IVC Series Small PLC

Programming Manual

Version V1.2
Revision date March 17, 2015

INVT Auto-Control Technology provides customers with technical support. Users may contact the nearest INVT local
sales office, service center or headquarters.

INVT Auto-Control Technology Co., Ltd.

Copyright. All rights reserved. The content is subject to change without notice.

INVT Auto-Control Technology Co., Ltd.

Address: 4# Building, Gaofa Technological Park, Longjing, Nanshan District, Shenzhen
Postal code: 518055
Website: www.invt.com
E-mail: [email protected]
Preface
Target reader
This book is suitable for the automation personnel who need to master the PLC programming, system design and
commissioning. This book can also serve as a reference for anyone who are interested in futhering their PLC programming
knowledge.
Content of this book
This book details the principles, hardware resources, programming languages and instructions of IVC series small PLC. A
variety of application illustrations are used to help you understand the rich functions of PLC.
Features of this book
The chapters in this book develop from general to details, each having its independent topic. You can either read thoroughly to
gain overall knowledge of IVC series small PLC or consult in some of the chapters for technical reference.
Reading instructions
1. For readers unfamiliar with PLC
It is recommended to start with chapters 1~4 to learn the basic PLC knowledge, including PLC function description,
programming languages, elements & data, addressing modes, program annotating function, main program and subprograms.
Afterwards, you can read other chapters to cater for your needs.
2. For readers familiar with PLC
You can jump directly to 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 and 错误！未找到引用源。Application Instructions, which
provide complete and detailed explanation for the instructions of INVT IVC series PLC. For sequential function chart (SFC),
high-speed I/O, interrupts and communication function, please refer to chapters 7~10. For positioning control, please refer to
Appendix 10 Positioning Function Guideline. In addition, Appendix 9Instruction index and Appendix 10Classified instruction
index provide tools for locating the instructions in the orders of alphabet and classification respectively.
Related documents and references
You can refer to the following manuals while reading this manual:
 IVC1 Series PLC User Manual
 IVC2 Series PLC User Manual
 Auto Station Programming Software User Manual
Content
Chapter 1 Product overview .......................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Product introduction .............................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Auto Station programming software ......................................................................................................................5
1.3 Communication function .......................................................................................................................................7
1.4 Documents of IVC series small PLC......................................................................................................................7
Chapter 2 Function description ..................................................................................................................................9
2.1 Programming resources and theories....................................................................................................................9
2.2 System configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 18
2.3 Running mode and state control ......................................................................................................................... 27
2.4 System debugging ............................................................................................................................................. 28
Chapter 3 Element and data...................................................................................................................................... 35
3.1 Element type and function .................................................................................................................................. 35
3.2 Elements addressing mode ................................................................................................................................ 42
3.3 Data .................................................................................................................................................................. 44
Chapter 4 Programming concepts............................................................................................................................ 46
4.1 Programming language ...................................................................................................................................... 46
4.2 Program components ......................................................................................................................................... 48
4.3 Block comment and variable comment ................................................................................................................ 49
4.4 Subprogram ....................................................................................................................................................... 51
4.5 General information of instructions...................................................................................................................... 53
Chapter 5 Basic instructions .................................................................................................................................... 55
5.1 Contact logic instructions .................................................................................................................................... 55
5.2 Main control instruction ....................................................................................................................................... 62
5.3 SFC instructions ................................................................................................................................................. 63
5.4 Timer instruction ................................................................................................................................................. 65
5.5 Counter instruction ............................................................................................................................................. 67
Chapter 6 Application instructions........................................................................................................................... 69
6.1 Program flow control instruction .......................................................................................................................... 69
6.2 Data transmission instruction .............................................................................................................................. 74
6.3 Integer math instruction ...................................................................................................................................... 83
6.4 Floating-point arithmetic operation instruction...................................................................................................... 92
6.5 Data converting instruction ............................................................................................................................... 101
6.6 Word logic operation ........................................................................................................................................ 112
6.7 Shift/Rotate instruction ..................................................................................................................................... 115
6.8 External equipment instruction .......................................................................................................................... 123
6.9 Real-time clock instruction ................................................................................................................................ 131
6.10 High-speed I/O instruction ................................................................................................................................ 139
6.11 Control calculation instruction ........................................................................................................................... 160
6.12 Communication instruction ............................................................................................................................... 169
6.13 Data check instruction ...................................................................................................................................... 180
6.14 Enhanced bit processing instruction .................................................................................................................. 182
6.15 Word contact instruction ................................................................................................................................... 185
6.16 Compare contact instruction ............................................................................................................................. 189
6.17 Batch data processing instruction ..................................................................................................................... 200
6.18 Data table instruction........................................................................................................................................ 202
6.19 String instruction .............................................................................................................................................. 205
6.20 Extension file register instruction....................................................................................................................... 210
6.21 Locating instruction .......................................................................................................................................... 214
6.22 Data processing instruction............................................................................................................................... 229
6.23 Other instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 235
Chapter 7 SFC tutor................................................................................................................................................ 236
7.1 Introduction to SFC .......................................................................................................................................... 236
7.2 Relationship between SFC program and LAD program ..................................................................................... 241
7.3 How to program with SFC ................................................................................................................................ 242
7.4 Points to note in SFC programming .................................................................................................................. 243
7.5 Examples of SFC programming........................................................................................................................ 247
Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions ......................................................................................................... 256
8.1 High-speed counter ......................................................................................................................................... 256
8.2 External pulse capture function ........................................................................................................................ 262
8.3 Points to note about high-speed input application.............................................................................................. 262
Chapter 9 Using interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 264
9.1 Interrupt program ............................................................................................................................................. 264
9.2 Processing interrupt event................................................................................................................................ 265
9.3 Timer interrupt ................................................................................................................................................. 265
9.4 External interrupt ............................................................................................................................................. 267
9.5 High-speed counter interrupt ............................................................................................................................ 268
9.6 PTO output completion interrupt ....................................................................................................................... 269
9.7 Power failure interrupt ...................................................................................................................................... 270
9.8 Serial port interrupt .......................................................................................................................................... 270
9.9 Measure short time pulse ................................................................................................................................. 272
Chapter 10 Using communication function ............................................................................................................. 274
10.1 Communication resource ................................................................................................................................. 274
10.2 Programming port protocol ............................................................................................................................... 274
10.3 Free port communication protocol .................................................................................................................... 274
10.4 Modbus communication protocol ...................................................................................................................... 277
10.5 N:N bus communication protocol ...................................................................................................................... 284
10.6 Control strategies ............................................................................................................................................ 291
Chapter 11 Using positioning function .................................................................................................................... 293
11.1 Positioning control system................................................................................................................................ 293
11.2 IVC series PLC positioning function introduction ............................................................................................... 295
11.3 Points to note about locating instructions .......................................................................................................... 298
11.4 Special elements related to locating instructions ............................................................................................... 298
11.5 Examples ........................................................................................................................................................ 314
Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay............................................................................................................................ 326
Appendix 2 Special data register .............................................................................................................................. 338
Appendix 3 Reserved elements ................................................................................................................................ 350
Appendix 4 Modbus communication error code ...................................................................................................... 351
Appendix 5 Inverter instruction error code .............................................................................................................. 352
Appendix 6 System error code ................................................................................................................................. 353
Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) ........................................................................ 355
Appendix 8 ASCII code table .................................................................................................................................... 364
Appendix 9 Instruction index.................................................................................................................................... 365
Appendix 10 Classified instruction index .................................................................................................................. 374
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 1

Chapter 1 Product overview

1.1 Product introduction

The IVC series small PLC, comprising the IVC1, IVC1S, IVC1L mini-scale series and IVC2L, IVC2H small series, is a high
performance product suitable for modern industrial control.
The IVC series PLC products have integrated structure, built-in high performance microprocessor, operation control system,
integrated I/O and extension bus. The series also include I/O extension modules and special modules. The main module has
2~3 communication ports, and the sytem can connect to the profibus network through a profibus extension module. The main
module I/O also has high-speed counting and high-speed output that can be used for exact positioning. The powerful Auto
Station programming software provides 3 standard programming languages and commissioning & monitoring functions, and
boasts complete user program protection mechanism.

1.1.1 Product specification

Table 1-1 Specification of PLC main module
Name IVC2H IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC1S
10 inputs/6
outputs
14 inputs/10
10 inputs/6 outputs
outputs
14 inputs/10
20 inputs/12 16 inputs/14
outputs
outputs 8 inputs/6 outputs outputs
16 inputs/14
16 inputs/16 32 inputs/32 10 inputs/6 outputs 24 inputs/16
Digital I/O outputs
outputs outputs, 40 12 inputs/8 outputs outputs
inputs/40 24 inputs/16
14 inputs/10 outputs 36 inputs/24
outputs outputs
outputs 36 inputs/24
16 inputs/14
outputs
outputs/2 analog
inputs/1 analog
output
Max. I/O 512 512 128 128 60
Max. special
8 8 7 7 Without
function modules
2×200kHz, 2×100kHz (only 2×100kHz
2×100kHz (only 2×50kHz (only
I/O High-speed pulse 4×100kHz (6-axis) apply to 2×10kHz (only apply
apply to transistor apply to transistor
output or 2×200kHz, transistor to transistor output)
output) output)
2×100kHz (4-axis) output)
Single-phase
8×100kHz 6: 2 50kHz/4 10kHz
counting channel
Dual-phase
4×50kHz 2: 1 30kHz/1 5kHz
counting channel
Max. frequency
sum of high-speed 800kHz 80kHz 60kHz 60kHz 60kHz
counter
X0~X7 adopt X0~X7 adopt
X0~X7 adopt digital digital filtering, digital filtering,
X0~X7 adopt X0~X17 adopt
filtering, input filtering input filtering input filtering
digital filtering, digital filtering,
constant is selectable constant is constant is
Digital filtering input filtering input filtering
among 0, 2, 4, 8, 16, selectable among selectable among
constant range: constant range:
32 and 64ms, 7 in 0, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 0, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
0~60ms 0~60ms
total and 64ms, 7 in and 64ms, 7 in
total total
Max. Resistive
2A/1 point; 8A/4 points group common terminal; 8A/8 points group common terminal
relay load
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 2

Name IVC2H IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC1S

output Inductive
220Vac, 80VA
current load
Light
220Vac, 100W
load
Resistive Output point: 0.3A/1 point; other: 0.3A/1 point; 0.8A/4 points; 1.6A/8 points
load If above 8 points, allow the total current to increase 0.1A for every additional 1 point
Y0~Y7:
Max.
Inductive 7.2W/24Vdc;
transistor Y0, Y1: 7.2W/24Vdc; other: 12W/24Vdc
load other:
output
12W/24Vdc
current
Y0~Y7:
Light
0.9W/24Vdc; Y0, Y1: 0.9W/24Vdc; other: 1.5W/24Vdc
load
other: 1.5W/24Vdc
32k steps 12k steps 16k steps
User program 16k steps (32kByte) 6k steps (12kByte)
(64kByte) (24kByte) (32kByte)
Program power-off
Yes
permanent storage
User setting Range of bit 320 bit elements,
Memory Max. hold elements All elements 320 bit elements,
(Max. C elements, 180 word
at power off except R elements 180 word elements
elements: 200) 1700 word elements elements
Standby EEPROM,
Hardware support Standby batteries, EEPROM, permanent EEPROM,
batteries, 1-year permanent
and hold time 3-year hold time storage permanent storage
hold time storage
100ms accuracy:
T0~T209
100ms accuracy: T0~T209
10ms accuracy:
Timer 10ms accuracy: T210~T251
T210~T479
1ms accuracy: T252~T255
1ms accuracy:
T480~T511
16bit up counter:
C0~C199
32bit up/down
counter: 16bit up counter: C0~C199
Counter C200~C235 32bit up/down counter: C200~C235
32bit high-speed 32bit high-speed counter: C236~C255
counter:
Element C236~C255,
resource C301~C306
D0~D7999,
Data register D0~D7999 D0~D7999 D0~D3999
R0~R32767
Local data register V0~V63
Indexed
Z0~Z15
addressing register
Special data
SD0~SD511 SD0~SD511 SD0~SD511 SD0~SD255 SD0~SD255
register
Auxiliary relay M0~M10239 M0~M1999 M0~M2047 M0~M1023
Local auxiliary
LM0~LM63
relay
Special auxiliary
SM0~SM511 SM0~SM511 SM0~SM511 SM0~SM255 SM0~SM255
relay
State relay S0~ S4095 S0~ S991 S0~ S1023 S0~ S511
Internal timer
3 3 3 3
interrupt
External timer
16 16 16 16
interrupt
Interrupt
High-speed
resource 8 6 6 6
counter interrupt
Serial port interrupt 12 12 12 8 4
PTO output
6 2 4 2
interrupt
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 3

Name IVC2H IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC1S

Interpolation
3 / / / /
interrupt
Passed position
6 / / / /
interrupt
Power loss
1 1 1 1
interrupt
Running time of
0.065μS 0.09μS 0.2μS 0.3μS 0.3μS
basic instruction
Support (at least Support (at least Support (at least Support Support (100-hour
General Realtime clock 3-year hold time at 3-year hold time 3-year hold time at (100-hour hold hold time at power
power off) at power off) power off) time at power off) off)
Analog
Without 2/8-bit accuracy Without 2/8-bit accuracy Without
potentiometer
PORT0: RS232 PORT0: RS232 PORT0: RS232 PORT0: RS232
Communication
PORT1: RS485 PORT1: PORT1: RS485 PORT1: PORT0: RS232
Communic port
PORT2: RS485 RS232/RS485 PORT2: RS485 RS232/RS485
ation
Communication
Modbus/free port/N:N/programming port protocol
protocol
Access Uploading password, downloading password, monitoring password, subprogram password, prohibit
Set password type
control formatting
and user
program Prohibit uploading Support
protection
Realtime clock,
With With With With Without
clock instruction
Date and clock
compare With With With With Without
instruction
Floating point
With With With With Without
instruction
Locating instruction With With With With Only support DRVI
High-speed IO
With With With With Not support PLS
instruction
MODBUS and
With With With With Without
Applicatio inverter instruction
n Read and write
instruction EEPROM Without With With With Without
instruction
Computation
With With With With Only support PID
control instruction
String instruction With Without Without Without Without
Batch data
processing With Without Without Without Without
instruction
Data sheet
With Without Without Without Without
instruction
Memory card
With Without Without Without Without
instruction
200,000 hours (for ground fixation, mechanical stress close to zero, with temperature and humidity control)
Relay output
100,000 hours (for ground fixation, mechanical stress close to zero, no temperature and humidity control)
MTBF
300,000 hours (for ground fixation, mechanical stress close to zero, with temperature and humidity control)
Transistor output
150,000 hours (mechanical stress close to zero, no temperature and humidity control)
220Vac/15VA/
1s ON/1s OFF, 3,200,000 times
Contact inductance
life of 220Vac/30VA/
1s ON/1s OFF, 1,200,000 times
output inductance
relay 220Vac/72VA/
1s ON/1s OFF, 300,000 times
inductance
Power
Input voltage range 85Vac~264Vac (normal)
feature
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 4

Name IVC2H IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC1S

Note:
1. For detailed product specifications, installation instructions, operation and maintenance guidelines of IVC1 series PLC, please refer to IVC1
Series PLC User Manual
2. For detailed product specifications, installation instructions, operation and maintenance guidelines of IVC2L series PLC, please refer to
IVC2L Series PLC User Manual
3. For detailed product specifications, installation instructions, operation and maintenance guidelines of IVC2H series PLC, please refer to
IVC2H Series PLC User Manual
4. Under 25℃ running environment temperature, the hold time of standby batteries is 3 years

1.1.2 Outline of IVC1/1L series main module

The outline and structure of IVC1/1Lseries main module are shown in the following figure (take IVC1-1614MAR for example):

Figure 1-1 Outline and structure of IVC1/1L series main module

PORT0 and PORT1 are for communication. PORT0 is RS232, and use socket Mini DIN8, while IVC1 series PORT1 is RS485
or RS232, IVC1L series PORT1 and PORT2 is RS485. The bus socket is for connecting extension modules. The mode
selector switch can be set to ON, TM or OFF.

1.1.3 Outline of IVC2L series main module

The outline and structure of IVC2L series main module are shown in the following figure (take 64-point main module for
example):

Power supply
电池输入端子
Input terminals
信号输入端子 输入信号状
Input status LEDs
terminals 态指示灯

Analog potentiometer Bus socket

模拟电位器 母线插座
模式选择开关
Mode selector switch

输出信号状
Output status LEDs
态指示灯

PORT0
通信端口 PORT0

System
系统工作状 status
Output terminals
信号输出端子
通信端口 PORT1 态指示灯
LEDs

Figure 1-2 Outline and structure of IVC2L series main module

The battery socket is designed for CR2354 lithium battery. The bus socket is for connecting extension modules. PORT0 is
RS232 and uses socket Mini DIN8, while the communication port PORT1 is RS485 or RS232. The mode selector switch can
be set to ON, TM or OFF.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 5

1.1.4 Outline of IVC2H series main module

The outline and structure of IVC2H series main module are shown in the following figure (take 32-point main module for
example):

信号输入端子
Input terminals
输入信号状
Input status LEDs
态指示灯

Bus socket
母线插座
Mode selector 模式选
switch 系统工作状
System status
择开关 态指示灯
LEDs
Output
输出信号状 status LEDs
PORT0
PORT0
态指示灯

PORT1 PORT2
PORT1 PORT2 信号输出端子
Output terminals

Figure 1-3 Outline and structure of IVC2H series main module

The battery socket is designed for CR2354 lithium battery. The bus socket is for connecting extension modules. PORT0 is
RS232 and uses socket Mini DIN8, while the communication port PORT1 and PORT2 are RS485. The mode selector switch
can be set to ON, TM or OFF.

1.2 Auto Station programming software

Auto Station is a programming software specialized for IVC1, IVC1S, IVC1L, IVC2L and IVC2H series PLC. You can download
it at www.invt.com.
Auto Station programming software is a standard Windows-based diagram programming-tool, operated through the mouse and
keyboard. Three programming languages are available: ladder diagram (LAD), instruction list (IL) and Sequential Function
Chart (SFC).
The serial port programming cable is used to connect Auto Station programming platform with PLC. You can realize Modbus
network programming through serial port conversion and remote programming through a modem. Refer to Auto Station
Programming Software User Manual for Modbus programming and remote monitoring.

1.2.1 Basic configuration

Auto Station programming software requires an IBM PC and Microsoft Windows series OS. The compatible OSs include
Windows 98, Windows Me, NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
The minimum and recommended configuration is listed below:
Table 1-1 Basic configuration of Auto Station programming environment
Item Minimum Recommended
CPU Equivalent to Intel Pentium 233 or above Equivalent to Intel Pentium 1G or above
Memory 64M 128M
Display card Support 640×480 resolution and 256 colors Support 800×600 resolution and 65535 colors
Communication
A RS232 serial port with DB9 socket (or a USB port and a USB-RS232 converter)
port
Others Programming cable special for INVT PLC

1.2.2 Auto Station installation

The Auto Station installation package issued by INVT Auto-Control Technology Co., Ltd. (INVT for short) is an executable
program. Double click it to start the installation, and follow the prompts step by step. You can select an installation path
according to your actual need.
After the installation, INVT program group will be added to the start menu. An Auto Station shortcut icon will also be added to
the desktop. Double click the shortcut icon to run the program.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 6

You can uninstall the Auto Station software through the Windows control panel. To install the Auto Station software in a new
version, you have to uninstall the old version at first.

1.2.3 Auto Station operation interface

The main interface includes 7 sections: menu, toolbar, project management window, instruction tree window, information
window, status bar and operation area.
菜单
Menu 工具栏
Toolbar

工作区 area
Operation
Project management window
管理窗口

指令树窗口
Instruction tree window 信息窗口 Status
Information window 状态栏 bar

Figure 1-1 Main interface of Auto Station

For the usage of Auto Station programming software, refer to Auto Station Programming Software User Manual.

1.2.4 Programming cable

You can use the programming cable provided by INVT Auto-Control Technology Co., Ltd. to program and debug the PLC.
There are three kinds of cables: one is optically isolated and hot swappable; one is non-isolated and not hot swappable;
another is USB converted to RS232 and hot swappable. None of them requires setting jumpers.
See the following figure for the connection of the programming cable.

Figure 1-1 Connection of programming cable

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 7

1.3 Communication function

The main module of IVC1/2L series small PLC has two integrated serial ports: PORT0 and PORT1, the main module of IVC1S
series small PLC has one integrated serial port: PORT0, and the main module of IVC1L and IVC2H series small PLC has three
integrated serial ports: PORT0, PORT1 and PORT2. The extension modules including 485 communication module are also
available for the communication in a fieldbus network.
Three serial ports are compatible with Modbus, N:N and user-defined free port protocols.

1.3.1 Modbus protocol network

The main module can set up a RS485 Modbus network with multiple inverters, PLCs and other intelligent devices through the
RS485 port on PORT1 and PORT2, or through PORT0 and a RS232/485 converter. The maximum communication distance is
1200 meters and the maximum baud rate is 115200bit/s. RTU and ASCII transmission modes are optional.
The main module can communicate one-to-one with inverters, PLCs, touch screens and instruments through the RS232 port
on PORT0 and PORT1. The maximum communication distance is 15 meters and the maximum baud rate is 115200bit/s.
For details about the Modbus network, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 and Appendix 7Modbus communication
protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series).

1.3.2 N:N protocol network

IVC1/IVC1L/IVC2L/IVC2H series PLC is embedded with INVT-developed N:N communication protocol, capable of setting up
an N:N communication network through the RS485 port on PORT1 and PORT2, or through PORT0 and a RS232/485
converter.
The N:N communication protocol allows single/double-layer networking and data exchange among 2~32 PLCs with the
maximum baud rate of 115200bps.
For details about the N:N network, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.

1.3.3 Free port protocol network

The free port protocol allows communication with customized data format and supports ASCII and binary system. In this
communication mode, the PLC can communicate with various equipment with customized formats, such as inverter, barcode
scanner, instrument and other intelligent devices. PLC can communicate with a single device in the RS232 or RS485 mode, or
form a RS485 network when there are multiple devices.
For details about the free port protocol communication, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.

1.4 Documents of IVC series small PLC

You can download the documents of IVC series small PLC at www.invt.com. If you need the printed copy, please contact your
agent.

1.4.1 Selection manual

IVC1 Selection Manual
IVC2L Technical Manual
IVC2H Selection Manual

1.4.2 User manual of main module

IVC1 series IVC2L series

Quick Start User Manual of IVC1 Series PLC Quick Start User Manual of IVC2L Series PLC
User Manual of IVC1 Series PLC User Manual of IVC2L Series PLC

IVC1S series IVC2H series

Quick Start User Manual of IVC1S Series PLC Quick Start User Manual of IVC2H Series PLC
User Manual of IVC1S Series PLC User Manual of IVC2H Series PLC
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 1 Product overview 8

IVC1L series
Quick Start User Manual of IVC1L Series PLC
User Manual of IVC1L Series PLC

1.4.3 Programming manual

Programming Manual of IVC Series Small PLC

1.4.4 User manual of programming software

User Manual of Auto Station Programming Software

1.4.5 User manual of I/O extension module

IVC1 series IVC2L series
User Manual of IVC1 Series Passive I/O Extension Module User Manual of IVC2L Series Passive I/O Extension Module
User Manual of IVC2L Series Active I/O Extension Module

1.4.6 User manual of special module

IVC1 series
User Manual of IVC1-4AD Analog Input module
IVC2L series
User Manual of IVC1-2DA Analog Output module
User Manual of IVC2L-4AD Analog Input module
User Manual of IVC1-4DA Analog Output module
User Manual of IVC2L-4AM Analog Input/Output module
User Manual of IVC1-2PT RTD Input Module
User Manual of IVC2L-4DA Analog Output module
User Manual of IVC1-4PT RTD Input Module
User Manual of IVC2L-4PT RTD Input Module
User Manual of IVC1-2TC Thermalcouple Input Module
User Manual of IVC2L-4TC RTD Input Module
User Manual of IVC1-4TC Thermalcouple Input Module
User Manual of IVC2L-8AD Analog Input module
User Manual of IVC2L-8TC Thermalcouple Input Module

1.4.7 User manual of communication module

User Manual of IVCS-EPM Communication Module
User Manual of IVC2L-RS485 Communication Module
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 9

Chapter 2 Function description

This chapter introduces the programming resources, theories and system configuration of IVC series PLC as well as how to set
PLC running and operation modes. The system commissioning functions and commissioning software are also introduced.

2.1 Programming resources and theories

2.1.1 Programming resources

Table 2-1 IVC1 programming resources
Name Specification and description
Max. I/O 128 (theoretical)
I/O
Qty. of extension
configuration The sum of I/O extension modules and special modules is no more than 7
modules
Program capacity 16k steps
User file
Datablock
capacity 8000 D elements
capacity
Basic instruction 0.3µs/instruction
Instruction
Application
speed Several µs/instruction~several hundred µs/instruction
instruction
Basic instruction 32
Instruction
Application
number 226
instruction
Input/output 128 I/128 O (input: X0~X177, output: Y0~Y177) Note1
Auxiliary relay 2048 (M0~M2047)
Local auxiliary
64 (LM0~LM63)
relay
Special auxiliary
256 (SM0~SM255)
relay
State relay 1024 (S0~S1023)
Timer 256 (T0~T255) Note2
Element
Counter 256 (C0~C255) Note3
resourceNote7
Data register 8000 (D0~D7999)
Local data
64 (V0~V63)
register
Indexed
addressing 16 (Z0~Z15)
register
Special data
256 (SD0~SD255)
register
External input 16 (triggering edge is user configurable, corresponding to the rising&falling edge of terminals
interrupt X0~X7)
High-speed
6
counter interrupt
Internal timer
3
Interrupt interrupt
resource Serial port
8
interrupt
PTO output
2
interrupt
Power loss
1
interrupt
Communication
2 asynchronous serial communication ports. Port0: RS232. Port1: RS232 or RS485
Communication port
function Communication Modbus, freeport and N:N protocols; capable of setting up 1:N and N:N communication
protocol networks
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 10

Name Specification and description

High-speed X0, X1 Single input: 50kHz. Total frequency (X0~X5): no more than 80kHz
counter X2~X5 Single input: 10kHz
High-speed pulse
Y0, Y1 100kHz 2 independent outputs (only for transistor outputs)
output
Digital filtering X0~X7 adopt digital filtering and other terminals adopt hardware filtering
Analog
2
potentiometer Note4
Calling of Maximum number: 64. Maximum nesting levels: 6. Local variables and variable alias are
subprograms supported. Each subprogram can provide up to 16 parameter transfer
Special
Upload password
function 3 kinds of password. Not longer than 8 letters or numbers. Case
Download password
User program sensitive
Monitor password
protection
Subprogram password Not longer than 16 letters or numbers. Case sensitive.
Other protections Formatting and uploading ban enabled
Auto Station
Programming
programming IBM PC or compatible computer is required
modeNote5
softwareNote6
Built-in, 100h of working time after power failure (the main module must have worked for more
Realtime clock
than 2mins before the power failure)

Table 2-2 IVC1S programming resources

Name Specification and description
Max. I/O 60
I/O
Qty. of extension
configuration No
modules
Program capacity 6k steps
User file
Datablock
capacity 4000 D elements
capacity
Basic instruction 0.3µs/instruction
Instruction
Application
speed Several µs/instruction~several hundred µs/instruction
instruction
Basic instruction 32
Instruction
Application
number 200
instruction
Input/output 128 I/128 O (input: X0~X177, output: Y0~Y177) Note1
Auxiliary relay 1024 (M0~M1023)
Local auxiliary
64 (LM0~LM63)
relay
Special auxiliary
256 (SM0~SM255)
relay
State relay 1024 (S0~S1023)
Timer 256 (T0~T255) Note2
Element
Counter 256 (C0~C255) Note3
resourceNote7
Data register 4000 (D0~D3999)
Local data
64 (V0~V63)
register
Indexed
addressing 16 (Z0~Z15)
register
Special data
256 (SD0~SD255)
register
External input 16 (triggering edge is user configurable, corresponding to the rising&falling edge of terminals
interrupt X0~X7)
High-speed
6
Interrupt counter interrupt
resource Internal timer
3
interrupt
Serial port
4
interrupt
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 11

Name Specification and description

PTO output
2
interrupt
Power loss
1
interrupt
Communication
1 asynchronous serial communication port. Port0: RS232
Communication port
function Communication
Modbus and freeport protocols
protocol
High-speed X0, X1 Single input: 50kHz. Total frequency (X0~X5): no more than 80kHz
counter X2~X5 Single input: 10kHz
High-speed pulse
Y0, Y1 50kHz 2 independent outputs (only for transistor outputs)
output
Digital filtering X0~X7 adopt digital filtering and other terminals adopt hardware filtering
Analog
2
potentiometer Note4
Calling of Maximum number: 64. Maximum nesting levels: 6. Local variables and variable alias are
subprograms supported. Each subprogram can provide up to 16 parameter transfer
Special
Upload password
function 3 kinds of password. Not longer than 8 letters or numbers. Case
Download password
User program sensitive
Monitor password
protection
Subprogram password Not longer than 16 letters or numbers. Case sensitive.
Other protections Formatting and uploading ban enabled
Auto Station
Programming
programming IBM PC or compatible computer is required
modeNote5
softwareNote6
Built-in, 100h of working time after power failure (the main module must have worked for more
Realtime clock
than 2mins before the power failure)

Table 2-3 IVC1L programming resources

Name Specification and description
Max. I/O 128 (theoretical)
I/O
Qty. of extension
configuration The sum of I/O extension modules and special modules is no more than 7
modules
Program capacity 16k steps
User file
Datablock
capacity 8000 D elements
capacity
Basic instruction 0.2µs/instruction
Instruction
Application
speed Several µs/instruction~several hundred µs/instruction
instruction
Basic instruction 32
Instruction
Application
number 234
instruction
Input/output 128 I/128 O (input: X0~X177, output: Y0~Y177) Note1
Auxiliary relay 2048 (M0~M2047)
Local auxiliary
64 (LM0~LM63)
relay
Special auxiliary
512 (SM0~SM511)
relay
State relay 1024 (S0~S1023)
Timer 256 (T0~T255) Note2
Element
Counter 256 (C0~C255) Note3
resourceNote7
Data register 8000 (D0~D7999)
Local data
64 (V0~V63)
register
Indexed
addressing 16 (Z0~Z15)
register
Special data
512 (SD0~SD512)
register
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 12

Name Specification and description

External input 16 (triggering edge is user configurable, corresponding to the rising&falling edge of terminals
interrupt X0~X7)
High-speed
6
counter interrupt
Internal timer
3
Interrupt interrupt
resource Serial port
12
interrupt
PTO output
4
interrupt
Power loss
1
interrupt
Communication
3 asynchronous serial communication ports. Port0: RS232. Port1: RS485 . Port2: RS485
Communication port
function Communication Modbus, freeport and N:N protocols; capable of setting up 1:N and N:N communication
protocol networks
High-speed X0, X1 Single input: 50kHz. Total frequency (X0~X5): no more than 80kHz
counter X2~X5 Single input: 10kHz
High-speed pulse Y0, Y1 100kHz 2 independent outputs (only for transistor outputs)
output Y2, Y3 10kHz 2 independent outputs (only for transistor outputs)
Digital filtering X0~X7 adopt digital filtering and other terminals adopt hardware filtering
Analog
without
potentiometer Note4
Calling of Maximum number: 64. Maximum nesting levels: 6. Local variables and variable alias are
Special subprograms supported. Each subprogram can provide up to 16 parameter transfer
function Upload password
3 kinds of password. Not longer than 8 letters or numbers. Case
Download password
User program sensitive
Monitor password
protection
Subprogram password Not longer than 16 letters or numbers. Case sensitive.
Other protections Formatting and uploading ban enabled
Auto Station
Programming
programming IBM PC or compatible computer is required
modeNote5
softwareNote6
Realtime clock Built-in, the standby battery supplies power

Table 2-4 IVC2L programming resources

Name Specification and description
Max. I/O 512 (256 I/256 O)
I/O
Qty. of extension
configuration 8, the sum of special modules is no more than 8
modules
User file Program capacity 12k steps
capacity Datablock capacity 8000 D elements
Instruction Basic instruction 0.09µs/instruction
speed Application instruction 5µs/instruction~280µs/instruction
Instruction Basic instruction 32
number Application instruction 221
Input/output 256 I/256 O(input: X0~X377, output: Y0~Y377) Note1
Auxiliary relay 2000 (M0~M1999)
Local auxiliary relay 64 (LM0~LM63)
Special auxiliary relay 256 (SM0~SM255)
State relay 992 (S0~S991)
Element Timer 256 (T0~T255) Note2
resourceNote7 Counter 256 (C0~C255) Note3
Data register 8000 (D0~D7999)
Local data register 64 (V0~V63)
Indexed addressing
16 (Z0~Z15)
register
Special data register 256 (SD0~SD255)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 13

Name Specification and description

External input 16 (triggering edge is user configurable, corresponding to the rising&falling edge of
interrupt terminals X0~X7)
High-speed counter
6
Interrupt interrupt
resource Internal timer interrupt 3
PTO output interrupt 2
Serial port interrupt 12
Power loss interrupt 1
2 asynchronous serial communication ports. Port0: RS232. Port1: RS232 or RS485. Port2
Communication port
Communication (external 485 communication module): RS422 or RS485
function Communication
Modbus and freeport protocols; capable of setting up 1:N communication network
protocol
X0, X1 Single input: 50kHz. Total frequency (X0~X5): no more than 80kHz
High-speed counter
X2~X5 Single input: 10kHz
High-speed pulse
Y0, Y1 100kHz 2 independent outputs (only for transistor outputs)
output
Digital filtering X0~X17 adopt digital filtering and other terminals adopt hardware filtering
Analog
2
potentiometer Note4
Special Calling of Maximum number: 64. Maximum nesting levels: 6. Local variables and variable alias are
function subprograms supported. Each subprogram can provide up to 16 parameter transfer
Upload password
User program 3 kinds of password. Not longer than 8 letters or numbers. Case
Download password
protection sensitive
Monitor password
Auto Station
Programming
programming IBM PC or compatible computer is required
modeNote5
softwareNote6
Realtime clock Built-in, standby batteries supply power

Table 2-4 IVC2H programming resources

Name Specification and description
Max. I/O 512 (256 I/256 O)
I/O
Qty. of extension
configuration 8 modules, the sum of special modules is no more than 8
modules
User file Program capacity 32k steps
capacity Datablock capacity 8000 D elements, 32K R elements
Instruction Basic instruction 0.065µs/instruction
speed Application instruction Several µs/instruction~several hundred µs/instruction
Instruction Basic instruction 32
number Application instruction 286
Input/output 256 I/256 O(input: X0~X377, output: Y0~Y377) Note1
Auxiliary relay 10240 (M0~M1999)
Local auxiliary relay 64 (LM0~LM63)
Special auxiliary relay 512 (SM0~SM511)
State relay 4096 (S0~S4095)
Element Timer 512 (T0~T511) Note2
resourceNote7 Counter 262 (C0~C306) Note3
Data register 40768 (D0~D7999, R0~R32767)
Local data register 64 (V0~V63)
Indexed addressing
16 (Z0~Z15)
register
Special data register 512 (SD0~SD511)
External input 16 (triggering edge is user configurable, corresponding to the rising&falling edge of
interrupt terminals X0~X7)
Interrupt High-speed counter
8
resource interrupt
Internal timer interrupt 3
Serial port interrupt 12
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 14

Name Specification and description

PTO output interrupt 6
Power loss interrupt 1
Interpolation interrupt 3
Passed position
6
interrupt
3 asynchronous serial communication ports. Port0: RS232. Port1: RS485. Port2 (external
Communication port
Communication 485 communication module): RS422 or RS485
function Communication Modbus, freeport and N:N protocols; capable of setting up 1:N and N:N communication
protocol networks

High-speed counter X0~X7, 8×100kHz

High-speed pulse
Y0~Y7 4×200kHz, 4×100kHz
output
Digital filtering X0~X7 adopt digital filtering and other terminals adopt hardware filtering
Calling of Maximum number: 64. Maximum nesting levels: 6. Local variables and variable alias are
Special subprograms supported. Each subprogram can provide up to 16 parameter transfer
function Upload password
User program 3 kinds of password. Not longer than 8 letters or numbers. Case
Download password
protection sensitive
Monitor password
Auto Station
Programming
programming IBM PC or compatible computer is required
modeNote5
softwareNote6
Realtime clock Built-in, standby batteries supply power
Notes:
Note 1: X and Y elements are addressed in octal system. For example, X10 stands for the eighth input point.
Note 2: Based on the timing precision, T element addresses fall into three categories:
IVC1/IVC1S/IVC1L/IVC2L
1) 100ms: T0~T209
2) 10ms: T210~T251
3) 1ms: T252~T255
IVC2H
1) 100ms: T0~T209
2) 10ms: T210~T479
3) 1ms: T480~T511
Note 3: Based on the width and function of count value, C element addresses fall into three categories:
IVC1/IVC1S/IVC2L
1) 16bit up counter: C0~C199
2) 32bit up/down counter: C200~C235
3) 32bit high-speed counter: C236~C255
IVC2H
1) 16bit up counter: C0~C199
2) 32bit up/down counter: C200~C235
3) 32bit high-speed counter: C236~C255, C301-C307, C256-C300 reserved
Note 4: The analog potentiometer is an instrument that you can use to set the PLC element value. You can use a philips
screwdriver to wind the potentiometer clockwise to the maximum angle of 270°, and the element value will be set from 0 to 255.
Note that the potentiometer could be damaged if you wind it clockwise more than 270°.
Note 5: The element values can be forcedly set to facilitate commissioning and analyzing user program and streamline the
commissioning. You can force up to 128 bit elements and 16 word elements at the same time.
Note 6: The user program can be modified online.
Note 7: Partial PLC elements are reserved. Avoid using those elements in the user program. For details, see Appendix
3Reserved elements.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 15

2.1.2 PLC running mechanism (scan cycle model)

IVC series PLC main module runs according to the scan cycle model.
The system cyclically executes the following four tasks one by one: user program execution, communication, internal tasks and
I/O update. Each round is called a scan cycle.

Execute user
program

Refresh I/O Communication

Internal tasks

Figure 2-1 PLC running mechanism

 User program execution

The system will execute user program instructions one by one from the beginning till the main program ending instruction.
 Communication
Communicate with the programming software to receive and respond to the instructions such as download, run and stop.
 Internal tasks
Processing various system internal tasks, such as refreshing panel indicators, updating software timer, refreshing special
auxiliary relays and special data registers.
 I/O update
The I/O update includes two stages: input update and output update.
Output update: open or close the output terminal based on the value of the corresponding Y element (ON or OFF).
Input update: convert the ON or OFF state of input terminals to the value of the corresponding X element (ON or OFF).

2.1.3 Watchdog function for user program execution

The watchdog function enables the system to monitor the user program execution time during every scan cycle, and stop the
user program if the running time exceeds the preset limit. You can set the watchdog time in the Set time tab after double
clicking the System block in Auto Station main interface.

2.1.4 Constant scan mode

In the constant scan mode, every scan cycle takes the same time. You can set the constant scanning time in the Set time tab
after double clicking the System block in Auto Station main interface. By default, the Constant scanning time setting is zero,
which means no constant scan. The actual scan cycle will prevail when the actual scan cycle is bigger than the constant scan
cycle.

 Note
The constant scanning time setting must not be set bigger than the watchdog time setting.

2.1.5 User file download and storage

You can download a user file to the main module to control the main module.
The user file includes user program, datablock, system block and auxiliary user information. The auxiliary user information
includes the user program variable list and the source file of user data.
You can select to download the user program, datablock or system block. Whatever you select, the corresponding auxiliary
user information will always be downloaded.
For IVC2L series PLC, the downloaded user program, datablock and system block will be stored permanently in the main
module EEPROM area, while the downloaded auxiliary user information will be stored in the battery backed RAM area.
For IVC1 series PLC, all user files will be stored permanently in the main module FLASH area.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 16

For IVC2H series PLC, the downloaded user program, datablock and system block will be stored permanently in the main
module FLASH and EEPROM areas, while the downloaded auxiliary user information will be stored in the battery backed RAM
area.

 Note
1. To embed the downloaded files into the main module, the main module power supply must be maintained for more than 30s
after the download.
2. If the backup battery fails in IVC2L and IVC2H series PLC, the auxiliary user information will be lost, the annotation for the
user program will not be uploaded, and system will report “User information file error”. But the user program will be executed
after all.

2.1.6 Initialization of elements

When the PLC changes from STOP to RUN, it will initialize its elements according to battery backed data, EEPROM data,
datablock and element value. The priorities of various data are listed in the following table.
Table 2-5 PLC data initialization priorities
Data type Power OFF→ON STOP→RUN
Battery backed data Highest Highest
EEPROM data High High
Datablock (precondition: the Datablock enabled is checked in the
Mid Mid
Advanced Settings tab of System block)
Element value (precondition: the Element value retained is checked in
- Low
the Advanced Settings tab of System block)

2.1.7 Saving data at power off

 Preconditions
Upon power loss, the system will stop the user program and save the element in the specified saving range to the battery
backed files.
 Element restore after power on
If the battery backed files are correct, the PLC elements will restore their saved values after power on.
The elements outside of the saving range will be set to zero.
If the battery backed files are lost or incorrect, the system will set all elements to zero.
 Setting saving range
You can set the element range in the Saving Range tab of System block. See 0 and the following example.
IVC1/1L series PLC supports only one group of saving range.
IVC2L and IVC2H series PLC supports two saving groups that form a union.
Example (IVC2L):
Set M100~M200 as the saving range in Group 1.
Set M300~M400 as the saving range in Group 2.
In effect, both M100~M200 and M300~M400 are set as the saving range.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 17

Help

Figure 2-2 Setting saving range

 Note
1. The power-off data saving function in IVC2L and IVC2H series PLC relies on the support of the backup battery. If batteries
fail, all the saved elements will have uncertain values after power loss.
2. For IVC1 series PLC, the values of its saved elements are stored in the permanent memory.

2.1.8 Permanent storage of D element data

You can use the EROMWR instruction in the user program to write the D element values (D6000~D6999) to the permanent
memory EEPROM in IVC1 series PLC. The EEPROM operation will make the scan cycle 2ms~5ms longer. The written data
will overwrite the existing data in EEPROM.

 Note
The EEPROM can be over-written for a limited number of times (usually one million). Do not overwrite EEPROM unless it is
necessary, otherwise EEPROM could fail soon and lead to CPU fault.

2.1.9 Digital filtering of input terminals

The input terminals X0~X17 of IVC2L series main module and X0~X7 of IVC1、IVC1L and IVC2H series main module use
digital filtering to filter the noise at the terminal. You can set the filter constant in the Input Filter tab of System block.

2.1.10 No battery mode

IVC1L、IVC2L and IVC2H series main module can work without battery. When you select the No battery mode in the
Advanced Settings tab of System block, the system will not report system errors caused by lack of battery (battery-backed
data lost, forced-table lost and user information file error).
See the notice for the No battery mode in the Advanced Settings tab of Datablock.

 Note
IVC1 series PLC has no battery, therefore it does not support no battery mode.

2.1.11 User program protection

IVC1, IVC1L, IVC2L and IVC2H series PLCs provide mutiple levels of passwords and other protection measures.
Table 2-6 User program protection
Protection
Description
measures
Formatting ban After downloading system block to the PLC and checking the Formatting is prohibited option in the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 18

Protection
Description
measures
Advanced Settings tab in System block, the PLC internal user program, system block and datablock are
protected against formatting.
To lift the formatting ban, you need to re-download the system block and uncheck the Formatting is
prohibited option.
Download
Download limit
password
If you select to disable the upload function during downloading process, it will be prohibited to upload the
Upload ban program from PLC to PC. To enable the upload function, you must re-download the program and check to
enable the upload function during the downloading process.
Upload password Upload limit
Monitor password Download limit
The programmer can set passwords to protect the program, subprogram and interrupt subprogram against
aunthrorized accessing and editing in Auto Station.
Program password Password setting method: Right click the program and select Encrypt/Decrypt in the popped out shortcut
menu, insert the password and confirm it. To cancel the password, just go through the same process and
input the correct password.

 Note
If you fail to input the correct password for continuously 5 times, you will be banned from inputting password for the next 5
minutes.

2.2 System configuration

2.2.1 System block

The PLC configuration information, or system block file, is configured through the system block and is an important part of the
PLC user file. Before using the PLC, you need to compile and download the system block file.
The system block configuration includes configuring the following items:
 Saving range (element saving range)  Output table
 Set time (watchdog time, constant scanning time and  Input filter
power loss detection time setting)  Advanced settings (datablock, element
 Input point (startup mode of input point) value retain, no battery mode and formatting
 Communication port (communication port and ban)
protocol setting)  Special module configuration
 Priority level of interruption  Communication module
 Inverter configuration
After setting the system block, you can select PLC-> Compile All to compile the system block file and be ready for download.
Saving range
Upon power loss, IVC1, IVC1L, IVC2L and IVC2H series PLCs can save the data of elements in the preset saving range to
SRAM, so as to use them after the power on.
You can set the saving range in the Saving Range tab, as shown in 0.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 19

Help

Figure 2-3 Setting element saving range

 Note
The element range and group number of the saving range are different for different PLC models.
By default, the D, M, S, T and C elements in a certain range will be saved.
You can change the defaults as you need. By clicking the Clear button on the right will set the corresponding number to zero.
For IVC2L and IVC2H series PLC, you can set two groups that form a union.
For IVC1 and IVC1L series PLC, you can set only one group.

 Note
The T elements cannot be set in the saving range for IVC1/1L series PLC.
System operation upon power loss: PLC will save the elements in the saving range to the battery backed files.
System operation upon power on: PLC will check the data in SRAM. If the data saved in SRAM is correct, it will remain
unchanged. If the data is incorrect, PLC will clear all the elements in SRAM.
Output table
In the Output Table tab, you can set the state of output points when the PLC is in STOP state. See Figure 2-4.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 20

Help

Figure 2-4 Setting output table

The output table is used to set the PLC output state when the PLC is stopped. The output states include:
(1) Disable: When the PLC is stopped, all the outputs will be disabled.
(2) Freeze: When the PLC is stopped, all the outputs will be frozen at the last status.
(3) Configure: When the PLC is stopped, the marked outputs will be set as ON.
Set time
See Figure 2-5.

Help

Figure 2-5 Setting time

1. Watchdog time setting

The watchdog time is the maximum user program execution time. When the actual program execution time exceeds the
watchdog time, PLC will stop the execution, the ERR indicator (red) will turn on, and the system will output according to the
system configuration. The watchdog time setting range is 0ms~1000ms. Default: 200ms.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 21

2. Constant scanning time setting

With the constant scanning time set, system will scan the registers within a constant duration. Setting range: 0ms~1000ms.
Default: 0ms.
3. Power loss detection time setting (for IVC2L and IVC2H only)
When the duration of power loss exceeds the power loss detection time, the PLC will change to STOP. The system will save
the values of elements in the Saving Range. Setting range: 0ms~100ms. Default: 0ms
Input filter
In the Input Filter tab, you can set the filter constant for a PLC input terminal. The digital filter can eliminate the noise at the
input terminal. Only input terminals X0~X17 (for IVC1 and IVC2H series: X0~X7) use digital filter, while other digital input
terminals use hardware filter. IVC1 input filter can be in grouped (divided into X0~X3, X4~X7) and the filter constant is 0, 2, 4, 8,
16, 32 and 64; IVC2H input filter can be grouped (divided into X0~X3, X4~X7) and the filter constant can be continuously set in
0~64ms; IVC2L input filter cannot be grouped and the filter constant can be continuously set in 0~64ms. See Figure 2-6 IVC1
input filter setting.

Help

Figure 2-6 Setting input filter

Input point
The Input Point setting tab is shown in Figure 2-7.
In this tab, you can set the following parameters:
1. Input point
When the Disable input point is not checked, you can designate an input terminal (among X0~X17) as a means of external
RUN control. When the designated input terminal is ON, the PLC will be turned from STOP state to RUN state.
2. Disable input point
Check the Disable input point to disable the input point startup function.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 22

Help

Figure 2-7 Setting input point

Advanced settings
The advanced settings include datablock enabled, element value retained and no battery mode.

Help

Figure 2-8 Advanced settings

1. Datablock enabled
Check the Datablock enabled, and the datablock will be used to initialize the D elements when the PLC changes from STOP to
RUN.
2. Element value retained
Check the Element value retained, and the elements will not be initialized, but saved when the PLC changes from STOP to
RUN.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 23

 Note
When the Datablock enabled and Element value retained are both checked, the Datablock enabled prevails. See
2.1.6Initialization of elements.
3. No battery mode
Check this option, and the system will not report the battery backup data lost error and forced table lost error upon battery
failure.
Communication port
You can set the two or three PLC communication ports in the Communication port tab of the System block, as shown in
Figure 2-9. The setting items include protocol selection and the specific protocol parameters.

Help

Figure 2-9 Setting communication ports

By default, the communication port 0 uses program port protocol, while the communication port 1 and 2 use no protocol. You
can set as you need.
1. Program port protocol
By default, the communication port 0 uses the program port protocol, the dedicated protocol for the communication of IVC
series PLC programming software. Under this protocol, you can set the communication baud rate between PC and port 0
through the serial port configuration tool of AutoStation. In the TM state, port 0 can only be used for programming
communication.
2. Free port protocol
The free port protocol supports customized data file format, either ASCII or binary code. Only in the RUN state can a PLC use
the free port communication, which cannot be used to communicate with the programming device. In the STOP state, port 0
can only be used for programming communication.
The configurable parameters include baud rate, data bit, parity check, stop bit, allow start character detection, allow end
character detection, intercharacter timeout and interframe timeout.
3. Modbus protocol
The Modbus communication equipment include a master and a slave. The master can communicate with the slave (including
inverters) and send control frames to the slave, and the slave will respond to the master’s requests.
Communication port 0 can be set as a slave, while communication port 1 can be set as a slave or a master.
The configurable parameters include baud rate, data bit, parity check, stop bit, master/slave mode, station No., transmission
mode, timeout time of the main mode and retry times.
4. N:N bus protocol
N:N bus is an INVT-developed communication protocol that supports N to N communication in a small PLC network. The PLCs
in a N:N bus network can automatically exchange part of their D and M elements.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 24

Port 0, port1 and port 2 can use N:N bus protocol.

 Note
For the detailed information of communication protocols, see Chapter 10 Using Communication Function.
Special module configuration
You can set the Module type and Module property in the Special module configuration tab, as shown in 错误！未找到引用
源。.

Help

Figure 2-10 Special module configuration

1. Module type
As shown in 错误！未找到引用源。, you can set the module type for No.0~No.3 special modules.
2. Module property
After selecting the Module type, the corresponding Module property will be activated. Open the dialogue box as shown
below.

Figure 2-11 Setting special module property

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 25

In the dialogue box as shown in 错误！未找到引用源。, you can configure the channel for the special module, including mode
(signal features), digital value at zero, upper limit of digital value and average sampling value. Refer to the user manual of the
specific special module for the meanings and configuration methods of the various parameters.
Priority level of interruption
The priority level of interruption is shown in Figure 2-12.
The PLC built-in interrupts can be set as high priority or low priority.

Help

Figure 2-12 Setting interrupt priority

Communication module
You can set the Communication module, as shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Setting communication module

The following dialog box will pop up by clicking Setting:

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 26

Figure 2-14 Profibus module configuration

Inverter configuration
You can select the inverter model and set the station number, as shown below:

Figure 2-15 Inverter configuration

2.2.2 Datablock
The datablock is used to set the defaults for D elements. If you download the compiled datablock settings to the PLC, the PLC
will use the datablock to initialize the related D elements upon PLC startup.
The datablock editor enables you to assign initial data to the D register (data memory). You can assign data to words or double
words, but not to bytes. You can also add comments by inputting “//” to the front of a character string.
Besides the datablock of D elements, IVC2H series support the datablock of R elements.
See Auto Station Programming Software User Manual for detailed datablock instruction.

2.2.3 Global variable table

The global variables table enables you to give meaningful names for certain PLC addresses. The names are accessible
anywhere in the project, and using them is in effect using the corresponding device. The global variable table includes three
columns: variable name, variable addr. and comments.
The variable name can be made up of letters (case insensitive), numbers, underline or their mixture, but no spaces. The name
cannot start with a number, nor be completely made up of numbers. Length: not longer than 8 bytes. The format of “device type
+ number” is illegal. No keywords shall be used. The keywords include: basic data type, instructions and the operators in the IL
programming language.
For IVC2H/IVC2L/IVC1 series small PLC, the uploading number the global variables allow shall not exceed 1000/500/140. If
beyond the number, the variables can be only saved at local. See Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16 Global variable table

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 27

2.2.4 Setting BFM for IVC2L and IVC2H series special modules
There is no need to set the addresses for IVC2L and IVC2H series special modules, for the main module can detect and
address them automatically upon power on.
Among the special modules, the analog extension module includes the analog input module and analog output module.
The parameters of these two special modules, such as the channel characteristics, zero point and maximum digital signal are
by default applicable directly. However, when necessary, you can change the parameters in order to cater for your actual
needs.
IVC2L and IVC2H analog input module
IVC2L and IVC2H analog input module exchanges information with its main module through the BFM area.
When a user program runs on the main module, the TO instruction will write data to the related registers in the BFM area of
IVC2L special module, and change the default settings. The configuration data that can be changed includes zero digital signal,
maximum digital signal, input channel signal characteristic, input channel ready flag, and so on.
The main module uses the FROM instruction to read the data from the BFM area of IVC2L analog input module. The data may
include the analog-digital conversion result and other information.
IVC2L and IVC2H analog output module
IVC2L and IVC2H analog output module exchanges information with its main module through the BFM area.
When a user program runs on the main module, the TO instruction will write data to the related registers in the BFM area of
IVC2L special module, and change the default settings. The configuration data that can be changed includes zero digital signal,
maximum digital signal, output channel signal characteristic, output channel ready flag, and so on.
The main module uses the FROM instruction to read the data from, and uses the TO instruction to write the digital signal to be
convertered to, the BFM area of IVC2L analog output module.
For details about the TO/FROM instruction, refer to 错误！未找到引用源。Application instructions. As for the information about
various special modules, as well as their BFM areas, see the quick start manuals of the special module.

2.3 Running mode and state control

You can start or stop the PLC in any of the following three ways.
1. Using the mode selection switch
2. Using the designated terminals by setting the startup mode of input point and external terminal in system block
3. Using the programming software by setting the mode selection switch at TM or ON

2.3.1 System RUN and system STOP states

The main module states include RUN and STOP states.
RUN
When the main module is in the RUN state, the PLC will execute the user program. That is to say, all the four tasks in a scan
cycle, namely the user program execution, communication, internal tasks and I/O update, will be executed.
STOP
When the main module is in the STOP state, the PLC will not execute the user program, but will still execute the other three
tasks in every scan cycle, namely the communication, internal tasks and I/O update.

2.3.2 RUN&STOP state change

How to change from STOP to RUN
1. Resetting the PLC
If the mode selection switch is set to ON, reset the PLC (including power-on reset), and the system will enter the RUN state
automatically.

 Note
If the Control mode of input point is valid in the main module, the corresponding input terminal must be ON, or the system
will not enter the RUN state after reset.
2. Setting mode selection switch
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 28

When the PLC is in STOP state, setting the mode selection switch to ON will change the PLC to RUN state.
3. Setting startup mode of input point
If the Startup mode of input point is valid in the system block, in STOP state, the designated input points (X0~X17) detected
by the system change from OFF to ON, and then the main module enter the RUN state.

 Note
The mode selection switch must be set to ON for the input terminal startup mode to be valid.
How to change from RUN to STOP
1. Resetting the PLC
If the mode selection switch is set to OFF or TM, resetting the system (including power-on reset) will change the PLC to STOP
state.

 Note
Even when the mode selection switch is ON, the system will also enter the STOP state after reset if the Control mode of input
point is valid in the main module and the designated input point is OFF.
2. Setting mode selection switch
The system will change from RUN to STOP when you set the mode selection switch from ON or TM to OFF.
3. Using the STOP command
The system will enter the STOP state after executing the STOP command in the user program.
4. Auto-stop upon faults
The system will stop executing the user program when a serious fault (like user program error, or user program execution
overtime) is detected.

2.3.3 Setting output in STOP state

You can set the state of output terminals (Y) when the PLC is stopped. The three optional settings include:
1. Disable: When the PLC is stopped, all output terminals will be OFF.
2. Freeze: When the PLC is stopped, all the output terminals will be frozen at the last status.
3. Configure: You can decide which output will be ON and which will be OFF when the PLC is stopped according to the actual
need.
You can find the above settings in the Output Table tab of the System block. See the Output Table in 错误！未找到引用源。
错误！未找到引用源。.

2.4 System debugging

2.4.1 Uploading&downloading program

Downloading
The system block, data block and user program edited in Auto Station can be downloaded to the PLC through a serial port.
Note that the PLC should be in the STOP state when downloading.
If you change a compiled program and want to download it, the system will ask you to compile it again, as shown in Figure
2-17.

Yes No

Figure 2-17 Re-compile prompt

 Note
If you select No, the program compiled last time will be downloaded to the PLC, which means the changes are invalid.
If you have set a download password and have not entered it after starting the Auto Station this time, a window asking you to
enter the password will pop up before the download can start.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 29

Uploading
You can upload the system block, data block and user program from a PLC to your PC, and save them in a new project. If the
battery backed data are valid, the user auxiliary information files will be uploaded together. See Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18 Upload dialog box

If you have set a upload password and have not entered it after starting the Auto Station this time, a window asking you to enter
the password will pop up before the upload can start.
During the download, you can select to disable the upload function, which means no PC can upload the program from the PLC.
To enable the upload function, you must re-download the program and check to enable the upload function during the
downloading process.

2.4.2 Error reporting mechanism

The system can detect and report two types of errors: system error and user program execution error.
A system error is caused by abnormal system operation while a user program execution error is caused by the abnormal
execution of the user program.
Every error is assigned with a code. See Appendix 6System error code.
System error
When system error occurs, the system will set the special relay SM3, and write the error code into the special data register SD3.
You can obtain the system error information by accessing the error code stored in SD3.
If multiple system errors occur at the same time, the system will only write the code of the worst error into SD3.
When serious system errors occur, the user program will halt, and the ERR indicator on the main module will turn on.
User program execution error
When user program execution error occurs, the system will set the special relay SM20, and write the error code into the special
data register SD20.
If the next application instruction is correctly executed, the SM20 will be reset, while SD20 will still keep the error code.
The system keeps the codes of the lastest five errors in special data registers SD20~SD24 and form a stack.
If the code of the current error is different from the code in SD20, the error stack will be pushed down, as shown in Figure 2-19.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 30

New
Newuser
userprogram
programerror
新发生的用户程序错误 error

错误记录
SD20 Error
Error record
record 00
0

错误记录
SD21 Error
Error record
record 11
1

错误记录
SD22 Error
Error record
record 22
2

错误记录
SD23 Error
Errorrecord
record33
3

错误记录
SD24 Error record
Error record 44
4

Discard

Figure 2-19 Push operation of the error stack

Only when serious user program execution error occurs will the user program halt and the ERR indicator on the main module
turn on. In less serious cases, the ERR indicator on the main module will not turn on.
Checing the error information online
Connect the PLC with your PC through the serial port, and you can read various PLC state information through the Auto Station,
including the system error and user program execution error.
In the main interface of Auto Station, click PLC->PLC Info to check the PLC information, as shown below:

Figure 2-20 PLC information

The System error No. is the No. of the system errors stored in SD3, and Execution error No. is the No. of the execution error
stored in SD20. The error description is for your reference.

2.4.3 Editing user program online

You can use the online editing function when you want to change the user program without stopping the PLC.

 Warning
On occasions when casualties or property loss may occur, the online program editing function should be used by professionals
with sufficient protection measures.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 31

Method
After making sure that the PC-PLC communication has been set up and the PLC is in RUN state, click Debug->Online edit in
the Auto Station main interface to enter the online edit state.
In the online edit state, you can edit the main program, subprograms and interrupts as usual. After the edit, click
PLC->Download and the edited program will be compiled and downloaded to the PLC automatically. When the download
completes, the PLC will execute the new program.
Limits
1. In the online edit state, you cannot change the global variable table or any local variable table, nor add or delete any
subprogram and interrupt.
2. Auto Station will quit the online edit state if the PLC is stopped.

2.4.4 Clearing and formatting

You can use the clearing operation to clear PLC element value, PLC program and PLC datablock. While through formatting,
you can clear all PLC internal data and program.
PLC element value clear
The PLC element value clear function can clear all element values when the PLC is in STOP state.
Think it twice before using the clearing function, because clearing PLC element values may cause PLC operation error or loss
of working data.
PLC program clear
The PLC program clear function can clear the PLC user program when the PLC is in STOP state.
Think it twice before using the clearing function, because after the PLC user program is cleared, the PLC will have no program
to execute.
PLC datablock clear
The PLC datablock clear function can clear all the PLC datablocks when the PLC is in STOP state.
Think it twice before using the clearing function, because after the PLC datablock is cleared, the PLC will not initialize element
D according to the presetting of the datablock.
PLC format
The PLC format function can format all PLC data, including clearing the user program, restoring the defaults, and clearing the
datablock (when PLC is in STOP state).
Think it twice before using the formatting function, because this operation will clear all the downloads and settings in the PLC.

2.4.5 Checking PLC information online

PLC info
The PLC info function can obtain and display various PLC running information, as shown in Figure 2-21.

Figure 2-21 PLC current operation information

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 32

PLC time
The PLC time function can be used to display and set PLC present time, as shown in Figure 2-22.

Figure 2-22 Setting PLC time

Displayed in the PLC time window is the present date and time of PLC. You can adjust the time setting and click the Set time
button to validate it.

2.4.6 Write, force and element monitoring table

Write and force
During the debugging, some element values may need to be changed manually. You can use the write or force function.
Difference between write and force is that written element values are one-off and may change with the program operation, but
forced element values will be permanently recorded in the PLC hardware until being unforced.
To use the write or force function, just select the element that needs changing, right click and select Write selected element or
Force selected element. All the element addresses used by the selected element will be listed in the dialog box. Modify the
address value to be written or forced, click the OK button, and the value will be downloaded to the PLC. If these values are
effective in the hardware, you will see the change in later debugging process.
The Write element value dialogue box is shown in Figure 2-23:

Figure 2-23 Write element value

The Force element dialogue box is shown in Figure 2-24:

Figure 2-24 Force element

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 33

You can see a lock under the forced elements in the LAD, as shown in Figure 2-25:

Figure 2-25 Lock signs under forced elements

Unforce
You can unforce any forced elements when forcing them becomes unnecessary. To unforce an element, select the target
element, right click and select Unforce to pop up a dialog box as shown in Figure 2-26. All the forced elements among the
selected elements are listed in the dialog box. You can select to unforce any elements, and click the OK button to confirm. The
forced value will be deleted from the PLC, so is the lock mark.

Figure 2-26 Unforce

Element monitoring table

The element monitoring table (EMT) is responsible for monitoring the element value during the debugging. The program input
and output elements can be added to the EMT so that they can be tracked after the program is downloaded to the PLC.
The EMT monitors the element value during the debugging. You can input the input & output elements, registers and word
elements into the EMT during the debugging so that those elements can be monitored after the program is downloaded to PLC.
The EMT works in two modes: editing mode and monitoring mode. In the editing mode, no monitoring function can be carried
out. In the monitoring mode, both the monitoring and editing functions are available.
In the monitoring mode, the displayed elements’ values are updated automatically.
The EMT provides functions including editing, sequencing, searching, auto-updating of the current value, written value, forced
value of the specified element or variable, and unforce.
See Figure 2-27 for the illustration of an EMT:

Figure 2-27 Element monitoring table

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 2 Function description 34

2.4.7 Generating datablock from RAM

This function can continuously read and display the value of up to 500 D registers in the PLC. The results can merge into the
datablock or overwrite the original datablock.
Select PLC->Generate datablock from RAM to pop up a window as shown in Figure 2-28.

Figure 2-28 Reading data register value

Enter the range of the datablock to be read, click the Read from RAM button, and the data will be read into the list after the
instruction is correctly executed.
You can select hex, decimal or octal or binary system in the field of Display type to display the data.
After reading the data successfully, the buttons of Merge to datablock and Overwrite datablock are enabled. Clicking Merge
to datablock will add the results after the current datablock. Clicking Overwrite datablock will replace the contents in the
datablock with the generated results. After exiting the register value reading window, the software will prompt that the datablock
has changed and the datablock window will be opened automatically.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 35

Chapter 3 Element and data

This chapter details the description, classification and functions of the elements of IVC series small PLC.

3.1 Element type and function

3.1.1 Element overview

The PLC elements are virtual elements configured in PLC system design in order to replace the actual relays in the relay
control circuits. PLC uses the elements to calculate and configure system function. Due to their virtual nature, the elements can
be used repeatedly in the program, their number is in theory unlimited (only related to program capacity), and have no
mechanical or electric problems like their actual counterparts. Such features make the PLC much more reliable than relay
control circuits. In addition, it is easier to program and modify the logic.
The types and functions of IVC series PLC elements are shown in the following figure.

User program

Y discrete output point hardware circuit

X discrete input point hardware circuit

Executing & displaying devices

Indexed addressing register Z

Special auxiliary relay SM

Local auxiliary relay LM

Special data register SD

Buttons, contacts, etc.

Output image registers

Input image registers

Local data register V

Auxiliary relay M

Data register D

Output point Y
Input point X

State relay S

Counter C
Timer T

Elements

PLC system functions, system states,

time square wave, interrupts and
communication, etc.

Figure3-1 Types and functions of PLC elements

In this manual, the elements are named according to their types. For example:
 Input point X, or “X element” for short
 Output point Y, or “Y element” for short
 Auxiliary relay M, or “M element” for short
 Data register D, or “D element” for short
 State relay S, or “S element” for short
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 36

3.1.2 Element list

The elements of IVC series PLC are classified according to their functions, and are easily accessible.
The elements are listed in the following table.
Table 3-1 IVC series PLC elements

IVC1 series IVC1L series IVC2L series IVC2H series Numbered in

128 I/128 O(input 128 I/128 O(input 256 I/256 O (input 256 I/256 O (input
I/O X0~X177, output X0~X177, output X0~X377, output X0~X377, output Octal
Y0~Y177) Note1 Y0~Y177) Note1 Y0~Y377) Note1 Y0~Y377) Note1
2048 (M0~M2047) 10240
Auxiliary relay 2048 (M0~M2047) 2000 (M0~M1999) Decimal
(M0~M10239)
Local auxiliary relayNote 5 64 (LM0~LM63) 64 (LM0~LM63) 64 (LM0~LM63) 64 (LM0~LM63) Decimal

Special auxiliary relay 256 (SM0~SM255) 512 (SM0~SM511) 256 (SM0~SM255) 512 (SM0~SM511) Decimal

State relay 1024 (S0~S1023) 1024 (S0~S1023) 992 (S0~S991) 4096 (S0~S4095) Decimal
Element
Note2 Note2 Note2 Note2
resources Note4 Timer 256 (T0~T255) 256 (T0~T255) 256 (T0~T255) 512 (T0~T511) Decimal

Counter 256 (C0~C255) Note3 256 (C0~C255) Note3 256 (C0~C255) Note3 307 (C0~C256) Note3 Decimal
Data register 8000 (D0~D7999) 8000 (D0~D7999) 8000 (D0~D7999) 8000 (D0~D7999) Decimal

Data register R 32768 (R0~R32767) Decimal

Note5 64 (V0~V63)
Local data register 64 (V0~V63) 64 (V0~V63) 64 (V0~V63) Decimal
Indexed addressing 16 (Z0~Z15)
16 (Z0~Z15) 16 (Z0~Z15) 16 (Z0~Z15) Decimal
register
Special data register 256 (SD0~SD255) 512 (SD0~SD511) 256 (SD0~SD255) 512 (SD0~SD511) Decimal
Notes:
1: The X and Y elements are addressed in octal system, and X10 represents the 8th input point. The I/O point number here is the system capacity
while the actual system I/O point number is determined by the actual system configuration (including extension modules and power supply).
2: The T elements are addressed according to the timing precision:
 100ms: T0~T209
 10ms: T210~T251
 1ms: T252~T255
(IVC2H)
 100ms: T0~T209
 10ms: T210~T479
 1ms: T480~T511
3: The C elements are addressed according to the counter types and functions:
 16bit up counter: C0~C199
 32bit up/down counter: C200~C235
 32bit high-speed counter: C236~C255
(IVC2H)
 16bit up counter: C0~C199
 32bit up/down counter: C200~C235
 32bit high-speed counter: C236~C255, C301-C307, C256-C300 reserved
4: Part of PLC elements are reserved for internal tasks. Avoid using those elements in the user program. See Appendix 3Reserved elements.
5: These two elements are local variables that cannot be defined in the global variable table. When the user program calls subprograms or
returns to the main program, they will be cleared, or be set through interface parameter transfer.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 37

3.1.3 Input and output points

Element mnemonic counters. Besides, X0~X7 can also be used for inputting
 X (discrete input point) external interrupts, pulse tracking and SPD frequency
detecting instruction.
 Y (discrete output point)
Y0 and Y1 can be used for high-speed output. Others are
Function
ordinary output points.
The X and Y elements represent respectively the input
Elements numbered in
state of hardware X terminal and output state of hardware
Y terminal. Octal, starting with 0. The X and Y elements of both the
main module and the I/O modules are numbered
The state of X elements is obtained through the input
continuously. X elements are numbered in X0~X7,
image register, while the state of Y elements is output
X10~X17 and X20~X27, etc. while Y elements are
through the output circuit driven by the output image
numbered in Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17 and Y20~Y27, etc.
register. The two operations are carried out in the I/O
update stage of PLC scan cycle, as shown in 0. For Data type
details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。. Boolean (both X and Y)
It is obvious that there is a brief delay in PLC’s response
Available forms
to the I/O. The delay is related to the input filter,
communication, internal tasks and scan cycle. NO and NC contacts (dependent on which instruction
uses it) The NO and NC contacts have opposite state
values. They are sometimes referred to as “a” contact and
Execution of user “b” contact.
program
You can use NO and NC contacts of the Y element during
programming.
Input filtering
Communication
Executing & displaying
Buttons, contacts, etc.

Value assignment
1. The X elements accepts only hardware input state
devices

Internal tasks value and forced operation state value. In the user
program, they cannot be changed through output or
instructions, nor be set during system debugging.
Update I/O Output relay delay 2. You can assign values to Y elements with the OUT
instruction, or set the state value of Y elements, or even
force or write Y element values during system debugging.
Figure 3-2 Schematic diagram of I/O update 3. Through the system block, you can set the output
Classification states of Y elements in the STOP state.

X0~X17 have digital filters whose filtering time can be set

at the system block. Others use hardware filter. X0~X5
can be used as the counting input point for high-speed
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 38

3.1.4 Auxiliary relays

Element mnemonic Value assignment
M 1. Through instructions.
Function 2. Write or force during system debugging.
The M state elements of discrete type are similar to the Power loss saving
transfer relays in the actual electrical control circuits. You M elements in the M elements outside
State
can use them to save various transit states in the user saving range the saving range
program. Power loss Remain unchanged Cleared
RUN → STOP Remain unchanged Remain unchanged
Elements numbered in
STOP → RUN Remain unchanged Cleared
Decimal, starting with 0. Note: The saving range is set through the system block. See
Data type 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.

Boolean
 Note
Available forms
When using the N:N bus protocol, some M elements will
NO and NC contacts be used by the system.

3.1.5 State relays

Element mnemonic Available forms
S 1. Representation of steps (when used in STL instruction)
Alias 2. NO and NC contacts (when not used in STL instruction).
Step flag Similar to M elements, the NO and NC contacts of S
elements are available during programming.
Function
Value assignment
As the step flag, the S elements are used in the
1. Through instructions.
Sequential Function Chart (SFC). See 错误！未找到引用
2. Write or force during system debugging.
源。错误！未找到引用源。.
Power loss saving
Classification
S elements in the S elements outside
S0~S19: initial step flag State
saving range the saving range
Others: normal step flag Power loss Remain unchanged Cleared
Elements numbered in RUN → STOP Remain unchanged Remain unchanged
STOP → RUN Remain unchanged Cleared
Decimal, starting with 0 Note: The saving range is set through the system block. See
Data type 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.

Boolean

3.1.6 Timer

Element mnemonic Function

T The T element contains a word element (2 bytes) and a bit

element. The T word element can record a 16-bit value.
The T bit element represents the timer coil state and is
applicable to logic control.
1 state bit Classification
T bit element According to the timing precision, the T elements are
classified into three types:
MSB T element Timing precision
Sign bit
T word element LSB T0~T209 100ms
16 bits T210~T251 10ms
T252~T255 1ms
Figure 3-3 T element
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 39

The T elements with the timing precision of 1ms are 2. Write or force during system debugging.
activated by interrupts, unrelated to the PLC scan cycle. Power loss saving
Their action time is the most precise. The update and
T elements in the
action time of other T elements are related to PLC scan T elements outside
State saving range
cycles. the saving range
(IVC2L series only)
Elements numbered in Power loss Remain unchanged Cleared
RUN → STOP Remain unchanged Remain unchanged
Decimal, starting with 0
STOP → RUN Remain unchanged Cleared
Data type Note: The saving range is set through the system block. See
错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
Boolean, word
Available forms
 Note
The timing and action mode of T elements are determined
The maximum timing value of T element is 32767. The
by the timing instruction that uses them. There are four preset value is -32768~32767. Because T elements act
timing instructions: TON, TOF, TONR and TMON. See 错 only when the counted value reaches or exceeds the
preset value, it is pointless setting the preset value as a
误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 for details.
negative number.
Value assignment
1. Through instructions.

3.1.7 Counter
Element mnemonic Available forms
C The instructions that may use the C elements are
Function classified into 4 types: CTU, CTR, DCNT and high-speed
I/O. See 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 and
The C element contains a bit element and a word (or a
double word) element. The word elements can record 错误！未找到引用源。Application instructions for details.
16-bit or 32-bit counted numbers, and is used as a value The classification of C elements is shown below:
in the program. The bit element represents the state of the C element Type Applicable to
counter coil and is applied to logic control. C0~C199 16bit up counter CTU, CTR
C200~C235 32bit up/down counter DCNT
1 state bit
C bit element C236~C255 32bit high-speed counter High-speed I/O

MSB
Value assignment
Sign bit
16-bit counter LSB
16 bits
1. Through instructions.
Sign bit
MSB 2. Write or force during system debugging.
32-bit counter LSB
16 bits 16 bits Power loss saving
Figure 3-4 C element C elements in the C elements outside
State
saving range the saving range
Classification
Power loss Remain unchanged Cleared
Two types: 16-bit counter and 32-bit counter RUN → STOP Remain unchanged Remain unchanged
STOP → RUN Remain unchanged Cleared
Elements numbered in
Note: The saving range is set through the system block. See
Decimal, starting with 0 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
Data type
Boolean, word or double-word
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 40

3.1.8 Data register

Element mnemonic  Note
D, R In a double-word D or R element, the higher 16-bit is in
the first D or R element; and the lower 16-bit is in the
Function second D or R element.
As a data element, the D or R elements are used in many Available forms
calculation and control instructions as the operands.
The D or R elements are used in many calculation and
Elements numbered in control instructions as the operands.
Decimal, starting with 0 Value assignment
Data type 1. Through initialization. 2. Through instructions.
Every D or R element is a 16-bit register that can store 3. Write or force during system debugging.
data, like an 16-bit integer. Power loss saving
Two D or R elements can form a double-word and store a D elements in the D elements outside
32-bit data, such as the long integer data or floating-point State
saving range the saving range
data. Power loss Remain unchanged Cleared
MSB Dn element (n: 0 ~ 7999) RUN → STOP Remain unchanged Remain unchanged
Sign bit
Single word D LSB STOP → RUN Remain unchanged Cleared
element 16 bits
Note: The saving range is set through the system block. See
MSB LSB
Sign bit
Dn element (n: 0 ~ 7998)
Dn + 1 element 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
(n: 0 ~ 7998)
Double word
D element
R elements cannot be saved at power loss.
16 bits 16 bits
The data range of single word D element: -32, 168 ~ 32, 767
The data range of double word D element: -2, 147, 483, 648 ~ 2, 147, 483, 647
 Note
Figure 3-5 D or R element Some D elements may be reserved for internal tasks
when the inverter instruction or N:N bus protocol is used.

3.1.9 Special auxiliary relay

Element mnemonic  SM40~SM68: interrupt control flag bit. Setting these

SM elements will enable the corresponding
SM
interrupts.
Function  SM80/81: Y0/Y1 high-speed pulse output stop
The SM elements are closely related to the PLC system instruction.
function. They reflect PLC system function and system  SM110~SM114: monitor bit of free port 0
state. For details, see Appendix 1Special auxiliary relay.  SM135/136: Modbus communication flag bit.
Classification  SM172~SM178: integrated analog channel enabling
The frequently used SM elements include: flag (valid only for IVC1-1614BRA1)
 SM0: PLC operation monitor bit. It is ON when the Elements numbered in
PLC is in RUN state. Decimal, starting with 0
 SM1: initial operation pulse bit. It is ON in the first
Data type
scan cycle of PLC operation.
Boolean
 SM3: system error. It is ON if any system error is
detected after PLC is powered on or when PLC Available forms
changes from STOP to RUN. NO and NC contacts
 SM10~SM12: respetively the clock square-wave
Value assignment
cycled at 10ms, 100ms and 1s (flipping-over twice in
a cycle). 1. Through instructions.
In addition, you can use, control or change the PLC 2. Write or force during system debugging.
system function by adjusting certain SM elements. Such  Note
elements include: You cannot assign values to the read only SM elements.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 41

3.1.10 Special data register

Element mnemonic  SD66~SD68: cycle of timed interrupt.

 SD80~SD89: locating instruction parameters.
SD
Elements numbered in
Function
Decimal, starting with 0
The SD elements are closely related to the PLC system
function. They reflect PLC system function parameters, Data type
state code and instruction execution data. See Appendix Word, double-word (integer)
2Special data register for details.
Available forms
Classification
Storage and calculation of integers
The frequently used SD elements include:
Value assignment
 SD3: system error code.
1. Through instructions.
 SD50~SD57: high-speed pulse output monitor.
2. Write or force during system debugging.
 SD100~SD106: real time clock data.
In addition, you can change PLC system function  Note
parameters by changing certain SD elements. Such You cannot assign values to the read only SD elements.
elements include:

3.1.11 Indexed addressing register

Element mnemonic Data type
Z Word
Function Available forms
The Z elements are 16-bit registers that can store signed The Z elements are used for indexed addressing. You
integers. For detailed indexed addressing information, need to write the addressing offset to the Z elements
see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。. before you can use them.
Elements numbered in Value assignment
Decimal, starting with 0 1. Through instructions.
2. Write or force during system debugging.

3.1.12 Local auxiliary relay

Element mnemonic transfer. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未
LM 找到引用源。.
Function Elements numbered in
The LM elements are local variables and can be used in Decimal, starting with 0
the main program and subprograms. But being local Data type
variables, they are valid only in a certain program.
Boolean
Different programs cannot share the same LM element
directly. When the system jumps from one program to Available forms
another, the system will redefine the LM element. When NO and NC contacts
the system returns to the main program or calls a
Value assignment
subprogram, the redefined LM element will be cleared, or
be set by the interface parameter transfer. 1. Through instructions.
The LM elements can be used to define the interface 2
parameters of subprograms to realize interface parameter
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 42

3.1.13 Local data registe

Element mnemonic transfer. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未

找到引用源。.
V
Elements numbered in
Function
Decimal, starting with 0
The V elements are local variables and can be used in the
main program and subprograms. But being local variables, Data type
they are valid only in a certain program. Different Boolean
programs cannot share the same V element directly.
Available forms
When the system jumps from one program to another, the
system will redefine the V element. When the system Word, for numeric information
returns to the main program or calls a subprogram, the Value assignment
redefined V element will be cleared, or be set by the
1. Through instructions.
interface parameter transfer.
2
The V elements can be used to define the interface
parameters of subprograms to realize interface parameter

3.2 Elements addressing mode

3.2.1 Bit-string addressing mode (Kn addressing mode)

Concept
The Kn addressing mode, or combined bit-string addressing mode, realizes addressing by combining bit elements into words
or double words.
Kn addressing method
The format is: “K(n)(U)”, where the “n” is an integer from one to eight, standing for the length of the bit string: n×4. The “U”
stands for the address of the starting element.
For example:
1. K1X0 stands for a word made up of (X0, X1, X2, X3).
2. K3Y0 stands for a word made up of (Y0, Y01, Y02, Y03), (Y04, Y05, Y06, Y07), (Y10, Y11, Y12, Y13).
3. K4M0 stands for a word made up of M0, M1, M2, M3…, M15.
4. K8M0 stands for a word made up of M0, M1, M2, M3…, M31.
Data storage format of Kn addressing mode
The following is an example of how a specific data can be stored using the Kn addressing mode:
MOV 2#10001001 K2M0 (which is equal to MOV 16#89 K2M0, or MOV 137 K2M0). After executing the instruction, the result
is:
Data Highest bit Middle bit Lowest bit
K2M0 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
16#89 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Notes
If the destination operand uses the Kn addressing mode, while the data to be stored is longer than the length of the destination
operand, the system will keep the lower bits and discard the higher bits.
For example:
Execute instruction DBITS 16# FFFFFFF0 K1M0. After executing the instruction, the operand 2 (K1M0) should store the
calculation result 16# 1c (28). However, the K1M0 is only 4 bits wide, which is not enough for 16# 1c. By discarding the higher
bits, the actual operand 2 is K1M0=16# c (12).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 43

3.2.2 Indexed addressing mode (Z addressing mode)

Concept
The IVC2L/IVC2H series PLC provides the Z addressing mode, or indexed addressing mode. You can use the Z elements
(indexed addressing register) to get indirect access to the targe elements.
Z addressing method
Targe address=Basic element address+Address offset stored in Z element
For example:
In the indexed addressing mode, for D0Z0 (Z0=3), the target address is D3, because D0 is the basic address, and the address
offset is stored in element Z0, which in this case, is 3.
Therefore when Z0=3, the instruction “MOV 45 D0Z0” is equal to “MOV 45 D3” in effect, because in both cases the D3 is
set as 45 by the instruction.
Indexed addressing example
1. Bit element indexed addressing example 2. Word element indexed addressing example
LD M01 LD M0 1
MOV 6 Z1 MOV 30 Z20
SFTR X0Z1 M0 8 2 MOV D100Z20 D0
The preceeding instructions are in effect equal to: The preceeding instructions are in effect equal to:
LD M0 1 LD M0 1
SFTR X6 M0 8 2 MOV D130 D0
The addressing process is as follows: The addressing process is as follows:
Z1=6 Z20=30
X0Z1=X(0+Z1)=X6 D100 Z20=D(100+Z20)=D130
Notes
1. The Z elements store the address offset for the indexed addressing mode. They support signed integers, which means
minus offset is supported.
For example:
MOV -30 Z20
MOV D100Z20 D0
The preceeding instructions are equal to the following one in effect:
MOV D70 D0
2. The SM elements and SD elements do not support the Z addressing mode.
3. Pay attention to the address range when using the Z addressing mode. For example, D7999Z0 (Z0=9) is outside the address
range of the D elements, which is not bigger than D7999.

3.2.3 Indexing addressing mode in bit-string combination

The indexed addressing mode can be used in combination with the bit-string addressing mode. For example: K1X0Z10.
In this mode, the starting element address is found through the Z addressing mode, and then the Kn addressing mode is used
to determine the length of the bit string.
For example:
LD M1
MOV 3 Z10
MOV K1X0Z10 D0
The preceeding instructions are in effect equal to:
LD M1
MOV K1X3 D0
The addressing process is as follows:
Z10=3
K1X0Z10=K1X (0+Z10)=K1X3
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 44

3.2.4 Storing&addressing 32-bit data in D, R and V Elements

Storing 32-bit data in D, R and V elements
The DINT, DWORD and REAL data are all 32-bit, while the D, R or V elements are only 16-bit. Two consecutive D, R or V
elements are needed to store the 32-bit data.
The IVC2L series PLC stores the 32-bit data in the Big Endian mode, which means the elements with smaller addresses are
used to store the higher bits, while the elements with bigger addresses are used to store the lower bits.
For example, the signless integer “16# FEA8_67DA” is stored in the element (D0, D1). The actual storing format is:
D0 0xFEA8
D1 0x67DA

Addressing 32-bit data in D, R and V elements

You can use a D or V element to locate a 16-bit data, such as an INT or WORD data, or a 32-bit data, such as a DINT or
DWORD data.
If a D, R or V element address is used in an instruction, the operand data type determines whethther the data is 16-bit or 32-bit.
For example:
In the instruction “MOV 16#34 D0”, the address D0 stands for a single D0 element, because operand 2 of the MOV
instruction is of the WORD data type.
In the instruction “DMOV 16# FEA867DA D0”, the address D0 stands for two consecutive words: D0 and D1, because
operand 2 of the DMOV instruction is of the DWORD data type.

3.3 Data

3.3.1 Data type

All instruction operands are of a certain data type. There are altogether six data types, as listed in the following table:
Table 3-2 Operand data types
Data type Type description Data width Range
BOOL Bit 1 ON, OFF (1, 0)
INT Signed integer 16 -32768~32767
Signed double
DINT 32 -2147483648~2147483647
integer
WORD Word 16 0~65535 (16#0~16#FFFF)
DWORD Double word 32 0~4294967295 (16#0~16#FFFFFFFF)
REAL Floating point 32 ±1.175494E-38~±3.402823E+38

3.3.2 Correlation between elements and data types

The elements used as instruction operands must have suitable data types. The correlations are listed in the following table.
Table 3-3 Elements and data type correlations
Data type Elements
C T
BOOL
X Y M S LM SM
Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R
INT

Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R

DINT

Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R

WORD

Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R

DWORD

Constant D V R
REAL
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 3 Element and data 45

If an instruction uses an operand with unsuitable data type, the instruction will be deemed illegal. For example, instruction
“MOV 10 X0” is illegal because operand 2 of the MOV instruction is of signed integer data type, while the X0 element can
store only Boolean data.

 Note
1. When the operand is of INT or WORD type, the applicable elements include KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, KnLM and KnSM, where
1≤n≤4
2. When the operand is of DINT or DWORD type, the applicable elements include KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, KnLM and KnSM,
where 5≤n≤8
3. When the operand is of INT or WORD type, the applicable C elements are C0~C199.
4. When the operand is of DINT or DWORD type, the applicable C elements are C200~C255, C301~C306.

3.3.3 Constant
You can use constants as the instruction operands. IVC2L series PLC supports input of multiple types of constants. The usual
constant types are listed in the following table:
Table 3-4 Constant types
Constant type Example Valid range Remarks
Decimal constant (16-bit signed
-8949 -32768~32767
integer)
Decimal constant (16-bit unsigned
65326 0~65535
integer)
Decimal constant (32-bit signed
-2147483646 -2147483648~2147483647
integer)
Decimal constant(32-bit unsigned
4294967295 0~4294967295
integer)
Hex constant (16-bit) 16#1FE9 16#0~16#FFFF The hex, octal or binary constants
Hex constant (32-bit) 16#FD1EAFE9 16#0~16#FFFFFFFF are neither positive nor negative by
Octal constant (16-bit) 8#7173 8#0~8#177777 themselves. When used as
Octal constant (32-bit) 8#71732 8#0~8#37777777777 operands, the positive and negative
Binary constant (16-bit) 2#10111001 2#0~2#1111111111111111 nature of these constants are
2#0~2#1111111111111111 determined by the data type of the
Binary constant (32-bit) 2#101110011111
1111111111111111 operand.
Compliant with IEEE-754.
-3.1415E-16 The programming software can
Single-precision floating point 3.1415E+3 ±1.175494E-38~±3.402823E+38 display and input floating point
0.016 constants with 7-bit of operational
accuracy
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 46

Chapter 4 Programming concepts

This chapter details the programming of IVC series small PLC, including the programming language, program components,
data type, addressing mode and annotating function. The programming and usage of subprograms are also introduced, and
finally, the general explanation of instructions.

4.1 Programming language

Three programming languages are provided: ladder diagram (LAD), instruction list (IL) and sequential function chart (SFC).

4.1.1 Ladder diagram (LAD)

Concepts
The LAD is a widely-used diagram programming-language, similar to the electric (relay) control diagram. It features:
1. Left bus, with right bus omitted.
2. All control output elements (coils) and functional blocks (application instructions) share the same power flow inlet.
The electric control diagram and LAD are equivalent to a certain degree, as shown in the following figure.

M
LS1 PB CR

LS2 SS

Figure 4-1 The equivalence between electric control diagram and LAD

LAD basic programming components

According to the principles in electric control diagram, several basic programming components are abstracted for the LAD:
1. Left bus: Corresponding to the control bus in electric control diagram, it provides power for the control circuit.
2. Connecting line ( ): Corresponding to the electric connection in electric control diagram, it connects different
components.
3. Contact ( ): Corresponding to the input contact in electric diagram, it controls the ON/OFF and direction of control currents.
The parallel and serial connection of contacts stands for the logic calculation of inputs, determining the transfer of power flow.
4. Coil ( ): It corresponds to the relay output in electric control diagram.
5. Function block ( ): Or application instruction. Corresponding to the execution unit or functional device that provides special
functions in electric control diagram, it can accomplish specific control function or control calculation function (like data
transmission, data calculation, timer and counter).
Power flow
Being an important concept in LAD, the power flow is used to drive coils and application instructions, which is similar to the
control current output by the driving coil, and executed by the execution unit in electric control diagram.
In LAD, the coils or application instructions must be preceded with power flow, because the coils can output and instructions
can be executed only when the power flow is ON.
The following figure demonstrates the power flow in LAD and how the power flow drives coils or function blocks.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 47

Power flow No.1

Power flow No.1

Power flow No.2

Power flow No.3

Three power flows

Figure 4-2 Power flow and its driving function

4.1.2 Instruction list (IL)

The IL, or the instruction list composed by users, is a text programming language.
The user program stored in the PLC main module is actually the instruction list recognizable to the main module. The system
realizes the control function by executing the instructions in the list one by one.
The following is an example of equivalent LAD and IL.
LAD IL
LD X0
OR X1
AND X14
MPS
OUT Y0
AND X1
OUT Y1
MPP
AND X2
MPS
OUT Y2
AND X3
AND X4
OUT Y3
MRD
LD X5
AND X6
LD X7
AND X10
ORB
ANB
OUT Y4
MPP
OUT Y5

4.1.3 Sequential function chart (SFC).

The SFC is a diagram programming-language usually used to realize sequence control, which is a control process that can be
divided into multiple procedures and proceed according to certain working sequence.
The user program designed with SFC is direct and clear because it has a structure similar to the actual sequence control
process.
See the following figure for a simple example of SFC.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 48

Figure 4-3 Example of SFC

4.2 Program components

The program components include user program, system block and data block. You can change these components by
programming.

4.2.1 User program

A user program is the program code composed by users. It must be compiled into executable instruction list, downloaded to the
PLC and executed to realize the control function.
The user program comprises three program organization units (POU): main program (MAIN), subprogram (SBR) and interrupt
(INT).
Main program (MAIN)
The main program is the main body and framework of the user program. When the system is in RUN state, the main program
will be executed cyclically.
One user program has only one main program.
Subprogram (SBR)
A subprogram is a program independent in structure and function. It can be called by other POUs. Subprograms generally have
call operand interface and are executed only when being called.
A user program can have random number of subprograms, or no subprogram at all.
Interrupt (INT)
An interrupt is a program section handling a specific interrupt event. A specific interrupt event always corresponds to a specific
interrupt.
Upon the occurance of an interrupt event, a ordinary scan cycle will be interrupted. The system will run the corresponding
interrupt until the interrupt is finished, when the system will return to the ordinary scan cycle.
A user program can have random number of interrupts, or no interrupts at all.

4.2.2 System block

The system block contains multiple system configuration parameters. You can modify, compile and download the system block
to configure the operation mode of the main module.
For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 or the related description in Auto Station Programming Software
User Manual.

4.2.3 Data block

The data block contains the values of D or R elements. By downloading the data block to the PLC, you can set a batch of
designated D or R elements.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 49

If the Datablock enabled is checked in the Advanced Settings tab of System block, the D or R elements will be initialized by
the data block before the PLC executes the user program.

4.3 Block comment and variable comment

4.3.1 Block comment

You can add comments to the program. Occupying a whole row, each piece of comment can be used to explain the function of
the following program block.
In the program, right click and select Insert Row to insert a row above the current row. You can use an empty row to separate
two program sections.
To make a block comment, just select an empty row, right click and select Insert Block Comment.

Figure 4-4 Adding block comment

Input your comment into the Block Comment dialog box that pops out and click the OK button

Figure 4-5 Block comment dialog box

The comment will appear in the empty row, as shown below:

Figure 4-6 Block comment dialog box

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 50

A block comment occupies a whole row. You cannot add a block comment to an occupied row, nor can a row occupied by a
comment be used for other purposes.

4.3.2 Variable comment

You can define variables in the Local variable table and Global variable table. (See 2.2.3Global variable table and 4.4.3SBR
local variable table) , and use them in the LAD programming language. A variable can stand for a certain address to make the
program more sensible. Figure 4-7 shows some variables defined in a global variable table.

Figure 4-7 Variables defined in the global variable table

Symbol addressing
When the defined variables are used, you can select View->Symbol Addressing to display their names instead of their
addresses in the LAD or IL program.
The following figure shows the LAD program when the Symbol Addressing is not checked.

Figure 4-8 When symbol addressing is unchecked

The following figure shows the LAD program when the Symbol Addressing is checked.

Figure 4-9 When symbol addressing is checked

Element comment
You can select View->Element Comment to display the element comments in the LAD program, as shown in 错误！未找到引
用源。.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 51

Figure 4-10 LAD program displaying element comments

 Note
The block comment, global variable table and local variable table can be compiled and downloaded to IVC2L and IVC2H series
PLC. To store such information, battery backup is needed. However, although battery failure may cause information loss,
comment upload failure and user information file error report, the user program can still run normally.

4.4 Subprogram

4.4.1 Concept
Being an optional part of the user program, a subprogram (SBR) is an independent program organization unit (POU) that can
be called by the main program or other SBRs.
You can use SBRs in your user program to:
1. Reduce the size of the user program. You can write a repeated program section as a SBR and call it whenever necessary.
2. Clarify the program structure, particularly the structure of the main program.
3. Make the user program more transplantable.

4.4.2 Note for using SBRs

Note the following when writing or calling a SBR:
1. The PLC supports up to 6 levels of SBR nesting.
The following is an fine example of 6-level of SBR nesting:
MAINSBR1SBR2SBR3SBR4SBR5SBR6 (where the “” represents calling with the CALL instruction)
2. The PLC does not support recursive calling and cyclic calling of SBRs.
The following two examples show two illegal SBR callings.
 MAIN→SBR0→SBR0 (recursive calling, illegal)
 MAIN→SBR0→SBR1→SBR0 (cyclic calling, illegal)
3. You can define up to 64 SBRs in a user program.
4. You can define up to 16 bit variables and 16 word variables in the local variable table of a SBR.
5. When calling a SBR, the operand type of the CALL instruction must match the variable type defined in the SBR local variable
table. The compiler will check the match.
6. The interrupts are not allowed to call SBRs.

4.4.3 SBR local variable table

Concept
The SBR local variable table displays all SBR interface parameters and local variables (both are called variables) and
stipulates their properties.
SBR variable properties
The SBR variables (including interface parameters and local variables) have the following properties:
1. Variable address
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 52

Based on the variable data type, the software will automatically assign a fixed LM or V element address to each SBR variable
in sequence.
2. Variable name
You can give each SBR variable a name (alias). You can use a variable in the program by quoting its name.
3. Variable type
The SBR variables are classified into the following four types:
 IN: The IN type variables can transfer the inputs of SBR when the SBR is being called.
 OUT: The OUT type variables can transfer the SBR execution result to the main program when a SBR calling ends.
 IN_OUT: The IN type variables can transfer the inputs of SBR when the SBR is being called, or transfer the the SBR
execution result to the main program when a SBR calling ends.
 TEMP: The TEMP variables are local variables that are valid only within the SBR.
4. Data type
The variable data type specifies the range of the data. The variable data types are listed in the following table.
Table 4-1 Variable data types
Data type Description Occupid LM/V element address
BOOL Bit type One LM element address
INT Signed integer type One V element address
DINT Signed double integer type Two consecutive V element addresses
WORD Word type One V element address
DWORD Double word type Two consecutive V element addresses
REAL Floating point type Two consecutive V element addresses

4.4.4 SBR parameter transfer

If local input or output variables are defined in a SBR, when the main program calls the SBR, you should input the
corresponding variable values, global variables or temporary variables into the SBR interface parameters. Note that the global
variable should be of the same data type with the local variable.

4.4.5 Example
What follows is an example of how to write and call a SBR.
Function of this example SBR
Call SBR_1 in the main program to complete a adding calculation of two integer constants 3 and 2, and assign the result 5 to
D0.
Operation procedures
Step 1: Insert a SBR into the project and name it as SBR_1.
Step 2: Write SBR_1.
1. Set the SBR calling interface through the SBR_1 variable table.
1) Variable 1: Name it as IN1 (variable type: IN). Set the data type as INT. The software will assign it with a V element address
of V0.
2) Variable 2: Name it as IN2 (variable type: IN). Set the data type as INT. The software will assign it with a V element address
of V1.
3) Variable 3: Name it as OUT1 (variable type: OUT). Set the data type as INT. The software will assign it with a V element
address of V2.
2. Write the SBR_1 as:
LD SM0
ADD #IN1 #IN2 #OUT1
The above program is shown in the following figure.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 53

Figure 4-11 Writing SBR_1

Step 3: Write the main program and call the SBR

Use the CALL instruction in the main program to call SBR_1.
The corresponding main program is as shown below:
LD M0
CALL SBR_1 3 2 D0
You can use the parameter transfer relationship table as shown in the following figure to set the parameters transferred to the
subprogram and specify the element for storing the result of the subprogram.
 Parameter IN1 is used to transfer constant integer 3
 Parameter IN2 is used to transfer constant integer 2
 The result OUT1 is stored in D0

Figure 4-12 Calling subprogram

Step 4: Compile, download and run the user program and check the correctness of the SBR logic.
Execution result
When M0 is ON, SBR_1 will be called. Values 2 and 3 are transferred to the operands IN1 and IN2 to carry out the calculation
operation. The result 5 is then returned to the main program, and in the end, D0 is 5.

4.5 General information of instructions

4.5.1 Instruction operands

The instruction operands can be classified into the following two types:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 4 Programming concepts 54

 Source operands: or S (or S1, S2, S3 … when there are more than one of them in the same instruction). The instruction
reads values from source operands for calculation.
 Destination operands: or D (or D1, D2, D3 … when there are more than one of them in the same instruction). The
instruction controls or outputs values to the destination operands.
The operands could be bit elements, word elements, double-word elements, or constants. See the specific instruction
description in Chapter 5 or Chapter 6 for details.

4.5.2 Flag bit

The instruction result may affect three kinds of flag.
Zero flag SM180
The zero flag is set when the instruction operation result is zero.
Carry flag SM181
The carry flag is set when the instruction operation result is a carry.
Borrow flag SM182
The borrow flag is set when the instruction operation result is a borrow.

4.5.3 Limits to instruction usage

There are some limits to the usage of certain instructions. For details, see the description of the specific instruction.
Exclusive hardware resources
Some instructions requires hardware resources. When a specific hardware is being used by a certain instruction, the access to
the hardware will be denied to other instructions, because the occupation of the resource is exclusive.
Take the high-speed I/O instructions and SPD instruction for example. Any of these instructions occupies a input point among
X0~X7. The limited resources will make it impossible to execute these instructions at the same time.
Exclusive time
The execution of certain instructions may take some time. During such period, the system will be too busy to execute other
instructions.
Take the XMT instruction for example. Because of the time limit in communication, only one XMT instruction can be executed
once. In the same way, the free port can execute only one RCV instruction once. Every time when a Modbus instruction is
being executed, the communication channel will be unavailable to other instructions for a while. The same is true to other
instructions such as high-speed output instructions, locating instructions and inverter instructions.
Application limit
Some instructions cannot be used in certain situations due to their limited application scope.
For example, instruction pair MC/MCR cannot be used in the steps of SFC.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 55

Chapter 5 Basic instructions

This chapter details the basic instruction of IVC series small PLC, including the instruction format (form), operand, influenced
flag bit, function, example and sequence chart.

5.1 Contact logic instructions

5.1.1 LD: NO contact power-flow loading

LAD:
Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
LD

Influenced flag bit

IL: LD (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

LD M0
S: Source operand
OUT Y0
Function description
When M0 is ON, Y0 is ON.
Connected to the left bus to connect
(status: ON) or disconnect (status:
OFF) the power flow. LD D1.2
OUT Y0
nd
When the 2 bit of D1 is 1, Y0 is ON.

Note
For the contact logic instructions of IVC1 series, when the
operands are M1536~M2047, the actual program steps will be
the instruction program steps plus 1.
For the contact logic instructions of IVC2H series, when the
operands are M1536~M10240, C256~C511, T256~T511 and
S0~S4096, the actual program steps will be the instruction
program steps plus 1. When the operands are Dx.y, the
program steps will be 4.

5.1.2 LDI: NC contact power-flow loading

LAD:
Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
LDI

Influenced flag bit

IL: LDI (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 56

S: Source operand LDI M0

Function description OUT Y0
Connected to the left bus to connect When M0 is OFF, Y0 is ON.
(status: OFF) or disconnect (status:
Note
ON) the power flow.
For the contact logic instructions of IVC1 series, when the
operands are M1536~M2047, the actual program steps will be
the instruction program steps plus 1.
For the contact logic instructions of IVC2H series, when the
operands are M1536~M10240, C256~C511, T256~T511 and
S0~S4096, the actual program steps will be the instruction
program steps plus 1. When the operands are Dx.y, the
program steps will be 4.

5.1.3 AND: NO contact power-flow and

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
AND
Influenced flag bit

IL: AND (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

S: Source operand LD M0
Function description AND M1
After conducting the “and” operation on the OUT Y0
ON/OFF status of the designated contact (S) and
the current power flow, assign the value to the When M0 is ON and M1 is ON, Y0 is ON.
current power flow.

5.1.4 ANI: NC contact power-flow and

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
ANI
Influenced flag bit

IL: ANI (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 57

Operand description Example

S: Source operand LD M0
Function description ANI M1
OUT Y0
After reversing the ON/OFF status of the
designated contact (S), conduct “and” operation When M0 is ON and M1 is OFF, Y0 is ON.
on the reversed result and the current power flow,
and then assign the value to the current power
flow.

5.1.5 OR: NO contact power-flow or

Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H

LAD:
Influenced flag bit

OR

IL: OR (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

S: Source operand
LD M0
Function description
OR M1
After conducting “OR” operation on the ON/OFF OUT Y0
status of the designated contact (S) and the
When M0 or M1 is ON, Y0 is ON.
current power flow, assign the value to the
current power flow.

5.1.6 ORI: NC contact power-flow or

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

ORI

IL: ORI (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

S: Source operand
LD M1
Function description ORI M2
After reversing the ON/OFF status of the OUT Y0
designated contact (S), conduct “OR” operation on
the reversed result and the current power flow, and When M1 is ON or M2 is OFF, Y0 is ON.
then assign the value to the current power flow.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 58

5.1.7 OUT: Power-flow output

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

OUT
Influenced flag bit

IL: OUT (S) Program steps 1

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

S: Source operand
LD M1
Function description OUT Y0
Assign the value of the current power flow to the When M1 is ON, Y0 is ON.
designated coil (D)

5.1.8 ANB: Power-flow block and

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
ANB

Influenced flag bit

Power flow Power flow

1 能流块 2
block 1 block 2

IL: ANB Program steps 1

Operand description Example

Function description LD M0
OR M1
Conduct “and” operation on the
power flow values of two power LD M2
flow blocks, and then assign the OR M3
value to the current power flow. ANB
OUT Y0
When M0 or M1 is on, and M2 or M3 is ON, Y0 is ON.

5.1.9 ORB: Power-flow block or

LAD:
Power flow block 1 Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

ORB Influenced flag bit

Power flow block 2

IL: ORB Program steps 1

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 59

Operand description Example

Function description LD M1
AND M2
Conduct “or” operation on the
power flow values of two power LD M3
flow blocks, and then assign the AND M4
value to the current power flow. ORB
OUT Y0
When both M1 and M2 are ON, or both M3 and M4 are ON, Y0
outputs ON.

5.1.10 MPS: Output power-flow input stack

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
MPS

Influenced flag bit

IL: MPS Program steps 1

Function description Note

Push the current power flow value It is prohibited to use the MPS instruction consecutively for over 8
into the stack for storage, so that it times in a LAD program (with no MPP instruction in between),
can be used in the power flow otherwise the power flow output stack may overflow.
calculation for the subsequent
output branches.

5.1.11 MRD: Read output power-flow stack top value

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

MRD

IL: MRD Program steps 1

Function description
Assign the top value of the power flow output stack to the current power flow.

5.1.12 MPP: Output power-flow stack pop off

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

MPP
IL: MPP Program steps 1
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 60

Function description Example

Pop the power flow output stack, and LD M0
assign the popped value to the current MPS
power flow. AND M1
OUT Y0
MRD
AND M2
OUT Y1
MPP
AND M3
OUT Y2

5.1.13 EU: Power flow rising edge detection

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
EU
Influenced flag bit

IL: EU Program steps 2

Function description Example

Compare the current power flow status
LD M0
with its previous status. If the power flow
EU
rises (OFF→ON), the output is valid in the
SET Y0
current scan cycle.

5.1.14 ED: Power flow falling edge detection

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
ED
Influenced flag bit
IL: ED Program steps 2

Function description Sequence chart of example

Compare the current power flow status with
its previous status. If the power flow falls ON

(ON→OFF), the output is valid in the current OFF

M2
scan cycle.
ON
OFF
Y2
Example
ON
LD M2
Y3 OFF
MPS
EU
Note
OUT Y2
In LAD program, the rising edge contact or falling edge
MPP contact instruction shall be used in series rather than in
ED parallel connection with other contact elements.
OUT Y3 In LAD program, the rising edge contact and falling edge
1. In two consecutive scan cycles, the status contact instruction cannot directly connect to the left
of M2 contact is OFF and ON respectively. power flow bus.
When the EU instruction detects a rising The examples of improper use of EU/ED instructions in
edge, Y2 will output ON status with the width LAD program are shown as follows:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 61

of a scan cycle.
2. In two consecutive scan cycles, the status X X
of M2 contact is ON and OFF respectively,
when the ED instruction detects a trailing
edge, Y3 will output ON status with the width
X
of a scan cycle.

5.1.15 INV: Power-flow block inverse

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

INV

IL: INV Program steps 1

Function description
Reverse the current power flow value and then assign to the current power flow.
Note
In LAD program, the INV instruction shall be used in series rather than in parallel connection with contacts.
INV cannot be used as the first instruction in the input parallel branch.
In LAD program, the INV instruction cannot directly connect to the left power flow bus.
The examples of improper use of INV instructions in LAD program are shown as follows:

X
X X

5.1.16 SET: Set

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: SET(S) Program steps 1
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T

Operand description Example

S: Source operand LD M0
Function description SET M1

When the power flow is valid, the bit

element designated by D will be set.

5.1.17 RST: Reset

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: RST(S) Program steps 1
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL Y M S LM SM Dx.y C T
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 62

Operand description Example

S: Source operand LD M0
Function description RST M1
When the power flow is valid, the Note
designated bit element (D) will be reset. If D is C element, the corresponding count value will be
reset; if D is T element, the corresponding timing value will
be reset.

5.1.18 NOP: No operation

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: NOP Program steps 1

Function description Note

In LAD program, this instruction cannot directly
This instruction does not enable any action.
connect to the left power flow bus.

5.2 Main control instruction

5.2.1 MC: Main control

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: MC(S) Program steps 3
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant

Operand description
S: Source operand

5.2.2 MCR: Main control remove

IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L
LAD: Applicable to
IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: MCR(S) Program steps 1
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 63

Operand description Note

1. In LAD program, the MCR instruction
S: Source operand
must directly connect to the left power
Function description flow bus.
1. MC and MCR form a MC-MCR structure. The MC instruction 2. In LAD program, the MCR instruction
indicates the beginning a MC-MCR structure, and its operand S is cannot connect to other instructions.
the SN of the MC-MCR structure. The value of S is a constant 3. Several MC-MCR structures of
ranging from 0 to 7. MCR indicates the end of the MC-MCR different SNs can be used through the
structure. nest structure, but the number of nest
2. When the power flow before the MC instruction is valid, the levels cannot exceed 8. The MC-MCR
instructions in the MC-MCR structure will be executed. structures with the same SN cannot be
3. When the power flow before the MC instruction is invalid, the used in the nest structure.
program will skip over the instructions in the MC-MCR structure and 4. Crossing of two MC-MCR structures is
execute the instructions after the structure. Besides, the destination not allowed. The following is an illegal
operands of instructions OUT, TON, TOF, PWM, HCNT, PLSY, example.
PLSR, DHSCS, SPD, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHST, DHSP and
BOUT in the structure will be cleared.
Example
LD M0
MC 0
LD SM0
OUT Y0
MCR 0
When M0=ON, the instructions in the MC 0-MCR 0 structure will be
executed, and Y0=ON. When M0=OFF, the instructions in the MC
0-MCR 0 structure will not be executed, and the bit element Y0 Note: It cannot be used in SFC
designated by the designation operand of the OUT instruction in the programming.
structure will be cleared, Y0=OFF.

5.3 SFC instructions

5.3.1 STL: SFC state load instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: STL(S) Program steps 3
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL S

Operand description OUT, TON, TOF, PWM, HCNT, PLSY, PLSR, DHSCS, SPD,
DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHST, DHSP and BOUT will be
S: Source operand
cleared.
Function description 4. If a step is invalid (OFF), the embedded instructions will
1. It indicates the beginning of a step (S). not be executed.
2. If a step is valid (ON), its embedded instructions will be 5. Consecutive STL instructions (serial connection of S
executed. elements) define a parallel merge structure. The STL
3. If a step changes from ON to OFF (falling edge), the instructions can be used up to 16 times in a row (the
embedded instructions will not be executed, and the maximum number of branches of a parallel branch structure
destination operands of the embedded instructions such as is 16).

5.3.2 SET Sxx: SFC state transfer

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 64

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: SET(D) Program steps 3
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL S

Operand description Function description

D: Destination operand When the power flow is valid, the designated step (D) will
be set valid, and the current valid step will be set invalid, to
complete the step transition.

5.3.3 OUT Sxx: SFC state jump

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: OUT(D) Program steps 3
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL S

Operand description Function description

D: Destination operand When the power flow is valid, the designated step (D) will
be set valid, and the current valid step will be set invalid, to
complete the step transition.

5.3.4 RST Sxx: SFC state reset

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: RST(D) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL S

Operand description Function description

D: Destination operand When the current power flow is valid, the designated step
(D) will be set invalid.

5.3.5 RET: SFC program end

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: RET Program steps 1

Function description Note

It can only be used in the main program.
It indicates the end of a SFC program section.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 65

5.4 Timer instruction

5.4.1 TON: On-delay timing instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: TON (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT T
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand TON T1 4
Function description LD T1
OUT Y0
1. When the power flow is valid, and the timing
value<32,767, the designated T element (D) will Time sequence chart
start timing (the value will increase with the lapse of
time). When the timing value reaches 32,767, it will
maintain at 32,767. ON ON
2. When the timing valuethe preset value (S), the OFF
M0
timing coil output of the designated T element will
0.3s 0.4s ON
be ON.
OFF T1 = 32767 (max.)
3. When the power flow is OFF, the timing will stop, T1 timing coil
the timing value will be cleared, and the timing coil
output will be OFF. T1=3 T1=4
T1 timing value
4. When the system executes the instruction for the T1=0
first time, it will reset the timing coil of the
designated T element, and clear the timing value.

5.4.2 TONR: On-delay remember timing instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: TONR (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT T
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand TONR T1
Function description 5
LD T1
1. When the power flow is valid, and the timing
OUT Y0
value<32,767, the designated T element (D) start
timing (the value will increase with the lapse of Time sequence chart
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 66

time). When the timing value reaches 32,767, it will ON ON

maintain at 32,767.
OFF
2. When the timing value≥the preset value (S), the M0
0.3s 0.2s ON
timing coil output of the designated T element will
be ON. OFF T1 = 32767 (max.)
T1 timing coil
3. When the power flow is OFF, the timing will stop,
T1=3 T1=5
the timing coil and the timing value will maintain
the current value. T1 timing value
T1=0

5.4.3 TOF: Off-delay timing instruction

IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L
LAD: Applicable to
IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: TOF (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT T
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand TOF T1
Function description 5
LD T1
1. When the power flow changes from ON to OFF
OUT Y0
(falling edge), the designated timer T (D) will start
timing. Time sequence chart
2. When the power flow is OFF, if the designated
timer T has started timing, it will keep timing until ON ON
the timing value reaches the preset value (S). The OFF OFF
timing coil output of the T element will be OFF, and M0
the timing value will maintain at the preset value. ON ON
3. When the power flow input is OFF, if the timing OFF OFF
T1 timing coil 0.5s
has not started, the timing will not start.
T1=5
4. When the power flow is ON, the timing will stop,
the timing value will be cleared, and the timing coil T1=0 T1=0
T1 timing value
output is ON.

5.4.4 TMON: Monostable timing instruction

Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
LAD:
Influenced flag bit

IL: TMON (D) (S) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT T
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand TMON T1 5
Function description LD T1
OUT Y0
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 67

1. When the input power flow changes from OFF Time sequence chart
to ON (rising edge), and the timing has not started,
the designated timer T (D) will start timing based
on the current value. In the timing status (whose ON ON
length is determined by S), the timing coil output OFF
will maintain ON. M0
ON
2. In the timing status (whose length is determined
by S), no matter how the power flow changes, the OFF OFF
T1 timing coil
timing will keep going, and the timing coil output 0.5s 0.5s
will keep ON. T1=5 T 1=5
3. When the timing value reaches the preset point, T1 timing value
T1=0 T1=0
the timing will stop, the timing value will be
cleared, and the timing coil output will be set OFF.

5.5 Counter instruction

5.5.1 CTU: 16-bit counter counting up instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: CTU (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT C
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand CTU C0
Function description 3
LD C0
1. When the power flow changes from OFF to ON (rising
OUT Y0
edge), the 16-bit counter C (D) will count 1.
2. When the counting value reaches 32,767, it will Time sequence chart
maintain that value. ON ON
3. When the counting value is larger than or equal to the
OFF
preset point (S), the counting coil will be set ON. M0
ON
Note
The address range of the 16-bit counter C (D): C0~C199. C0 counting coil
OFF

C0=3
C0=1 C0=2
C0 counting value C0=0

5.5.2 CTR: 16-bit counter loop cycle counting instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: CTR (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT C
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 5 Basic instructions 68

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand CTR C0 3
Function description Time sequence chart
1. When the power flow changes from OFF to ON (rising
edge), the 16-bit counter C (D) will count 1.
2. When the counting value is equal to the preset point
(S), the counting coil will be set ON. ON ON ON
ON ON ON
3. After the counting value reaches the preset point (S), if OFF OFF
M0
the power flow changes from OFF to ON again (rising
ON ON
edge), the counting value will be set to 1, and the
OFF OFF
counting coil will be set OFF. C0 counting coil

Note C0=1 C0=2

C0=3 C0=3
C0=2
C0=0 C0=1
1. When the preset counting value (S) is less than or C0 counting value

equal to 0, there will be no counting.

2. The address of the 16-bit counter C (D) shall be within
C0~C199.

5.5.3 DCNT: 32-bit counting instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: DCNT (D) (S) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D DINT C
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: Destination operand LD M0
S: Source operand DCNT C235
Function description D0

1. When the input power flow changes from Time sequence chart
OFF to ON (rising edge), the 32-bit counter C
(D) will count up or down 1 (depending on the
corresponding SM flag bit).
2. For a up counter, when the counting value is D0=3
D0
larger than or equal to the preset point (S), the
ON
counting coil will be set ON.
Switch to down counting
OFF
3. For a down counter, when the counting value SM235
is less than or equal to the preset point (S), the ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
counting coil will be set OFF. OFF OFF
M0
4. When the counting value is 2147483647, it
ON
will change to -2147483648 if the counter
OFF OFF
counts up once more. C235
counting coil
5. When the counting value is -2147483648, it C235=3
C235=2
C235=1
will change to 2147483647 if the counter counts C235 counting C235=0 C235=2
value C235=1
down once more. C235=0 C235=-1

Note
The address of the C element (D) shall be within
C200~C235.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 69

Chapter 6 Application instructions

This chapter introduces the application instructions of IVC series small PLC, including the formats, operands, influenced flag bit,
functions, examples and time sequence charts of the instructions.

6.1 Program flow control instruction

6.1.1 FOR: Cycle instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: FOR (S) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description
S: source operand

6.1.2 NEXT: Return from cycle

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: NEXT Program steps 1

Function description times. D0 will increase one for each cycle. When the cycle is
over, D0 reaches 100.
1. Instructions FOR and NEXT form a FOR-NEXT structure.
Note
2. When the power flow before FOR is valid, and the cycle
times (S) is larger than 0, the instructions in the FOR-NEXT 1. The FOR-NEXT instruction must be used in pairs in a
structure will be cyclically executed S times. After that, the POU, or the program cannot pass the compiling.
instructions after the FOR-NEXT structure will be executed. 2. Nesting of several FOR-NEXT structures is supported.
3. If the power flow before FOR is invalid, or the cycle times IVC2L series PLC supports up to 8 levels of nesting. (The
(S) is less than or equal to 0, the program will skip over the figure below shows a 3-level nesting of FOR-NEXT
instructions in the FOR-NEXT structure and execute the structure)
following instructions.
Example
LD SM1
MOV 0 D0
LD M2
EU
FOR 100
LD SM0
INC D10 3. You can use the Conditional Jump (CJ) instruction to jump
NEXT out of the structure and end the loop in advance, as shown in
The initial conditions for the operation are: D0=0, M2=OFF. the following ladder diagram:
When M2 changes from OFF to ON, the instructions in the
FOR-NEXT structure will be consecutively executed for 100
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 70

5. The crossing of the structures MC-MCR and FOR-NEXT

is prohibited. LAD program shown in the following figure
4. It is prohibited to use the CJ instruction to jump into a loop.
cannot pass the compiling.
The LAD program shown in the following figure cannot pass
the compiling.

 Note
The execution of the FOR-NEXT structure is time consuming. The bigger the cycle times is, or the more instructions are
contained in the loop, the longer it will take. To prevent the operation overtime error, use the WDT instruction in a
time-consuming loop.

6.1.3 LBL: Jump label definition

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: LBL (S) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant

Operand description Example of error program

S: label number
Function description
1. A label numbered S is defined.
2. It is used to mark a specific jumping position for the CJ
instruction. Repeated
label No.
Note
1. Range: 0≤S≤127
2. Take care not to mark two labels with the same No. in one
POU, or the program cannot pass the compiling. However,
you can do so in different POUs (for example, different
sub-programs).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 71

6.1.4 CJ: Conditional jump

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: CJ (S) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant

Operand description Example

S: label number LD M0
Function description CJ 0
LD SM0
1. When the power flow is valid, the program will
jump to execute the instruction numbered S. MOV 100 D0
Jump to LBL 0 CFEND
2. If the power flow is invalid, the program will not
jump, but execute the instruction following CJ. LBL 0
LD M1
Note
MOV 200 D0
1. The jumping label S (0≤S≤127) for the CJ
instruction shall be a legal and defined label. 1. Initial conditions: M0=OFF, M1=ON. The CJ 0 instruction
Otherwise, the user program cannot pass the is not be executed, and D0 is 100. After executing CFEND,
the current cycle of the main program ends in advance, and
compiling.
the following LD M1 and MOV 200 D0 instructions are not
2. It is not allowed to use the CJ instruction to jump
executed.
into a FOR-NEXT structure.
2. When M0 is ON, M1=ON, the program will execute the
3. It is allowable to use the CJ instruction to jump
CJ 0 instruction, skip over the “MOV 100 200” and CFEND
out of or into the MC-MCR structure or SFC status.
instructions, and jump to LBL 0 and execute “MOV 200 D0”
However, such operation will damage the logic of
instruction. D0 is 200 then.
the MC-MCR structure or SFC status and make
the program complex. It is not recommended to do
this.

6.1.5 CFEND: Conditional end from user main program

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: CFEND Program steps 1

Function description Example

1. When the power flow of the instruction is valid, The current scan cycle ends LD M0
the current scan cycle of the main program ends CFEND
immediately and the following instructions in the
LD SM12
main program will not be executed.
OUT Y0
2. When the power flow of the instruction is invalid,
the instruction enables no action, and the When the program is running, if M0=OFF, the CFEND
instruction after it will be executed in order. instruction will not enable any action. The following
instructions LD SM12 and OUT Y0 will be executed. When
Note
M0 is ON, the CFEND instruction will be executed, the main
The CFEND must be used in the main program, or program will end the current scan cycle immediately, and
the program cannot pass the compiling. the following instructions will not be executed.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 72

6.1.6 WDT: User program watchdog reset

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: WDT Program steps 1

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the instruction will clear the user program watchdog, and the watchdog will restart timing.

6.1.7 EI: Enable interrupt instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: EI Program steps 1

Function description
1. When the power flow of the EI instruction is valid, the interrupts in the current scan cycle will be enabled.
2. When the EI instruction is valid, the interrupt requests will be allowed to join the interrupt request queue to wait for system
response.

6.1.8 DI: Disable interrupt instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: DI Program steps 1

Function description
1. When the power flow is valid, the global interrupt enable flag is inactive, that is, the global interrupt will be off.
2. When the global interrupt enable flag is inactive, the interrupt events will not generate any interrupt request.
Note
When the DI instruction is valid, the system will still respond to the unprocessed interrupt requests in the request queue, but
new interrupt events cannot generate interrupt requests.

6.1.9 CIRET: Conditional return from user interrupt subprogram

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: CIRET Program steps 1

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the system will quit the current interrupt program immediately.

6.1.10 STOP: User program stop

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: STOP Program steps 1

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the system will immediately stop the execution of the user program.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 73

6.1.11 CALL: Calling a subprogram

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

Determined by the subprogram

IL: CALL (SBR name) (PARAM1) (PARAM2) … Program steps
parameters

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the system will call the designated subprogram, execute it, and then return to the main program
to execute the instructions following the CALL instruction.
Note
1. The subprogram called by the CALL instruction must be defined in advance in the user program, or the program cannot pass
the compiling.
2. The operand element type in the CALL instruction must match the Data Type defined in the local variable table of the
subprogram, or the program cannot pass the compiling.
The following examples demonstrates some illegal matches.
Example 1: In the local variable table of subprogram SBR1, the data type of Operand 1 is DINT/DWORD.
The following usages are illegal:
 CALL SBR1 Z0 (The data type of Z element cannot be DINT/DWORD)
 CALL SBR1 C199 (The data type of elements C0 to C199 cannot be DINT/DWORD)
 CALL SBR1 K2X0 (Kn addressing 1≤n≤3, the data type cannot be DINT/DWORD)
Example 2: In the local variable table of the SBR1 subprogram, the data type of Operand 1 is INT/WORD.
The following usages are illegal:
 CALL SBR1 C200 (The data type of element C200 to C255 cannot be INT/WORD)
 CALL SBR1 K2X0 (Kn addressing 4≤n≤8, the data type cannot be INT/WORD)
3. The operand element type in the CALL instruction must match the Variable Type defined in the local variable table in the
subprogram, or the program will not pass the compiling.
The following examples demonstrates some illegal matches.
Example: In the local variable table of subprogram SBR1, the operand type of Operand 1 is OUT or IN_OUT.
The following usages are illegal:
 CALL SBR1 321 (constants cannot be changed, therefore it does not match OUT or IN_OUT)
 CALL SBR1 K4X0 (K4X0 is read-only, therefore it does not match OUT or IN_OUT)
 CALL SBR1 SD0 (SD0 is read-only, therefore it does not match OUT or IN_OUT)
4. The number of the operands in the CALL instruction must match the local variable table of the subprogram, or the program
will not pass the compiling.

6.1.12 CSRET: Conditional return from user subprogram

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: CSRET Program steps 1

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the program will quit the current subprogram and return to the upper level subprogram.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 74

6.2 Data transmission instruction

6.2.1 MOV: Move word data transmission instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: MOV (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand 1. The MOV instruction supports signed and unsigned integers. If the two
D: destination operand operands are both elements, the data type is signed integer. If the source operand
is a signed integer (for example, -10, +100), the destination operand is also a
Function description
signed integer. If the source operand is an unsigned double integer (for example,
When the power flow is valid, the 100, or 45535), the destination operand will also be an unsigned integer.
content of S is assigned to D, and the
2. The corresponding element C only supports C0 to C199.
value of S remains unchanged.
Example
LD X0
MOV D0 D10
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 is assigned to D10, D10 = 500.

6.2.2 DMOV: Move double word data transmission instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DMOV (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand 1. The DMOV instruction supports signed and unsigned double integers. If the two
D: destination operand operands of the instruction are elements, the data types are signed integers. If the
source operand of the instruction is a signed double integer (for example, -10,
Function description
+100), the destination operand will also be signed integer. If the source operand is
When the power flow is valid, the the unsigned double integer (for example, 100, 45535), the destination operand
content of S is assigned to D, and the will also be unsigned integer.
value of S remains unchanged. 2. The corresponding element C only supports C200 to C255.
Example
LD X0
DMOV D0 D10
When X0 is ON, the content of (D0, D1) is assigned to (D10, D11). (D10, D11) is
50000.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 75

6.2.3 RMOV: Move floating point number data transmission

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: RMOV (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD X0
D: destination operand RMOV D0 D10

Function description When X0 is ON, the content of (D0, D1) is assigned to (D10, D11). (D10, D11) is
When the power flow is valid, the 50000.5.
content of S is assigned to D, and the
value of S remains unchanged.

6.2.4 BMOV: Move data block transmission instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: BMOV (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description starting with D, and the contents of S2 elements starting with S1 remain
unchanged.
S: source operand, starting element of
data block Example
D: destination operand, starting LD X0
element of data block BMOV D0 D100 10
S2: size of data block When X0 is ON, the contents of 10 elements starting with D0 are assigned to 10
Function description elements starting with D100. D100=D0, D101=D1, ..., D109=D9.
When the power flow is valid, the
contents of S2 elements starting with
S1 are assigned to the S2 elements
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 76

6.2.5 FMOV: Fill data block instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: FMOV (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description elements starting with D element, and the content of S1 remains unchanged.

S1: source operand, starting element Note

of data block 1. When S1, D and S2 use C element, the legal range is C0 to C199.
D: destination operand, starting 2. S2 is larger than or equal to 0.
element of data block 3. When S1 and D both use Kn addressing, Kn shall be the same.
S2: size of data block
Example
Function description
LD X0
When the power flow is valid, the FMOV D0 D100 10
contents of S1 will be filled into S2
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will be filled into 10 elements starting with D100.
D100=D101= ... =D109=D0=500.

6.2.6 DFMOV: Fill data block double word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: DFMOV (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand 1. When S1, D and S2 use C element, the legal range is C200 to C255.
D: destination operand, starting 2. S2 is larger than or equal to 0.
element of data block 3. When S1 and D are both Kn addressing, Kn shall be the same.
S2: size of data block Example
Function description LD X0
When the power flow is valid, the DFMOV D0 D10 10
contents of S1 will be filled into S2
When X0 is ON, the content of (D0, D1) will be filled into 10×2 units starting with
elements starting with D, and the
D10. (D10, D11)=(D12, D13)=...=(D28, D29)=(D0, D1)=100000.
content of S1 remains unchanged.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 77

6.2.7 SWAP: Swap bytes

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: SWAP (D) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: destination operand, the word LD X0
element whose high/low bytes are SWAP D0
swapped. When X0 is ON, the high/low bytes in D0=0x1027 (4135) will be swapped and
Function description saved. D0 is then 0x2710 (10000).
When the power flow is valid, the D
element whose high/low bytes has
been swapped will be saved.

6.2.8 XCH: Exchange word

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: XCH (D1) (D2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D1 INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
D2 INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

D1: destination operand1 When using the Kn addressing mode, the Kn in D1 and D2 shall be the same.
D2: destination operand2 Example
Function description LD X0
When the power flow is valid, D1 and XCH D0 D10
D2 will exchange their values.
When X0 is ON, D0 and D10 will exchange their values. Before the execution, D0
is 5000 and D10 is 1000. After the execution, D0 is 1000 and D10 is 5000
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 78

6.2.9 DXCH: Exchange double word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: DXCH (D1) (D2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D1 DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
D2 DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

D1: destination operand1 When using the Kn addressing mode, the Kn in D1 and D2 shall be the same.
D2: destination operand2 Example
Function description LD X0
When the power flow is valid, D1 and DXCH D0 D10
D2 will exchange their values.
When X0 is ON, (D0,D1) and (D10,D11) will exchange their values. Before the
execution and (D0, D1) is 5000000, (D10, D11) is 1000000. After the execution,
(D0, D1) is 1000000 and (D10, D11) is 5000000.

6.2.10 PUSH: Push instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: PUSH (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT D V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S1: push value 1. When the stack is illegal (for example, when the stack size≤0, the number of
D: the number of elements in the stack. elements in the stack<0, or when the stack size is beyond the limit), the system will
It is also the element at the stack report “Definition error of stack operated”.
bottom. 2. The stack size does not include the stack bottom element (the element
S2: stack size designated by D).

Function description 3. S2 indicates the stack size, range＞0.

1. When the power flow is valid, the Example

value of S1 will be pushed onto the top LD M0
of the stack with D element as the PUSH D0 D100 10
bottom, and D will increase by 1. At
this time, the address of the stack top
Stack
unit is the address of D plus the value pointer
of D. D0 D110 D109 D108 D107 D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100
2. When the value of D reaches S2,
one more push instruction will set the
1. When M0 is ON, push D0 into the stack with D100 as the stack bottom.
operation carry flag (SM181) to 1, and
the push operation will not be 2. Before the execution, D0 is 1000, D100 is 8 and D109 is 0.
executed. 3. After the execution, D0 is 1000, D100 is 9 and D109 is 1000.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 79

6.2.11 FIFO: First-in-first-out instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
FIFO (D1) (D2) (S) Influenced flag bit
FIFO (D1) (D2) (S)
IL: FIFO (D1) (D2) (S) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D1 INT D V R √
D2 INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description limit), the system will report “Definition error of stack operated”.
2. The stack size does not include the stack bottom element (the
D1: the number of elements in the stack. Its
element designated by D1)
element address plus 1 is the address of the stack
head. 3. S indicates the stack size, range＞0.
D2: storage register for popped value Example
S: queue size LD M0
Function description FIFO D100 D0 10
1. When the power flow is valid, the value of the
stack head (the element immediately following D1) Stack
with D1 as the queue head is assigned to D2. At pointer
0 D110 D109 D108 D107 D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100 D0
the same time, the value of D1 subtracts 1, the
contents of the S units after D1 will move forward,
and the last unit is filled with 0. 1. When M0 is ON, the content of D101 is filled into D0, and at the
2. When D1 is 0, it indicates that the stack is same time the contents of D101~D110 move forward, and the
empty, the zero flag (SM180) will be set 1. D110 is filled with 0.
2. Before the execution: D0=0, D100=10, D101=1000,
Note
D102=2000, ..., D109=9000, D110=10000.
1. When the stack is illegal (for example, when the
3. After the execution: D0=1000, D100=9, D101=2000,
stack size≤0, the number of elements in the
D102=3000,..., D109=10000, D110=0.
stack<0, or when the stack size is beyond the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 80

6.2.12 LIFO: Last-in-first-out instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: LIFO (D1) (D2) (S) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D1 INT D V R √
D2 INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 2. The stack size does not include the stack bottom element
(the element designated by D1)
D1: the number of elements in the queue. Its element
address plus 1 is the address of the queue’s head. 3. S indicates the stack size, range＞0.

D2: storage register for popped value Example

S: queue size
Function description
LD M0
1. When the power flow is valid, the value of the stack head
LIFO D100 D0 10
with D1 as the stack bottom is assigned to D2, and at the
Stack
same time the value of D1 subtracts 1. pointer
D0 D110 D109 D108 D107 D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100
2. When D1 is 0, it indicates that the stack is empty, the zero
flag (SM180) will be set 1.
1. When M0 is ON, the content of D110 is assigned to D0,
Note
the content of units D101~D110 remain unchanged.
1. When the stack is illegal (for example, when the stack 2. Before the execution: D0=0, D100=10, D101=1000,
size≤0, the number of elements in the stack<0, or when the D102=2000, ..., D109=9000, D110=10000.
stack size is beyond the limit), the system will report 3. After the execution: D0=10000, D100=9, D101=1000,
“Definition error of stack operated”. D102=2000, ..., D109=9000, D110=10000.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 81

6.2.13 WSFR: Shift right word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: WSFR (S1) (D) (S2) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand
D: destination operand, starting unit of word string
S2: size of destination word queue LD X0
S3: number of words filled rightward WSFR D0 D100 10 3

Function description D2 D1 D0

When the power flow is valid, the contents of S2 units

starting with D unit will move rightward S3 words. The D109 D108 D107 D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100

rightmost S3 units will be discarded. At the same time, the

contents of S3 units starting with S1 will be filled into the left
1. When M0 is ON, the contents of 10 units starting with
end of the word string.
D100 unit will move rightward 3 words. The rightmost units
Note D102~D100 will be discarded. At the same time, the
1. The elements with smaller SN are at the right, and the contents of the 3 units starting with D0 will be filled into the
elements with larger SN are at the left. left end of the word string.
2. S2≥0, S3≥0. 2. Before the execution: D2=300, D1=200, D0=100.
3. S2≥S3. D109=10000, D108=9000, D107=8000, D106=7000,
4. When S1 and D both use Kn addressing, Kn shall be the D105=6000, D104=5000, D103=4000, D102=3000,
same. D101=2000, D100=1000.
3. After the execution: D0~D2 remain unchanged, D2=300,
D1=200, D0=100. D109=300, D108=200, D107=100,
D106=10000, D105=9000, D104=8000, D103=7000,
D102=6000, D101=5000, D100=4000.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 82

6.2.14 WSFL: Shift left word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: WSFL (S1) (D) (S2) (S3) Program steps 9
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 4. When S1 and D both use Kn addressing, Kn shall be the same.

S1: source operand Example

D: destination operand, starting unit of
word string
S2: size of destination word queue LD X0

S3: number of words filled for right WSFL D0 D100 10 3

forward D2 D1 D0

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the D109 D108 D107 D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100

contents of S2 units starting with D

unit will move leftward S3 words. The
leftmost S3 units will be discarded. At 1. When X0 is ON, the contents of 10 units starting with D100 will move leftward 3
the same time, the contents of S3 words. The leftmost units D109~D107 will be discarded. At the same time, the
units starting with S1 will be filled into contents of the 3 units starting with D0 will be filled into the right end of the word
the right end of the word string. string.
2. Before the execution: D0=100, D1=200, D2=300. D109=10000, D108=9000,
Note
D107=8000, D106=7000, D105=6000, D104=5000, D103=4000, D102=3000,
1. The elements with smaller SN are D101=2000, D100=1000.
at the right, and the elements with
3. After the execution: D0~D2 remain unchanged: D2=300, D1=200, D0=100.
larger SN are at the left.
D109=7000, D108=6000, D107=5000, D106=4000, D105=3000, D104=2000,
2. S2≥0, S3≥0. D103=1000, D102=300, D101=200, D100=100.
3. S2≥S3.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 83

6.3 Integer math instruction

6.3.1 ADD: Add integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ADD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set. When the operation
result is less than -32768, the borrow flag bit (SM182) will be
S1: source operand1
set.
S2: source operand2
Example
D: destination operand
Function description
1. When the power flow is valid, add S1 and S2, and assign LD X0
the operation result to D.
ADD D0 D1 D10
2. When the operation result (D) is larger than 32767, the
When X0 is ON, add D0 (1000) and D1 (2000), and assign
carry flag bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result
the result to D10, D10=3000.

6.3.2 SUB: Subtract integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: SUB (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description result is less than -32768, the borrow flag will be set bit
(SM182).
S1: source operand1
S2: source operand2 Example

D: destination operand
Function description
LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, S1 subtracts S2, and the
SUB D0 D1 D10
operation result is assigned to D.
When X0 is ON, D0 (1000) subtracts D1 (2000), and the
2. When the operation result (D) is larger than 32767, the
result -1000 is assigned to D10.
carry flag bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result
is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set. When the operation
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 84

6.3.3 MUL: Multiply integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: MUL (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 8

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 The operation result of MUL instruction is a 32-bit data.
S2: source operand2 Example
D: destination operand
Function description
LD X0
When the power flow is valid, S1 multiplies S2, and the
operation result is assigned to D. MUL D0 D1 D10
When X0 is ON, D0 (1000) multiplies D1 (2000), and the
result 2000000 is assigned to (D10, D11).

6.3.4 DIV: Divide integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: DIV (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 S2≠0, otherwise, the system will report “Divided by 0 error”,
S2: source operand2 and the instruction will not be executed.
D: destination operand Example
Function description
When the power flow is valid, S1 is divided by S2, and the
LD X0
operation result is assigned to D (D includes 2 units, one
DIV D0 D1 D10
storing the quotient, the other storing the remainder).
When X0 is ON, D0 (2500) is divided by D1 (1000), the
result is assigned to (D10, D11). D10=2, D11=500.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 85

6.3.5 SQT: Square root integer instructions

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: SQT (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description the decimal fraction, the borrow flag bit (SM182) will be set.

S: source operand Note

D: destination operand S≥0, otherwise, the system will report operand error, and the instruction will not be
Function description executed.

1. When the power flow is valid, S is Example

extracted, and the operation result is LD X0
assigned to D. SQT D0 D10
2. When the operation result (D) is 0, When X0 is ON, extract D0 (1000), and assign the result to D10, D10=31.
the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
When the operation result rounds off

6.3.6 INC: Increment integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: INC (D) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

D: destination operand This instruction is a cyclic increase instruction. Range: -32768~32767. The
Function description supported range of C element: C0~C199.

When the power flow is valid, D Example

increases by 1. LD X0
INC D0
When X0 is ON, D0 (1000) is increased by 1. After the execution, D0 is 1001.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 86

6.3.7 DEC: Decrement integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: DEC (D) Program steps 3
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

D: destination operand This instruction is a cyclic decrease instruction, with the range of -32768~32767.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, D LD X0

decreases 1. DEC D0
When X0 is ON, D0 (1000) decreases 1. After the execution, D0=999.

6.3.8 VABS: Integer absolute value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: VABS (S) (D) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand The range of S shall be -32767~32767. When S is -32768, the system will report
D: destination operand operand error, and the instruction will not be executed.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, get the LD X0

absolute value of S and assign it to D. VABS D0 D10
When X0 is ON, get the absolute value of D0 (-1000), and assign the result to D10.
D10=1000.

6.3.9 NEG: Negative integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: NEG (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
Operand description Note
S: source operand The range of S shall be -32767~32767. When S is -32768, the system will report
D: destination operand operand error, and the instruction will not be executed.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, get the LD X0

negative value of S and assign the NEG D0 D10
result to D. When X0 is ON, get the negative value of D0 (1000) and assign the result to D10.
D10=-1000.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 87

6.3.10 DADD: Add double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DADD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description zero flag bit (SM180) will be set. When the operation
result<-2147483648, the borrow flag bit (SM182) will be set.
S1: source operand1
Example
S2: source operand2
D: destination operand
Function description
LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, add S1 and S2, and assign
DADD D0 D2 D10
the operation result to D.
When X0 is ON, add the value (100000) of (D0, D1) and the
2. When the operation result (D)>2147483647, the carry flag
value (200000) of (D2, D3), and assign the result to (D10,
bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the
D11). (D10, D11)=300000.

6.3.11 DSUB: Subtract double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DSUB (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description zero flag bit (SM180) will be set. When the operation
result<-2147483648, the borrow flag bit (SM182) will be set.
S1: source operand1
S2: source operand2 Example

D: destination operand
Function description
LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, S1 subtracts S2, and the
DSUB D0 D2 D10
operation result is assigned to D.
When X0 is ON, the value (100000) of (D0, D1) subtracts the
2. When the operation result (D)>2147483647, the carry flag
value (200000) of (D2,D3), and the result -100000 is
bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the
assigned to (D10, D11).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 88

6.3.12 DMUL: Multiply double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: DMUL (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 The result of the DMUL instruction is a 32-bit data, and overflow may occur.
S2: source operand2 Example
D: destination operand
LD X0
Function description DMUL D0 D2 D10
When the power flow is valid, S1 When X0 is ON, the value (83000) of (D0, D1) multiplies the value (2000) of (D2,D3),
multiplies S2, and the result is and the result 1660000000 is assigned to (D10, D11).
assigned to D.

6.3.13 DDIV: Divide double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DDIV (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 S2≠0, otherwise, the system will report “Divided by 0 error”, and the instruction will
S2: source operand2 not be executed.
D: destination operand Example
Function description LD X0
When the power flow is valid, S1 is DDIV D0 D2 D10
divided by S2, and the operation result When X0 is ON, the value (83000) of (D0, D1) is divided by the value (2000) of (D2,
is assigned to D (D includes 4 units, D3), and the result is assigned to (D10, D11) and (D12,D13). (D10, D11)=41, (D12,
with the first two storing the quotient, D13)=1000.
the other two storing the remainder).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 89

6.3.14 DSQT: Square root double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: DSQT (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand S≥0, otherwise, the system will report operand error, and the instruction will not be
D: destination operand executed.

Function description Example

1. When the power flow is valid, S is LD X0

extracted, and the operation result is DSQT D0 D10
assigned to D. When X0 is ON, extract the value (83000) of (D0, D1), and assign the result to
2. When the operation result (D) is 0, (D10, D11). (D10, D11)=288.
the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
When the operation result rounds off
the decimal fraction, the borrow flag bit
(SM182) will be set.

6.3.15 DINC: Increment double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: DINC (D) Program steps 4

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements address
ing
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Range: -2147483648~2147483647.

2. The supported range of C element: C200~C255.
D: destination operand
Example
Function description
LD X0
When the power flow is valid, D
increases 1. DINC D0
When X0 is ON, the value (100000) of (D0, D1) increases 1. After the execution,
Note
(D0, D1)=100001.
1. This instruction is a cyclic increase
instruction.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 90

6.3.16 DDEC: Decrement double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
IL: DDEC (D) Program steps 4

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Range: -2147483648~2147483647.

D: destination operand Example

Function description LD X0
DDEC D0
When the power flow is valid, D
decreases 1. When X0 is ON, the value (100000) of (D0, D1) decreases 1. After the execution,
(D0, D1)=99999.
Note
This instruction is a cyclic decrease
instruction.

6.3.17 DVABS: Double integer absolute value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DVABS (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand The range of S shall be -2147483647~2147483647. When S is -2147483648, the
D: destination operand system will report operand error, and the instruction will not be executed.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, get the LD X0

absolute value of S and assign the DVABS D0 D10
result to D. When X0 is ON, get the absolute value (-100000) of (D0, D1) and assign the result
to (D10, D11). (D10, D11)=100000.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 91

6.3.18 DNEG: Negative double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DNEG (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand The range of S shall be -2147483647~2147483647. When the value of S is
D: destination operand -2147483648, the system will report operand error, and the instruction will not be
executed.
Function description
Example
When the power flow is valid, get the
negative value of S and assign the LD X0
result to D. DNEG D0 D10
When X0 is ON, get the negative value (100000) of (D0, D1), and assign the result
to (D10, D11). (D10, D11)=-100000.

6.3.19 SUM: Sum integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: SUM (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 8

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description 2. 0≤S2≤255, or system will report operand error.

3. Since D is a 32-bit data, the carry and borrow flags are constantly 0, and the
S1: source operand, starting unit of
zero flag is determined by the final summing result.
summing
S2: source operand, number of units Example
to be summed up LD SM0
D: destination operand, summing MOV 1000 D0
result MOV 2000 D1
Function description MOV 3000 D2
When the power flow is valid, the MOV 4000 D3
contents of S2 units starting with the MOV 5000 D4
starting unit (S1) will be summed up, LD X0
and the summing result is assigned to SUM D0 5
the D unit. D100
Note When X0 is ON, the integers of 5 elements starting from D0 will be summed up,
1. The operation result of the SUM and the result is assigned to (D100, D101), (D100, D101)=D0+...+D4=15000.
instruction is a 32-bit data.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 92

6.3.20 DSUM: Sum double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DSUM (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand, starting unit of 0≤S2≤255, or the system will report operand error.
summing Example
S2: source operand, number of data to
LD SM0
be summed up
DMOV 100000 D0
D: destination operand, summing
DMOV 200000 D2
result
DMOV 300000 D4
Function description
DMOV 400000 D6
When the power flow is valid, the
DMOV 500000 D8
contents of S2×2 units starting with the
LD X0
starting unit (S1) will be summed up,
DSUM D0 5 D100
and the summing result is assigned to
the D unit. When X0 is ON, the double integers of 5×2 units starting with D0 will be summed
up, and the result is assigned to (D100, D101).
(D100,D101)=(D0,D1)+ ...+(D8,D9)=1500000.

6.4 Floating-point arithmetic operation instruction

6.4.1 RADD: Add floating point number instruction

IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L
LAD: Applicable to
IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RADD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result (D) is not within (-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e+038),
the carry flag bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the zero flag
S1: source operand1
bit (SM180) will be set.
S2: source operand2
Example
D: destination operand
LD X0
Function description
RADD D0 D2 D10
1. When the power flow is valid, add
When X0 is ON, add the value (-10000.2) of (D0, D1) and the value (2000.5) of (D2,
S1 and S2, and assign the operation
D3), and the result -7999.7 is assigned to (D10, D11).
result to D.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 93

6.4.2 RSUB: Substract floating point number instruction

IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L
LAD: Applicable to
IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RSUB (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description
S1: source operand1 Example

S2: source operand2

D: destination operand
LD X0
Function description
RSUB D0 D2 D10
1. When the power flow is valid, S2 is subtracted from S1, When X0 is ON, the value (2000.5) of (D2, D3) is subtracted
and the operation result is assigned to D. from the value (-10000.2) of (D0, D1), and the result
2. When the operation result (D) is not within -12000.7 is assigned to (D10, D11).
(-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e+038), the carry flag bit
(SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the zero
flag bit (SM180) will be set.

6.4.3 RMUL: Multiply floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RMUL (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the zero
flag bit (SM180) will be set.
S1: source operand1
S2: source operand2 Example

D: destination operand
Function description LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, S1 multiplies S2, and the RMUL D0 D2 D10
operation result is assigned to D. When X0 is ON, the value (-10000.2) of (D0, D1), multiplies
2. When the operation result (D) is not within the value (2000.5) of (D2, D3), and the result -20005400.0 is
(-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e+038), the carry flag bit assigned to (D10, D11) (actually the product is -20005400.1,
but is rounded off to the calculation precision).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 94

6.4.4 RDIV: Divide floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RDIV (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description
Note
S1: source operand1
S2≠0, or the system will report “Divided by 0 error”, and the RDIV instruction will
S2: source operand2
not be executed.
D: destination operand
Example
Function description
LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, S1 is
RDIV D0 D2 D10
divided by S2, and the operation result
is assigned to D. When X0 is ON, the value -10000.2 of (D0, D1) is divided by the value 2000.5 of
2. When the operation result (D) is not (D2, D3), and the result -4.998850 is assigned to (D10, D11).
within (-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e
+038), the carry flag bit (SM181) will
be set. When the operation result is 0,
the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.

6.4.5 RSQT: Square root floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RSQT (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description
S: source operand Note
D: destination operand S≥0, or the system will report operand error, and the instruction will not be
Function description executed.

1. When the power flow is valid, S is Example

extracted, and the operation result is LD X0
assigned to D. RSQT D0 D10
2. When the operation result (D) is 0,
When X0 is ON, extract the value (10000.2) of (D0, D1), and assign the result
the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
100.000999 to (D10, D11).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 95

6.4.6 RVABS: Floating point number absolute value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit
IL: RVABS (S) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand
D: destination operand
Function description LD X0

When the power flow is valid, get the absolute value of S and RVABS D0 D10
assign the value to D. When X0 is ON, get the absolute value (10000.2) of (D0, D1),
and assign the result to (D10, D11).

6.4.7 RNEG: Negative floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: RNEG (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand
D: destination operand
LD X0
Function description
RNEG D0 D10
When the power flow is valid, get the negative value of S and When X0 is ON, get the negative value -10000.2 of (D0, D1)
assign the result to D. and assign the result to (D10, D11).

6.4.8 SIN: Floating point number SIN instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: SIN (S) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √
Operand description Example
S: source operand
D: destination operand
Function description LD X0

1. When the power flow is valid, get the SIN value of S (unit: SIN D0 D10
radian), and assign the result to D. When X0 is ON, get the SIN value of (D0, D1)=1.57, and
2. When the operation result (D) is 0, the zero flag bit assign the value 1 to (D10, D11).
(SM180) will be set.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 96

6.4.9 COS: Floating point number COS instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: COS (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result (D) is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD X0
COS D0 D10
Function description
When X0 is ON, get the COS value of (D0, D1) 3.14, and assign the result
1. When the power flow is valid, get
-0.999999 to (D10, D11).
the COS value of S (unit: radian), and
assign the result to D.

6.4.10 TAN: Floating point number TAN instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: TAN (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result (D) is not within (-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e +038),
the carry flag bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the zero flag
S: source operand
bit (SM180) will be set.
D: destination operand
Example
Function description
LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, get
TAN D0 D10
the TAN value of S (unit: radian), and
assign the result to D. When X0 is ON, get the TAN value of (D0, D1) 1.57, and assign the result
1255.848398 to (D10, D11).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 97

6.4.11 POWER: Floating point number exponentiation instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: POWER (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description be set. When the operation result is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.

S1: source operand1 Note

S2: source operand2 1. When S1=0 and S2≤0, the system will report operand error, and the instruction
D: destination operand will not be executed.

Function description 2. When S1<0 and the mantissa of S2 is not 0, the system will report operand error,
and the instruction will not be executed.
1. When the power flow is valid, get
the S2th power of S1, and assign the Example
result to D. LD X0
2. When the operation result (D) is not POWER D0 D2 D10
within (-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e th 3.0
When X0 is ON, get the (D2, D3) power of (D0, D1) (i.e. 55.0 ), and assign the
+038), the carry flag bit (SM181) will result 166375.0 to (D10, D11).

6.4.12 LN: Floating point number LN instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: LN (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description +038), the carry flag bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the
zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
S: source operand
D: destination operand Example

Function description LD X0
LN D0 D10
1. When the power flow is valid, get
the LN value of S1, and assign the When X0 is ON, get the LN value of (D0, D1) 1000.0, and assign the result
result to D. 6.907755 to (D10, D11).
2. When the operation result (D) is not
within (-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 98

6.4.13 EXP: Floating point number EXP instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: EXP (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result (D) is not within (-1.701412e+038)~(1.701412e +038),
the carry flag bit (SM181) will be set. When the operation result is 0, the zero flag
S: source operand
bit (SM180) will be set.
D: destination operand
Example
Function description
LD X0
1. When the power flow is valid, get EXP D0 D10
the EXP value of S, and assign the When X0 is ON, get the EXP value of (D0, D1) “10.0”, and assign the result
result to D. 22026.464844 to (D10, D11).

6.4.14 RSUM: Sum floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RSUM (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL D V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When overflow occurs, the summing operation will stop.

S1: source operand, starting unit of Example

summing LD SM0
S2: source operand, number of units RMOV 10000.1 D0
to be summed up RMOV 20000.2 D2
D: destination operand, summing RMOV 30000.3 D4
result RMOV 40000.4 D6
Function description RMOV 50000.5 D8
When the power flow is valid, the LD X0
contents of S2×2 units starting with S1 RSUM D0 5 D100
will be summed up, and the floating
When X0 is ON, the floating point numbers of the 5×2 units starting with D0 will be
point number summing result is
summed up, and the result is assigned to (D100, D101). (D100, D101)=(D0, D1)
assigned to the D unit.
+ ... + (D8, D9)=150001.5.
Note
1. 0≤S2≤255, or the system will report
operand error.

6.4.15 ASIN: Floating point number ASIN instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ASIN (S) (D) Program steps 7
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 99

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand When S>1 or S<-1, the system will report operand error and will not execute the
D: destination operand conversion. D will not change.

Function description Example

1. When the power flow is valid, get LD SM0

the SIN-1 value of S, and assign the ASIN D0 D10
result to D. When SM0 is ON, get the SIN-1 value of (D0, D1)(0.500000), and assign the result
2. When the operation result (D) is 0, 0.523599 to (D10, D11).
the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.

6.4.16 ACOS: Floating point number ACOS instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ACOS (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand When S>1 or S<-1, the system will report operand error and will not execute the
D: destination operand conversion. D will not change.

Function description Example

1. When the power flow is valid, get LD SM0

-1
the COS value of S, and assign the ACOS D0 D10
result to D. When SM0 is ON, get the COS-1 value of (D0, D1)(0.500000), and assign the
2. When the operation result (D) is 0, result 1.047198 to (D10, D11).
the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 100

6.4.17 ATAN: Floating point number ATAN instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ATAN (S) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result (D) is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD SM0
Function description ATAN D0 D10

1. When the power flow is valid, get When SM0 is ON, get the TAN-1 value of (D0, D1)(3.14), and assign the result
the TAN-1 value of S, and assign the 1.262481 to (D10, D11).
result to D.

6.4.18 LOG: Floating point number LOG instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: LOG (S) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result (D) overflows, the carry (overflow) flag bit (SM181)
will be set; when the operation result is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
S: source operand
D: destination operand Example

Function description LD SM0

LOG D0 D10
1. When the power flow is valid, get
the LOG value of S, and assign the When SM0 is ON, get (3.0) of D0(D1), and assign the result 0.477121 to
result to D. LOG is a common D10(D11).
logarithm to the base 10.

6.4.19 RAD: Floating point number angle->rad

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RAD (S) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
Consta
S REAL D V R √
nt
D REAL D V R √

Operand description angle of S to the radian, and assign the result to D.

2. When the operation result is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set.
S: source operand
D: destination operand
Function description
1. When the power flow is valid,
convert the floating point number
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 101

Example When SM0 is ON, get (180.0) of D0(D1), and assign the result 3.141593 to
D10(D11).
LD SM0
RAD D0 D10

6.4.20 DEG: Floating point number rad->angle

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DEG (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description 2. When the operation result is 0, the zero flag bit (SM180) will be set; when the
operation result overflows, the carry (overflow) flag bit (SM181) will be set.
S: source operand
D: destination operand Example

Function description LD SM0

DEG D0 D10
1. When the power flow is valid,
convert the floating point number When SM0 is ON, get (3.0) of D0(D1), and assign the result 171.8873 to
radian of S to the angle, and assign D10(D11).
the result to D.

6.5 Data converting instruction

6.5.1 DTI: Double integer to integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DTI (S) (D) Program steps 6

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand When S is not within -32768~32767, the system will report operand error and will
D: destination operand not execute the conversion. D will not change.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, S will be LD X0

converted from double integer to DTI D0 D10
integer, and the result is assigned to When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 10000 will be converted from double integer to integer
D. and the result 10000 is assigned to D10.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 102

6.5.2 ITD: Integer to double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ITD (S) (D) Program steps 6

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description integer, and the result is assigned to D.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD X0
Function description ITD D0 D10

When the power flow is valid, S will be When X0 is ON, D0 (1000) will be converted from integer to double integer, and the
converted from integer to double result 1000 is assigned to (D10, D11).

6.5.3 FLT: Integer to floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: FLT (S) (D) Program steps 6

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description number, and the result is assigned to D.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD X0

Function description FLT D0 D10

When X0 is ON, D0 (10005) will be converted from integer to floating point number,
When the power flow is valid, S will be
and the result 10005.0 is assigned to (D10, D11).
converted from integer to floating point

6.5.4 DFLT: Double integer to floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DFLT (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D REAL D V R √

Operand description floating point number, and the result is assigned to D.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD X0
Function description DFLT D0 D10

When the power flow is valid, S will be When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 100000 will be converted from double integer to floating
converted from double integer to point number, and the result 100000.0 is assigned to (D10, D11).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 103

6.5.5 INT: Floating point number to integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: INT (S) (D) Program steps 6

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description When the result rounds off the decimal fraction, the borrow flag will be set. the
carry (overflow) flag will be set.
S: source operand
D: destination operand Note

Function description When S>32767, D=32767. When S<-32768, D=-32768, and at the same time the
carry (overflow) flag bit will be set.
1. When the power flow is valid, S will
be converted from floating point Example
number to integer, and the result is LD X0
assigned to D. INT D0 D10
2. This instruction affects the zero flag When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 10000.5 will be converted from floating point number to
and borrow flag. When the conversion integer and the result 10000 is assigned to D10.
result is 0, the zero flag will be set.

6.5.6 DINT: Floating point number to double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DINT (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S REAL Constant D V R √
D DINT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description exceeds the range of the double integer, the carry (overflow) flag will be set.

S: source operand Note

D: destination operand When S>2147483647, D=2147483647. When S<-2147483648, D=-2147483648,
Function description and at the same time the carry (overflow) flag will be set.

1. When the power flow is valid, S will Example

be converted from floating point LD X0
number to double integer, and the DINT D0 D10

result is assigned to D. When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 100000.5 will be converted from floating point number to
2. When the conversion result is 0, the double integer, and the result 100000 is assigned to (D10, D11).
zero flag will be set. When the result
rounds off the decimal fraction, the
borrow flag will be set. When the result
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 104

6.5.7 BCD: Word to 16-bit BCD instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: BCD (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand, ≤9999 When S>9999, the system will report operand error and will not execute the
D: destination operand instruction, and D will not change.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, S will be LD X0

converted from integer to 16-bit BCD BCD D0 D10
code, and the result is assigned to D. When X0 is ON, D0 0x0D05 (3333) will be converted from integer to 16-bit BCD
code, and the result 0x3333 (13107) is assigned to D10.

6.5.8 DBCD: Double word to 32-bit BCD instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DBCD (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand, ≤99999999 When S>99999999, the system will report operand error and will not execute the
D: destination operand instruction, and D will not change.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, S will be LD X0

converted from double integer to DBCD D0 D10
32-bit BCD code, and the result is When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 0x3F940AA (66666666) will be converted from double
assigned to D. integer to 32-bit BCD code, and the result 0x66666666 (1717986918) is assigned
to (D10, D11).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 105

6.5.9 BIN: 16-bit BCD to word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: BIN (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand, the data format of When the data format of S does not match the BCD code format, the system will
S must match the BCD code format reports illegal operand and will not execute the instruction, and D will not change.
D: destination operand Example
Function description LD X0
When the power flow is valid, S will be BIN D0 D10
converted from 16-bit BCD code to When X0 is ON, D0 0x5555 (21845) will be converted from 16-bit BCD code to
integer, and the result is assigned to integer, and the result 0x15B3 (5555) is assigned to D10.
D.

6.5.10 DBIN: 32-bit BCD to double word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DBIN (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand When the data format of S does not match the BCD code format, the system will
D: destination operand report operand error and will not execute the instruction, and D will not change.

Function description Example

1. When the power flow is valid, S will LD X0

be converted from 32-bit BCD code to DBIN D0 D10
double integer, and the result is When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 0x99999999 (2576980377) will be converted from 32-bit
assigned to D. BCD code to double integer, and the result 0x5F5E0FF (99999999) is assigned to
2. The data format of S must match (D10, D11).
the BCD code format.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 106

6.5.11 GRY: Word to 16-bit Gray code instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: GRY (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD X0
D: destination operand GRY D0 D10
Function description When X0 is ON, D0 0xAAAA (43690) will be converted form integer to 16-bit Gray
code, and the result 0xFFFF (65535) is assigned to D10.
When the power flow is valid, S will be
converted from integer to 16-bit Gray
code, and the result is assigned to D.

6.5.12 DGRY: Double word to 32-bit Gray code instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DGRY (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD X0
D: destination operand DGRY D0 D10
Function description When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 0x88888888 (2290649224) will be converted from
double integer to 32-bit Gray code, and the result 0xCCCCCCCC (3435973836) is
When the power flow is valid, S will be
assigned to (D10, D11).
converted from integer to 32-bit Gray
code, and the result is assigned to D.

6.5.13 GBIN: 16-bit Gray code to word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: GBIN (S) (D) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description integer, and the result is assigned to D.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD X0
Function description GBIN D0 D10

When the power flow is valid, S will be When X0 is ON, D0 0xFFFF (65535) will be converted from 16-bit Gray code to
converted from 16-bit Gray code to integer, and the result 0xAAAA (43690) is assigned to D10.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 107

6.5.14 DGBIN: 32-bit Gray code to double word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DGBIN (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description double integer, and the result is assigned to D.

S: source operand Example

D: destination operand LD X0
Function description DGBIN D0 D10

When the power flow is valid, S will be When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 0xCCCCCCCC (3435973836) will be converted from
converted from 32-bit Gray code to 32-bit Gray code to double integer, and the result 0x88888888 (2290649224) is
assigned to (D10, D11).

6.5.15 SEG: Word to 7-segment code instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: SEG (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand, ≤15 When S>15, the system reports illegal operand and will not execute the instruction,
D: destination operand and D will not change.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, S will be LD X0

converted from integer to 7-segment SEG D0 D10
code, and the result is assigned to D. When X0 is ON, D0 0x0F (15) will be converted from integer to 7-segment code,
and the result 0x71 (113) is assigned to D10.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 108

6.5.16 ASC: ASCII code conversion instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: ASC (S1~S8) (D) Program steps 19
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant
S2 WORD Constant
S3 WORD Constant
S4 WORD Constant
S5 WORD Constant
S6 WORD Constant
S7 WORD Constant
S8 WORD Constant
D WORD D C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1~S8: source operand (If the number is less than 8, the

remaining elements shall be filled with 0)
Only characters with ASCII code of 0x21~0x7E are LD M0
supported (input through keyboard, if the number is less ASC 12345678 D0
than 8, fill in with 0X00) When M0 is ON, execute the ASCII conversion, and the data
D: destination operand will be stored in two modes:
Function description  When SM186 is OFF, the execution result is:
D0=0x3231, D1=0x3433, D2=0x3635, D3=0x3837.
When the power flow is valid, the string S1~S8 will be
 When SM186 is ON, the execution result is: D0=0x31,
converted to ASCII code, and the result is assigned to the
D1=0x32, D2=0x33, D3=0x34, D4=0x35, D5=0x36,
elements starting with D. When SM186 is OFF, the high/low
D6=0x37, D7=0x38.
byte of each D element will store two ASCII code data. When
SM186 is ON, the low byte of each D element will store 1
ASCII code data.

6.5.17 ITA: Hexadecimal number-ASCII code conversion instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ITA (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S1: conversion source, hexadecimal number 1. When S1 and D use Kn addressing, Kn=4.
D: destination operand. 2. When S2 is not within 1~256, the system will report
S2: number of ASCII codes, 1≤S2≤256 operand error and will not execute the instruction, and D will
not change.
Function description
3. If S1 is a constant, S2 will be regarded as 4 by default
When the power flow is valid, the hexadecimal number when S2≥4, and the system will not report operand error.
starting with S1 element will be converted to S2 ASCII codes,
Example
and the result is assigned to the elements starting with D.
When SM186 is OFF, the high/low byte of each D element
will store two ASCII code data. When SM186 is ON, the low
Source data: 0x9876
byte of each D element will store 1 ASCII code data.
LD M0
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 109

ITA 16#9876 D20 8  If SM186=ON, the execution result is D20=0x39,

When M0 is ON, execute ITA conversion, the data will be D21=0x38, D22=0x37, D23=0x36.
stored in two modes:
 If SM186=OFF, the execution result is: D20=0x3839,
D21=0x3637.

6.5.18 ATI: ASCII code-hexadecimal number conversion instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ATI (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 3. If S1 is a constant, S2 will be regarded as 2 by default

when SM186 is OFF and S2≥2, or as when SM186 is ON
S1: conversion source, ASCII code data 0x30≤S1≤0x39 or
and S2≥1, and the system will not report operand error.
0x41≤S1≤0x46 (when SM186 is OFF, the high byte and low
byte of S1 shall both be within this range) Example
D: destination operand
S2: number of ASCII codes; 1≤S2≤256
LD M0
Function description
ATI D10 D30 4
When the power flow is valid, the S2 ASCII code data
Source data: D10=0x3938, D11=0x3736, D12=0x3534,
starting with S1 element will be converted to hexadecimal
D13=0x3332
number, and the result will be stored in the elements starting
with D in every 4 bits. When SM186 is OFF, the high/low When M0 is ON, the ATI conversion will be executed.
byte of each D element will store two ASCII code data. When According to the data storing mode, the results are as
SM186 is ON, the low byte of each D element will store 1 follows:
ASCII code data.  If SM186 is OFF, the result is: D30=0x8967.
 If SM186 is ON, the result is: D30=0x8642.
Note
1. When S1 is not within 0x30~0x39 or 0x41~0x46, or S2 is
not within 1~256, the system will report operand error and
will not execute the instruction, and D will not change.

6.5.19 LCNV: Engineering conversion instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: LCNV (S1)(S2)(D)(S3) Program steps 9
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D V R
S2 INT D V R
D INT D V R
S3 Word Constant D V R

Operand description Function description

S1: starting address of source operand under conversion When the analog input module is used to read external
S2: starting address of conversion table analog signals, the instruction can convert the original
D: starting address of storing conversion result analog reading to corresponding engineering reading.
S3: number of data under conversion; 1≤S3≤64 When the temperature or analog module is used for
measuring, if there is deviation between the temperature or
engineering reading measured by PLC and the result
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 110

measured by standard thermometer or instrument, the LDI M1

instruction can be taken as linear correction to correct the MOV 282 D1000
actual measurement. MOV 3530 D1001
Fill four values of low point measured value VML , high point MOV 260 D1002
MOV 3650 D1003
measured value VMH , low point standard value VSL and
LDI M4
high point standard value VSH into conversion table; when MOV 282 D100
the linear conversion is executed, the source data will MOV 3530 D101
perform operation according to the following formulas and MOV 1906 D102
generate corresponding target standard values. S n is the MOV 0 D103
MOV 5000 D104
original input data and Dn is the result after conversion.
MOV -115 D105
A  (VSL  VSH ) /(VML  VMH ) *10000 LD M2
B  VSL  (VML * A / 10000) LCNV D100 D100 D1000 D200 6
When M2 is ON, the LCNV conversion will be executed.
Dn  ( S n * A / 10000)  B According to the data storing mode, the results are as
Note follows:
D200=260
The four values in the conversion table is meaningful. For
D201=3650
example, the low point measured value should be smaller
than the high point measured value. The conversion result D202=1955
will be not accurate if exceeding the range of D203=-34

integers. Dn >32767, the result is 32767; Dn <-32768, the D204=5184

D205=-154
result is -32768.
Example

6.5.20 RLCNV: Floating point engineering conversion instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H
Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: RLCNV (S1)(S2)(D)(S3) Program steps 12
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL D V R
S2 REAL D V R
D REAL D V R
S3 Word Constant D V R
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 111

Operand description Example

S1: starting address of source operand under conversion

S2: starting address of conversion table
D: starting address of storing conversion result
S3: number of data under conversion; 1≤S3≤64
Function description
When the analog input module is used to read external
analog signals, the instruction can convert the original
analog reading to corresponding engineering reading.
When the temperature or analog module is used for
measuring, if there is deviation between the temperature or
engineering reading measured by PLC and the result
measured by standard thermometer or instrument, the
instruction can be taken as linear correction to correct the
actual measurement.

Fill four values of low point measured value VML , high point

measured value VMH , low point standard value VSL and

high point standard value VSH into conversion table; when

the linear conversion is executed, the source data will
perform operation according to the following formulas and LDI M1

generate corresponding target standard values. S n is the RMOV 282 D1000

RMOV 3530 D1002
original input data and Dn is the result after conversion. RMOV 260 D1004
A  (VSL  VSH ) /(VML  VMH ) *10000 RMOV 3650 D1006
LDI M4
B  VSL  (VML * A / 10000)
RMOV 282 D100
Dn  ( S n * A / 10000)  B RMOV 3530 D102

Note RMOV 1906 D104

RMOV 0 D106
The four values in the conversion table is meaningful. For
RMOV 5000 D108
example, the low point measured value should be smaller
than the high point measured value. The conversion result RMOV -115 D110
will be not accurate if exceeding the range of LD M2
RLCNV D100 D1000 D200 6
integers. Dn >32767, the result is 32767; Dn <-32768, the
When M2 is ON, the RLCNV conversion will be executed.
result is -32768.
According to the data storing mode, the results are as
follows:
D200(D201)=260
D202(D203)=3650
D204(D205)=1955
D206(D207)=-34.3288
D208(D209)=5184.267
D210(D211)=-154.357
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 112

6.6 Word logic operation

6.6.1 WAND: AND word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
Program steps 7
IL: WAND (S1) (S2) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
Operand description Example
LD X0
S1: source operand1
WAND
S2: source operand2
D0 D1 D10
D: destination operand When X0 is ON, D0 2#1011011010010011 (46739) and D1 2#1001001100101110
Function description (37678) will conduct logic AND operation, and the result 2#1001001000000010
When the power flow is valid, S1 and (37378) is assigned to D10.
S2 will conduct logic AND operation,
and the result is assigned to D.

6.6.2 WOR: OR word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
Program steps 7
IL: WOR (S1) (S2) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
Operand description Example

S1: source operand1 LD X0

WOR D0 D1
S2: source operand2
D10
D: destination operand When X0 is ON, D0 2#1011011010010011 (46739) and D1 2#1001001100101110
Function description (37678) will conduct logic OR operation, and the result 2#1011011110111111
When the power flow is valid, S1 and (47039) is assigned to D10.
S2 will conduct logic OR operation,
and the result is assigned to D.

6.6.3 WXOR: Exclusive-OR word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit
Program steps 7
IL: WXOR (S1) (S2) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
Operand description S2: source operand2

S1: source operand1 D: destination operand

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 113

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, S1 and LD X0
S2 will conduct logic exclusive OR WXOR D0 D1 D10

operation, and the result is assigned When X0 is ON, D0 2#1011011010010011 (46739) and D1 2#1001001100101110
to D. (37678) will conduct logic exclusive OR operation, and the result
2#0010010110111101 (9661) is assigned to D10.

6.6.4 WINV: NOT word instruction

Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

LAD:
Influenced flag bit

Program steps 5
IL: WINV (S) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD X0
WINV D0 D10
D: destination operand
When X0 is ON, conduct logic NOT operation on D0 (46739), and assign the result
Function description 18796 to D10.
When the power flow is valid, conduct
logic NOT operation on S, and assign
the result to D.

6.6.5 DWAND: AND double word instruction

Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

LAD:
Influenced flag bit

Program steps 10
IL: DWAND (S1) (S1) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
Operand description Example

S1: source operand1 LD X0

DWAND D0 D2 D10
S2: source operand2
When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#10110010101001101110011001010010 (2997282386)
D: destination operand
and (D2, D3) 2#00111010001110110011000100110011 (976957747) will conduct
Function description the logic AND operation, and the result 2#00110010001000100010000000010010
When the power flow is valid, S1 and (841097234) is assigned to (D10, D11).
S2 will conduct logic AND operation,
and the result is assigned to D.

6.6.6 DWOR: OR double word instruction

Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

LAD:
Influenced flag bit

Program steps 10
IL: DWOR (S1) (S2) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 114

S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

S2 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
Operand description operation, and the result is assigned to D.

S1: source operand1 Example

S2: source operand2 LD X0

DWOR D0 D2 D10
D: destination operand
When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#10110010101001101110011001010010 (2997282386)
Function description and (D2, D3) 2#00111010001110110011000100110011 (976957747) will conduct logic
When the power flow is valid, S1 OR operation, and the result 2#10111010101111111111011101110011 (3133142899) is
and S2 will conduct logic OR assigned to (D10, D11).

6.6.7 DWXOR: Exclusive-OR double word instruction

Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

LAD:
Influenced flag bit
Program steps 10
IL: DWXOR (S1) (S2) (D)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
Operand description Example
LD X0
S1: source operand1
DWXOR D0 D2
S2: source operand2
D10
D: destination operand When X0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#10110010101001101110011001010010 (2997282386)
Function description and (D2, D3) 2#00111010001110110011000100110011 (976957747) will conduct
When the power flow is valid, S1 and logic exclusive OR operation, and the result 2#10001000100111011101011101100001
S2 will conduct logic exclusive OR (2292045665) is assigned to (D10, D11).
operation, and the result is assigned to
D.

6.6.8 DWINV: NOT double word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DWINV (S) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD X0
DWINV D0 D10
D: destination operand
When X0 is ON, logic NOT operation will be conducted on (D0, D1)
Function description 2#10110010101001101110011001010010 (2997282386), and the result
When the power flow is valid, logic 2#01001101010110010001100110101101 (1297684909) is assigned to (D10,
NOT operation will be conducted on S, D11).
and the result is assigned to D.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 115

6.7 Shift/Rotate instruction

6.7.1 ROR: 16-bit circular shift right instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: ROR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand1 LD M0

ROR D0 D10 3
D: destination operand
Before Rotate rightward 3 bits
S2: source operand2 MSB LSB
Function description 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

When the power flow is valid, the

SM181
data of S1 will rotate rightward for After
S2 bits, and the result is assigned to MSB LSB
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
D. At the same time the highest bit
of the S2 bits will be stored into the
SM181 1
carry flag (SM181).
Note When M0 is ON, D0 2#1100110110010101 (52629) rotates rightward for 3 bits, and
the result 2#1011100110110010 (47538) is assigned to D10. The highest bit of the 3
1. S2≥0.
bits is stored into the carry flag. SM181 is ON.
2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn
must be equal to 4.

6.7.2 ROL: 16-bit circular shift left instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: ROL (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description will be stored into the carry flag SM181.

S1: source operand1 Note

D: destination operand 1. S2≥0.

S2: source operand2 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 4.

Function description
When the power flow is valid, the data
of S1 will rotate leftward for S2 bits,
and the result is assigned to D. At the
same time the lowest bit of the S2 bits
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 116

Example
LD M0
ROL D0 D10 15

Before Rotate leftward 15 bits

MSB LSB
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

SM181

After
MSB LSB
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

0 SM181

When M0 is ON, D0 2#1100110110010101 (52629) rotates leftward for 15 bits, and the result 2#1110011011001010 (59082) is
assigned to D10. The final bit will be stored in the carry flag bit. SM181 is OFF.

6.7.3 RCR: 16-bit carry circular shift right instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: RCR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand1 LD M0

RCR D0 D10 5
D: destination operand
Rotate with the carry
S2: source operand2 flag 5 bits rightward
Before
Function description MSB LSB
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
When the power flow is valid, S1 data
and the carry flag (SM181) will SM181 (0)
together rotate rightward for S2 bits,
After
and the result is assigned to D. MSB LSB
Note 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

1. S2≥0. SM181 1
2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn
must be equal to 4.
When M0 is ON, D0 2#1100110110010101 (52629) and the carry SM181 (OFF)
will rotate rightward for 5 bits, and the result 2#0101011001101100 (22124) is
assigned to D10. SM181=ON.

6.7.4 RCL: 16-bit carry circular shift left instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: RCL (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 117

S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand1 LD M0

RCL D0 D10 16
D: destination operand
Rotate with the carry
S2: source operand2 Before flag leftward 16 bits
MSB LSB
Function description 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

When the power flow is valid, S1 data SM181 (1)

and the carry (SM181) will together
rotate leftward for S2 bits, and the After
result is assigned to D. MSB LSB
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
Note
1 SM181
1. S2≥0.
2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn When M0 is ON, D0 2#1100110110010101 (52629) and the carry SM181 (ON) will
must be equal to 4. rotate leftward for 16-bits, and the result 2#1110011011001010 (59082) is assigned
to D10. SM181=ON.

6.7.5 DROR: 32-bit circular shift right instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: DROR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 1. S2≥0.

D: destination operand 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 8.
S2: source operand2 Example
Function description LD M0
DROR D0 D10 7
When the power flow is valid, the data
of S1 will rotate rightward for S2 bits, 1. When M0 is ON, D0 (D1) 2#10110011100110001001110010101100
and the result is assigned to D. At the (3013123244) will rotate rightward for 7 bits, and the result
same time the highest bit of the S2 bits 2#01011001011001110011000100111001 (1499935033) is assigned to (D10, D11).
will be stored into the carry flag bit The final bit is stored into the carry flag bit. SM181=OFF.
SM181. 2. Please refer to the ROR instruction illustration.

6.7.6 DROL: 32-bit circular shift left instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: DROL (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 118

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 1. S2≥0.

D: destination operand 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 8.

S2: source operand2 Example

Function description LD M0
DROL D0 D10 30
When the power flow is valid, the data
1. When M0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#10110011100110001001110010101100
of S1 will rotate leftward for S2 bits,
(3013123244) will rotate leftward for 30 bits, and the result
and the result is assigned to D. At the
2#00101100111001100010011100101011 (753280811) is assigned to (D10, D11).
same time the lowest bit of the S2 bits
The final bit is stored into the carry flag bit. SM181=ON.
will be stored into the carry flag bit
SM181. 2. Please refer to the ROL instruction illustration.

6.7.7 DRCR: 32-bit carry circular shift right instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: DRCR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 8.

S1: source operand1 Example

LD M0
D: destination operand
DRCR D0
S2: source operand2
D10 11
Function description 1. When M0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#10110011100110001001110010101100
When the power flow is valid, S1 data (3013123244) and the carry SM181 (OFF) will rotate rightward for 11 bits, and the
and the carry SM181 will together result 2#00101011000101100111001100010011 (722891539) is assigned to (D10,
rotate rightward for S2 bits, and the D11). SM181=ON.
result is assigned to D. 2. Please refer to the RCR instruction illustration.
Note
1. S2≥0.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 119

6.7.8 DRCL: 32-bit carry circular shift left instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Carry flag SM181

IL: DRCL (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 8.

S1: source operand1 Example

D: destination operand LD M0
DRCL D0 D10 25
S2: source operand2
1. When M0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#10110011100110001001110010101100
Function description (3013123244) and the carry SM181 (OFF) will rotate leftward for 25 bits, and the
When the power flow is valid, the S1 result 2#001011000101100111001100010011100 (1488165020) is assigned to
data and the carry SM181 will together (D10, D11). SM181 = ON.
rotate leftward for S2 bits, and the 2. Please refer to the RCL instruction illustration.
result is assigned to D.
Note
1. S2≥0.

6.7.9 SHR: 16-bit shift right instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: SHR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description
S1: source operand1 Example

D: destination operand LD M0
SHR D0 D10 5
S2: source operand2
Before Rotate rightward 5 bits
Function description MSB LSB
0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
When the power flow is valid, the data
of S1 will shift rightward for S2 bits, After
and the result is assigned to D. MSB LSB
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
Note
When M0 is ON, D0 2#0111101011011100 (31452) shifts rightward for 5 bits, and
1. S2≥0.
the result 2#0000001111010110 (982) is assigned to D10.
2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn
must be equal to 4.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 120

6.7.10 SHL: 16-bit shift left instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: SHL (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √

S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 4.

S1: source operand1 Example

D: destination operand LD M0
SHL D0 D10 7
S2: source operand2
Before Rotate leftward 7 bits
Function description MSB LSB
0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0
When the power flow is valid, the data
of S1 will shift leftward for S2 bits, and After
the result is assigned to D. MSB LSB
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note
When M0 is ON, D0 2#0111101011011100 (31452) shifts leftward for 7 bits, and
1. S2≥0. the result 2#0110111000000000 (28160) is assigned to D10.

6.7.11 DSHR: 32-bit shift right instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DSHR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √

S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 1. S2≥0.

D: destination operand 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 8.
S2: source operand2 Example
Function description LD M0
DSHR D0 D10 10
When the power flow is valid, the data
of S1 will shift rightward for S2 bits, 1. When M0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#01110011100110001001110010101100
and the result is assigned to D. (1939381420) shifts rightward for 10 bits, and the result
2#00000000000111001110011000100111 (1893927) is assigned to (D10, D11).
2. Please refer to the SHR instruction illustration.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 121

6.7.12 DSHL: 32-bit shift left instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DSHL (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D DWORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description 2. When S1 uses Kn addressing, Kn must be equal to 8.

S1: source operand1 Example

LD M0
D: destination operand
DSHL D0 D10 15
S2: source operand2
1. When M0 is ON, (D0, D1) 2#01110011100110001001110010101100
Function description (1939381420) shifts leftward for 15 bits, and the result
When the power flow is valid, the data 2#01001110010101100000000000000000 (1314258944) is assigned to (D10,
of S1 will shift leftward for S2 bits, and D11).
the result is assigned to D. 2. Please refer to SHL instruction illustration.
Note
1. S2≥0.

6.7.13 SFTR: Shift right byte instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: SFTR (S1) (D) (S2) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 BOOL X Y M S LM SM C T √
D BOOL Y M S LM C T √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S1: source operand1 1. The elements with smaller SN are at the right, and the elements with larger SN
D: destination operand are at the left.
S2: source operand2 2. S2≥0.
S3: source operand3 3. S3≥0.

Function description Example

When the power flow is valid, S2 LD M0

elements starting with D will move SFTR X0 M10 10 3
rightward for S3 units, and the S3
elements at the rightmost side will be X2 X1 X0

discarded. At the same time, the

M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
contents of S3 elements starting with
S1 will be filled into the left end of the
string.
1. When M0 is ON, the contents of 10 elements starting with M10 will move
rightward for 3 bits, and rightmost three elements M10~M12 will be discarded. At
the same time, the contents of the 3 elements starting with X0 will be filled into the
left end of the string.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 122

2. Before the execution: X0=1, X1=0, 3. After the execution: the contents of X0 to X2 remain unchanged, M10=0, M11=0,
X2=1, M10=0, M11=1, M12=1, M12=1, M13=0, M14=0, m15=0, m16=0, m17=1, m18=0, m19=1.
M13=0, M14=0, M15=1, M16=0,
M17=0, M18=0, M19=1.

6.7.14 SFTL: Shift left byte instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: SFTL (S1) (D) (S2) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 BOOL X Y M S LM SM C T √
D BOOL Y M S LM C T √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand1 LD M0

D: destination operand SFTL X0 M10 10 3

S2: source operand2

X2 X1 X0
S3: source operand3
Note M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

1. The elements with smaller SN are

at the right, and the elements with
1. When M0 is ON, the contents of 10 elements starting with M10 will move leftward
larger SN are at the left.
for 3 bits, and the leftmost elements M17~M19 will be discarded. At the same time,
2. S2≥0.
the contents of the 3 elements starting with X0 will be filled into the right end of the
3. S3≥0. string.
Function description 2. Before the execution: X0=1, X1=0, X2=1, M10=0, M11=1, M12=1, M13=0,
When the power flow is valid, S2 M14=0, M15=1, M16=0, M17=0, M18=0, M19=1.
elements starting with D will more 3. After the execution: the contents of X0~X2 remain unchanged, M10=1, M11=0,
leftward for S3 units, and the S3 M12=1, M13=0, M14=1, M15=1, M16=0, M17=0, M18=1, M19=0.
elements at the leftmost side will be
discarded. At the same time, the
contents of S3 elements starting with
S1 will be filled into the right end of
the string.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 123

6.8 External equipment instruction

6.8.1 FROM: Read word from special module buffer register instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: FROM (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 INT Constant
D INT D V R √
S3 INT Constant

Operand description Range: 1~32767. If the target register does not exist, the system will report “BFM
unit of accessed special module exceeds range”.
S1: SN of the special module to be
read, or the target module. Function description

Range: 0~7. If the target module does Read consecutively S3 registers, starting with S2 register, in the BFM of the target
not exist, the system will report target module (SN: S1) and put them into the S3 word elements starting with D.
module address invalid. Note
S2: the starting address in the BFM of
The execution time of the FROM instruction is relatively long, and closely related to
the target module.
S3.
Range: 0~32767. If the BFM address
Example
is invalid, the system will report “BFM
unit of accessed special module LD M0
FROM 0 3 D100 2
exceeds range”.
D: the D element where the data read When M0 is ON, read consecutively 2 registers, starting with register 3, in the BFM
from the target module will be stored. of the target module number 0, and put them into the word elements D100 and
S3: the number of consecutive buffer D101.
registers (single word) to be read.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 124

6.8.2 DFROM: Read double word from special module buffer register instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DFROM (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 INT Constant
D DINT D V R √
S3 INT Constant

Operand description Range: 1~32767. If the target register does not exist, the system will report “BFM
unit of accessed special module exceeds range”
S1: SN of the special module to be
read, or the target module. Function description

Range: 0~7. If the target module does Read consecutively S3 registers, starting with S2 register, in the BFM of the target
not exist, the system will report target module (SN: S1) and put them into the S3 double-word elements starting with D.
module address invalid. Note
S2: the starting address in the BFM of
The execution time of the DFROM instruction is relatively long, and closely related
the target module.
to S3.
Range: 0~32767. If the BFM address
Example
is invalid, the system will report “BFM
unit of accessed special module
exceeds range”.
D: the D element where the data read LD M0
from the target module will be stored.
DFROM 0 3 D200 1
S3: the number of consecutive buffer
When M0 is ON, read 1 double word from register 3, in the BFM of the target
registers (double word) to be read.
module number 0, and put it into the double word element (D200, D201).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 125

6.8.3 TO: Write word to special module buffer register instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: TO (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 INT Constant
S3 INT D V R √
S4 INT Constant

Operand description S4: the number of consecutive buffer registers (single word) to be written.
Range: 1~32767. If the target register does not exist, the system will report “BFM
S1: the SN of the special module to
unit of accessed special module exceeds range”.
be written, or the target module.
Range: 0~7. If the target module does Function description
not exist, the system will report “Using Write data from consecutive S4 registers starting with S3 to the consecutive S4
FROM/TO instruciton to access buffer registers starting with S2 in the BFM of the target module (SN: S1).
module not existing”. Note
S2: the starting register address in
The execution time of the TO instruction is relatively long, and closely related to S4.
the BFM of the target module.
Range: 0~32767. If the BFM address Example
is invalid, the system will report “BFM LD SM0
unit of accessed special module TO 0 8 1000 2

exceeds range”. When PLC runs, write 1000 respectively to buffer registers 8 and 9 in the BFM of
S3: the data to be written into the target module number 0.
target module.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 126

6.8.4 DTO: Write double word to special module buffer register instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DTO (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) Program steps 10

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 INT Constant
S3 DINT D V R √
S4 INT Constant

Operand description S4: the number of consecutive buffer registers (double word) to be written.
Range: 1~32767. If the target register does not exist, the system will report “BFM
S1: the SN of the special module to be
unit of accessed special module exceeds range”.
written, or the target module.
Range: 0~7. If the target module does Function description
not exist, the system will report “Using Write data from consecutive S4 registers starting with S3 to the consecutive S4
FROM/TO instruciton to access module buffer registers starting with S2 in the BFM of the target module (SN: S1).
not existing”. Note
S2: the starting register address in the
The execution time of the DTO instruction is relatively long, and closely related
BFM of the target module.
to S4.
Range: 0~32767. If the BFM address is
invalid, the system will “BFM unit of Example
accessed special module exceeds LD SM0
range”. DTO 0 8 16711935 1

S3: the data to be written into the target When PLC runs, write a double word data 16711935 to buffer registers 8 and 9
module. (which forms a double-word element) in the BFM of target module number 0.

6.8.5 VRRD: Read analog potentiometer value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1

Influenced flag bit

IL: VRRD (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant
D WORD D V √

Operand description Function description

S: the specified potentiometer SN. Read the value of the specified analog potentiometer and store it into the specified
Range: 0~255. If S is set outside this element.
range, the system will report operand Example
error.
LD M0
D: the element where the read analog
VRRD 0 D10
potentiometer value will be stored.
When M0 is ON, read the value of analog potentiometer 0 and put the reading into
Range: 0~255.
D10.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 127

6.8.6 REFF: Set input filtering constant instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: REFF (S) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Function description

S: input filtering constant. Set the input filtering constant of X0~X17.

IVC2L: Range: 0~64ms. Any setting bigger than 64 will be Note
regarded as 64.
The input filtering constant is valid only for non-high-speed
IVC1: Range: 0, 8, 16, 32, 64. Any setting between any two input points.
values will be regarded as the smaller value. For example, a
Example
setting smaller than 8 will be regarded as 0, a setting smaller
than 16 will be regarded as 8, a setting smaller than 32 will LD M0
REFF 30
be regarded as 16, a setting smaller than 64 will be regarded
as 32, and other settings will be regarded as 64. When X10 is ON, set the input filtering constant to 30ms.

6.8.7 REF: Instant refresh I/O instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: REF (D) (S) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL X Y
S INT Constant

Operand description Note

D: the starting X or Y element to be refreshed. The specified 1. The subscript values of inputs (Xn, Yn) are integer
starting element address should always be a multiple of 8 (in multiples of 8.
octal system). For example, X0, X10, X20… or Y0, Y10, 2. The refreshed (terminal) number is the integer multiple of
Y20…. 8.
S: the number of inputs and outputs to be refreshed. It 3. Generally, the REF instruction is used to refresh I/O
should always be a multiple of 8, for example, 8, 16, ..., 256, immediately between the FOR-NEXT instruction and the CJ
and so on. instruction.
Function description 4. You can also use the REF instruction to obtain the latest
input and output the operation result without delay during the
Generally, the PLC will not refresh its inputs or outputs
execution of the interrupts with I/Os.
before the user program ends. However, if you want to
5. To refresh a relay output, you need to consider the
refresh the inputs or outputs when the user program is still
response time.
running, you can use this instruction.
Example
LD M0
REF Y0 8
When M0 is ON, the status at Y0~Y7 will be output
immediately regardless of the scan cycle.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 128

6.8.8 EROMWR: EEPROM write instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: EROMWR (S1) (S2) Program steps 6

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD D R
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: starting address of write elements

(D6000~D6999)
S2: number of write elements (S2<16,
S1+S2<D7000)
LD M1
Note SET M1000
RST M1
An EROMWR instruction will make the
MOV 16 D6016
scan cycle 2~5ms longer. It is
MOV 32 D6032
recommended to set the S1 to 6000 LD SM1
plus an integer multiple of 16, like SET M1
D6000, D6016 and D6032. LD M1000
EROMWR D6016 2
Function description
LD M1001
1. Partial PLC data are battery backed. EROMWR D6032 16
However, during the calculation, you LD M1000
can save the intermediate data into SET M1001
EEPROM with the EROMWR
instruction.
2. This instruction is executed upon
the rising edge.
In the preceding example, two sets of D elements are stored in the EEPROM:
1. SM1 and M1 makes M1000 generate a rising edge during the second scan cycle
and triggers the execution of the first EROMWR instruction.
2. M1001 and SM196 makes the second rising edge, triggering the execution of
the second EROMWR instruction.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 129

6.8.9 PR: Print instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

PR (S) (D)
Influenced flag bit
IL: PR (S) (D) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD D C T R √
D BOOL Y

Operand description When the power flow is invalid, the flag bit of print instruction
in execution will reset.
S: starting SN of the elements to be stored
D: starting Y SN of output data  Note
1. When the power flow is valid, only print once.
Function description
2. The flag bit of print instruction in execution can be used to
1. The stored data in low 8-bit (1 byte) of S~S+7 is inputted control the breaking of power flow in print instruction.
to D~D+7 by time division and the enabling signal is Y0.
2. SM71 is the mark of print instruction in execution. SM71 is Example
set in printing process and printing reset is completed.
Instruction input
S S+1 S+2 S+3 S+7

D ~D+7 Data A B C D H
Note
T0 T0 T0:Scan time（ms）
T0 1. Only applicable to transistor output modules
D+8 Gating
2. The instruction is executed with scan cycle at the same
3. When the special register SM70 is OFF, serial output 8 time
bytes; when SM70 is ON, serial output 1~16 bytes. For H00 3. Only one instruction can be executed at the same time.
(NUL code), the previous character is the last one. After printing is completed, execute SM71 reset.
Power flow input .

Data output
˜˜
Beginning character Ending character
˜˜
T T T T: Operation cycle or interrupt time

Printer gating
˜˜
Flag bit in execution
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 130

6.8.10 TKY: Numeric key input instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: TKY (S) (D1) (D2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S SM LM
D1 INT KnY KnM KnLM D SD C T V Z R √
D2 BOOL Y M S SM LM

Operand description S ④
S: starting bit of input numeric keys (occupy 10 bits)
S+1 ②
D1: data storing units
D2: element number corresponding to input keys ON/OFF S+2 ①
(occupy 11 points)
S+3 ③
Function description
S+9
1. S~S+9 are key inputs, the input data will be stored in D1,
D2~D2+9 are input information of output keys and D2+10
D2
will detect inputs. When any input is ON, D2+10 will be set.
1) Values of D1 D2+1

Press the numeric keys ①, ②, ③ and ④ in order, and D2+2

save 2130 in D1.
D2+3
2) Key information of D2-D2+10
Key information of D2-D2+9, ON/OFF according to the keys D2+9
pressed
D2+10 ① ② ③ ④
When any key in 0-9 is pressed, D2+10 will output ON.
Numeric key 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example
LD M0
TKY X0
D7999 M1000
S S S S S s S S S S
24V 0V s/s
+1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
After pressing X2, X1, X3 and X0 in order, D7999 will be
PLC
2130. M1002 will be set after pressing X2 and before
pressing other keys. It is the same with other keys. After
pressing any key, M1010 will be ON at the time.
Note
1. When multiple keys are pressed at the same time, only
the first pressed key is valid.
2. When the power flow is OFF, D1 remains unchanged
while D2~D2+10 becomes OFF.
3. If the input exceeds 9999, overflow from high bit.
4. After an input key is pressed, D2 output bit will be set until
the next input key is pressed.
5. Only one of TKY instructions can be used in the program
and the indexed addressing can realize use for many times.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 131

6.9 Real-time clock instruction

6.9.1 TRD: Read real-time clock instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: TRD (D) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D WORD D V R √

Operand description Note

D: the starting storage element for the system time, which The TRD instruction will fail upon system clock setting error.
occupies the 7 consecutive elements starting with D Example
Function description LD M0
Read the system time and store the value in the storage TRD D10
elements designated by D. When M0 is ON, send the system time to the 7 elements
starting with D10.
The execution result of the instruction is as follows:
Element Item Clock data Element Item
SD100 Year 2000~2099 ――――――→ D10 Year
SD101 Month 1~12 ――――――→ D11 Month
Special data register SD102 Day 1~31 ――――――→ D12 Day
for real time clock SD103 Hour 0~23 ――――――→ D13 Hour
SD104 Minute 0~59 ――――――→ D14 Minute
SD105 Second 0~59 ――――――→ D15 Second
SD106 Week 0~6 ――――――→ D16 Week
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 132

6.9.2 TWR: Write real-time clock instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: TWR (S) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD D V R √

Operand description
S: the element where the system time is to be written
Element Item Clock data Element Item
――――――→
D10 Year 2000~2099 SD100 Year
――――――→
D11 Month 1~12 SD101 Month
――――――→
D12 Day 1~31 SD102 Day
Data for clock setting ――――――→
D13 Hour 0~23 SD103 Hour
――――――→
D14 Minute 0~59 SD104 Minute
――――――→
D15 Second 0~59 SD105 Second
――――――→
D16 Week 0~6 SD106 Week

Function description
LD X10
When the system time is different from EU
the real time, you can use the TWR MOV 2004 D10
instruction to correct the system time. MOV 12 D11
MOV 7 D12
Note MOV 9 D13
1. The time must use the solar MOV 53 D14
MOV 30 D15
calendar, or the instruction will not be
MOV 2 D16
executed.
LD X11
2. It is recommended to use the edge EU
to trigger the execution of the TWR D10
instruction. LD M0
TRD D20
Example
Changing the system time with the 1. Upon the rising edge of X10, write the time setting into the 7 consecutive units
TWR instruction is shown in the starting with D10.
following figure: 2. Upon the rising edge of X11, write the values of elements D10 into the system
time.
3. When M0 is On, read the system time and store it into D20.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 133

6.9.3 TADD: Add clock instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero flag SM180 Carry flag SM181

IL: TADD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD D SD V R √
S2 WORD D SD V R √

D WORD D V R √

Operand description  Second: 0~59

S1: clock data 1. The 3 storage Example

elements designated by S1 are used S1 S2 D
to store the time data. If the data is not D10 23 (hour) D20 23 (hour) D30 23 (hour)
+ =
compliant with the time format, the D11 59 (minute) D21 58 (minute) D31 58 (minute)
D12 59 (second) D22 58 (second) D32 57 (second)
system will report “Illegal instruction
operand value”.
S2: clock data 2. The 3 storage LD X10
elements designated by S2 are used MOV 23 D10
MOV 59 D11
to store another time data. If the data
MOV 59 D12
is not compliant with the time format,
MOV 23 D20
the system will report “Illegal MOV 58 D21
instruction operand value”. MOV 58 D22
D: time result storage unit. The result LD M0
of the time adding operation is stored TADD D0 D20
in the 3 storage elements designated D30
LD SM181
by D. The result will affect the carry
OUT Y10
flag SM181 and the zero flag SM180.
LD SM180
Function description OUT Y11

Add two time-format data. The 1. When X10 is ON, send the time data to the 3 storage elements starting with D10
operation rules follow the time format. and the 3 storage elements starting with D20.
Note 2. When M0 is ON, add the data starting with D10 and the data starting with D20,
The time data for the operation must and store the result in the 3 storage elements starting with D30.
meet the time setting range 3. The carry flag (SM181) will be set to ON, and the zero flag (SM180) will be set to
requirements. OFF.
 Hour: 0~23
 Minute: 0~59
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 134

6.9.4 TSUB: Subtract clock instruction

Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

LAD:
Zero flag SM180,
Influenced flag bit
borrow flag SM182

IL: TADD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD D SD V R √
S2 WORD D SD V R √

D WORD D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: clock data 1. The 3 storage S1 S2 D

D10 23 (hour) D20 23 (hour) D30 23 (hour)
elements designated by S1 are used - =
D11 59 (minute) D21 59 (minute) D31 59 (minute)
to store the time data. If the data is not
D12 58 (second) D22 59 (second) D32 59 (second)
compliant with the time format, the
system will report “Illegal instruction
operand value”.
S2: clock data 2. The 3 storage LD X10
elements designated by S2 are used MOV 23 D10
MOV 59 D11
to store another time data. If the data
MOV 58 D12
is not compliant with the time format,
MOV 23 D20
the system will report “Illegal
MOV 59 D21
instruction operand value”. MOV 59 D22
D: time result storage unit. The result LD M0
of the time subtracting operation is TSUB D10 D20 D30
stored in the 3 storage elements LD SM182
OUT Y10
designated by D. The result will affect
LD SM180
the carry flag SM181 and the zero flag
OUT Y11
SM180.
Function description
1. When X10 is ON, send the time data to the 3 storage elements starting with D10
Conduct subtract operation on the and the 3 storage elements starting with D20.
time format data, with the operation 2. When M0 is ON, subtract the data starting with D20 from the data starting with
rules following the time format. D10, and store the result in the 3 storage elements starting with D30.
Note 3. The carry flag (SM182) will be set to ON, and the zero flag (SM180) will be set to
The time data for the operation must OFF.
meet the time setting range
requirements.
 Hour: 0~23
 Minute: 0~59
 Second: 0~59
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 135

6.9.5 HOUR: Timing list instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: HOUR (S) (D1) (D2) Program steps 8

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D1 INT D V R √

D2 BOOL Y M S LM

Operand description the current data will be cleared upon PLC power off or when PLC changes from
RUN to STOP.
S: the hour comparison data. Range:
2. The timing still continues even when the alarm output D2 is ON.
0~32767.
3. The hour data in this instruction is a 16-bit integer. It will restart from 0 after
D1: time storage starting element. D1:
32767.
hour. D1+1: second.
D2: alarm output address. When Example
D1≥S, the alarm point changes to ON, LD M0
and generates output. MOV 1000 D100
LD M1
Function description HOUR D100 D200
Make judgment on the time when the M10
LD M10
input contact is ON (unit: hour).
OUT Y10
Note 1. When M0 is ON, set the comparison data of HOUR instruction.
1. To sustain the current data after 2. When M1 is ON, accumulate the time for the input contact.
power off, set D1 within the element 3. M10 will be ON when the accumulated time≥1000.
saving range (see 错误！未找到引用
源。错误！未找到引用源。). Otherwise,
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 136

6.9.6 DCMP: Compare date (=、<、>、<>、>=、<=) instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL:
DCMP＝ (S1) (S2) (D)
DCMP＜ (S1) (S2) (D)
DCMP＞ (S1) (S2) (D)
Program steps 7
DCMP＜＞ (S1) (S2) (D)
DCMP＞＝ (S1) (S2) (D)
DCMP＜＝ (S1) (S2) (D)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD V R √

S2 INT D SD V R √
D BOOL Y M S LM C T

Operand description example, “2004, 9, 31” and “2003, 2, 29” are both illegal.

S1: date comparison data 1, which Example

occupies the 3 word elements
following S1. The data must comply
with the solar calendar format, or the LD SM0
MOV 2004 D0
system will report operand error.
MOV 10 D1
S2: date comparison data 2, which MOV 25 D2
occupies the 3 word elements MOV 2004 D10
following S2. The data must comply MOV 10 D11
with the solar calendar format, or the MOV 24 D12
system will report operand error. LD X0
DCMP= D0 D10 M0
D: Comparison status output. When
DCMP< D0 D10 M1
the data meet the comparison
DCMP> D0 D10 M2
condition, D is set ON; otherwise, it is DCMP<> D0 D10 M3
set OFF. DCMP>= D0 D10 M4
Function description DCMP<= D0 D10 M5

Conduct BIN comparison on the date

data stored in the elements starting
Conduct BIN comparison on the date data stored in the elements starting with D0
with S1 and S2, and assign the
and D10, and assign the comparison result to M0.
comparison result to D.
Note
The date data stored in the elements
starting with S1 and S2 must comply
with the solar calendar format, or the
system will report operand error. For
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 137

6.9.7 TCMP: Compare time (=、<、>、<>、>=、<=) instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL:
TCMP＝ (S1) (S2) (D)
TCMP＜ (S1) (S2) (D)
TCMP＞ (S1) (S2) (D)
Program steps 7
TCMP＜＞ (S1) (S2) (D)
TCMP＞＝ (S1) (S2) (D)
TCMP＜＝ (S1) (S2) (D)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD V R √
S2 INT D SD V R √

D BOOL Y M S LM C T

Operand description “24, 10, 31” and “13, 59, 60” are both illegal.

S1: time comparison data 1, which Example

occupies the 3 word elements
following S1. The data must comply
with the 24-hour time format, or the LD SM0
MOV 20 D0
system will report operand error.
MOV 31 D1
S2: time comparison data 2, which
MOV 1 D2
occupies the 3 word elements MOV 20 D10
following S2. The data must comply MOV 30 D11
with the 24-hour time format, or the MOV 59 D12
system will report operand error. LD X0
TCMP= D0 D10 M0
D: comparison status output. When
TCMP< D0 D10 M1
the data meet the comparison
TCMP> D0 D10 M2
condition, D is set ON; otherwise, it is
TCMP<> D0 D10 M3
set OFF. TCMP>= D0 D10 M4
Function description TCMP<= D0 D10 M5

Conduct BIN comparison on the time

data stored in the elements starting
Conduct BIN comparison on the time data stored in the elements starting with D0
with S1 and S2, and assign the
and D10, and assign the comparison result to M0.
comparison result to D.
Note
The time data stored in the elements
starting with S1 and S2 must comply
with the 24-hour system, or the system
will report operand error. For example,
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 138

6.9.8 HTOS: Time (hour, minute and second) to second instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

Program
IL: HTOS (S) (D) 5
steps
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D SD R √
D WORD KnY KnM KnS T C D SD R √

Operand description Example

S: starting element of time data before

LD M1
storing conversion
HTOS D0 D10
D: starting element of time data after
storing conversion 1. When M1 is ON, convert the starting hour, minute and second of D0 to second
Function description and store the result in D10. When D0=3, D1=10 and D2=15, D10=11415.

Convert time data of S-S+2 (hour,

minute and second) to second, and
store the result in D.

6.9.9 STOH: Second to time (hour, minute and second) instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

Program
IL: STOH (S) (D) 5
steps
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D SD R √

D WORD KnY KnM KnS T C D SD R √

Operand description Example

S: starting element of time data before LD M1

storing conversion STOH D0 D10
D: starting element of time data after
1. When M1 is ON, convert the second data of D0 to hour, minute and second and
storing conversion store the result in 3 units starting with D10. When D0=1000, D10=0, D11=16 and
Function description D12=40.
Convert second data to hour, minute
and second, and store the result in D,
D+1 and D+2.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 139

6.10 High-speed I/O instruction

6.10.1 HCNT: High-speed counter drive instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: HCNT (D) (S) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D DINT C
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

Operand description Example

D: Counter SN. Range: C236~C255. LD X10

S: Comparison constant, a signed OUT SM236
LD X11
32-bit data.
RST C236
Range: -2147483648~2147483647. LD X12
Function description HCNT C236 -5

Drive the specified hardware X010 Rising Rising

Falling
high-speed counter. All high-speed X011 Reset input
counter must be driven to perform Startup input
X012
high-speed counting. Meanwhile, the
NO contact action of the counter will X000
Counting input
be judged based on the S value. 4
5
4
3 3
Note 2 2
Current value 0 1 1
0 1
The HCNT instruction, SPD instruction, -
1 -
Output situation 2 - -
external input interrupt and pulse 3 -
-
-
- 4 3
4 - -
capture may have contradictory 5 5
6 - -
- 6
7 7
hardware demands. Pay attention to C235 output contact 8

the preconditions of all system

high-speed I/Os, and refer to the 1. When X12 changes from OFF to ON, the hardware counter C236 will be
instruction description in actual initialized. X0 is the pulse input point for C236, which counts the pulse input
practice. through X0. When X12 is OFF, X0 is a common input point, and C236 cannot count
the external pulse of X0.
2. Contact actions: when the current value of the counter C236 increases from -6
to -5, the contact of C236 will be set. When the counter C236 decreases from -5 to
-6, the contact of C236 will be reset.
3. When X11 is ON, the RST instruction will be executed, C236 will be cleared, and
the C236 contact will be disconnected.
4. When PLC is powered off, the data of the high-speed counter and the contact
status is set by the user in the system block through the AutoStation software.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 140

6.10.2 DHSCS: High-speed counting compare set instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHSCS (S1) (S2 ) (D) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT C

D BOOL Y M S

Operand description DHSP and DHST. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.

S1: a 32-bit DINT data, the one with Function description

which the high-speed counter will 1. A high-speed counter will count in the interrupt mode only when it is driven by
compare. the HCNT instruction and the counting input changes from OFF to ON. When
Range: -2147483648~2147483647. high-speed counter counts to S1 in the DHSCS instruction, the bit element D will
S2: high-speed counter. be set immediately, or, in the case of a Y element, the Y element will output
Range: C236~C255. immediately.
D: target bit element, including Y, M 2. This instruction can be used when you want to set (and output, for Y elements) a
and S elements. They will be set or certain bit element by comparing the counter value with a preset value.
output immediately regardless of the Example
scan cycle. LD M1
Note OUT SM236
LD M0
1. The DHSCS instruction must work HCNT C236 1000
together with the HCNT instruction, LD M2
because DHSCS is only applicable to DHSCS 2000 C236
the high-speed counters that is driven Y10
by HCNT. LD C236
OUT Y11
2. The DHSCS instruction will be
validated only by pulse input. You 1. When M0 is ON, C236 will count in the interrupt mode when X0 changes from
cannot validate the instruction by OFF to ON (see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 for the description of
changing the counter value with the X0 input frequency). When C236 changes from 999 to 1000, the C236 contact
instructions such as DMOV or MOV. will be set. When C236 changes from 1001 to 1000, the C236 contact will be reset.
3. DHSCS (DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, When the C236 contact drives Y11, the execution of Y11 is determined by the user
DHSP, DHST) can be used repeatedly. program scan cycle.
However, at most the first six such 2. When M2 is ON, and the DHSCS instruction meets the requirements stated in
instructions can be driven at the same the preceding “Note”, Y10 will output immediately if C236 reaches 2000,
time. regardless of the the scan cycle.
4. The maximum frequency supported 3. When M1 is ON, SM236 is driven, and the C236 counter counts down. When M1
by the PLC high-speed counters will is OFF, SM236 is not driven, and the C236 counter counts up.
be seriously affected by instructions
like DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ,
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 141

6.10.3 DHSCI: High-speed counting interrupt trigger instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHSCI (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT C

S3 WORD Constant

Operand description instructions can be driven at the same time.

4. The maximum frequency supported by the PLC high-speed counters will be
S1: a 32-bit DINT data, the one with
seriously affected by instructions like DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and
which the high-speed counter will
DHST. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
compare.
Range: -2147483648~2147483647. Example
S2: high-speed counter. Main user program:
Range: C236~C255.
LD M1
S3: interrupt SN. Range: 20~25. OUT SM236
Function description LD M0
DHSCI 2000 C236 20
A high-speed counter will count in the LD C236
interrupt mode only when it is driven OUT Y11
by the HCNT instruction and the
Interrupt No.20:
counting input changes from OFF to
ON. When the counter counts to S1, LD M10
the S3 interrupt will start. You can OUT Y20
LD>= D0 100
write the interrupt according to your
OUT Y12
actual needs.
MOV 0 D0
Note 1. When M0 is ON, C236 will count in the interrupt mode when X0 changes from
1. The DHSCI instruction must work OFF to ON (see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 for the description of
together with the HCNT instruction, the X0 input frequency). When C236 changes from 999 to 1000, the C236 contact
because DHSCI is only applicable to will be set. When C236 changes from 1001 to 1000, the C236 contact will be reset.
the high-speed counters that is driven When C236 contact drives Y11, the execution of Y11 will be determined by the
by HCNT. user program scan cycle.
2. The DHSCI instruction will be 2. When M2 is ON, and the DHSCI instruction meets the requirements stated in the
validated only by pulse input. You preceding “Note”, interrupt No.20 will be executed immediately when C236
cannot validate the instruction by reaches 2000, regardless of the scan cycle.
changing the counter value with 3. When M1 is ON, SM236 is driven, and the C236 counter counts down. When M1
instructions such as DMOV or MOV. is OFF, SM236 is not driven, and the C236 counter counts up.
3. DHSCI (DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, 4. With pulse input, interrupt No.20 will be executed when C236 reaches 2000, and
DHSP, DHST) can be used repeatedly. Y20 will be driven when M10 is ON. But, the output of Y20 is related to the scan
However, at most the first six such cycle. Meanwhile, Y12 will be driven and D0 will be cleared when D0 is detected to
be larger than 100.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 142

6.10.4 DHSPI: High-speed output absolute position compare interrupt trigger instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHSPI (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT SD

S3 WORD Constant

Operand description Example

S1: a 32-bit DINT data, the one with which the high-speed Main user program:
output position element will compare.
Range: -2147483648~2147483647.
S2: high-speed output position element.
Range: SD200,SD320,SD340,SD350,SD360 and SD370.
S3: interrupt SN. Range: 53,54,55,56,57 and 58.
Function description
When the high-speed output position element is equal to S1
in DHSPI instruction, enter S3 interrupt subprogram; you can
write the program that will be executed immediately in
interrupt subprogram. You can select the interrupt SN to be 53 or other high-speed
output postion interrupt sources, and then write the program
Note
executed when passing the postion in interrupt subprogram.
1. Writing to SD element will not trigger position interrupt.
After writing, passing the position that needs interrupt again
will trigger position interrupt.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 143

6.10.5 DHSCR: High-speed counting compare reset instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHSCR (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT C

D BOOL Y M S C

Operand description 2. The DHSCR instruction will be validated only by pulse input. You cannot validate
the instruction by changing the counter value with instructions such as DMOV or
S1: a 32-bit DINT data, the one with
MOV.
which the high-speed counter will
3. DHSCR (DHSCI, DHSCS, DHSZ, DHSP, DHST) can be used repeatedly.
compare.
However, at most the first six such instructions can be driven at the same time.
Range: -2147483648~2147483647.
4. The maximum frequency supported by the PLC high-speed counters will be
S2: high-speed counter.
seriously affected by instructions like DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and
Range: C236~C255. DHST. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
D: target bit element. The action on Y,
Example
M, S or C will be valid immediately
regardless of the scan cycle. If D is a LD SM255
OUT Y10
C element, it must be S2.
LD M1
Function description HCNT C255 1000
LD C255
A high-speed counter will count in the
OUT Y20
interrupt mode only when it is driven
LD M2
by the HCNT instruction and the DHSCR 2000 C255
counting input changes from OFF to Y1
ON. When the counter counts to S1, 1. When M1 and X7 are both ON, C255 counts the phase difference of X3 and X4
the D element will be reset (and output, in the interrupt mode. When C255 changes from 999 to 1000, C255 contact will be
for Y elements) immediately. You can set, and reset when C255 changes from 1001 to 1000. When C255 contact drives
use this instruction when you want to Y20, the execution of Y20 will be determined by the user program scan cycle.
reset (and output, for Y elements) a
2. When M2 is ON, and the DHSCR instruction meets the requirements stated in
certain bit element by comparing the
the preceding “Note”, Y1 will be output immediately when C255 reaches 2000,
counter value with a preset value.
regardless of the the scan cycle.
Note 3. When the X3 pulse input is ahead of X4, SM255 is ON. When the X4 pulse input
1. The DHSCR instruction must work is ahead of X3, SM255 is OFF.
together with the HCNT instruction, 4. When X7, the startup signal of C255, is OFF, C255 will not count.
because DHSCR is only applicable to 5. When M1 and X7 are all ON, if X5 is ON, C255 will be cleared, and C255
the high-speed counters that is driven auxiliary contact will be reset.
by HCNT.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 144

6.10.6 DHSZ: High-speed counting zone compare instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHSZ (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 13
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

S3 DINT C
D BOOL Y M S

Operand description because DHSZ is only applicable to the high-speed counters that is driven by
HCNT.
S1: a 32-bit DINT data, one of the two
2. The DHSZ instruction will be validated only by pulse input. You cannot validate
numbers with which the high-speed
the instruction by changing the counter value with instructions such as DMOV or
counter will compare.
MOV.
Range: -2147483648~2147483647.
3. DHSZ (DHSCI, DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSP, DHST) can be used repeatedly.
S2: a 32-bit DINT data, one of the two
However, at most the first six such instructions can be driven at the same time.
numbers with which the high-speed
4. The maximum frequency supported by the PLC high-speed counters will be
counter will compare.
seriously affected by instructions like DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and
Range: -2147483648~2147483647.
DHST. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
S3: high-speed counter.
Example
Range: C236~C255.
LD M0
D: target bit element. The action on Y,
HCNT C249 1000
M or S will be valid immediately
LD M1
regardless of the scan cycle. DHSZ 1500 2000 C249
Function description Y10
LD SM249
1. A high-speed counter will count in OUT Y12
the interrupt mode only when it is LD C249
driven by the HCNT instruction and OUT Y6
the counting input changes from OFF 1. When M0 and X6 are both ON, C249 will count up when X0 changes from OFF
to ON. to ON, or count down when X1 changes from OFF to ON. When C249 changes
2. When the counter value is smaller from 999 to 1000, the C249 contact will be set; when C249 changes from 1001 to
than S1, the D element will be set. In 1000, the C249 contact will be reset. When C249 contact drives Y6, the execution
addition, the D+1 and D+2 elements of Y6 will be determined by the user program scan cycle.
will be reset. 2. When M1 is ON, the DHSZ instruction meets the requirements stated in the
3. When the counter value ≥S1 and preceding “Note”, the states of elements Y10~Y12 are as follows:
≤S2, the D and D+2 elements will be C249<1500: Y10: ON, Y11&Y12: OFF.
reset, while the D+1 element will be 1500≤C249≤2000: Y10, Y12: OFF, Y11: ON.
set.
C249>2000: Y10, Y11: OFF, Y12: ON.
4. When the counter value is bigger
The outputs of Y10, Y11 and Y12 are immediate, regardless of the scan cycle.
than S2, the D and D+1 elements will
3. When M0 and X6 are ON at the same time, SM249 will be reset if X0 changes
be reset, while D+2 element will be
from OFF to ON and the counter counts up, and SM249 will be set if X1 changes
set.
from OFF to ON and the counter counts down.
5. If D is a Y element, it will be output
4. When X6 is OFF, C249 stops counting.
immediately regardless of the scan
5. When M0 and X6 are both ON, if X2 is ON, C249 will be cleared, and C249
cycle.
auxiliary contact will be reset.
Note
1. The DHSZ instruction must work
together with the HCNT instruction,
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 145

6.10.7 DHST: High-speed counting table compare instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHST (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT D R

S2 INT Constant
S3 DINT C

Operand description Note

S1: the starting D element for table comparison. The 1. The DHST instruction must work together with the HCNT
following three D elements are the comparison data, SN of Y instruction, because DHST is only applicable to the
element and the output state. These four D elements form a high-speed counters that is driven by HCNT.
record. 2. The DHST instruction will be validated only by pulse input.
S2: the number of records for comparison. Range: 1~128. You cannot validate the instruction by changing the counter
S3: high-speed counter. Range: C236~C255. value with instructions such as DMOV or MOV.
3. DHST (DHSCI, DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSP, DHSZ) can be
Function description
used repeatedly. However, at most six such instructions can
1. A high-speed counter will count in the interrupt mode only be driven at the same time.
when it is driven by the HCNT instruction and the counting
4. In a user program, the DHSP and DHST instructions
input changes from OFF to ON.
cannot be valid at the same time. That means a valid DHST
2. When the counter value equates the comparison data of (or DHSP) instruction will make the following DHSP (or
the present record, the corresponding Y element will be DHST) instructions invalid.
output.
5. The maximum frequency supported by the PLC
3. The Y element specified in the present record will be high-speed counters will be seriously affected by instructions
output immediately, regardless of the scan cycle. like DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST. For
4. You can use the DHST instruction when you want to details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
immediately output, according to certain comparison data,
the Y elements specified in a certain table.

Example
The table for comparison is shown below:
Comparison data
Y element Set/Reset Operation flow
MSB LSB
D100=0 D101=100 D102=0 D103=1 1
D104=0 D105=200 D106=1 D107=0 2
D108=0 D109=300 D110=2 D111=1 3
4
D112=0 D113=300 D114=3 D115=1
Return to 1
The following is the user program:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 146

LD SM1
DMOV 100 D100
MOV 0 D102
MOV 1 D103
DMOV 200 D104
MOV 1 D106
MOV 0 D107
DMOV 300 D108
MOV 2 D110
MOV 1 D111
DMOV 100 D112
MOV 3 D114
MOV 1 D115
LD M0
HCNT C244 1000
LD M1
DHST D100 4 C244
LD M2
OUT SM244
LD C244
OUT Y10

1. In the first user-program scan cycle, assign elements D100~D115 with values to generate the table for comparison.
2. When M0 and X6 are both ON, the C244 will count when X0 changes from OFF to ON (for the input frequency, see 错误！
未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。). When C244 changes from 999 to 1000, the C244 contact will be set; when C244 changes
from 1001 to 1000, the C244 contact will be reset. When the C244 contact drives Y10, the execution of Y10 will be determined
by the user program scan cycle.
3. When M1 is ON, and the DHST instruction meets the requirements in the preceding “Note”, the compare will start with the
first record. The compare with the second record will not start until the first compare is over and the corresponding Y element
has been output. After the compare with the last record is over, the compare with the first record will start again, and SM185 will
be set. SD184 is the SN of the present record, and SD182&SD183 are the present data for comparison. The corresponding
output will be immediate, regardless of the scan cycle.
4. When M2 is ON, SM244 is ON, and C244 will count down. If M2 is OFF, SM244 is OFF, and C244 will count up.
5. When X6 is OFF, C244 is invalid.
6. When M0 and X6 are both ON, if X2 is ON, C244 will be cleared, and C244 auxiliary contact will be reset.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 147

6.10.8 DHSP: High-speed counting table compare pulse output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DHSP (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT D R
S2 INT Constant

S3 DINT C

Operand description 2. When the DHSP instruction is used together with the
PLSY instruction, the values assigned to SD180 and SD181
S1: the starting D element for table comparison. The
must meet the frequency output requirement of the PLSY
following three D elements are the comparison data, and the
instruction. For details, see the description of the PLSY
data to output to SD180&SD181. These four D elements
instruction.
form a record.
3. To stop the comparison at the last record, set the last
S2: the number of records to be compared. Range: 1~128.
output data of the table as 0. Under this situation, other
S3: high-speed counter. Range: C236~C255. DHST and DHSP instructions will be invalid. But at this time,
Function description the DHSP instruction is not regarded as a high-speed
instruction when it comes to the number limit of high-speed
1. A high-speed counter will count in the interrupt mode only
instructions.
when it is driven by the HCNT instruction and the counting
input changes from OFF to ON. 4. The DHSP instruction will be validated only by pulse input.
You cannot validate the instruction by changing the counter
2. When the counter value equates the comparison data of
value with instructions such as DMOV or MOV.
the present record, the output data of the present record will
become the values of SD180&SD181. 5. DHSP (DHSCI, DHSCS, DHSCR, DHST, DHSZ) can be
used repeatedly. However, at most the first six such
3. You can use the DHSP instruction when you want to
instructions can be driven at the same time.
control the high-speed output or assign values to certain
parameters according to a table. For example, you can set 6. In a user program, the DHSP and DHST instructions
the SD180&SD181 (double word) as the output frequency of cannot be valid at the same time. That means a valid DHSP
the PLSY instruction, and the PLSY output frequency will be (or DHST) instruction will make the following DHST (or
adjusted by the table compare result. DHSP) instructions invalid.
7. The maximum frequency supported by the PLC
Note
high-speed counters will be seriously affected by instructions
1. The DHSP instruction must be used together with the like DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST. For
HCNT instruction, because the DHST instruction cannot be details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
executed unless the related high-speed counter is driven by
the HCNT instruction.
Example
The table for comparison is shown below:
Comparison data Output data (to SD180&SD181)
Operation flow
MSB LSB MSB LSB
D100=0 D101=100 D102=0 D103=1 1
D104=0 D105=200 D106=0 D107=2 2
D108=0 D109=300 D110=0 D111=3 3
4
D112=0 D113=100 D114=0 D115=4
Return to 1
The following is the user program:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 148

LD SM1
DMOV 100 D100
MOV 0 D102
MOV 1 D103
DMOV 200 D104
MOV 0 D106
MOV 2 D107
DMOV 300 D108
MOV 0 D110
MOV 3 D111
DMOV 100 D112
MOV 0 D114
MOV 4 D115
LD M0
HCNT C244 1000
LD M1
DHSP D100 4 C244
LD M2
OUT SM244
LD C244
OUT Y10
LD M3
PLSY SD180 0 Y0

1. In the first user-program scan cycle, assign elements D100~D115 with values to generate the table for comparison.
2. When M0 and X6 are both ON, C244 will count when X0 changes from OFF to ON (for the input frequency, see 错误！未找
到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。). When C244 changes from 999 to 1000, the C244 contact will be set; when C244 changes
from 1001 to 1000, the C244 contact will be reset. When the C244 contact drives Y10, the execution of Y10 will be determined
by the user program scan cycle.
3. When M1 is ON, and the DHSP instruction meets the requirements in the preceding “Note”, the compare will start with the
first record. The compare with the second record will not start until the first compare is over and the output data has been
output to SD180&SD181. After the compare with the last record is over, the compare with the first record will start again, and
SM185 will be set. SD184 is the SN of the present record, and SD182&SD183 are the present data for comparison. The output
data will be output to SD180&SD181 immediately, regardless of the scan cycle. If you want to stop the at the last record, set the
output data of the last record to 0.
4. When M2 is ON, and SM244 is ON, C244 will count down. When M2 is OFF, and SM244 is OFF, C244 will count up.
5. When X6 is OFF, C244 is invalid.
6. When M0 and X6 are both ON, if X2 is ON, C244 will be cleared, and the C244 contact will be reset.

6.10.9 SPD: Pulse detection instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: SPD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 BOOL X

S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D WORD D V R √

Operand description S2: time unit for input point detection. Unit: ms. Operand
S2>0.
S1: input point. Range: X0~X5.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 149

D: the storage register for the counted pulse number, which

M0
will cause overflow when bigger than 65535.
Function description X0

To detect the number of pulses input through X0~X5 in the D10: measured
specified period of time (ms) and store the result in the D11: current
value

designated storage register. value

Note
1. SPD, HCNT, external input interrupt and pulse capture are
1000ms 1000ms
contradictory in their occupation of hardware. For details,
see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
2. For IVC1 and IVC2L, the SPD instruction supports input 1000
points X0~X5. For IVC2H, the SPD instruction supports input
D12: elapsed time
points X0~X7.
3. Maximum pulse input frequency: 10kHz. Detection may
Input X0
be faulty when frequency is higher than 10kHz.
Example

N（fpn）
Proximity switch
n pulse/round

LD SM0 1. When M0 is ON, count the pulses input through X0 within

1000ms, and store the counting result in D10. D11 is the
PLSY 10000 0 Y0
present counting value within the 1000ms, while D12 is the
LD M0
elapsed time within the 1000ms.
SPD X0 1000 D10
2. D10 is in positive proportion to the rotary speed of the
The time sequence chart of the example program is shown
plate in the preceding figure.
below:
3. D10 counts whenever X0 changes from OFF to ON, and
the counting value within the last 1000ms will be stored in
D10.

6.10.10 PLSY: High-speed pulse output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: PLSY (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 9
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

D BOOL Y
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 150

Operand description Example

S1: specified frequency (Hz).

Range: IVC1, IVC2L: 1~100000(Hz); IVC1L: Y0,Y1 can set
1~100000(Hz), Y2,Y3 can set 1~10000(Hz); IVC2H:
LD M1
1~200000(Hz). When S1 is outside this range, the system will
PLSY 1000 10000 Y1
report instruction operand error, and no hardware resources will
be occupied. PLSY 1000 10000 Y0
Pulses
Change S1 during the execution of the instruction will change the
Y0
output frequency in real time.
Frequency (1000)
S2: output pulse number (PLS).
Pulses
Range: 0~2147483647. When S2 is outside this range, the
Y1
system will report instruction operand error, output no pulse, and
Frequency (1000)
no hardware resources will be occupied. When S2 is 0, the pulse
will output so long as the instruction is valid. If you change S2 1. When M1 is ON, 10,000 pulses will output through Y0
during the execution of the instruction, the change will be take and Y1 at the frequency of 1000Hz. Then the pulse
effect in the next round. output will stop until M0 changes from OFF to ON when
the next round of output will start. When M0 is OFF,
D: high-speed pulse output point. Range: IVC1, IVC2L: Y0, Y1;
there will be no output.
IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7.
2. The duty cycle of the pulses is 50%. The output is
Function description
handled in the interrupt mode, regardless of the scan
To output specified amount of high-speed pulses at the specified cycle. For high frequency output, the output duty cycle
frequency. For that purpose, the load current on the PLC output at Y points is related to the load. The waveform at output
transistor should be big, but below the rated load current. points (Y0&Port 0, Y1&Port 1) is related to the load: so
Note long as the current does not exceed the rated load
current, the smaller the load is, the closer the output
1. The PLC must use the transistor output mode.
wave form is to the set operand.
2. When the PLC outputs high-frequency pulses, the following
3. SM80&SM81 controls the ON/OFF of the output at Y0
load current for the PLC output transistor must be used.
and Y1 respectively. When SM80 or SM81 is 1, the
3. The output loop (transistor) for PLSY, PWM and PLSR is output is ON.
shown as follows:
4. SM82&SM83 are the output monitors of Y0&Y1
respectively. SM82 or SM83 will be OFF after the output
resistance
Load

PLC

External is complete.
power supply
5. SD50: the MSB of the output pulse number at Y0 for
PLSY and PLSR instructions.
100m A
SD51: the LSB of the output pulse number at Y0 for
4. With large load and current, the transistor off time is relatively PLSY and PLSR instructions.
longer. The PWM, PLSY and PLSR instructions require that the SD52: the MSB of the output pulse number at Y1 for
transistor output terminal be connected to their corresponding PLSY and PLSR instructions.
loads. When the output waveform does not conform to the SD53: the LSB of the output pulse number at Y1 for
instruction operand, increase the load current of the transistor PLSY and PLSR instructions.
(the transistor load current ≤100mA). SD54: the MSB of the total output pulse number at Y0
5. During or after the execution of the high-speed instruction, no and Y1 for PLSY and PLSR instructions.
other instructions can use the same port, unless the high-speed
SD55: the LSB of the total output pulse number at Y0
pulse output instruction is invalid.
and Y1 for PLSY and PLSR instructions.
6. Using multiple PLSY instructions can get independent pulse
6. SD50~SD55 can be changed with the instruction
outputs. You can also use PWM or PLSR instructions to get
DMOV or MOV, or through the ConstrolStar software.
independent pulse outputs at different output ports.
7. Refer to the DHSP instruction if you want to use the
7. When multiple PWM, PLSY or PLSR instructions work on the
input pulse number to control the PLSY output pulse
same output point, the first valid instruction will control the state
frequency.
of the output point, and others will not affect the output point
state.
8. Just like other high-speed instructions (DHSCS, DHSCR,
DHSZ, DHSP, DHST and HCNT), the PLSY instruction must
meet the system’s requests on high-speed I/O.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 151

Relevant elements:
Address Name Action and function R/W
SM80 Y0 high-speed pulse output control Y0 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM81 Y1 high-speed pulse output control Y1 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM82 Y000 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM83 Y001 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
At ON, you can use PLSY instructions in interrupts and subprograms,
SM86 Y0 interrupt drive pulse ouptut valid R/W
and continuous and repeated drive with power flow in main programs
At ON, you can use PLSY instructions in interrupts and subprograms,
SM87 Y1 interrupt drive pulse ouptut valid R/W
and continuous and repeated drive with power flow in main programs
SM262 Y002 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y002 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM264 Y004 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y004 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM265 Y005 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y005 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM266 Y006 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y006 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM267 Y007 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y007 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM272 Y002 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y002 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM274 Y004 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y004 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM275 Y005 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y005 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM276 Y006 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y006 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready)) R
SM277 Y007 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y007 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R

Address Action and function R/W

SD50 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L, IVC2H) R/W
SD51 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L, IVC2H) R/W
SD52 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L) R/W
SD53 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L) R/W
SD54 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC2L) R/W
SD55 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC2L) R/W
SD160 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2H) R/W
SD161 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2H) R/W
SD162 PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD163 PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD164 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD165 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD166 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD167 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD168 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD169 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD170 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD171 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD80 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD81 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD82 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD83 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD200 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L, IVC2H) R/W
SD201 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L, IVC2H) R/W

SD210 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L) R/W

SD211 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L) R/W
SD320 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2H) R/W
SD321 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2H) R/W
SD330 Current position of Y3 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD331 Current position of Y3output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD340 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD341 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD350 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD351 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 152

Address Action and function R/W

SD360 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD361 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD370 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD371 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W

6.10.11 PLSR: Count pulse with acceleration/deceleration output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC1S IVC1L IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: PLSR (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

S3 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D1 BOOL Y

Operand description  Note

S1: maximum frequency. Range: 10~20,000(Hz), IVC1L: For IVC1, the acceleration/deceleration time must not be
Y2,Y3 range:10~10000(Hz). When S1 is specified indirectly, smaller than 50ms.
and if the specified value is outside this setting range, it will The speed change is evenly divided into 10 steps during the
be regarded as 10 or 20,000, depending on which limit it acceration or deceleration, each step being S1/10.
breaks. In that case, the system will report operand illegal, D: high-speed pulse output point. Range: IVC1, IVC2L: Y0,
and the high-speed pulse output will be based on the default Y1; IVC1L: Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3; IVC2H: Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7.
10Hz or 20,000Hz. Function description
S2: total output pulse number (PLS). Range:
The PLSR instruction is a high-speed pulse output
110~2147483647. When S2 is outside this range, the instruction with acceleration/deceleration function. It is used
system will report instruction operand error, output no pulse, for locating. Targeting at the specified maximum frequency,
and no hardware resources will be occupied. the pulse output will accelerate evenly. After the output pulse
S3: acceleration or deceleration time (ms). If number reaches the preset value, the pulse output will
S1×S3<100,000, S3 will be regarded as 100000/S1. decelerate evenly.
Meanwhile the system will report instruction operand error,
and the acceleration or deceleration time will be uncertain.
If S1×S3>S2×909, S3 will be regarded as S2×909/S1.
Meanwhile the system will report instruction operand error,
and the acceleration or deceleration time will be uncertain.

The operation process is shown in the following figure:

S1 highest frequency: 10 ~ 2000Hz

10 1
9 2
Output: 8 3
Y0 or Y1
s

7
ep

Sp

4
st

ee
10

6
d

5 Speed change
ch

S1 total output pulse

in

an

5
ge

number: 110 ~ 6 in one step is at

ge
an

most 1/10 of S1
in

4 2,147,483,647pls
ch

7
10
d
ee

st

3 8
ep
Sp

2 9
1 10

S9 acceleration time S5 deceleration time

Time (sec)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 153

Note
1. The output frequency of this instruction is 10~20,000Hz. When 1. When M0 is ON, Y0 and Y1 output 110 pulses
the acceleration/deceleration rate exceeds that range, it will be respectively at set frequencies. When M0 changes from
automatically adjusted according to that range, regardless of the OFF to ON, pulses will be output again. When M0 is
scan cycle. OFF, the output will stop.
2. Use the transistor output. During the high-speed pulse output, 2. The operand change during the execution of the
the output current must comply with the related regulations. The instruction will not be valid until the next time this
waveform at output points (Y0&Port 0, Y1&Port 1) is related to instruction is executed.
the load: so long as the current does not exceed the rated load 3. SM80&SM81 controls the ON/OFF of the output at Y0
current, the smaller the load is, the closer the output waveform is and Y1 respectively. When SM80 or SM81 is 1, the
to the set operand. output will stop.
3. During the execution of the high-speed instruction, so long as 4. SM82&SM83 are the output monitors of Y0&Y1
the power flow is not OFF, no other instructions can use the respectively. SM82 & SM83 will be ON when the output
same port, unless the high-speed pulse output instruction is is going on, or OFF when the output is over.
invalid. 5. SD50: the MSB of the output pulse number at Y0 for
4. Using two PLSR instructions can output two independent PLSY and PLSR instructions.
pulses at Y0 and Y1. You can also use PLSR and the PWM (or SD51: the LSB of the output pulse number at Y0 for
PLSY) instruction to get independent pulse outputs at different PLSY and PLSR instructions.
output ports (Y0, Y1). SD52: the MSB of the output pulse number at Y1 for
5. When multiple PWM, PLSY or PLSR instructions work on the PLSY and PLSR instructions.
same output point, the first valid instruction will control the state SD53: the LSB of the output pulse number at Y1 for
of the output point, and others will not affect the output point PLSY and PLSR instructions.
state. SD54: the MSB of the total output pulse number at Y0
6. Just like other high-speed instructions (DHSCS, DHSCR, and Y1 for PLSY and PLSR instructions.
DHSZ, DHSP, DHST and HCNT), the PLSR instruction must
SD55: the LSB of the total output pulse number at Y0
meet the system’s requests on high-speed I/O.
and Y1 for PLSY and PLSR instructions.
Example 6. SD50~SD55 can be changed with the instruction
DMOV or MOV, or through the AutoStation software.

LD M0
PLSR 10 110 1000 Y1
PLSR 10 110 1000 Y0
Relevant elements:
Address Name Action and function R/W
SM80 Y0 high-speed pulse output control Y0 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM81 Y1 high-speed pulse output control Y1 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM82 Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM83 Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM262 Y002 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y002 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM264 Y004 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y004 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM265 Y005 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y005 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM266 Y006 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y006 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM267 Y007 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y007 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM272 Y002 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y002 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM274 Y004 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y004 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM275 Y005 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y005 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM276 Y006 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y006 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM277 Y007 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y007 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R

Address Action and function R/W

SD50 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L, IVC2H) R/W
SD51 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L, IVC2H) R/W
SD52 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L) R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 154

Address Action and function R/W

SD53 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2L) R/W
SD54 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (MSB) ( IVC2L) R/W
SD55 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (LSB) ( IVC2L) R/W
SD160 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L, IVC2H) R/W
SD161 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L, IVC2H) R/W
SD162 PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (MSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD163 PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (LSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD164 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (MSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD165 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (LSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD166 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (MSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD167 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (LSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD168 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (MSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD169 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (LSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD170 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (MSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD171 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (LSB) ( IVC2H) R/W
SD80 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD81 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD82 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD83 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD200 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L ,IVC2L,IVC2H) R/W
SD201 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L ,IVC2L,IVC2H) R/W

SD210 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L ,IVC2L) R/W

SD211 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L ,IVC2L) R/W
SD320 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L ,IVC2H) R/W
SD321 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L ,IVC2H) R/W
SD330 Current position of Y3 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD331 Current position of Y3 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1L) R/W
SD340 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD341 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD350 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD351 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD360 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD361 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD370 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2H) R/W
SD371 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2H) R/W

6.10.12 PLS: Pulse output instruction of envelope

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: PLS (S1) (S2) (D1) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

D1 BOOL Y

Operand description
S1: the starting D element Function description
S2: output section number. Range: 0~255 1. Use the ConstrolStar instruction wizzard to generate the
D: high-speed pulse output point. Range: IVC1, IVC2L: Y0, PLS instruction, which can be called like subprograms.
Y1;IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7. When the power flow is ON, the system will output
corresponding pulses according to the configuration. You
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 155

can control ON or OFF of the PG, and set frequency & pulse ( FN  FN 1 )  ( FN  FN 1 )  Tup
P
number. 2000  ( Fmax  Fmin )
2. There is no output when the section number is 0. 2) When the speed of step N is smaller than that of step N-1,
3. SM80 and SM81 can be used to stop the high-speed the pulse number of step N must meet the following
pulse output. Other flag bits are the same as other condition:
high-speed I/O instructions. ( FN  FN 1 )  ( FN  FN 1 )  Tdown
P
4. The subprogram PLS_SET generated by the AutoStation 2000  ( Fmax  Fmin )
is as follows (n: D element addr. M: total section number): 3. In particular,
LD SM0 1) When N=1, the frequency of step N-1 is used instead of
DMOV section 1 step frequency Dn Fmin in the above format.
DMOV section 1 step pulse number Dn+2 2) When all the step number is 1, that is to say, only one
DMOV section 2 step frequency Dn+4 section, the pulse number must meet the following condition:
DMOV section 2 step pulse number Dn+6 ( F1  Fmin )  ( F1  Fmin )  (Tup  Tdown )
P
DMOV section 3 step frequency Dn+8 2000  ( Fmax  Fmin )
DMOV section 3 step pulse number Dn+10 3) The pulse number of the last step must meet the following
... format:
DMOV section M step frequency Dn+4M-4 ( FM  FM 1 )  ( FM  FM 1 )  (Tup  Tdown )
P
DMOV section M step pulse number Dn+4M-2 2000  ( Fmax  Fmin )
DMOV max. speed Dn+4M 4) The frequency set in every step must be within the range
MOV min. speed Dn+4M+2 of maximum speed and minimum speed.
MOV acceleration time Dn+4M+3 5) The maximum total pulse number of all steps is 999,999.
MOV deceleration time Dn+4M+4 4. Use the transistor output. During the high-speed pulse
Note output, the output current must comply with the related
regulations. The waveform at output points (Y0&Port 0,
1. It is recommended to use the PTO instruction wizard to
Y1&Port 1) is related to the load: so long as the current does
generate PLS instruction. If you write the PLS instruction
not exceed the rated load current, the smaller the load is, the
manually, note that the pulse number of the steps must not
closer the output waveform is to the set operand.
be too small. With set acceleration, the pulse number of
5. During the execution of the high-speed instruction, so long
each step must be bigger than the min. pulse number
as the power flow is not OFF, no other instructions can use
required by frequency transfer.
the same port, unless the high-speed pulse output
2. Use P to stand for the pulse number that a certain step
instruction is invalid.
outputs; FN : frequency of section N; F max : the maximum 6. The PLSY, PLSR, PLS and locating instructions can
speed; Fmin : the minimum speed; Tup : the acceleration time; output high-speed pulses through Y0 and Y1. Note that only
Tdown : the deceleration time. one instruction can use one output port at one time.
1) When the speed of step N is bigger than that of step N-1,
the pulse number of step N must meet the following
condition:
Address Name Action and function R/W
SM80 Y0 high-speed pulse output control Y0 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM81 Y1 high-speed pulse output control Y1 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM82 Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM83 Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM262 Y002 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y002 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM264 Y004 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y004 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM265 Y005 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y005 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM266 Y006 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y006 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM267 Y007 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y007 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM272 Y002 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y002 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM274 Y004 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y004 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM275 Y005 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y005 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready)) R
SM276 Y006 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y006 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM277 Y007 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y007 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM88 Evelope loop execution Evelope loop execution at ON R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 156

Address Action and function R/W

SD56 Current output section number when Y000 envelope outputs R
SD57 Current output section number when Y001 envelope outputs R
SD88 Rising time of envelope (ms) R/W
SD89 Falling time of envelope (ms) R/W
SD252 Current output section number when Y002 envelope outputs R
SD253 Current output section number when Y003 envelope outputs R
SD254 Current output section number when Y004 envelope outputs R
SD255 Current output section number when Y005 envelope outputs R
SD256 Current output section number when Y006 envelope outputs R
SD257 Current output section number when Y007 envelope outputs R
SD50 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD51 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD52 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD53 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD54 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD55 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD160 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD161 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD162 PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD163 PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD164 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD165 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD166 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD167 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD168 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD169 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD170 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD171 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD80 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD81 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD82 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD83 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD200 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2L,IVC2H) R/W
SD201 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2L,IVC2H) R/W

SD210 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W

SD211 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W

SD320 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD321 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD330 Current position of Y3 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD331 Current position of Y3 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD340 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD341 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD350 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD351 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD360 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD361 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD370 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD371 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 157

6.10.13 PLSB: Count pulse with base frequency and acceleration/deceleration output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2H

PLSB (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (D) Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: PLSB (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (D) Program steps 12

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S3 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S4 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D1 BOOL Y

Operand description S3: total output pulse number (PLS). Range: 5~999999.
When S3 is outside this range, the system will report
S1: base frequency (Hz). Range: 0~20000Hz. When S1 is instruction operand error, output no pulse, and no hardware
outside this range, the system will report instruction operand resources will be occupied.
error, output no pulse, and no hardware resources will be S4: acceleration time (ms). Range: 0~10000. When S4 is
occupied. outside this range, the system will report instruction operand
error, output no pulse, and no hardware resources will be
S2: maximum frequency (Hz). Range: 10~20000 (Hz). When
occupied.
S2 is outside this range, the system will report instruction
D: pulse output point. Range: IVC1, IVC2L: Y0, Y1; IVC2H:
operand error, output no pulse, and no hardware resources
Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7.
will be occupied.
Function description
The PLSB instruction is a high-speed pulse output instruction with base frequency and acceleration/deceleration functions. It is
used for locating. Targeting at the specified maximum frequency, the pulse output will accelerate evenly from base frequency.
After the output pulse number reaches the preset value, the pulse output will decelerate evenly to base frequency.
The operation process is shown in the following figure:

S2 Max. frequency: 10~20000 Hz

60 1
59 2
Output: Y0 or Y1
58 3
57 4
... 5
S3total output pulse Speed change in one step is at most 1/60 of S2~S1
5 ...
number: 5~999,999pls
4 57
3
Speed change in 60 steps Speed change in 60 steps58 S 1 base frequency: 0~20000Hz
2 59
1 60

S4 acceleration time S4 deceleration time

Time (sec)

Note and frequency), accelerate or decelerate according to the

set operand values and ensure the output pulse number is
1. The output frequency of this instruction is 10~20,000Hz.
correct. The output frequency and ACC/DEC time may be
When the acceleration/deceleration rate exceeds that range,
smaller than the set operand values.
it will be automatically adjusted according to that range,
3. The instruction uses speed change in 60 steps. When the
regardless of the scan cycle.
operand is set improperly or the pulse number is small,
2. When the operand is set improperly (for example, the
reduce the steps properly.
pulse number is smaller than corresponding ACC/DEC time
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 158

4. Use the transistor output. During the high-speed pulse 1. When M0 is ON, Y0 and Y1 output 10000 pulses
output, the output current must comply with the related respectively at set frequencies. When M0 changes from OFF
regulations. The waveform at output points (Y0&Port 0, to ON, pulses will be output again. When M0 is OFF, the
Y1&Port 1) is related to the load: so long as the current does output will stop.
not exceed the rated load current, the smaller the load is, the 2. The operand change during the execution of the
closer the output waveform is to the set operand. instruction will not be valid until the next time this instruction
5. During the execution of the high-speed instruction, so long is executed.
as the power flow is not OFF, no other instructions can use 3. SM80&SM81 controls the ON/OFF of the output at Y0 and
the same port, unless the high-speed pulse output Y1 respectively. When SM80 or SM81 is 1, the output will
instruction is invalid. stop.
6. Using two PLSB instructions can output two independent 4. SM82&SM83 are the output monitors of Y0&Y1
pulses. You can also use PWM or PLSY instruction to get respectively. SM82&SM83 will be ON when the output is
independent pulse outputs at different output ports. going on, or OFF when the output is over.
7. When multiple PWM, PLSY or PLSB instructions work on 5. SD50: the MSB of the output pulse number at Y0 for
the same output point, the first valid instruction will control PLSB instruction.
the state of the output point, and others will not affect the SD51: the LSB of the output pulse number at Y0 for PLSB
output point state. instruction.
8. Just like other high-speed instructions (DHSCS, DHSCR, SD52: the MSB of the output pulse number at Y1 for PLSB
DHSZ, DHSP, DHST and HCNT), the PLSB instruction must instruction.
meet the system’s requests on high-speed I/O. SD53: the LSB of the output pulse number at Y1 for PLSB
9. The high-speed, envelope and locating instructions can instruction.
output high-speed pulses through Y0 and Y1. Note that only
SD54: the MSB of the total output pulse number at Y0 and
one instruction can use one output port at one time.
Y1 for PLSB instruction.
Example SD55: the LSB of the total output pulse number at Y0 and Y1
for PLSB instruction.
6. SD50~SD55 can be changed with the instruction DMOV
or MOV, or through the AutoStation software.
LD M0
PLSR 100 10000 10000 1000 Y1
PLSR 100 10000 10000 1000 Y0
Relevant elements:
Address Name Action and function R/W
SM80 Y0 high-speed pulse output control Y0 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM81 Y1 high-speed pulse output control Y1 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM82 Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM83 Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM262 Y002 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y002 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM264 Y004 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y004 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM265 Y005 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y005 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM266 Y006 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y006 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM267 Y007 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y007 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM272 Y002 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y002 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM274 Y004 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y004 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM275 Y005 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y005 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM276 Y006 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y006 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM277 Y007 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y007 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R

Address Action and function R/W

SD50 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD51 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD52 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD53 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD54 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD55 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD160 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 159

Address Action and function R/W

SD161 PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD164 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD165 PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD166 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD167 PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD168 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD169 PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD170 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (MSB) R/W
SD171 PLSY accumulated output Y7 total pulse number (LSB) R/W
SD80 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD81 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC1) R/W
SD82 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD83 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD200 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (MSB) (IVC2L,IVC2H) R/W
SD201 Current position of Y0 output locating instruction (LSB) (IVC2L,IVC2H) R/W

SD210 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W

SD211 Current position of Y1 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W

SD320 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD321 Current position of Y2 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD340 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD341 Current position of Y4 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD350 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD351 Current position of Y5 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD360 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD361 Current position of Y6 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W
SD370 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (MSB) R/W
SD371 Current position of Y7 output locating instruction (LSB) R/W

6.10.14 PWM: Pulse output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1S IVC1L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: PWM (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D BOOL Y

Operand description You can change the output pulses in real-time by

changing S2 during the execution of the instruction.
S1: pulse width (ms/μs).
S2 must be bigger than S1, or the system will report
Range: 0~32767 (ms). When S1 is bigger than 32767, the system
illegal instruction operand, no pulse will be output,
will report illegal instruction operand, and no hardware resources
and no system resources will be occupied.
will be occupied.
D: high-speed pulse output point. Range: IVC1,
You can change the output pulses in real-time by changing S1
IVC2L: Y0, Y1; IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y4, Y5,
during the execution of the instruction. When SM84=0, the unit of
Y6, Y7.
S1 is ms; when SM84=1, the unit of S1 is μs.
Function description
S2: pulse cycle (ms).
Range: 1~32767. When S2 is outside the range, the system will Output PWM pulses with the width of S1 and cycle of
report illegal instruction operand, no pulse will be output, and no S2 at the port designated by D.
system resources will be occupied.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 160

Note PWM 40 200 Y1

1. When S1 is 0, Y0 or Y1 output is OFF. When S1 is equates S2, t

Y0 or Y1 output is ON.
Y0
2. The waveform at output points (Y0&Port 0, Y1&Port 1) is related
to the load: so long as the current does not exceed the rated load To

current, the smaller the load is, the closer the output waveform is to t

the set operand. Therefore, in order to output high-speed pulses,

Y1
the load current at the PLC output transistor must be big, but
smaller than the rated load current. To

3. During the execution of the high-speed instruction, so long as the Where “t” is the pulse width and T0 is the pulse cycle.
power flow is not OFF, no other instructions can use the same port, 1. When M0 is ON, Y0 and Y1 output PWM pulses
unless the high-speed pulse output instruction is invalid. with the width of 40ms and cycle of 200ms. When M0
4. Using two PWM instructions can output two independent pulses is OFF, the output will stop, regardless of the scan
at Y0 and Y1. You can also use the PLSY and PLSR instructions to cycle.
get independent pulse outputs at different output ports (Y0, Y1). 2. SM80 and SM81 control the output ON/OFF of Y0
5. When multiple PWM, PLSY or PLSR instructions work on the and Y1 respectively. When SM80 and SM81 are ON,
same output point, the first valid instruction will control the state of the output will stop.
the output point, and others will not affect the output point state. 3. SM82 and SM83 monitor the output of Y0 and Y1
6. Just like other high-speed instructions (DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, respectively. When M0 is OFF, SM82 and SM83 are
DHSP, DHST and HCNT), the PWM instruction must meet the OFF.
system’s requests on high-speed I/O.
Example

LD M0
PWM 40 200 Y0
Relevant elements:
Address Name Action and function R/W
SM80 Y0 high-speed pulse output control Y0 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM81 Y1 high-speed pulse output control Y1 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W
SM82 Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM83 Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM84 PWM time base unit Microsecond at ON and millisecond at OFF
SM264 Y004 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y004 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM265 Y005 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y005 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM266 Y006 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y006 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM267 Y007 pulse output stop instruction After setting, Y007 pulse will be disabled R/W
SM274 Y004 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y004 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM275 Y005 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y005 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM276 Y006 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y006 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R
SM277 Y007 pulse output monitor (busy/ready) Y007 high-speed pulse output monitor (ON: busy, OFF: ready) R

6.11 Control calculation instruction

6.11.1 PID: PID instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1S IVC1L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: PID (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 9
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 161

S1 INT D R √
S2 INT D R √
S3 INT D R √
D INT D R √

Operand description BIT0 process value (positive change) overflows

Bit1 process value (negative change) overflows
D: calculation result output after the program is executed (MV)
Bit2 output value (positive change) overflows
S1: preset value (SV)
Bit3 output value (negative change) overflows
S2: current value (PV)
Where, S3~S3+6 are the mandatory user set
S3: sampling time (Ts). Range: 1~32767(ms). It must be set bigger than
operands, while S3+15~S3+19 are optional user
the calculation time.
set operands. You can set the operands through
S3+1: action, alarm and thresholds setting
the PID instruction wizard of the AutoStation.
Value and meaning
Bit Function description
0 1
0 Forward Reverse 1. PID calculation will be carried out when the
Process value alarm Process value alarm power flow is ON and it is the sampling time.
1
disabled enabled
2. Multiple PID instructions can be executed
Output value alarm Output value alarm
2 simultaneously (no limit on the loop number).
disabled enabled
However, note that the elements used as S1, S2,
3~4 Reserved
Output threshold Output threshold
S3 or D should be different.
5
setting disabled setting enabled 3. The PID instruction is applicable to timed
6~15 Reserved interrupt subprograms, ordinary subprograms and
S3+2: input filter constant (α). Range: 0~99 [%]. Zero means no input the main program. Note that before using the PID
filtering function. instruction, confirm the operand settings and
S3+3: proportional gain (Kp). Range: 1~32767 [%]. clear the internal data registers S3+7 first.
S3+4: integral time constant (TI). Range: 0~32767(×100ms). Zero 4. The input filtering constant can smooth the
means limit, or no integral. change of measured value.
S3+5: differential gain (KD). Range: 0~100[%]. Zero means no 5. The differential gain can smooth the change of
differential gain. output value.
S3+6: differential time (TD). Range: 0~32767(×10ms). Zero means no 6. Action direction: BIT0 of S3+1 is used to set
differential processing. the forward (positive reactioin) and reverse
(negative reaction) of the system.
S3+7~S3+14: internal data register for PID operation
7. Output thresholds: when the output threshold
S3+15: PID process value (positive change) alarm point. Range:
setting is enabled (BIT5&BIT2 of S3+1 are 1 and
0~32767 (when BIT1 of S3+1 is 1).
0 respectively), the integral of PID can be
S3+16: PID process value (negative change) alarm point. 0~32767
controlled from becoming too big. The output
(when BIT1 of S3+1 is 1).
value is shown as below:
S3+17: PID output value (positive change) alarm point 0~32767 (when
Output value
BIT2&BIT5 of S3+1 are 1&0 respectively). Without
Output upper limit: -32768~32767 (when BIT2&BIT5 of S3+1 are 0&1 output limits
S3+17
No output
respectively). Upper limit

S3+18: PID output value (negative change) alarm point. Range: S3+18
No output
0~32767 (when BIT2&BIT5 of S3+1 are 1&0 respectively). Lower limit
With output
Output lower limit: -32768~32767 (when BIT2&BIT5 of S3+1 are 0&1 limits
Time
respectively).
S3+19: PID alarm output
8. Alarm setting: when the output thresholds are set valid (in S3+1, BIT1 is 1, BIT2 is 1 and BIT 5 is 0), the PID instruction will
compare the current value with the preset value in S3+15~S3+18. If the current value is bigger than the preset value, PID will
report alarm, and the corresponding BITs in S3+19 will be set. In this way, you can monitor the input change and output change.
See the following figures.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 162

Input change Output change

Positive change
Positive change

0 Sampling times
0 Sampling times

Negative change
Negative change
Alarm flag
Alarm flag
S3+19
bit 0 ON OFF S3+19
bit 2 ON OFF
S3+19
bit 1 OFF S3+19
bit 3 OFF ON
ON

9．Basic PID equations:

Direction PID equations

EVn  PVnf  1  SV
Forward TD
Dn  PVnf  PVnf  2  2 PVnf  1  αD TD  Dn  1
TS αD TD T S  α D T D
MVn   ΔMV

EVn  SV PVnf  1

Reverse TD
Dn  2 PVnf  1  PVn f  PVnf  2   αD TD  Dn  1
T S αD TD TS αD T D
MV n   ΔMV

Operand description:
Symbol Description Symbol Description
EVn Dn
The current error value The current differential value

EVn  1 The previous error value Dn  1 The previous differential value

SV The set point value KP The proportion gain
PVnf The calculated process value TS The sampling time
PVnf  1 The previsou process value TI The integral time
PVnf  2 The second previous Process Value TD The differential time
ΔMV The change in the output manipulation values αD The differential gain
MV The current output manipulation value

Example
// PID initialization. If the control operands are the same, you can initialize the operands only once.
LD SM1 //Initialization, executed only once
MOV 1000 D500 //Setting target value
MOV 500 D510 //Sampling time(Ts) Range: 1~32767(ms). It must be bigger than the
//calculation time
MOV 7 D511 //Action direction
MOV 70 D512 //Input filtering constant (α) Range: 0~99[%]. Zero means no input filtering
MOV 100 D513 //Proportional gain (Kp) Range:1~32767[%]
MOV 25 D514 //Integral time (TI) Range: 0~32767(×100ms). Zero means limit, or no integral
MOV 0 D515 //Differential gain (KD) Range: 0~100[%]. Zero means no differential gain
MOV 63 D516 //Differential time (TD) Range: 0~32767 (×10ms). Zero means no differential
// processing
FMOV 0 D517 8 //Clearing the memory for the transit data of PID calculation
MOV 2000 D525 //Process value (positive change) alarm setting 0~32767
MOV 2000 D526 //Process value (negative change) alarm setting 0~32767
MOV 2000 D527 //Output value (positive change) alarm setting 0~32767
MOV 2000 D528 //Output value (negative change) alarm setting 0~32767
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 163

//PID instruction execution

LD M0 //User-controlled PID calculation program
FROM 0 5 D501 1 //Input current measured value (users can input measured values
//according to the actual situation)
PID D500 D501 D510 D502 //PID instruction: PID S1 S2 S3 D
TO 0 8 D502 1 //PID calculation result is fed back to the controlled system (users can
//handle the PID calculation result according to the actual situation)
The LAD of the above instructions is shown below: 3. The maximum error of sampling time (TS) is -(scan cycle
+1ms)~+(scan cycle). When TS is small, the PID effect will
be affected. It is recommended to use PID instruction in the
timed interrupt.
4. When setting the PID output thresholds, if the upper limit
is smaller than the lower limit, the system will report operand
error, and no PID calculation will be carried out.
5. When the process value alarm and output value alarm are
enabled, S3+15~S3+18 cannot be set negative, or the
system will report operand error, and no PID calculation will
be carried out.
6. Setting BIT2 and BIT5 of S3+1 ON at the same time will
be regarded as invalid (essentially the same as setting BIT2
and BIT5 OFF), and there will be no limit, nor output value
alarm.
7. When the PID control operands (S3~S3+6) are set
outside their ranges, the system will report operand error,
and no PID calculation will be carried out.
8. When the sampling time is smaller than the scan cycle, if
there is data overflow or result overflow during the
calculation, there will be no alarm, and the PID calculation
continues.
9. The PID operands must be initialized before the PID
The PLC will initialize the PID operands only in the first scan
instruction is executed the first time. If the operands remain
cycle. When X2 is ON, the current measured value will be
the same during the operation, and the related operand
read from external A/D module (the actual situation could be
elements will not be covered by other programs, you can
different), assigned to the corresponding elements, and the
initialize the PID operands only once. However, if the data in
PID calculation will be carried out. The calculation result will
the transit data registers are changed during the PID
be converted into analog signals through the external D/A
calculation, the calculation result will be incorrect.
module (the actual situation could be different) and fed to the
controlled system.
Note
1. The operand D should be a register outside of the Saving
Range. Otherwise, it should be cleared (LD SM0 MOV 0
D****) in the first operation.
2. The PID instructions occupies 20 consecutive registers
starting with S3.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 164

6.11.2 RAMP: Ramp wave signal output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1S IVC1L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: RAMP (S1) (S2) (D1) (S3) (D2) Program steps 12
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D1 INT D V R √
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D2 BOOL Y M S LM C T

Operand description
S1: starting value D1
S2: end value
D1: output value
S3: step number (S3>0, or system will report operand error D2
and do not execute the calculation)
D2: output state 0
SM15
Function description
S3
In each scan cycle, when the power flow is ON, this
instruction can determine the increment and current output
Note
value D1 according to the ramp wave height and step
number. When the output value D1 reaches S2, it will keep 1. If the result is not divisible when calculating the program
stable, and the output state D2 will be set ON. If the power steps, round off to the nearest whole number.
flow falls, the output state D2 will be set OFF, but the output 2. The instruction will generate one ramp data upon every
value D1 will not change, until the power flow rises again, rising edge.
when D1 will be initialized as S1, and continue to conduct 3. When S1=S2, D1=S2, D2=ON.
the next ramp calculation. 4. The total number of RAMP, HACKLE and TRIANGLE
See the following figure: instructions in a program should not exceed 100.
Example
pf
//Initialize registers upon the first scan cycle after the
S2 power-on
S1 LD SM1
D1
MOV 0 D0
MOV 2000 D1
D2
//Execute RAMP instruction when X0 is ON
pf: state of the power flow
LD X0
Analysis of the execution process of the ramp instruction is
RAMP D0 D1 D10 1000 M0
shown in the following figure (S3=5):
//Output the ramp function result to external DA module
when X1=ON to generate ramp wave form
LD X1
TO 0 6 D10 1
The LAD of the preceding instructions is shown below:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 165

D1=2000, D10 will increase no more, and M0 will be ON.

During the generation of the ramp function, if the power flow
falls, the output state D2 will be OFF, the output value D1 will
keep its current value until the next rising edge, when
D10=D0 and a new ramp starts.
1. When X0 is ON, D10 (in the first cycle, D10=D0=0) will 2. You can use an external special module to convert the
increase by 2 (2000/1000) in every scan cycle. When D10= data into analog waveform.

6.11.3 HACKLE: Hackle wave signal output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1S IVC1L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: HACKLE (S1) (S2) (D1) (S3) (D2) Program steps 12
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D1 INT D V R √

S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

D2 BOOL Y M S LM C T

Operand description The analysis of the hackle wave instruction is shown in

the following figure (S3=5):
S1: starting value
S2: end value
D1: output value D1
S3: step number (S3>0, or system will report operand error and
do not execute the calculation)
D2: output state
D2
Function description
In each scan cycle, when the power flow is ON, this instruction
can determine the increment and current output value D1 SM15

according to the hackle wave height and step number. When S3

the output value reaches S2, it will be initialized as S1 and the
state output D2 will be set ON. If the power flow in the next scan Note
cycle is still ON, D2 will be set OFF to produce the next hackle
1. If the result is not divisible when calculating the
wave. If the power flow falls, the output state D2 will be OFF,
program steps, round off to the nearest whole number.
and the output value D1 will keep its current value until the next
The instruction will generate a series of continuous
rising edge, when the output value D1 will be initialized as S1,
hackle wave data so long as the power flow keep ON.
and the next hackle wave will be created, as shown in the
2. When S1=S2, D1=S2, D2=ON (no counting pulse).
following figure.
3. The total number of RAMP, HACKLE and TRIANGLE
instructions in a program should not exceed 100.
pf
Example
S2
//Initialize registers upon the first scan cycle after
S1
D1 power-on
LD SM1
D2 MOV 0 D0
pf: state of the power flow MOV 2000 D1
//Execute HACKLE instruction when X0 is ON
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 166

LD X0 1. When X0 is ON, D10 (in the first cycle, D10=D0=0) will

HACKLE D0 D1 D10 1000 M0 increase by 2 (2000/1000) in every scan cycle. When
//When X1 is ON, output the result of ramp function to external D10=D1=2000, M0 will be ON. In the next scan cycle, if
DA module to generate hackle waveform X0 keeps ON, D10=D0=0, and M0 is OFF, the next hackle
wave will start. If the power flow falls, the output state D2
LD X1
will be OFF, but the output value D1 will keep its current
TO 0 1 D10 1
value until the next rising edge, when D1 will be initialized
The LAD for the preceding instruction is shown in the following
as S1, and a new hackle wave starts.
figure:
2. You can use an external special module to convert the
data into analog waveform.

6.11.4 TRIANGLE: Triangle wave signal output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1S IVC1L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: TRIANGLE (S1) (S2) (D1) (S3) (D2) Program steps 12
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D1 INT D V R √
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D2 BOOL Y M S LM C T

Operand description
pf
S1: starting value
S2
S2: end value
S1
D1: output value D1
S3: step number (S3>0, or system will report operand error,
and do not execute the calculation) D2

D2: output state pf: state of the power flow

The analysis of the execution of the triangle instruction is
Function description
shown in the following figure (S3=5):
In each scan cycle, when the power flow is ON, this
instruction can determine the increment and current output
value D1 according to the triangle wave height and step
D1
number. When the output value reaches S2, the rising half of
the triangle is complete, the increment direction of the output
value will change and generate the falling half of the triangle. D2
When the output value D1 reaches S1 again, the state
output D2 will be set ON. In the next scan cycle, if the power
flow keeps ON, the state output D2 will be set OFF and the SM15
next triangle will be generated. If the power flow falls, the
(S3 -1)*2
output state D2 will be OFF, the output value D1 will keep its
current value until the power flow rises again, when D1 will
Note
be initialized as S1, and a new triangle wave will start. See
the following figure: 1. If the result is not divisible when calculating the program
steps, round off to the nearest whole number.
2. The instruction will generate a series of continuous
triangle wave data so long as the power flow keep ON
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 167

3. When S1=S2, D1=S2, D2=ON (no counting pulse).

4. The cycle of the triangle wave is (S3-1)×2.
5. The total number of RAMP, HACKLE and TRIANGLE
instructions in a program should not exceed 100.
Example 1. When X0 is ON, D10 (in the first cycle, D10=D0=0) will
//Initialize registers upon the first scan cycle after power-on increase by 2 (2000/1000) in every scan cycle. When
LD SM1 D10=D1=2000, the rising half of the triangle is complete, and
D10 will decrease by 2 in every scan cycle that follows.
MOV 0 D0
When D10=D0=0, a complete triangle is complete, and M0
MOV 2000 D1
is ON. In the next scan cycle, if X0 keeps ON, and M0 is OFF,
//Execute TRIANGLE instruction when X0 is ON
the next triangle wave will start. If the power flow falls, the
LD X0 output state D2 will be OFF, but the output value D1 will keep
TRIANGLE D0 D1 D10 1000 M0 its current value until the next rising edge, when D1 will be
//When X1 is ON, output the result of ramp function to initialized as S1, and a new triangle wave starts.
external DA module to generate triangle waveform 2. You can use an external special module to convert the
LD X1 data into analog waveform.
TO 0 1 D10 1
The LAD of the preceding instruction is shown in the
following figure:

6.11.5 ABSD: Absolute drum control instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

ABSD (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: ABSD (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS D C T R √
S2 INT C √
D BOOL Y M S
S3 WORD Constant

Operand description S1+4 160 S1+5 60 D+2

S1+6 240 S1+7 280 D+3
S1: starting element SN of table data (rising edge, falling
… … …
edge). k=4. … …
S1+2n S1+2n+1 D+n-1
S2: counter SN for monitoring the current value compared
4. When the instruction is ON, n points starting with D will
with table data
change as follows:
D: output starting elements SN
S3: rows of the table and points of output element; 1≤S3≤64
Function description
1. Compare n rows of table data starting with S1 (occupy n
rows×2 points) with the current value S2 of the counter for
ON/OFF control on D output of consecutive n points.
2. Change the rising points/falling points by changing the
data of S1~S1+n×2.
3. Fill in the table from S1 to S1+2n+1 as follows:
Rising Sample Falling Sample
Output Example
point data point data
S1 40 S1+1 140 D Rotate at a time (0~360°) to output ON/OFF (rotatry angle
S1+2 100 S1+3 200 D+1 signal of 1 pulse per degree)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 168

Note
1. When designating the element in S1, k=4.
2. When designating the counter SN in S2, the range is
C0~C199.
M0 is power flow input, X1 is the rotatry angle signal of 1 3. The instruction is affected by scan cycle.
pulse per degree

6.11.6 DABSD: Double word absolute drum control instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: DABSD (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 11

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT KnX KnY KnM KnS D C T R √
S2 DINT C √
D BOOL Y M S
S3 WORD Constant

Operand description 40 140

D
S1: starting element SN of table data (rising edge, falling
100 140
edge). k=8. D+1
S2: counter SN for monitoring the current value compared
60 160
with table data. Range: C200~C255. D+2

D: output starting elements SN 240 280

D+3
S3: rows of the table and points of output element; 1≤S3≤64
0 180 360
Function description
1. Compare n rows of table data starting with S1 (occupy n Example
rows×4 points) with the current value S2 of the counter for Rotate at a time (0~360°) to output ON/OFF (rotatry angle
ON/OFF control on D output of consecutive n points. signal of 1 pulse per degree)
2. Change the rising points/falling points by changing the
data of [S1+1, S1]~[S1+(n×2)+3, S1+(n×2)+2].
3. Fill in the table from [S1, S1+1] to [S1, S1+1]+4n+3 as
follows:
Sample Sample
Rising point Falling point Output
data data M0 is instruction input and X1 is the rotatry angle signal of 1
[S1+1, S1] 40 [S1+3, S1+2] 140 D
pulse per degree. SM200 is OFF by default, so DCNT
[S1+5, S1+4] 100 [S1+7, S1+6] 200 D+1
instruction is counting up.
[S1+11,
[S1+9, S1+8] 160 60 D+2
S1+10] Note
[S1+13, [S1+15,
240 280 D+3 1. When designating the element in S1, k=8.
S1+12] S1+14]
2. When designating the counter SN in S2, the range is
… … … … …
[S1+4n+1, [S1+4n+3, C200~C255.
D+n-1
S1+4n] S1+4n+2] 3. The instruction is affected by scan cycle.
4. When the instruction is ON, n points starting with D will
change as follows:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 169

6.11.7 ALT: Alternate output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

ALT （D） Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: ALT (D) Program steps 11

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL Y M S

Operand description Power ON ON ON

D: element address of alternate output flow input

D ON ON
Function description
When the power flow is ON, the Example
element will act reversely in each scan
cycle, as shown below:

6.12 Communication instruction

6.12.1 Modbus: Master station communication instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: Modbus (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 8
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 INT D V R

S3 INT D R √

Operand description
S1: designated communication channel because they will be added to the data automatically in the
S2: starting address of the data to be transmitted sending process.
S3: starting address of the data to be received 2. You do not need to set the length for the data to be sent.
The system will set the length automatically based on the
Function description
instruction.
1. When being a master station and the input conditions are
met, the system will transmit the data stored in the unit S2 Slave address

starting with S2, and then receive the data and store it to the S2+1 Function code
unit starting with S3. S2+2 Data 1
2. When being a slave station, the system needs no
...
instruction control for transceiving data.
S2+N+1 Data N
3. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge.
Note 3. The data, when received through Modbus, will be stored
in RTU-mode, regardless of whether you set it in RTU mode
1. Sending data through Modbus, whether the data is in RTU
mode or ASCII mode, you only need to store the RTU-mode or ASCII mode. That is, when you set the data to ASCII
mode, the system will automatically convert them to
data into the unit starting with S2. You do not need to store
the starting character, ending character and checksum,
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 170

hexadecimal, remove the starting character and ending 1. Store the data sent through Modbus into the element
character, and store them to the data area starting with S3. starting with D0.
4. The sent and received data are stored in the low bytes of 2. Store the data received in the elements starting with
the word element. High bytes are not used. D100.
Example 3. After receiving data through Modbus, the system will
conduct CRC check, address check and instruction check. If
there is any error, the error flag (SM136) will be set, and the
error details will be recorded in the special register SD139.
4. SM114 and SM124 are the flags of free serial port, and
they can be also flags of MODBUS communication status.
The communication error codes are shown below:
Code Description
0x01 Illegal instruction
0x02 Illegal register address
0x03 Wrong number of data
LD SM1
Communication timeout. The communication
MOV 3 D0 0x10
exceeds the preset communication time limit
MOV 1 D1 0x11 Error in receiving data frame
MOV 0 D2 Operand error. Operand (mode or
0x12
MOV 10 D3 master/slave) setting error
Error occurs because t he local station SN is
MOV 5 D4 0x13
the same as that set by the instruction
AND SM124
For the detailed application methods, see 错误！未找到引用
Modbus 1 D0 D100
源。错误！未找到引用源。.

6.12.2 IVFWD: Inverter forward rotation instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVFWD (S1) (S2) Program steps 6
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description 1. Set serial port 1, inverter address #1, and control the
inverter forward running through communication in the
S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L: Modbus protocol.
channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2) 2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address: check, address check and instruction check and set the
00. Slave address range: 1~247. communication completion flag (SM135) after the
communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
Function description will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
special register SD139.
1. Control the inverter forward running through
The error codes in inverter instruction communication are
communication in the Modbus protocol. listed below:
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge. Error
Description
code
Note
0x1 Illegal instruction
The total number of the instructions for the communication 0x2 Illegal register address
between Modbus and inverter does not exceed 128. 0x3 Data error. The data exceed the range
Slave operation failure, including the error
Example 0x4
caused by invalid data within the data range
Instruction valid, processing. It is used to
0x5
store data to EEPROM.
LD M1 Slave busy, please try again later. It is used
IVFWD 1 1 0x6
to store data to EEPROM.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 171

Error Error
Description Description
code code
Information frame error, including the RUN state (only EV3100 supports this
0x18
information length error and check error function)
0x20 The parameter cannot be modified 0x22 The parameter is protected by password
0x21 The parameter cannot be modified in the

6.12.3 IVREV: Inverter reverse rotation instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVREV (S1) (S2) Program steps 6
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant

S2 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L: LD M1

channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2) IVREV 1 1

S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address: 1. Set the serial port 1, inverter address #1, and control the
00. Slave address range: 1~247. inverter reverse running through communication in the
Modbus protocol.
Function description
2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
1. Control the inverter reverse running through check, address check and instruction check, and set the
communication in the Modbus protocol. communication completion flag (SM135) after the
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge. communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
special register SD139.

6.12.4 IVDFWD: Inverter jogging forward rotation instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVDFWD (S1) (S2) Program steps 6
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant

S2 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

LD M1
S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L:
IVDFWD 1 1
channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
1. Set the serial port 1 and inverter address #1, and control
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address:
the inverter jogging forward running through communication
00. Slave address range: 1~247.
in the Modbus protocol.
Function description 2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
1. Control the inverter jogging forward running through check, address check and instruction check, and set the
communication in the Modbus protocol. communication completion flag (SM135) after the
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge. communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
special register SD139.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 172

6.12.5 IVDREV: Inverter jogging reverse rotation instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVDREV (S1) (S2) Program steps 6
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L: LD M1

IVDREV 11
channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
1. Set the serial port 1 and inverter address #1, and control
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address:
the inverter jogging reverse running through communication
00. Slave address range: 1~247.
in the Modbus protocol.
Function description
2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
1. Control the inverter jogging reverse running through check, address check and instruction check, and set the
communication in the Modbus protocol. communication completion flag (SM135) after the
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge. communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
special register SD139.

6.12.6 IVSTOP: Inverter stop instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVSTOP (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 8
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √
S3 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L:

channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2) LD M1
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address: IVSTOP 1 1 0
00. Slave address range: 1~247. 1. Set the serial port 1, inverter address #1, and the inverter
S3: inverter stop mode. stop mode 0 (stop according to the set deceleration time),
There are three stop modes: stop mode 0 (stop), stop mode and control the inverter stop through communication in the
1 (free stop), stop mode 2 (JOG stop). Modbus protocol.
Function description 2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
check, address check and instruction check, and set the
1. Control the inverter stop through communication in the
communication completion flag (SM135) after the
Modbus protocol.
communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge.
will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
special register SD139.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 173

6.12.7 IVFRQ: Inverter set frequency instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVFRQ (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 8
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √
S3 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description LD M1
IVFRQ 1 1 50
S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L:
1. Set the serial port 1, inverter address #1, and the running
channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
frequency of the inverter 50Hz, and control the running
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address:
frequency of the inverter through communication in the
00. Slave address range: 1~247.
Modbus protocol.
S3: frequency of the inverter
2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
Function description check, address check and instruction check, and set the
1. Control the running frequency of the inverter through communication completion flag (SM135) after the
communication in the Modbus protocol. communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge. will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
special register SD139.
Example

6.12.8 IVWRT: Inverter write single register value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVWRT (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √
S3 WORD Constant D V R √
S4 WORD Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L:

channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address:
00. Slave address range: 1~247. LD M1
S3: register address MOV 1 D0
S4: register value IVWRT 1 1 D10 1
1. Set the serial port 1 and inverter address #1, input the
Function description
register address 1 (digital frequency control) and register
1. Write the single register value through communication in value 1 (disable frequency saving upon power-off), and write
the Modbus protocol. the value into the corresponding register through
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge. communication in the Modbus mode.
2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
check, address check and instruction check, and set the
communication completion flag (SM135) after the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 174

communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136) special register SD139.
will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the

6.12.9 IVRDST: Inverter read status instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVRDST (S1) (S2) (S3) (D1) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √
S3 WORD Constant D V R √
D1 WORD D √

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L:

channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
LD M1
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address:
IVRDST 1 1 1 D0
00. Slave address range: 1~247. 1. Set the serial port 1, inverter address#1, read status
S3: status information selection information selection 1 (actual running value in the current
0: Running status word 1: Actual operation value in the main setting) and set D0 as the storage register for the
current main setting 2: Inverter model 3: Output current returned status information. Read the inverter status through
4: Output voltage 5: Running speed 6: Operation fault communication in the Modbus protocol.
information 2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC
D1: storage address of the returned status information check, address check and instruction check, and set the
Function description communication completion flag (SM135) after the
communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
1. Read the inverter status through communication in the
will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
Modbus protocol.
special register SD139.
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge.

6.12.10 IVRD: Inverter read single register value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: IVRD (S1) (S2) (S3) (D1) Program steps 10
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √
S3 WORD Constant D V R √
D1 WORD D √

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel (IVC1,IVC2L:

channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
S2: inverter address. Broadcast mode. Broadcast address: LD M1
00. Slave address range: 1~247. MOV 2 D10
S3: address of the register to read IVRD 1 1 D10 D20
1. Set the serial port 1, inverter address#1, read register
D1: storage address of the returned value
address 2 (initially set frequency of the inverter) and set D20
Function description
as the storage register for the returned value. Read a single
1. Read the single inverter register value through inverter register through communication in the Modbus
communication in the Modbus protocol. protocol.
2. This instruction is executed upon the rising edge.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 175

2. After the inverter receives the data, it will conduct CRC communication. If there is any error, the error flag (SM136)
check, address check and instruction check, and set the will be set, and the error details will be recorded in the
communication completion flag (SM135) after the special register SD139.

6.12.11 XMT: Free port sending instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: XMT (S1) (S2) (S3) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD D V R
S3 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V Z R

Operand description Example

S1: designated communication channel. IVC1, IVC2L: 0, 1;

IVC1L, IVC2H: 0, 1, 2.
S2: starting address of the data to be sent
S3: number of bytes to be sent
Function description
When the power flow is valid, and the communication
conditions are met, the designated data will be sent through
the designated channel.
Note
1. Size of communication frame: depending on the element
type (D or V) of the communication frame, the ending
character of the frame does not exceed D7999 or V63.
2. In case of shutdown, the sending will stop. LD SM0
Special register TON T0 100
LD T0
1. SM110/SM120: Sending enabled flag. It will be set when
the XMT instruction is used and cleared when the sending is RST T0
completed. When it is reset, the current sending stops. MOV 16# 1 D0
2. SM112/SM122: Sending completed flag. When it is judged MOV 16#0 D1
that the sending is completed, the sending completed flag MOV 16#1 D2
will be set. MOV 16#1 D3
3. SM114/SM124: Idle flag. When the serial port has no MOV 16#2 D4
communication task, it will be set, and it can be used as the RST SM122
checking bit for communication. XMT 1 D0 5
4. For detailed examples of the application, please refer to LD SM122
Chapter 10 错误！未找到引用源。.
INC D1OO
In this example, one data frame is sent in every 10s.
The following data will be sent through serial port 1.
01 00 01 01 02
1. Set port 1 in the system block as free port, and then set
the baud rate, parity check, data bit and stop bit.
2. Write the data to be sent into the transmission buffer area.
For IVC2L, only the low bytes of the word element will be
sent.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 176

3. Reset the sending completed flag (SM122) before 4. When the sending is completed, set the sending
sending the data. completed flag (SM122).

6.12.12 RCV: Free port receiving instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: RCV (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
D WORD D V R
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V Z R

Operand description 2. For detailed application examples, refer to 错误！未找到引

用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
S1: designated communication channel. IVC1, IVC2L: 0, 1;
Special register
IVC1L, IVC2H: 0, 1, 2.
D: starting address for storing the received data SM111 (SM121): Receiving enabled flag. It will be set when
the RCV instruction is used and cleared when the sending is
S2: maximum number of received bytes
completed. When it is reset, the current receiving stops.
Function description SM113 (SM123): Receiving completed flag. When the
When the power flow is valid, and the communication receiving is completed, the receiving completed flag will be
set.
conditions are met, limited amount of data will be received
SM114 (SM124): Idle flag. When the serial port has no
through the designated channel to the designated registers.
communication task, it will be set, and it can be used as the
Note checking bit for communication.
1. Size of communication frame: depending on the element SD111 (SD121): Starting character, which can be set in the
system block
type (D or V) of the communication frame, the ending
SD112 (SD122): Ending character, which can be set in the
character of the frame does not exceed D7999 or V63.
system block
2. The receiving stops upon shutdown. SD113 (SD123): Character timeout time, i.e. the maximum
3. The value range of S1: 0 and 1 receiving interval between the two characters, which can be
Example set in the system block
SD114 (SD124): Frame timeout time, the time starting with
the power flow and stops at the end of the receiving, which
can be set in the system block
SD115 (SD125): receiving completion code. The definition of
the data bit is shown as follows:
LD SM1 Designated Max.
User Inter- (Frame) Parity
RCV 1 D20 5 ending number of
end character reception check
LD SM123 word characters Reserved
receiving timeout timeout error
INC D100 received received
flag flag flag flag
flag flag
1. The instruction will be valid continuously as long as the
Bits
power flow is valid. If you want to receive data only once, Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5
6~15
you can use a rising edge or special registers that are
effective only once, such as SM1, to trigger the instruction. SD116 (SD126): The characters currently received
SD117 (SD127): The character received previously
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 177

6.12.13 MODRW: MODBUS read/write instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

MODRW （S1）（S2）（S3）（S4）（S5）（D）（S6） Influenced flag bit

IL: MODRW (S1)(S2)(S3)(S4)(S5)(D) Program steps 14

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant
S2 WORD Constant D V R √
S3 WORD Constant D V R √
S4 WORD Constant D V R √
S5 WORD Constant D V R √
D WORD D R √

Operand description For IVC1, V1.23 or higher version supports the instruction
and needs to match with Auto Station of V2.39 or higher
S1: designated communication channel(IVC1,IVC2L: version.
channel 1; IVC1L,IVC2H: channen1 and channel 2)
Example
S2: address (slave address range: 1~247, broadcast
*The following example is only valid for IVC1 series PLC.
address is applicable to write elements)
1. Standard polling
S3: function code. IVC1 supports 01 (read coil), 02 (read
discrete input), 03 (read register), 04 (read input register), 05 The example is the simple polling, M1, M2 and M3 are set,
(write single coil), 06 (write single register), 15 (write multiple and three MODRW instructions access the device in turn.
coils), 16 (write multiple registers) In operation, reset any M element, the corresponding
S4: starting address of read/write elements MODRW instruction will exit polling but other MODRW
S5: number of read/write elements. The number of instructions will still execute by polling. For example, reset
read/write elements for IVC1 is limited by Max. RTU frame M2, MODRW instructions of M1 and M3 access the device.
length (256), as shown below: Similarly, one MODRW instruction can be inserted in
Number of Number of D operation. For example, set M2 and three MODRW
Code Name
elements elements instructions access the device in turn.
01 Read coil 1~2000 (S5+15)/16
02 Read discrete input 1~2000 (S5+15)/16
03 Read register 1~125 S5
04 Read input register 1~125 S5
05 Write single coil 0 (fixed) 1
Write single
06 0 (fixed) 1
register
15 Write multiple coils 1~1968 (S5+15)/16
Write multiple
16 1~123 S5
registers
*The number of 05 and 06 must be 0 in S5.
The number of read/write elements for IVC2L and IVC2H
(S5≤16), the maximum number of word elements and bit
elements is 16 and all bit elements are stored into a word.
D1: storage address of read/write elements. For the number
of elements needed by IVC1, refer to above table.
Function description
When the power flow is valid, send messages and receive
the returned data.
Note
For IVC2L and IVC2H
1. The number of elements is 16 at most.
2. The bit elements read 16 at most, the small address is
stored at low bit, and one byte stores 16 bits.
3. The returned abnormal code is Modbus instruction.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 178

space of the element)

Instruction
21
execution failure
The received slave address does
Address does not
22 not match with the requested
match
slave address
The received instruction does
Instruction does not
23 not match with the requested
match
instruction
Information frame The starting element address
24
error does not match
The received data length does
Data length does not comply with the protocol or
25
not match the number of elements exceeds
the maximum limit
CRC/LRC check
26
error
27 Reserved
S3 error, namely,
Error of starting element address
28 element address
setting
error
S4 error, namely, Unavailable or illegal instruction
29
instruction error setting
S5 error, namely,
30 element number Error of element number setting
error
31 Reserved
Parameters cannot
In above program, SM30 shows whether the MODRW 32 Parameters cannot be changed
be changed
instruction is executed. After the MODRW instruction is
Parameters cannot Parameters cannot be changed
executed, SM30 will be set. When the MODRW instruction
33 be changed in in running (only available for
enters the next execution, SM30 will be reset. The sequence
running EV3000)
charts in Example 2 illustrate the differences between SM30
Parameters under Parameters under password
and SM135. 34
password protection protection
When multiple MODRW instructions appear in the program,
SM30 can be used to show the executive conditions of the
instructions. The usage of multiple SM30 elements will not 2. Link time
affect each other. The following LAD propram can realize communication
When the MODRW instruction has an error, SM136 will be between MODBUS master station and slave station. The
set, SD139 and SD194 will indicate the error code. The time at each stage for a complete communication is shown
values of SM136, SD139 and SD194 can be changed by below:
other MODRW instructions, so record the conditions before
executing the next MODRW instruction.
The error codes of MODRW instructions are shown below:
Code Error name Description
1 Illegal instruction
2 Illegal address
3 Illegal data
4~15 Reserved
Communication The communication exceeds the
16
timeout preset communication time limit
17 Reserved
Set parameters Set parameters (mode or
18
error master/slave) error
The station number itself is the
S2 error, namely, same with the set station
19
slave address error number, or the address is out of
the range
D error, namely, The element address overflows
20 element address (the received or sent data
overflow amount exceeds the memory
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 179

M0
T6 : the waiting time of master station is determined by salve
SM30 station and the maximum value cannot exceed timeout time
SM135
of the set main mode
T1 T2
Interfra Bytes to be received  characterlength
me
interval
T7   1000 (ms)  1ms
Instructi
on
executio
Baud rate (bps)
n Data
sending

Master station waiting

The processing time of slave station can be calculated
Data
receivin
g
House
according to the following formula:
keepin
g
Instruct
ion
executi
on
T10  T5  T11  T12  T7
Other
instruct
T3 ions

T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9
Execute the next
MODBUS instruction T11 is the maximum scan cycle
The time for T12 is less than 1ms
Data
receiving
O ther
processi
Slave
For example: The set communication specification is 19200,
ng
station
processin
g
Data
even check, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, RTU transmission mode,
T11 T12 sending

send 10 characters and receive 20 characters. The

T10
processing time of master station is calculated as follows:
A complete MODBUS communication time ( Tm ) consists of
10  10
T5   1000＋1  6.2 ms
T1 and T2 , that is: 19200
Tm  T1  T2 20 10
T7   1000＋1  11.4ms
According to MODBUS communitiaon protocol, the interval 19200
time among frames should be the time of 3.5 bytes at least.
T4  T8  T9  1ms
Length of a character: starting bit (1 bit)+data length (7
bits)+check bit (0 bit or 1 bit)+stop bit (1 bit or 2 bits) Suppose T6  35ms , thus
T3 T3  1  6.2  35  11.4  1  1  55.6ms
T2  ( INT ( )  1))Ts
Ts
Suppose the maximum scan cycle is 10ms, thus
Ts is the maximum scan cycle for PLC 55.6
T2  ( INT ( )  1))15  60ms
T3  T4  T5  T6  T7  T8  T9 15
The processing time of slave station is:
The time for T4 , T8 and T9 is less than 1ms
T10  6.2  15  1  11.4  33.6ms
Bytes to be sent  character length
T5   1000(ms) 1ms
Baud rate (bps)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 180

6.13 Data check instruction

6.13.1 CCITT: Check instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: CCITT (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD D V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD D V R √

Operand description default. That is, the high bytes are taken as 0, and the check result has
16 bits.
S1: the starting element of the data to be
checked Example

S2: the number of the data to be checked. S2≥0,

or the system will report operand error.
D: check result LD SM1
MOV 16#00 D0
Function description MOV 16#11 D1
1. Conduct CCITT check on the S2 data starting MOV 16#22 D2
MOV 16#33 D3
with S1, and assign the result to D.
MOV 16#44 D4
2. The expression for CCITT check algorithm is:
MOV 16#55 D5
X^16+X^12+X^5+1 MOV 16#66 D6
Note MOV 16#77 D7
LD X0
1. For the system will bring value of D into the MOV 0 D100
operation each time the instruction is executed, CCITT D0 8 D100
make sure to clear D before executing the
CCITT instruction.
2. The data within the checking data zone When X0 is ON, conduct CCITT check on the 8 data starting with D0, and
starting with S2 are stored in byte mode by the result is assigned to D100.

6.13.2 CRC16: Check instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: CRC16 (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD D V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD D V R √

Operand description Function description

S1: the starting element of the data to be checked 1. Conduct CRC16 check on the S2 data starting with S1, and
S2: the number of the data to be checked; S2≥0, or assign the result to D unit.
the system will report operand error 2. The expression for CRC16 check algorithm is: X^16+X^15+X^2+1
D: check result
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 181

Note Example
1. For the system will bring value of D into the
operation each time the instruction is executed,
make sure to clear D before executing the CRC16 LD SM1
MOV 16#00 D0
instruction.
MOV 16#11 D1
2. The standard Modbus CRC check requires that MOV 16#22 D2
the D element (checksum) be initialized as 16#FFFF, MOV 16#33 D3
and the high/low byes (8 high, 8 low) shall be MOV 16#44 D4
swapped. MOV 16#55 D5
3. The data within the checking data zone starting MOV 16#66 D6
MOV 16#77 D7
with S2 are stored in byte mode by default. That is,
LD X0
the high bits will be taken as 0, and the check result
MOV 0 D100
has 16 bits. CRC16 D0 8 D100

When X0 is ON, conduct CRC16 check on the 8 data starting with

D0, and the result is assigned to D100.

6.13.3 LRC: Check instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: LRC (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD D V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D WORD D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: the starting element of the data to be checked

S2: the number of the data to be checked. S2≥0,
or the system will report operand error LD SM1
MOV 16#00 D0
D: check result
MOV 16#11 D1
Function description MOV 16#22 D2
Conduct LRC check on the S2 data starting with MOV 16#33 D3
MOV 16#44 D4
the S1, and assign the result to D.
MOV 16#55 D5
Note MOV 16#66 D6
MOV 16#77 D7
1. For the system will bring value of D into the
LD M0
operation each time the instruction is executed,
MOV 0 D100
make sure to clear D before executing the LRC LRC D0 8 D100
instruction.
2. The data within the checking data zone starting
with S2 are stored in byte mode by default. That is,
the high bytes are taken as 0, and the check result
When X0 is ON, conduct LRC check on the 8 data starting with D0, and
has 8 bits and is stored in the low bits of D.
the result is assigned to D100.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 182

6.14 Enhanced bit processing instruction

6.14.1 ZRST: Batch bit reset instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ZRST (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL Y M S LM C T √
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

D: destination operand 1. When a C element is reset, the counting value in it will also be
S: source operand cleared.
2. When a T element is reset, the timing value in it will also be cleared.
Function description
Example
When the power flow is valid, reset S bit-elements
LD SM0
starting with D.
ZRST M10 10
When SM0 is ON, the 10 units M10, M11, M12 ... M19 will be
completely cleared.

6.14.2 ZSET: Set batch bit instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ZSET (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D BOOL Y M S LM C T √
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: destination operand LD SM0

ZSET M10 10
S: source operand
When SM0 is ON, the 10 units M10, M11, M12 … M19 will all be set to 1.
Function description
When the power flow is valid, set S bit
elements starting with D.

6.14.3 DECO: Decode instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: DECO (S) (D) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 183

Operand description Note

S: source operand 1. Range of S: 0 to 15.

D: destination operand 2. If S is outside the range of 0~15, D will not be changed when the power flow is
valid. Instead, the system will report operand error.
Function description
Example
When the power flow is valid, set bit S
LD SM0
in word element D to 1, and clear other
DECO 2 D9
bits.
When the power flow is valid, bit 2 in D9 will be set as 1, other bits will be cleared.

6.14.4 ENCO: Encode instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ENCO (S) (D) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Note

S: source operand； When the value of multiple bits in S is 1, the smallest bit number will be written into
D, as shown in the following figure:
D: destination operand
Function description
When the power flow is valid, assign Example
the number of the bit whose value is 1 LD M0
in word element S to D. ENCO 2#0010 D0
When the power flow is valid, operand 1 is 2#0010, bit 1 is 1, hence 1 is written into
D0.

6.14.5 BITS: Counting ON bit in word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: BITS (S) (D) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD SM0

BITS 16#F0F0 D1
D: destination operand
When the power flow is valid, it is counted that there are 8 bits whose value
Function description is 1 (ON status) in constant 16#F0F0, so 8 is stored into D1.
When the power flow is valid, count how
many bits in operand S is 1, and store the
result into D.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 184

6.14.6 DBITS: Counting ON bit in double word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: DBITS (S) (D) Program steps 6
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DWORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description into D.

S: source operand Example

LD SM0
D: destination operand
DBITS 16#FF0FF D10
Function description
When the power flow is valid, it is counted that there are 16 bits whose
When the power flow is valid, count how many value is 1 (ON status) in constant 16#FF0FF, so 16 is stored into D10.
bits in double word S is 1, and store the result

6.14.7 BON: Judging ON bit in word instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: BON(S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
D BOOL Y M S
S2 INT D V R

Operand description Example

S: source operand LD M1
BON D0 Y0 5
D: destination operand
Function description When the power flow is valid, S1 in BON instruction is ConstantD0, the
state of bit 5 is ON, and the result is stored into Y0.
When the power flow is valid, count the status
of bit S2 in element S1, and store the result
into D.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 185

6.15 Word contact instruction

6.15.1 BLD: Word bit contact LD instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: BLD (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand BLD D0 5

OUT Y0
S2: designated bit, 0≤S2≤15, or system will report operand
Use the status of BIT5 (ON) in D0 (1000:
error
2#0000001111101000) to determine the status of Y0 in the
Function description following operation.
Use the status of bit S2 in element S1 to drive the following
operation.

6.15.2 BLDI: Word bit contact LDI instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: BLDI (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand BLDI D0 5

OUT Y0
S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or system will report operand
Use the logic NOT of the status of BIT5 (ON) in D0 (1000:
error
2#0000001111101000), which is OFF, to determine the
Function description status of Y0 in the following operation.
Use the logic NOT of the status of bit S2 in element S1 to
drive the following operation.

6.15.3 BAND: Word bit contact AND instruction

LAD:
Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Note: because the logic relationship is visualized in the diagram, the

Influenced flag bit
BAND instruction is displayed in LAD as BLD

IL: BAND (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 186

Operand description other nodes to drive the operation of the following operation.

S1: source operand Example

LD X0
S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or
BAND D0 5
system will report operand error
OUT Y0
Function description Take the status of BIT5 (ON) in element D0 (1000: 2#0000001111101000) and use
Take the status of bit S2 in element S1 it in serial connection with other nodes (X0: ON) to determine the status of Y0 in
and use it in serial connection with the following operation.

6.15.4 BANI: Word bit contact ANI instruction

LAD:
Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Note: because the logic relationship is visualized in the diagram, the Influenced flag bit
BANI instruction is displayed in LAD as BLDI

IL: BANI (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description the operation of the following instruction.

S1: source operand Example

S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or LD X0

BANI D0 5
system will report operand error
OUT Y0
Function description Take the logic NOT of the status of BIT5 (ON) in element D0 (1000:
Take the logic NOT of the status of bit 2#0000001111101000), which is OFF, and use it in serial connection with other
S2 in element S1 and use it in serial nodes (X0: ON) to determine the status of Y0 in the following operation.
connection with other nodes to drive

6.15.5 BOR: Word bit contact OR instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

Note: because the logic relationship is visualized in the diagram, the
BOR instruction is displayed in LAD as BLD

IL: BOR (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: source operand LD X0

BOR D0 5
S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or system will
OUT Y0
report operand error
Take the status of BIT5 (ON) in element D0 (1000:
Function description
2#0000001111101000) and use it in parallel connection with other
Take the status of bit S2 in element S1 and use it nodes (X0: ON) to determine the status of Y0 in the following operation.
in parallel connection with other nodes to drive
the operation of the following instruction.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 187

6.15.6 BORI: Word bit contact ORI instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

Note: because the logic relationship is visualized in the diagram, the
BORI instruction is displayed in LAD as BLDI

IL: BORI (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description other nodes to drive the operation of the following stage.

S1: source operand Example

S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or system will LD X0

report operand error BORI D0 5
OUT Y0
Function description
Take the logic NOT of the status of BIT5 (ON) in element D0 (1000:
Take the logic NOT of the status of bit S2 in 2#0000001111101000), which is OFF, and use it in parallel connection
element S1 and use it in parallel connection with with other nodes (X0: ON) to determine the status of Y0 in the following
operation.

6.15.7 BOUT: Word bit coil output instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: BOUT (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operan
Type Applicable elements addressi
d
ng
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
Con
S INT stan KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
t

Operand description Example

LD X0
S1: source operand
BOUT D0 4
S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or system will
Assign the current power flow status (X0: ON) to BIT4 ofelement D0
report operand error
(1000: 2#0000001111101000). After the execution, D0=1016
Function description (2#0000001111111000).
Assign the current power flow status to bit S of
element D.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 188

6.15.8 BSET: Word bit coil set instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: BSET (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: destination operand LD X0
BSET D0 15
S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or system
will report operand error When the power flow is valid, set BIT15 of element D0 (1000:
2#0000001111101000). After the execution, D0=33768
Function description
(2#1000001111101000).
Set bit S of element D.

6.15.9 BRST: Word bit coil reset instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: BRST (D) (S) Program steps 5
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D WORD KnY KnM KnS KnLM D C T V Z R √
S INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

D: destination operand LD X0
BRST D0 8
S2: designated bit. 0≤S2≤15, or system will
report operand error When the power flow is valid, reset BIT8 of element D0 (1000:
2#0000001111101000). After the execution, D0=744
Function description
(2#0000001011101000).
Reset bit S of element D.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 189

6.16 Compare contact instruction

6.16.1 LD (=, <, >, <>, >=, <=): Compare integer LD※ instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: LD＝ (S1) (S2)

LD＜ (S1) (S2)

LD＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 5
LD＜＞ (S1) (S2)

LD＞＝ (S1) (S2)

LD＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

LD= D0 D1
S1: comparison parameter 1
OUT Y0
S2: comparison parameter 2
LD< D0 D1
Function description OUT Y1
LD> D0 D1
Conduct BIN comparison on elements
OUT 2
S1 and S2, and use the comparison LD<> D0 D1
result to drive the following operation. OUT Y3
LD>= D0 D1
OUT Y4
LD<= D0 D1
OUT Y5
Conduct BIN comparison on the data of D0 and D1, and the comparison result is
used to determine the output status of the following element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 190

6.16.2 AND(=, <, >, <>, >=, <=): Compare integer AND※ instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: AND＝ (S1) (S2)

AND＜ (S1) (S2)

AND＞ (S1) (S2)
Program steps 5
AND＜＞ (S1) (S2)

AND＞＝ (S1) (S2)

AND＜＝ (S1) (S2)
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

LD X0
S1: comparison parameter 1
AND= D0 D1
S2: comparison parameter 2
OUT Y0
Function description LD X1
AND< D0 D1
Conduct BIN comparison on elements
OUT Y1
S1 and S2, and use the comparison LD X2
result to drive the following operation. AND> D0 D1
OUT Y2
LD X3
AND<> D0 D1
OUT Y3
LD X4
AND>= D0 D1
OUT Y4
LD X5
AND<= D0 D1
OUT Y5
Conduct BIN comparison on the data of D0 and D1, and the comparison result is
used to determine the output status of the following element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 191

6.16.3 OR(=, <, >, <>, >=, <=): Compare integer OR※ instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: OR＝ (S1) (S2)

OR＜ (S1) (S2)

OR＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 5
OR＜＞ (S1) (S2)

OR＞＝ (S1) (S2)

OR＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √

Operand description Example

S1: comparison parameter 1 LD X0

OR= D0 D1
S2: comparison parameter 2
OUT Y0
Function description LD X1
OR< D0 D1
Compare elements S1 and S2, and
OUT Y1
use the comparison result in parallel LD X2
connection with other nodes to drive OR<> D0 D1
the following operation. OUT Y2
LD X3
OR>= D0 D2
OUT Y3
LD X4
OR>= D0 D1
OUT Y4
LD X5
OR<= D0 D1
OUT Y5
Compare elements D0 and D1, and use the comparison result in parallel
connection with other nodes to determine the output status of the following
element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 192

6.16.4 LDD(=, <, >, <>, >=, <=): Compare double integer LDD※ instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: LDD＝ (S1) (S2)

LDD＜ (S1) (S2)

LDD＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 7
LDD＜＞ (S1) (S2)

LDD＞＝ (S1) (S2)

LDD＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

Operand description Example

LD= D0 D2
S1: comparison parameter 1
OUT Y0
S2: comparison parameter 2
LD< D0 D2
Function description OUT Y1
LD<> D0 D2
Compare elements S1 and S2, and
OUT Y2
use the comparison result to drive the LD>= D0 D2
following operation. OUT Y3
LD>= D0 D2
OUT Y4
LD<=D0 D2
OUT Y5
Compare (D0, D1) and (D2,D3), and use the comparison result to determine the
output status of the following element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 193

6.16.5 ANDD(=, <, >, <>, >=, <=): Compare double integer ANDD※ instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ANDD＝ (S1) (S2)

ANDD＜ (S1) (S2)

ANDD＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 7
ANDD＜＞ (S1) (S2)
ANDD＞＝ (S1) (S2)

ANDD＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

Operand description Example

S1: comparison parameter 1 LD X0

LDD= D0 D2
S2: comparison parameter 2
OUT Y0
Function description LD X1
LDD< D0 D2
Compare elements S1 and S2, and
OUT Y1
use the comparison result in serial LD X2
connection with other nodes to drive LDD<> D0 D2
the following operation. OUT Y2
LD X3
LDD<> D0 D2
OUT Y3
LD X4
LDD>= D0 D2
OUT Y4
LD X5
LDD<= D0 D2
OUT Y5
Compare (D0, D1) and (D2,D3), and use the comparison result in serial connection
with other nodes to determine the output status of the following element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 194

6.16.6 ORD(=, <, >, <>, >=, <=): Compare double integer ORD※ instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ORD＝ (S1) (S2)

ORD＜ (S1) (S2)

ORD＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 7
ORD＜＞ (S1) (S2)

ORD＞＝ (S1) (S2)

ORD＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √

Operand description Example

S1: comparison parameter 1 LD X0

S2: comparison parameter 2 ORD= D0 D2
OUT Y0
Function description LD X1
Compare elements S1 and S2, and ORD< D0 D2
use the comparison result in parallel OUT Y1
LD X2
connection with other nodes to drive
ORD<> D0 D2
the following operation.
OUT Y2
LD X3
ORD>= D0 D2
OUT Y3
LD X4
ORD>= D0 D2
OUT Y4
LD X5
ORD<= D0 D2
OUT Y5

Compare (D0, D1) and (D2,D3), and use the comparison result in parallel
connection with other nodes to determine the output status of the following
element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 195

6.16.7 LDR: Compare floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: LDR＝ (S1) (S2)

LDR＜ (S1) (S2)

LDR＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 7
LDR＜＞ (S1) (S2)

LDR＞＝ (S1) (S2)

LDR＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 RAEL Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

LDR= D0 D2
S1: comparison parameter 1
OUT Y0
S2: comparison parameter 2
LDR< D0 D2
Function description OUT Y1
LDR> D0 D2
Compare elements S1 and S2, and
OUT Y2
use the comparison result to drive the LDR<> D0 D2
following operation. OUT Y3
LDR>= D0 D2
OUT Y4
LDR<= D0 D2
OUT Y5
Compare (D0, D1) and (D2,D3), and use the comparison result determine the
output status of the following element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 196

6.16.8 ANDR: Compare floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ANDR＝ (S1) (S2)

ANDR＜ (S1) (S2)

ANDR＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 7
ANDR＜＞ (S1) (S2)

ANDR＞＝ (S1) (S2)

ANDR＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: comparison parameter 1 LD X0

ANDR= D0 D2
S2: comparison parameter 2
OUT Y0
Function description LD X1
ANDR< D0 D2
Compare elements S1 and S2, and
OUT Y1
use the comparison result in serial LD X2
connection with other nodes to drive ANDR<> D0 D2
the following operation. OUT Y2
LD X3
ANDR<> Y3
LD X4
ANDR>= D0 D2
OUT Y4
LD X5
ANDR<= D0 D2
OUT Y5
Compare (D0, D1) and (D2,D3), and use the comparison result in serial connection
with other nodes to determine the output status of the following element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 197

6.16.9 ORR: Compare floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ORR＝ (S1) (S2)

ORR＜ (S1) (S2)

ORR＞ (S1) (S2)

Program steps 7
ORR＜＞ (S1) (S2)
ORR＞＝ (S1) (S2)

ORR＜＝ (S1) (S2)

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D V R √
S2 REAL Constant D V R √

Operand description Example

S1: comparison parameter 1 LD X0

ORR= D0
S2: comparison parameter 2
D2
Function description OUT Y0
LD X1
Compare elements S1 and S2, and
ORR< D0
use the comparison result in parallel D2
connection with other nodes to drive OUT Y1
the following operation. LD X2
ORR> D0 D2
OUT Y2
LD X3
ORR<> D0 D2
OUT Y3
LD X4
ORR>= D0 D2
OUT Y4
LD X5
ORR<= D0 D2
OUT Y5
Compare (D0, D1) and (D2, D3), and use the comparison result in parallel
connection with other nodes to determine the output status of the following
element.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 198

6.16.10 CMP: Compare and set integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

CMP （S1） （S2） （D） Influenced flag bit

IL: CMP (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D BOOL Y M S

Operand description Function description

S1: data to be comparison values or element SN When the power flow is valid, execute the instruction and compare S1
S2: data to be comparison source or element SN and S2. Set one of (D)(D+1)(D+2) ON according to the result (<, =, >).
D: starting element SN of output result Example
LD m0
CMP 1000
2000 M3

6.16.11 LCMP: Compare and set double integer instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

LCMP （S1） （S2） （D） Influenced flag bit

IL: LCMP (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V Z R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V Z R √
D BOOL Y M S

Operand description S2. Set one of (D)(D+1)(D+2) ON according to the result (<, =, >).

S1: comparison parameter 1 Example

S2: comparison parameter 2 LD m1

LCMP 200000 300000
D: starting element SN of output result
M6
Function description
When the power flow is valid, execute
the instruction and compare S1 and
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 199

6.16.12 RCMP: Compare and set floating point number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H

RCMP （S1）（S2）（D） Influenced flag bit

IL: RCMP (S1)(S2)(D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 REAL Constant D R √
S2 REAL Constant D R √
D BOOL Y M S

Operand description S2. Set one of (D)(D+1)(D+2) ON according to the result (<, =, >).

S1: comparison parameter 1 Example

S2: comparison parameter 2 LD m2

RCMP 500.3400
D: starting element SN of output result
200.4000 Y7
Function description
When the power flow is valid, execute
the instruction and compare S1 and
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 200

6.17 Batch data processing instruction

6.17.1 BKADD: Add batch data operation

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: BKADD (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant D SD C T V R √
D INT D SD C T V R √
S3 INT Constant D V R

Operand description Note

S1: starting element SN for saving the data of add operation When the operation result overflows, the carry flag will not
S2: starting element SN for constant or saving the data of be set ON.
add operation Example
D: starting element SN for saving the result of add operation
S3: number of data
Function description LD M1

1. When the power flow is valid, execute the instruction, add BKADD D10 D100 D1000 5

S3 point 16bit data starting with S1 and S3 point 16bit data When M1=ON, add the content of 5 units starting with D10
(BIN) starting with S2, and store the result in S3 point and 5 units starting with D100, and store the result in 5 units
starting with D. starting with D1000.
2. 16bit constant can be designated in S2. If S2 is constant, D1000=D10+D100, D1001=D11+D101,…,D1004=D14+D104.
add S3 point 16bit data starting with S1 and S2, and store
the result in S3 point starting with D.

6.17.2 BKSUB: Subtract batch data operation

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: BKSUB (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant D SD C T V R √
D INT D SD C T V R √
S3 INT Constant D V R

Operand description Function description

S1: starting element SN for saving the data of subtract 1. When the power flow is valid, execute the instruction,
operation subtract S3 point 16bit data starting with S1 and S3 point
S2: starting element SN for constant or saving the data of 16bit data (BIN) starting with S2, and store the result in S3
subtract operation point starting with D.
D: starting element SN for saving the result of subtract 2. 16bit constant can be designated in S2. If S2 is constant,
operation subtract S3 point 16bit data starting with S1 and S2, and
store the result in S3 point starting with D.
S3: number of data
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 201

Note When M1=ON, subtract the content of 5 units starting with

When the operation result overflows, the carry flag will not D10 and 5 units starting with D100, and store the result in 5
be set ON. units starting with D1000.
D1000=D10-D100, D1001=D11-D101,…,D1004=D14-D104.
Example

LD M1
BKSUB D10 D100 D1000 5

6.17.3 BKCMP=,>,<,<>,<=,>=: Compare batch data

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: BKCMP=,>,<,<>,<=,>= (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant D SD C T V R √
S2 INT D SD C T V R √
D BOOL Y M S LM SM
S3 INT Constant D V R

Operand description Note

S1: starting element SN for comparison value or stored data When the operation result overflows, the carry flag will not
S2: starting element SN to store comparison source data be set ON.
D: starting element SN to store comparison result Example
S3: number of data
Function description
1. After comparing S3 point 16bit data starting with S1 and
S3 point 16bit data (BIN) starting with S2, store the result in
LD M1
S3 point starting with D.
BKCMP= D10 D100 Y0 4
2. 16bit constant can be designated in S1. If S1 is constant,
compare S3 point 16bit data starting with S1 and S2, and LD SM188
store the result in S3 point starting with D. SET Y10
3. When the comparison results of S3 point starting with D When M1=ON, compare the content of 4 units starting with
are ON, set SM188. D10 and 4 units starting with D100, and store the result in 4
units starting with Y0. Besides, when the comparison results
are ON, Y10 is set ON.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 202

6.18 Data table instruction

6.18.1 LIMIT: Upper/lower limit control

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: LIMIT (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S3 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √

Output D (output)
Operand description
S1: lower limit
S1 (lower limit)
S2: upper limit
Input S2 (upper limit)
S3: input value controlled by upper/lower limit
D: starting element SN for saving output value in
upper/lower limit control
Example
Function description
Judge whether the input value designated in S3
is in the range of S1 and S2 to control and store
LD M1
the result in D. If S3<S1, D=S1; if S3>S2, D=S2;
LIMIT D0 D10 D100 D1000
if S1<=S3<=S2, D=S2.
When M1=ON, execute D0~D10 upper/lower limit control on the content
of D100 and store the result in D1000.
D0(10)<=D100(30)<=D10(100), D1000=30.

6.18.2 DBAND: Dead band control

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: DBAND (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S3 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √

Operand description D: starting element SN for saving output value controlled by dead band

S1: lower limit of dead band Function description

S2: upper limit of dead band Judge whether the input value designated in S3 is in the range of S1 and
S3: input value in dead band control S2 to control and store the result in D. If S3<S1, D=S3-S1; if S3>S2, D=
S3-S2; if S1<=S3<=S2, D=0.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 203

Output D(output)

S1 (lower limit) LD M1
Input 0S2 (upper limit)
DBAND D0 D10 D100 D1000

When M1=ON, execute D0~D10 dead band control on the content of

D100 and store the result in D1000.
D0 (-100)<D100(30)<D10(100), D1000=0
Example

6.18.3 ZONE: Zone control

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: ZONE (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S3 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √

Output D (output)
Operand description
S2 (negative deviation)
S1: negative deviation value to be added to input
value
Input 0 S3 (input)
S2: positive deviation value to be added to input
S1 (positive deviation)
value
S3: input value controlled by zone
Example
D: starting element SN for saving output value in
zone control
Function description
LD M1
Judge the input value designated in S3 adds
ZONE D0 D10 D100 D1000
the deviation value in S1 or S2 to control and
store the result in D. If S3<0, D=S3+S1; if S3>0, When M1=ON, execute D0~D10 zone control on the content of D100
D=S3+S2; if S3=0, D=0. and store the result in D1000.
D100(30)>0, D1000=D100(30)+D10(100), D1000=130.

6.18.4 SCL: Locate coordinate

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: SCL (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT D V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 204

Operand description 2. S1 must be in the range set by the data table.

S1: element SN to execute locating coordinate input value or Example

store input value
S2: starting element SN of conversion table for locating
coordinate LD M1
D: element SN to store output value in located coordinate SCL D10 D100 D1000
control When M1=ON, execute locating coordinate for the content of
Function description D10 and store the result in D1000.
1. According to specified conversion features, execute Coordinate point D100 5
locating coordinate for input value in S1 and store the result X coordinate D101 10
Point 1
Y coordinate D102 0
in D.
X coordinate D103 20
2. The conversion for locating coordinate is executed Point 2
Y coordinate D104 20
according to the data table starting with element stored in S2. X coordinate D105 30
When the output value is not integer, it will be rounded off to Point 3
Y coordinate D106 60
st
the 1 decimal place. X coordinate D107 50
Point 4
3. Locating coordinate is set by conversion table: Y coordinate D108 40
Coordinate point S2 X coordinate D109 60
Point 5
X coordinate S2+1 Y coordinate D110 0
Point 1
Y coordinate S2+2 Y

X coordinate S2+3
Point 2
Y coordinate S2+4
… … …
X coordinate S2+2n-1 Point 3 (30, 60)
Point n (end)
Y coordinate S2+2n
D (40) Point 4 (50, 40)
Note
Point 2 (20, 20)
1. The data of X in the table should be in an ascending order.
If part of data are not in an ascending order but detect from Point 5 (60, 0)
Point 1 (10, 0) S1 (25) X
low bit, the operation before will still be executed.

6.18.5 SER: Search data

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: SER (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
S3 INT Constant D V R

Operand description Function description

S1: starting element SN to search the same data, Max. value 1. Search S3 data starting with S1 and the data the same
and Min. value with S2, and store the result in D-D+4.
S2: element SN to search reference values of the same data, 2. Store the number of the same data and the locations of
Max. value and Min. value or store target elements the initial/final value, Max. value and Min. value for 5
D: starting element SN to store the number after searching elements starting with D when there are same data.
the same data, Max. value and Min. value 3. Store 0 for starting 3 elements and other 2 elements as
S3: number of the same search data, Max. value and Min. above when there are no same data..
value (1≤S3≤256)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 205

Example SER D0 D10 D100 D1000 8

LD M1
When M1=ON, search the content of 8 units starting with D10 and store the result in 5 units starting with D1000.
Comparison
Search element S1 Value Data location Search result D Value
element value S2
D10 100 100 0 D1000 3
D11 78 1 D1001 0
D12 92 2 D1002 7
D13 100 3 D1003 5
D14 110 4 D1004 6
D15 -20 5
D16 145 6
D17 100 7

6.19 String instruction

6.19.1 STRADD: Add string

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRADD (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT String KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT String KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √

Operand description quotation marks indicate the delimiter in upper computer software, so it
st
cannot be identified;
S1: the 1 string unit
nd
2. When the stored result in S1 and S2 is ‘00H’, add ‘0000H’ in D;
S2: the 2 string unit
3. When the element addresses of S1 and D or S2 and D overlap, the
D: storage added string unit
system will report operand error;
Function description 4. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of string units
1. When the power flow is valid, add string units starting with S1 or S2, the system will report operand error.
starting with S1 and S2, and store the result in Example
the element starting with D;
2. The instruction refers to add the first character
of S2 to the end character of S1 and leave out
LD M1
the end flag of S1;
STRADD D10 D100 D1000
3. The valid data of string units are the data from
st When M1=ON, add the string unit starting with D10 and the string unit
the element designated by string units to the 1
detected ‘00H’; starting with D100, and store the result in the unit starting with D1000.
4. When the number of strings after connection B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0
is odd, add ‘00H’ to the high byte of the end D10 0x32 0x31 D100 0x38 0x37 D1000 0x32 0x31
character element; when the number is even, D11 0x34 0x33 + D101 0x61 0x39 D1001 0x34 0x33
add ‘0000H’ to the next element of the end D12 0x36 0x35 D102 0x00 0x62 D1002 0x36 0x35
character element. D13 0x00 0x00 D1003 0x38 0x37
Note D1004 0x61 0x39
D1005 0x00 0x62
1. When designating strings, S1 and S2 allow 32
characters at most. The comma and double
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 206

6.19.2 STRLEN: Detect string length

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRLEN (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √

Operand description Note

S: string unit When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of

D: string unit length string units starting with S, the system will report operand
error.
Function description
Example
1. When the power flow is valid, detect the length of S and
store the result in D.
2. The valid data of string units are the data from the element
st
designated by string units to the 1 detected ‘00H’. LD M1
STRLEN D10 D100

When M1=ON, detect the string unit length starting with D10,
and store the result in D100.

6.19.3 STRRIGHT: Read string from the right

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRRIGHT (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant D V R

Operand description 4. The valid data of string units are the data from the element designated
st
by string units to the 1 detected ‘00H’.
S1: string unit
D: storage read string unit Note
S2: number of read strings 1. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of string units
Function description starting with S1, the system will report operand error;
2. S2≥0;
1. When the power flow is valid, read S2 starting
3. S2≤the number of S1
from the end valid character of S1 (except ‘00H’),
and store the result in the element starting with Example
D;
2. When S2=0, store ‘00H’ in D;
3. When the number of read strings is odd, add LD M1
‘00H’ to the high byte of the end character STRRIGHT D10 D100 3
element; when the number is even, add ‘0000H’ When M1=ON, read 3 characters on the right of string units starting with
to the next element of the end character D10, and store the result in D100.
element;
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 207

B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0

D10 0x32 0x31 D100 0x35 0x34
D11 0x34 0x33 D101 0x00 0x36
D12 0x36 0x35
D13 0x00 0x00

6.19.4 STRLEFT: Read string from the left

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRLEFT (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT Constant D V R √

Operand description Note

S1: string unit 1. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of
D: storage read string unit string units starting with S1, the system will report operand
S2: number of read strings error;

Function description 2. S2≥0;

3. S2≤the number of S1
1. When the power flow is valid, read S2 starting from the left
of S1 (except ‘00H’), and store the result in the element Example
starting with D;
2. When S2=0, store ‘00H’ in D;
3. When the number of read strings is odd, add ‘00H’ to the LD M1
high byte of the end character element; when the number is STRLEFT D10 D100 3
even, add ‘0000H’ to the next element of the end character When M1=ON, read 3 characters on the left of string units
element; starting with D10, and store the result in D100.
4. The valid data of string units are the data from the element B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0
st
designated by string units to the 1 detected ‘00H’. D10 0x32 0x31 D100 0x32 0x31
D11 0x34 0x33 D101 0x00 0x33
D12 0x36 0x35
D13 0x00 0x00

6.19.5 STRMIDR: Read any strings

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRMIDR (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √

Operand description S2: initial location of read strings

S2+1 number of read strings n
S1: string unit
D: storage read string unit
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 208

Function description 3. S2≥1

1. When the power flow is valid, read n characters starting 4. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of
from the S2 character for S1 string unit, and store the result string units starting with S1, the system will report operand
in the element starting with D; error.
2. When the number of read strings is odd, add ‘00H’ to the Example
high byte of the end character element; when the number is
even, add ‘0000H’ to the next element of the end character
element;
LD M1
3. The valid data of string units are the data from the element
st STRMIDR D10 D100 D0
designated by string units to the 1 detected ‘00H’;
4. When n=0, no execution; When M1=ON, read D1(D1=3) from D0(D0=2) starting with
D10, and store the result in D100.
5. When n=-1, read all the data of S1 and store the result in
B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0
the element starting with D.
D10 0x32 0x31 D100 0x33 0x32
Note D11 0x34 0x33 0x00 0x34
D101

1. S2≤the number of S1; D12 0x36 0x35

D13 0x00 0x00
2. n>-2;

6.19.6 STRMIDW: Replace any strings

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRMIDW(S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √
S2 INT KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √

Operand description 3. S2≥1

4. When the replaced characters exceed the end character of string unit
S1: string unit for replacement
starting with D, store the data up to the end character.
D: string unit to be replaced
5. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of string units
S2: initial replace location
starting with S1 and D, the system will report operand error.
S2+1 number of replace strings n
Example
Function description
1. When the power flow is valid, replace n
characters from S2 in D with n characters of S1; LD M1
2. The valid data of string units are the data from STRMIDW D10 D100 D0
st
the element designated by string units to the 1
When M1=ON, replace D1(D1=3) of string unit starting with D10 with
detected ‘00H’;
D1(D1=3) after D0(D0=2) starting with D100.
4. When n=0, no execution;
B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0
5. When n=-1, store the content up to the end D10 0x32 0x31 D100 0x35 0x34 D100 0x31 0x34
character designated by S1 after the element D11
0x34 0x33 D101 0x37 0x36 D101 0x33 0x32
D12
designated by D. 0x00 0x35 D102 0x39 0x38 D102 0x39 0x38
D103 0x00 0x61 D103 0x00 0x61
Note
1. S2≤the number of S1;
2. n>-2;
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 209

6.19.7 STRINSTR: Search string

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRINSTR (S1) (S2) (D) (S3) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT String D SD C T V R √
S2 INT D SD C T V R √
D INT D SD C T V R √
S3 INT Constant D V R

Operand description 3. When designating strings, S1 allows 32 characters at

most. The comma and double quotation marks indicate the
S1: string unit to be searched
delimiter in upper computer software, so it cannot be
S2: search source identified;
D: search result 4. When S1 is the empty string (‘00H’), the result will be the
S3: initial search location st
‘00H’ location of S2 (the 1 ‘00H’ location if S2 is even).
Function description Example
1. When the power flow is valid, search the strings the same
with S1 from the S3 character of S2, and store the search
result in D; LD M1
2. When the strings are not consistent, store “0” in D; STRINSTR “45” D10 D100 2
3. When S3 is negative or “0”, no execution; When M1=ON, search the character the same with “45” from
4. The valid data of string units are the data from the element nd
the 2 character of the string unit starting with D10, and
st
designated by string units to the 1 detected ‘00H’. store the result in D100.`
Note “45”
B15---b8 b7---b0
1. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of
ASC D10 0x32 0x31
string units starting with S1 and S2, the system will report D100 = 4
D11 0x34 0x33
operand error; B15---b8 b7---b0
D12 0x36 0x35
2. S3≤the number of S2; 0x35 0x34
D13 0x00 0x37

6.19.8 STRMOV: Move string

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: STRMOV (S) (D) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S INT String KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C T V R √

Operand description 2. The valid data of string units are the data from the element
st
designated by string units to the 1 detected ‘00H’.
S: source string unit
Note
D: target unit
1. When no ‘00H’ exists in the range of relevant elements of
Function description
string units starting with S, the system will report operand
1. Move all data of S including ‘00H’ to the element unit error;
starting with D;
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 210

2. When the number of S is even, ‘00H’ will be stored in low B15---b8 b7---b0 B15---b8 b7---b0
byte while it can be stored in corresponding high byte in D; D10 0x32 0x31 D100 0x32 0x31
3. When designating strings, S1 allows 32 characters at
D11 0x34 0x33 D101 0x34 0x33
most. The comma and double quotation marks indicate the
D12 0x36 0x35 D102 0x36 0x35
delimiter in upper computer software, so it cannot be
identified.
D13 0x00 0x00 D103 0x00 0x00

Example

LD M1
STRMOV D10 D100

When M1=ON, move the string starting with D10 to the unit
starting with D100.

6.20 Extension file register instruction

6.20.1 LOADR: Read extension file register

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: LOADR (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT R √
S2 INT Constant D

Operand description 3. When S2=1024, the execution time for the instruction will
be about 80ms. In actual use, please set watchdog time
S1: element unit of extension register for data storage
correctly.
S2: number of read points (1≤S2≤1024)
Example
Function description
Read S2 starting with S1 in extension file register stored in
the memory into the element starting with S1 in the LD M1
extension register.
LOADR R0 16
Note
When M1=ON, read 16 data starting with R0 unit in memory
1. When S2=0, no execution; card R backup area, and store the result in 16 element units
2. When the memory is not connected, the system will report starting with R0.
no memory card;

6.20.2 SAVER: Write extension file register

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: SAVER (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT R √
S2 INT Constant
D INT D √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 211

Operand description 3. After the instruction is executed, set SM189 for the end of
execution.
S1: element unit of extension register for data storage (only
designate the starting address of the stage) Note

S2: number of write points in each operation cycle 1. When S2=2048, the execution time for the instruction will
(1≤S2≤2048) be about hundreds of milliseconds. In actual use, please set
D: stored number of write points watchdog time correctly;
2. Before driving SAVER, execute INITER or INITR
Function description
instruction and initialize the operation stage. If the write data
1. By 2048/S2 (aliquant, add 1 to the result) operation cycle, in extension file register are inconsistent with those in
write the data in extension register from S1 to S1+2047 into extension register, report memory card operation error;
the same units in the memory;
3. When the value designated in S2 is 0, execute the
2. In write process, store the number of write points in D; instruction according to S2=2048.
4. The value in S1 must be the starting element number of the stage, as shown below:

Starting element Range of write memory Starting element Range of write memory
Stage No. Stage No.
No. card R backup area No. card R backup area
0 R0 R0~R2047 8 R16384 R16384~R18431
1 R2048 R2048~R4095 9 R18432 R18432~R20479
2 R4096 R4096~R6143 10 R20480 R20480~R22527
3 R6144 R6144~R8191 11 R22528 R22528~R24575
4 R8192 R8192~R10239 12 R24576 R24576~R26623
5 R10240 R10240~R12287 13 R26624 R26624~R28671
6 R12288 R12288~R14335 14 R28672 R28672~R30719
7 R14336 R14336~R16383 15 R30720 R30720~R32767

5. When the memory is not connected, the system will report LD M1

no memory card; SAVER R0 64 D100
6. Under memory hardware write protection, report memory LD SM189
card operation error.
SET Y0
Example
When M1=ON, store the data of 2048 units starting with R0
into 2048 units starting with ER0, and store the number of
units in D100. After the instruction is executed, SM189=ON
and Y0=ON.

6.20.3 INITR: Initialize extension register

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: INITR (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT R √
S2 INT Constant

Operand description
S1: unit of extension register and extension file register for initialization (only designate the starting address of the stage)
S2: number of stages of extension register and extension file register for initialization (S2=1)
Function description
1. Initialize S2 stage extension register and extension file register starting with S1, initial value: 0xFFFF;
2. The initialization is executed in stages.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 212

Note
1. The value in S1 must be the starting element number of the stage, as shown below:
Starting element Range of write memory Starting element Range of write memory
Stage No. Stage No.
No. card R backup area No. card R backup area
0 R0 R0~R2047 8 R16384 R16384~R18431
1 R2048 R2048~R4095 9 R18432 R18432~R20479
2 R4096 R4096~R6143 10 R20480 R20480~R22527
3 R6144 R6144~R8191 11 R22528 R22528~R24575
4 R8192 R8192~R10239 12 R24576 R24576~R26623
5 R10240 R10240~R12287 13 R26624 R26624~R28671
6 R12288 R12288~R14335 14 R28672 R28672~R30719
7 R14336 R14336~R16383 15 R30720 R30720~R32767

2. When the memory card is not used, the instruction will be Example
not executed;
3. When connecting the memory card under memory
hardware write protection, report memory card operation LD M1
error;
INITR R0 1
4. The instruction can only initialize one stage at a time. If
When M1=ON, initialize extension register R0~R2047 at
the memory card is used, the initialization time for each
stage 0. If the memory card is used, ER0~ER2047 will be
stage is about 100ms. In actual use, please set watchdog
also initialized.
time correctly.

6.20.4 LOGR: Log in extension register

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: LOGR (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (D) Program steps 11

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D C T √
S2 INT Constant D
S3 INT R
S4 INT Constant
D INT D √

Operand description 2. Log in at each operation cycle;

3. Store the number of logged data in D.
S1: unit to execute log in
S2: number of units (1~1024) Note

S3: starting element address 1. When using the memory card, initialize the login stages. If
S4: stage of elements (1~16) the data for logging in extension file register are inconsistent
with the starting data of S1, report memory card operation
D: number of logged data
error. The initialization can be executed on the login stages
Function description by INITR or INITER instruction or on all ER elements by
1. When the power flow is valid, till the extension register menu clear command from background memory card (need
starting with S3 and S4 extent of the extension file register to select user program, global variable, data block and
are filled totally, log in S2 point starting with S1 all the time; system block at the same time). In order to avoid data loss,
please back up the content of the memory card by
background software before initialization.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 213

2. The value in S3 must be the starting element number of the stage, as shown below:
Starting element Range of write memory Starting element Range of write memory
Stage No. Stage No.
No. card R backup area No. card R backup area
0 R0 R0~R2047 8 R16384 R16384~R18431
1 R2048 R2048~R4095 9 R18432 R18432~R20479
2 R4096 R4096~R6143 10 R20480 R20480~R22527
3 R6144 R6144~R8191 11 R22528 R22528~R24575
4 R8192 R8192~R10239 12 R24576 R24576~R26623
5 R10240 R10240~R12287 13 R26624 R26624~R28671
6 R12288 R12288~R14335 14 R28672 R28672~R30719
7 R14336 R14336~R16383 15 R30720 R30720~R32767
3. Under memory hardware write protection, report memory card operation error.
4. Format of login data
Storage address of the 1st login data
S3~S3+S2-1 D=S2
S3~S3+S2-1
Storage address of the 2nd login data Data write area
S3+S2~S3+2S2-1 D=2S2
S3~S3+S2-1 1926 * S4
S3+2S2~S3+3S2-1 D=3S2
………… ………… ……
Storage area of login data
Control area of write location
Each time use 1 word write area,
S3+1926*S4-1 change ON to OFF in turn from 0 bit of Control area
~S3+2048*S4-1 S3+1926*S4-1. When all 122 * S4
S3+1926*S4-1 become OFF, use next
element S3+1926*S4.

Example LD M1

LOGR D0 5 R0 1 D100
When M1=ON, log in the data of D0~D4 in R0~R2047 at
stage 0, and record the login data number in D100.

6.20.5 INITER: Initialize extension file register

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow

IL: INITER (S1) (S2) Program steps 5

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT R √
S2 INT Constant

Operand description Function description

S1: extension register unit in the same address as extension 1. Initialize S2 stage extension file register starting with S1 in
file register unit to be initialized (only designate the starting memory and write 0xFFFF;
address of the stage) 2. The initialization is executed in stages.
S2: stage number of extension register and extension file
register to be initialized (S2=1)
Note
1. The value in S1 must be the starting element number of the stage, as shown below:
Starting element Range of write memory Starting element Range of write memory
Stage No. Stage No.
No. card R backup area No. card R backup area
0 R0 R0~R2047 8 R16384 R16384~R18431
1 R2048 R2048~R4095 9 R18432 R18432~R20479
2 R4096 R4096~R6143 10 R20480 R20480~R22527
3 R6144 R6144~R8191 11 R22528 R22528~R24575
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 214

4 R8192 R8192~R10239 12 R24576 R24576~R26623

5 R10240 R10240~R12287 13 R26624 R26624~R28671
6 R12288 R12288~R14335 14 R28672 R28672~R30719
7 R14336 R14336~R16383 15 R30720 R30720~R32767

2. Under memory hardware write protection, report memory Example

card operation error;
3. When the memory is not connected, the system will report
no memory card; LD M1
4. The instruction can only initialize one stage at a time and INITER R0 1
the initialization time for each stage is about 100ms. In
When M1=ON, initialize extension file register ER0~ER2047
actual use, please set watchdog time correctly.
at stage 0.

6.21 Locating instruction

6.21.1 ZRN: Regress to origin instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: ZRN (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 11

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S3 BOOL X Y M S
D BOOL Y

Operand description Note

S1: zero return speed, specifying the zero return start speed 1. Because the ZRN instruction is incapable of searching the
32-bit instruction: IVC1, IVC2L: 10~100000(Hz); IVC1L: Y0, proximity signal automatically, the zero return operation must
Y1 10~100000(Hz), Y2, Y3 10~10000(Hz); IVC2H: start earlier than where the proximity sensor is located.
10~200000(Hz) 2. During the return to zero process, the value of the current
S2: crawling speed, specifying the relatively low speed when value register will decrease.
the proximity signal is ON 3. The minimum value of actual output pulse frequency is
S3: proximity signal, specifying the X point for inputting determined by the following formula:
proximity signal Fmax  500
Fmin_ acc 
If a non-X element is specified, the position offset of the zero T
point will increase due to the influence of the PLC calculation Fmax is the maximum speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is
cycle.
ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), Fmin_ acc is the
D: starting address of the high-speed pulse output minimum output frequency limit.
IVC1, IVC2L: Y0 or Y1; IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y0, 4. The output pulse frequency will still output the frequency
Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 of the calculated result even if designated the value lower
Function description than the calculated result. The frequency of the initial
acceleration and final deceleration cannot be lower than the
When SM85 clearing function is enabled, the CLR signals
for high-speed pulse outputs Y0 and Y1 are output through calculated result. If the maximum speed is below the
Y2 and Y3 respectively. When SM85 is set, the CLR signals calculated result, there will be no pulse output.
will be output to the servo amplifier through Y2 and Y3. 5. 0<crawling speed<one tenth of the Max. speed
6. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 215

Time sequence chart

S1 Zero return speed
Frequency

S2 Crawling speed
Pulse output
Position
Zero return
starting point
ON

OFF
Position

ON

Note 1 OFF
Clearing signal
Width: 20ms + scan cycle Within 1ms
ON

Note 2
OFF
Monitoring of Position
pulse output
Note 1: When SM85 is set, the clearing function is valid
Note 2: SM82 & SM83 are the monitors of Y0 & Y1 pulse
outputs respectively

6.21.2 PLSV: Variable speed pulse output instruction

Applicable to
LAD: IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Influenced flag bit

IL: PLSV (S) (D1) (D2) Program steps

8
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y M S

Operand description stop, it is recommended to use the RAMP instruction to

change the value of pulse frequency S.
S: output pulse frequency(Hz)
3. In the process of high-speed pulse output, when the
32-bit instruction: IVC1, IVC2L: 10~100000(Hz),
power flow driven by the instruction turns OFF, the output will
-10~-100000(Hz);
stop without deceleration.
IVC1L: Y0,Y1 10~100000(Hz), -10~-100000(Hz), Y2,Y3
4. If the corresponding high-speed pulse output monitor
10~10000(Hz), -10~-10000(Hz);
(SM82 or SM83) is ON, the power flow driven by the
IVC2H: 10~200000(Hz), -10~-200000(Hz) instruction will not be driven by the instruction again after the
D1: starting address of the high-speed pulse output power flow turns OFF.
IVC1, IVC2L: Y0 or Y1; IVC1L: Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3; IVC2H: 5. The direction is determined by the positive or negative
Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 nature of S.
D2: starting address of rotating direction signal output. Its Note
state is determined by S:
1. The high-speed I/O instructions, PLS instruction and
When S is positive: D2 is ON
locating instructions can use Y0 or Y1 to output high-speed
When S is negative: D2 is OFF pulses. However, take care not to use more than one such
Function description instructions on Y0 or Y1 at one time.
1. You can change S even in the state of outputting 2. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.
high-speed pulses
2. Because there will be no acceleration or deceleration
during the start & stop, if buffer is needed during the start or
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 216

6.21.3 DRVI: Relative position control instruction

Applicable to
LAD: IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S IVC2H IVC1L
Influenced flag bit

IL: DRVI (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Program steps

11
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y M S

Operand description 5. During the execution of the instruction, the output will
decelerate to stop when the driven contact turns OFF. The
S1: output pulse number (relatively specified)
execution completion flag SM will not act then.
32-bit instruction: -999999~+999999
6. If the corresponding high-speed pulse output control
S2: output pulse frequency(Hz) (SM80 or SM81) is ON, the contact driven by the instruction
32-bit instruction: IVC1, IVC2L: 10~100000(Hz); IVC1L: will not be driven by the instruction again after the the power
Y0,Y1 10~100000(Hz),Y2,Y3 10~10000(Hz); IVC2H: flow turns OFF.
10~200000(Hz)
Note
D1: starting address of the high-speed pulse output
1. The minimum value of actual output pulse frequency is
IVC1, IVC2L: Y0 or Y1; IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y0, Y2,
determined by the following formula:
Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7
D2: starting address of rotating direction signal output. Its Fmax  500
Fmin_ acc 
T
state is determined by S1:
Fmax is the maximum speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is
When S1 is positive: D2 is ON
When S1 is negative: D2 is OFF ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), Fmin_ acc is the
minimum output frequency limit.
Function description
2. The output pulse frequency will still output the frequency
1. S1 is stored in the following current registers: of the calculated result even if designated the value lower
Y0 output: SD80, SD81 (32-bit) than the calculated result. The frequency of the initial
Y1 output: SD82, SD83 (32-bit) acceleration and final deceleration cannot be lower than the
2. When D2 is OFF, the value of the current value register calculated result. If the maximum speed is below the
will decrease. calculated result, there will be no pulse output.
3. The rotating direction is determined by the positive or 3. 0<crawling speed<one tenth of the Max. speed
negative nature of S1. 4. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.
4. Changing the operands during the execution of the
instruction will not take effect until the next cycle when the
instruction is executed again.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 217

6.21.4 DRVA: Absolute position control instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L

Influenced flag bit

IL: DRVA (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Program steps 11

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y M S

Y4 outputs the current position of locating

Operand description SD341
instruction (LSB) (IVC2H)
S1: targe position (absolutely specified) Y5 outputs the current position of locating
SD350
32-bit instruction: -999999~+999999 instruction (MSB) (IVC2H)
Y5 outputs the current position of locating
S2: output pulse frequency(Hz) SD351
instruction (LSB) (IVC2H)
32-bit instruction: IVC1, IVC2L: 10~100000(Hz); IVC1L: Y6 outputs the current position of locating
SD360
Y0,Y1 10~100000(Hz),Y2,Y3 10~10000(Hz); IVC2H: instruction (MSB) (IVC2H)
10~200000(Hz) Y6 outputs the current position of locating
SD361
instruction (LSB) (IVC2H)
D1: starting address of the high-speed pulse output
Y7 outputs the current position of locating
SD370
IVC1, IVC2L: Y0 or Y1; IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y0, Y2, instruction (MSB) (IVC2H)
Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 Y7 outputs the current position of locating
SD371
instruction (LSB) (IVC2H)
PLC output must apply transistor output.
D2: starting address of rotating direction signal output 2. When D2 is OFF, the value of the current value register
will decrease.
When the output pulse is positive, D2 is ON
3. The rotating direction is determined by the positive or
When the output pulse is negative, D2 is OFF
negative nature of S1.
Function description 4. Changing the operands during the execution of the
1. Output pulse in S1 corresponding to the current register instruction will not take effect until the next cycle when the
as the relative position as follows: instruction is executed again.

SD80
Y0 outputs the current position of locating 5. During the execution of the instruction, the output will
instruction (MSB)(IVC1) decelerate to stop when the driven contact turns OFF. The
Y0 outputs the current position of locating
SD81 execution completion flag SM will not act then.
instruction (LSB)(IVC1)
Y1 outputs the current position of locating 6. If the corresponding high-speed pulse output control
SD82
instruction (MSB) (IVC1) (SM80 or SM81) is ON, the contact driven by the instruction
SD83
Y1 outputs the current position of locating will not be driven by the instruction again after the the power
instruction (LSB) (IVC1) flow turns OFF.
Y0 outputs the current position of locating
SD200
instruction (MSB) (IVC2L,IVC1L,IVC2H) Note
Y0 outputs the current position of locating
SD201 1. The minimum value of actual output pulse frequency is
instruction (LSB) (IVC2L, IVC1L,IVC2H)
determined by the following formula:
Y1 outputs the current position of locating
SD210
instruction (MSB) (IVC2L, IVC1L) Fmax  500
Fmin_ acc 
Y1 outputs the current position of locating T
SD211
instruction (LSB) (IVC2L, IVC1L)
Fmax is the maximum speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is
Y2 outputs the current position of locating
SD320
instruction (MSB) (IVC1L,IVC2H) ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), Fmin_ acc is the
Y2 outputs the current position of locating minimum output frequency limit.
SD321
instruction (LSB) (IVC1L,IVC2H)
2. The output pulse frequency will still output the frequency
Y3 outputs the current position of locating
SD330 of the calculated result even if designated the value lower
instruction (MSB) (IVC1L)
Y3 outputs the current position of locating than the calculated result. The frequency of the initial
SD331
instruction (LSB) (IVC1L) acceleration and final deceleration cannot be lower than the
Y4 outputs the current position of locating calculated result. If the maximum speed is below the
SD340
instruction (MSB) (IVC2H)
calculated result, there will be no pulse output.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 218

3. 0<crawling speed<one tenth of the Max. speed 4. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.

6.21.5 ABS: Read current value instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: ABS (S) (D1) (D2) Program steps 8

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S BOOL X Y M S

D1 BOOL Y M S

D2 DINT KnY KnM KnS D SD C R √

Operand description
S: the input point from servo 2. The read current value D2 can be stored in any word
The input points occupies three consecutive Xs (S, S+1 and element, but the current value must be eventually stored in
S+2) or other bit elements. SD80 or SD82.
D1: output points to servo. 3. The power flow of the ABS instruction should be ON after
the current value is read, otherwise the servo amplifier will
The output points occupies three consecutive Ys (D1, D1+1
turn OFF.
and D1+2) or other bit elements
4. SM82 and SM83 are the output monitors of Y0 and Y1.
D2: the current value (32-bit) read from servo.
The monitors will turn OFF after the output is complete.
The current value occupies two word elements: D2 (MSB)
5. When the power flow is valid and the servo is ON, the
and D2+1 (LSB). Because the read current value must be
written into SD80 or SD82 (32-bit signed integer), you can ABS instruction will send the transmission mode signal.
directly specify SD80 or SD82 as D2. 6. When the data transmission ready signal and the ABS
request signal coincide with each other, the (32+6)bit data
Function description
communication will start.
1. You should power on the PLC and servo amplifier at the 7. The data are tranmitted through the ABS 2-bit (bit0 & bit1)
same time, or power on the servo amplifier first, in order to loop.
make sure that the servo amplifier is ON before the PLC
8. The system error code for ABS Data Read Timeout is 79;
enters the RUN state.
for ABS Data Read and Check Error, 80.
The wire connection for the I/O signals of the ABS instruction is as shown in the following figure:

PLC Servo amplifier PLC Servo amplifier

EC10 - 1614BRA MR-H -A EC10-1614BRA MR-J2-A
X 0 ABS ( bit 0) PF 24 X 0 ABS (bit 0) D01 4
X 1 ABS ( bit 1) ZSP 23 X 1 ABS (bit 1) ZSP 19
Data transmission Data transmission
X 2 ready
TLC 25 X 2 TLC 6
ready
COM SG 16 COM SG 10

Y 4 Servo ON SON 12 Y 4 Servo ON SON 5

ABS transmission ABS transmission
Y 5 mode
D13 44 Y 5 ABSM 8
mode
Y 6 ABS request D14 45 Y 6 ABS request ABSR 9
COM2 COM2
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 219

Time sequence chart

ON
Power supply
OFF
Note 4
Servo ON signal ON
(SON)
Note 1 OFF

ABS transmission ON
mode (ABSM).
Note 1 OFF

ABS transmission
ON
request (ABSR)
Note 1 OFF
Note 5
Data transmission ON
ready (TLC).
Note 2 OFF
Note 5

Send ABS data ON

DO1/ZSP
OFF
main circuit 80ms 80ms

Ready for
Ready. Note 2
operation.
RD Ready for Note 3
peration.
Note 3
Note 1: the signal PLC sends to servo amplifier
Note 2: the signal servo amplifier sends
Note 3: system data transmission over, ready for normal operation. After RD is set, ABSM signal will not be accepted
Note 4: Here the SON signal is set before ABSM signal. Despite that, the main circuit will not be ON until ABSM is set ON. If
transmission mode is interrupted with ABSM being set OFF during the ABS trasmission, the servo amplifier will report overtime alarm
(AL.E5).
Note 5: These signal pins' definitions will change upon ABSM set/reset. See the related Mitsubishi product information.

Note
The ABS instruction supports the Mitsubishi MR~J2 and MR~J2S servo amplifiers and use its specialized data transmission
protocol to read the current value of absolute position. The ABS instruction is a dedicated 32-bit instruction. For the servo
amplifiers of other brands, reading the current value of absolute position requires communication or other designated methods.
When the ABS instruction is executed, the related I/O points will be processed accordingly. Therefore, the ABS instruction is
applicable only to Mitsubishi servo amplifiers.

6.21.6 DSZR: Regress to origin with DOG search instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

DSZR (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Influenced flag bit

IL: DSZR (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 BOOL X Y M S
S2 BOOL X
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y M S

Operand description
S1: element SN of near-point input signal (DOG). When D1: pulse SN of output pulse. IVC1, IVC2L: Y0 or Y1;
designated to input the element, due to the influence from IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3; IVC2H: Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7
PLC operation cycle, the origin position offset will be D2: object SN of rotating direction signal output
enlarged.
S2: element SN of zero-point input signal. Range: X0~X7
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 220

Function description 2) Move in the opposite direction of origin return at origin

The near-point signal and zero-point signal are available. return speed
Forward rotation limit and reverse rotation limit are designed. 3) After detecting the front of DOG, decrease to stop (leave
The action of origin return will vary due to different positions. DOG)
After the instruction is completed, send the clear signal. 4) Move in origin return direction at origin return speed (enter
Origin return direction
DOG again)
Back Front
Reverse rotation limit DOG Forward rotation limit 5) Once detecting the front of DOG, decrease to crawling
Reverse rotation action
speed
Crawling speed 6) After detecting the back of DOG, stop when detecting the
Base speed
4) 3) 2) 1) first zero-point signal
Origin
Note
Forward rotation action
1. The PLSY, PLS and locating instructions can output
high-speed pulses through Y0 and Y1. Note that only one
1. The initial position before DOG: instruction can use one output port at one time.
1) By executing the instruction of origin return, start acting 2. The minimum value of actual output pulse frequency is
2) Move in origin return direction at origin return speed determined by the following formula:
3) Once detecting the front of DOG, decrease to crawling Fmax  500
Fmin_ acc 
speed T
4) After detecting the back of DOG, stop when detecting the Fmax is the maximum speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is
first zero-point signal ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), Fmin_ acc is the
2. The initial position in DOG: minimum output frequency limit.
1) By executing the instruction of origin return, start acting 3. The output pulse frequency will still output the frequency
2) Move in the opposite direction of origin return at origin of the calculated result even if designated the value lower
return speed than the calculated result. The frequency of the initial
3) After detecting the front of DOG, decrease to stop (leave acceleration and final deceleration cannot be lower than the
DOG) calculated result. If the maximum speed is below the
4) Move in origin return direction at origin return speed (enter calculated result, there will be no pulse output.
DOG again) 4. 0<crawling speed<one tenth of the Max. speed
5) Once detecting the front of DOG, decrease to crawling 5. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.
speed Example
6) After detecting the back of DOG, stop when detecting the
The parameters of the Max. speed, base speed, ACC/DEC
first zero-point signal
time, origin return speed and crawling speed can be set by
3. The initial position at near-point signal OFF (after DOG): default or by elements.
1) By executing the instruction of origin return, start acting
2) Move in origin return direction at origin return speed
3) When detecting reverse rotation limit, decrease to stop
4) Move in the opposite direction of origin return at origin
return speed
5) After detecting the front of DOG, decrease to stop (leave
DOG)
6) Move in origin return direction at origin return speed
7) Once detecting the front of DOG, decrease to crawling
Execute regress to origin with DOG search instruction:
speed
8) After detecting the back of DOG, stop when detecting the
first zero-point signal
4. The initial position at limit switch (forward rotation limit or
reverse rotation limit):
1) By executing the instruction of origin return, start acting
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 221

6.21.7 DVIT: Interrupt locating

LAD: Applicable to IVC2L IVC1L

DVIT (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Influenced flag bit

IL: DVIT (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Program steps 11

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V R √
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y M S

Operand description element instruction element

Y0 SM289
S1: output pulses after interrupt (relative address)
Y1 SM299
S2: output pulse frequency. IVC2L: 10~100000(Hz);
Note
IVC1L:Y0,Y1 10~100000(Hz),Y2,Y3 10~10000(Hz)
D1: SN of output pulse. IVC2L: Y0~Y1; IVC1L: Y0,Y1,Y2,Y3. 1. The PLSY, PLS and locating instructions can output
D2: object SN of rotating direction signal output high-speed pulses through Y0 and Y1. Note that only one
instruction can use one output port at one time.
Function description
2. The minimum value of actual output pulse frequency is
1. Execute DVIT instruction. SM260 is valid interrupt input determined by the following formula:
function, SD240 is the designation of interrupt input function,
Fmax  500
SM287 is logic inversion element of interrupt input signal. Fmin_ acc 
T
Logic inversion is to generate interrupts after confirming
Fmax is the maximum speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is
whether interrupt element is ON or OFF.
2. The designated method of interrupt input: SM260 is set ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), Fmin_ acc is the
ON. minimum output frequency limit.
3. Designate the SN of interrupt input (X0~X7) in SD240 or 3. The output pulse frequency will still output the frequency
the user interrupt instruction element. The low 8bit of SD240 of the calculated result even if designated the value lower
corresponds to interrupt input of pulse output Y0 and high than the calculated result. The frequency of the initial
8bit corresponds to interrupt input of pulse output Y1. acceleration and final deceleration cannot be lower than the
calculated result. If the maximum speed is below the
Set
Content calculated result, there will be no pulse output.
value
0 Designate X0 to interrupt input signal
4. When the output pulses are less than the pulses needed
1 Designate X1 to interrupt input signal by deceleration, deceleration frequency action can be
…… …… completed.
7 Designate X7 to interrupt input signal 5. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.
8*1 Designate the user interrupt instruction element*1 to Example
interrupt input signal
Pulse output User interrupt
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 222

6.21.8 STOPDV: Pulse output stop instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

STOPDV (S1) (S2) (S3) (D)
Influenced flag bit

IL: STOPDV (S1) (S2) (S3) (D) Program steps 12

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
S3 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
D BOOL Y

Operand description calculated result. If the maximum speed is below the

calculated result, there will be no pulse output.
S1: output pulses after executing the instruction (relative
3. When the output pulses are less than the pulses needed
address)
by deceleration, deceleration frequency action can be
S2: base speed in deceleration
completed.
S3: time from the original output action decelerates to base
4. D can be designated to Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6 and Y7. Y1
speed
and Y3 can be direction signal or negative pulse output
D: output point SN corresponding to high-speed pulse. Y0, signal to match with Y0 and Y2 separately.
Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7
5. If the output axis is in stop state, perform no operation. If
Function description the output axis is executing LIN, CW and CCW instructions,
1. Execute STOPDV instruction. Start in the process of PLSY, perform no operation.
PLS and locating instructions and stop output action of the 6. Refer to Chapter 11 Using locating function.
designated axis. Example
2. When the power flow is ON, stop after running the
In the main program, use PLSY instruction to drive Y0. The
designated pulse. When the pulse is 0, stop output
power flow is controlled by M0 element:
immediately; when the pulse is larger than 0, continue output,
then decelerate to base speed, and stop output until
reaching base speed.
3. The base speed and ACC/DEC time are set in the special Set the interrupt source of interrupt subprogram, such as:
data register of output axis, and the setting will be not
changed when executing the instruction; the base speed and
ACC/DEC time will be executed according to the setting in
Operand rather than the setting in the special data register.
4. The direction signal of output axis needs no designation
and it can identify the direction signal designated in original
PLSY, PLS and locating instructions. Executing the
instruction will not change the state of the direction signal.
Add the following sentence in interrupt subprogram:
Note
1. The minimum value of actual output pulse frequency is
determined by the following formula:
Fmax  500
Fmin_ acc  In above instruction, at the instant of setting X6 ON, Y0 will
T
decelerate to stop after outputting pulses. Until Y0 stops
Fmax is the maximum speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is
completely, output 30000 pulses regardless of the scan
ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), Fmin_ acc is the cycle.
minimum output frequency limit. For STOPDV instruction in INT_1, Operand1 is 0, as shown
2. The output pulse frequency will still output the frequency below:
of the calculated result even if designated the value lower
than the calculated result. The frequency of the initial
acceleration and final deceleration cannot be lower than the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 223

When the event of interrupt source generates (X6 rising primary function simultaneously to avoid scanning the
edge), Y0 will stop immediately regardless of the scan cycle. instruction and restarting high-speed output after Y0 stops.
Note: When executing STOPDV instruction, disconnect
relevant power flow of high-speed instruction for Y0 in

6.21.9 LIN: Linear trace interpolation

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

LIN (S) (D1) (D2) (D3) (D4)
Influenced flag bit

IL: LIN (S) (D1) (D2) (D3) (D4) Program steps 12

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT D
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y
D3 BOOL Y
D4 BOOL Y

Operand description (1) In the incremental mode, the target trace adopts relative
address, referring to the move distance of X and Y axes from
S: starting address of storage area for parameter list
the current position to the target.
D1: corresponding output point SN of X axis pulse signal (or
(2) In the absolute mode, the target trace adopts absolute
positive pulse signal). Range: Y0, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7
address, referring to the absolute coordinate of the target
D2: corresponding output point SN of X axis direction signal
position on X and Y axes.
(or negative pulse signal)
Note
D3: corresponding output point SN of Y axis pulse signal (or
positive pulse signal). Range: Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 1. D1 and D3 must be used in group. When the output group
D4: corresponding output point SN of Y axis direction signal is Y0 and Y2, Y1 and Y3 can be direction signal or negative
(or negative pulse signal) pulse output signal to match with Y0 and Y2 separately. D1
and D3 can select any two of Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 for interpolation,
Function description
and the corresponding direction signals are free to select.
1. Move to the target position in linear trace at designated 2. Output group (Y0, Y2) can be designated to
vector speed. “pulse+direction” mode or “positive pulse+negative pulse”
2. Definitions of parameter list mode, the Max. speed 100k; Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 for interpolation
D are output in “pulse+direction” mode, the Max. speed 20k.
Content
element 3. The move distance of each axis should not exceed
S Reserved
16,777,215 pulses at a time.
Relation between action mode and output logic
(configuration code in decimal) 4. Note that only one of PLSY, PLS or locating instructions
Configuration Mode Output logic can be used for one high-speed port at one time.
Pulse+direction
00 Incremental (positive ON/ Example
negative OFF)
S+1 Positive pulse
01 Incremental
+negative pulse
Pulse+direction
10 Absolute (positive ON/
negative OFF)
Positive pulse
11 Absolute
+negative pulse
S+2 Resultant speed, initial speed Fmin(Hz) (MSB)
S+3 Resultant speed, initial speed Fmin(Hz) (LSB)
S+4 Resultant speed, Max. speed Fmax(Hz) (MSB)
S+5 Resultant speed, Max. speed Fmax(Hz) (LSB)
S+6 ACC/DEC time T(ms) (MSB)
S+7 ACC/DEC time T(ms) (LSB)
S+8 X axis target position (move distance) (MSB)
S+9 X axis target position (move distance) (LSB)
S+10 Y axis target position (move distance) (MSB)
S+11 Y axis target position (move distance) (LSB)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 224

6.21.10 CW: Clockwise circular trace interpolation

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

CW (S) (D1) (D2) (D3) (D4)
Influenced flag bit

IL: CW (S) (D1) (D2) (D3) (D4) Program steps 12

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT D
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y
D3 BOOL Y
D4 BOOL Y

X coordinate of passed point (LSB)

Operand description
Center of a circle of Y axis/
S+14
S: starting address of storage area for parameter list Y coordinate of passed point (MSB)
Center of a circle of Y axis/
D1: corresponding output point SN of X axis pulse signal (or S+15
Y coordinate of passed point (LSB)
positive pulse signal). Range: Y0, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 (1) In the incremental mode, the target trace adopts relative
D2: corresponding output point SN of X axis direction signal address, referring to the move distance of X and Y axes from
(or negative pulse signal) the current position to the target.
D3: corresponding output point SN of Y axis pulse signal (or (2) In the absolute mode, the target trace adopts absolute
positive pulse signal). Range: Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 address, referring to the absolute coordinate of the target
D4: corresponding output point SN of Y axis direction signal position on X and Y axes.
(or negative pulse signal) Note
Function description 1. D1 and D3 must be used in group. When the output group
1. Move to the target position in clockwise circular trace at is Y0 and Y2, Y1 and Y3 can be direction signal or negative
designated linear speed. pulse output signal to match with Y0 and Y2 separately. D1
2. Definitions of parameter list and D3 can select any two of Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 for interpolation,
and the corresponding direction signals are free to select.
D
Content
element 2. Output group (Y0, Y2) can be designated to
Method to form circular arc “pulse+direction” mode or “positive pulse+negative pulse”
Configuration Mode mode, the Max. speed 100k; Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 for interpolation
S 0 Designate center of a circle
1 Designate passed position
are output in “pulse+direction” mode, the Max. speed 20k.
3. The move distance of each axis should not exceed
Relation between action mode and output logic
(configuration code in decimal) 16,777,215 pulses at a time.
Configuration Mode Output logic 4. Note that only one of PLSY, PLS or locating instructions
Pulse+direction
00 Incremental (positive ON/ can be used for one high-speed port at one time.
negative OFF) 5. The coordinate of passed point designated in passed
S+1 Positive pulse
01 Incremental position mode refers to the position the whole circle passes
+negative pulse
Pulse+direction while the path of user-defined trace may not pass.
10 Absolute (positive ON/
negative OFF) Example
Positive pulse If the displacement of the current SD element is (2000,
11 Absolute
+negative pulse
S+2 (Reserved) 5000), the circular arc will be drawn as follows:
S+3 (Reserved)
S+4 Resultant speed (MSB)
S+5 Resultant speed (LSB)
S+6 (Reserved)
Y axis (SD320)

S+7 (Reserved)
S+8 X axis move distance (target position) (MSB) Starting point Center of the
S+9 X axis move distance (target position) (LSB) (2000,5000) circle (6000,5000)
S+10 Y axis move distance (target position) (MSB)
S+11 Y axis move distance (target position) (LSB)
End point
Center of a circle of X axis/
S+12 (6000,1000)
X coordinate of passed point (MSB)
X axis (SD200)
S+13 Center of a circle of X axis/
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 225

The incremental mode can be used. The displacement of end point relative to starting point is (4000, -4000) and the
displacement of center of the circle relative to starting point is (4000, 0). The programming can be:

6.21.11 CCW: Counterclockwise circular trace interpolation

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

CCW (S) (D1) (D2) (D3) (D4)
Influenced flag bit

IL: CCW (S) (D1) (D2) (D3) (D4) Program steps 12

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S DINT D
D1 BOOL Y
D2 BOOL Y
D3 BOOL Y
D4 BOOL Y

D
Operand description Content
element
S: starting address of storage area for parameter list Method to form circular arc
D1: corresponding output point SN of X axis pulse signal (or Configuration Mode
S 0 Designate center of a circle
positive pulse signal). Range: Y0, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 1 Designate passed position
D2: corresponding output point SN of X axis direction signal
Relation between action mode and output logic
(or negative pulse signal) (configuration code in decimal)
D3: corresponding output point SN of Y axis pulse signal (or Configuration Mode Output logic
Pulse+direction
positive pulse signal). Range: Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 00 Incremental (positive ON/
D4: corresponding output point SN of Y axis direction signal negative OFF)
S+1 Positive pulse
(or negative pulse signal) 01 Incremental
+negative pulse
Function description Pulse+direction
10 Absolute (positive ON/
1. Move to the target position in counterclockwise circular negative OFF)
Positive pulse
trace at designated linear speed. 11 Absolute
+negative pulse
2. Definitions of parameter list S+2 (Reserved)
S+3 (Reserved)
S+4 Resultant speed (MSB)
S+5 Resultant speed (LSB)
S+6 (Reserved)
S+7 (Reserved)
S+8 X axis move distance (target position) (MSB)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 226

S+9 X axis move distance (target position) (LSB) Example

S+10 Y axis move distance (target position) (MSB)
If the displacement of the current SD element is (6000,
S+11 Y axis move distance (target position) (LSB)
Center of a circle of X axis/ 1000), the circular arc will be drawn as follows:
S+12
X coordinate of passed point (MSB)
Center of a circle of X axis/
S+13
X coordinate of passed point (LSB)
Center of a circle of Y axis/
S+14

Y axis (SD320)
Y coordinate of passed point (MSB)
Center of a circle of Y axis/
S+15
Y coordinate of passed point (LSB) End point Center of the circle
(2000,5000) (6000,5000)
(1) In the incremental mode, the target trace adopts relative
address, referring to the move distance of X and Y axes from
Starting point
the current position to the target. (6000,1000)
(2) In the absolute mode, the target trace adopts absolute X axis (SD200)
address, referring to the absolute coordinate of the target The incremental mode can be used. The displacement of
position on X and Y axes.
end point relative to starting point is (-4000, 4000) and the
Note
displacement of center of the circle relative to starting point
1. D1 and D3 must be used in group. When the output group is (0, 4000). The programming can be:
is Y0 and Y2, Y1 and Y3 can be direction signal or negative
pulse output signal to match with Y0 and Y2 separately. D1
and D3 can select any two of Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 for interpolation,
and the corresponding direction signals are free to select.
2. Output group (Y0, Y2) can be designated to
“pulse+direction” mode or “positive pulse+negative pulse”
mode, the Max. speed 100k; Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7 for interpolation
are output in “pulse+direction” mode, the Max. speed 20k.
3. The move distance of each axis should not exceed
16,777,215 pulses at a time.
4. Note that only one of PLSY, PLS or locating instructions
can be used for one high-speed port at one time.
5. The coordinate of passed point designated in passed
position mode refers to the position the whole circle passes
while the path of user-defined trace may not pass.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 227

6.21.12 MOVELINK: Synchronous control instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

MOVELINK (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) (S6)
Influenced flag bit

IL: MOVELINK(S1)(S2)(S3)(S4)(S5)(S6) Program steps 17

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
S3 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V
S4 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V
S5 BOOL Y
S6 BOOL Y C

Operand description primary axis to run after ACC and DEC process. When the
primary axis outputs S3, two axes will be consistent in speed
S1: total pulses of secondary axis in the following process
and start constant speed synchronization. When the pulses
S2: total pulses of primary axis in the followed process of the primary axis from the target position is S4, constant
S3: pulses of primary axis before reaching constant speed speed synchronization will be over and the secondary axis
synchronization will start decelerating. When the primary axis arrives at the
S4: pulses of primary axis after completing constant speed target position, the secondary axis will stop.
synchronization 3. When the primary axis is defined as output axis, S6 will be
S5: corresponding output point SN of secondary axis pulse Y0~Y7; when it is defined as input axis, S6 is C236~C255 or
signal. Range: Y4, Y5 C301~C306.
S6: corresponding output point SN or high-speed counter 4. When the power flow is ON, the secondary axis will run.
SN of primary axis pulse signal. Range: Y0~Y7, C236~C255, The instruction supports calling methods of main programs,
C301~C306 subprograms and interrupt programs.
Function description 5. The direction signal of output axis does not need
designation and its ON/OFF state will not change in the
1. The instruction realizes simple synchronous functions of
following process.
two axes. The secondary axis measures and follows the
speed and position of the primary axis. The primary axis can Note
be high-speed output port of the module or high-speed input 1. Note that only one of PLSY, PLS or locating instructions
port. can be used for one high-speed port at one time.
Total amount of 2. The output point SN D corresponding to high-speed pulse
movement
Amount of Amount of
movement movement
can be: Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7. Y1 and Y3 can be direction
before after signal or negative pulse output signal to match with Y0 and
synchronizing synchronizing
Amount of Y2 separately.
movement of
secondary axis
Example
Total amount
of movement

Amount of
Speed of movement of
secondary primary axis
axis

Speed Synchronization
Start End
synchronized completed

2. As shown above, after the instruction starts, the

secondary axis begins from static state and follows the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 228

6.21.13 GEARBOX: Electronic gear instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

GEARBOX (D1) (S1) (D2) (S2)
Influenced flag bit

IL: GEARBOX (D1) (S1) (D2) (S2) Program steps 9

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D1 BOOL Y
S1 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √
D2 BOOL Y
S2 DINT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C V √

Operand description 4. When the electronic gear ratio<0, namely, either S1 or S2

is negative or positive, SD element of the secondary axis will
D1: corresponding output point SN of primary axis pulse
decrease along with pulse output.
signal. Range: Y0~Y7
Note
S1: electronic gear ratio determined by the operand and S2
D2: corresponding output point SN of secondary axis pulse 1. Note that only one of PLSY, PLS or locating instructions
signal. Range: Y4, Y5 can be used for one high-speed port at one time.
S2: electronic gear ratio determined by the operand and S1 2. If the electronic gear ratio exceeds the designated range,
Range of electronic gear ratio (S1/S2): 1/10000~10000 there will be no pulse output.
3. The output point SN D corresponding to high-speed pulse
Function description
can be: Y0, Y2, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7. Y1 and Y3 can be direction
1. The secondary axis follows the primary axis by electronic signal or negative pulse output signal to match with Y0 and
gear ratio (S1/S2). When the primary axis sends N pulses, Y2 separately.
the secondary axis will send N×S1/S2 pulses; when the
Example
primary axis outputs F pulses, the secondary axis will output
F×S1/S2 pulses;
2. When the power flow is ON, the secondary axis will run.
3. The direction signal of output axis does not need
designation and its ON/OFF state will not change in the
following process.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 229

6.22 Data processing instruction

6.22.1 MEAN: Mean instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: MEAN (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T R √
S2 INT Constant D R √
D INT KnY KnM KnS KnLM D SD C R √

Operand description Example

S1: starting element SN to store the required mean values
S2: mean values (1~64)
D: word element SN to store the achieved mean values LD M1
Function description MEAN D0 D10 4
1. Store S2 16bit mean values starting with S1 to D, and When M1=ON, calculate the mean value of 4 units starting
round down remainder. with D0 and store the result to D10. When D0=32, D1=10,
D2=15 and D3=-14, D10=10.

6.22.2 WTOB: Data separation instruction for byte unit

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: WTOB (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD C T R √
S2 INT D SD C T R √
D INT Constant D R √

Operand description
S1: starting element SN to store the data which will be separated in byte unit
S2: data number to be separated (S2≥0)
D: starting element SN to store the data which has been separated in byte unit
Function description
1. Separate the 16bit data stored in S2/S elements starting with S1 into S2 bytes, store the result into the low bytes of S2
elements starting with D and clear the high bytes.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 230

b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0 b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0

S . +0 High byte Low byte D . +0 00H High byte

High byte Low byte
+1 +1 00H Low byte
…

…
+2 00H High byte

n/2? High byte Low byte n bytes

+3 00H Low byte

…
? When n is odd, carry bit and get the value.

n=5, S . +2 +n-2 00H High byte

+n-1 00H Low byte

Save H00

2. When S2 is odd, only the high bytes (8bit) in the last data of separation source are the object data.
For example, n=5, the data of low bytes of S~S+2 will be stored in D~D+4.
b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0 b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0

S. +0 12H 39H D. +0 00H 12H

+1 56H 78H +1 00H 39H

+2 FEH DCH +2 00H 56H n=5

+3 00H 78H
n=5, ignore
+4 00H FEH

Save H00

3. S2=0, the instruction will not be executed.

4. Source operand and destination operand cannot be overlapped.
Example

LD M1
WTOB D0 D10 6
When M1=ON, separate 3 unit data starting with D0 into 6 units according to high/low bytes, and store the result into 6 units
starting with D10. When D0=0x102, D1=0x304 and D2=0x506, D10=0x01, D11=0x02, D12=0x03, D13=0x04, D14=0x05 and
D15=0x06.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 231

6.22.3 BTOW: Data combination instruction for byte unit

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: BTOW (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD C T R √
S2 INT D SD C T R √
D INT Constant D R √

Operand description
S1: starting element SN to store the data which will be combined in byte unit
S2: data number to be combined (S2≥0)
D: starting element SN to store the data which has been combined in byte unit
Function description
1. Store the data after the combination of low bytes (8bit) of S2 16bit data starting with S1 into S2/2 elements starting with D.
Ignore (8bit) high bytes of 16bit data (after S1) of combination source.
b15 -- -- -- b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- b0 b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0

S . +0 st
data of the 1 byte D . +0 the 1st byte the 2nd byte

+1 data of the 2nd byte +1 the 3rd byte the 4th byte
n data of the 3rd byte

…
+2
…

bytes
n/2? the (n-1)th byte the n th byte
…

+n-1 data of the n th byte

Ignore the high bytes.

2. When S2 is odd, the low bytes combined at last will be cleared.

b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0 b15 -- -- -- -- -- --b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- b0

S . +0 ABH 12H D . +0 12H 34H

+1 CDH 34H +1 56H 78H

n=5 +2 EFH 56H +2 9AH 00H

+3 ABH 78H
n=5, “H00”
+4 CDH 9AH

Ignore the high bytes.

3. S2=0, the instruction will not be executed.

4. Source operand and destination operand cannot be overlapped.
Example

LD M1
BTOW D0 D10 6
When M1=ON, store 3 unit data after the combination of 6 unit data starting with D0 into 3 units starting with D10. When
D0=0x01, D1=0x02, D2=0x03, D3=0x04, D4=0x05 and D5=0x06, D10=0x102, D11=0x304 and D12=0x506.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 232

6.22.4 UNI: 4bit combination instruction for 16bit data

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: UNI (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD C T R √
S2 INT D SD C T R √
D INT Constant D R √

Operand description
S1: starting element SN to store the data which will be combined
S2: combined data (0-4, S2=0, no processing)
D: element SN to store the data which has been combined
Function description
1. Store S2 16bit data starting with S1 into S2 elements starting with D.

b15 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- b4 b3 -- -- -- -- b0

S. +0 low 4bit

1 low 4bit

2 low 4bit

3 low 4bit
D.

Ignored Data to be combined

2. When S2 is 1~3, the unit of low bit {4×(4-S2)} in D is zero.

b15 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- b4 b3 -- -- -- -- b0

S . +0 low 4bit

+1 low 4bit

+2 low 4bit

D.
Ignored Data to be combined

n=3, it is 0.

3. When the range of S2 is 1-4 and S2=0, the instruction will not be executed.
4. Source operand and destination operand cannot be overlapped.
Example

LD M1
UNI D0 D10 4
When M1=ON, combine low 4bit of 4 unit data starting with D0 and store the result into D10. When D0=0x01, D1=0x02,
D2=0x03 and D3=0x04, D10=0x1234.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 233

6.22.5 DIS: 4bit separation instruction for 16bit data

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: DIS (S1) (D) (S2) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT D SD C T R √
S2 INT D SD C T R √
D INT Constant D R √

Operand description
S1: starting element SN to store the data which will be separated
S2: separated data (0-4, S2=0, no processing)
D: element SN to store the data which has been separated
Function description
1. Store S2 16bit data starting with S1 into S2 elements starting with D.

S . D . +0 Low 4bit

+1 Low 4bit

+2 Low 4bit

+3 Low 4bit

Set to 0 Storage area

2. The valid range of S2 is 1-4. The instruction will not be executed for other data.
3. The high 12bit in S2 elements starting with D is cleared.
4. Source operand and destination operand cannot be overlapped.
Example

LD M1
DIS D0 D10 4
When M1=ON, separate D0 unit data every 4 bits, and store the result into 4 units starting with D10. When D0=0x1234,
D10=0x01, D11=0x02, D12=0x03 and D13=0x04.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 234

6.22.6 ANS: Signal alarm set instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ANS (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 INT T √
S2 INT Constant D R √
D BOOL S √

Operand description SM401 and SD401 works

Any of S900-S999 acts,
S1: timer SN to judge time, only applicable to 100ms timer, SM401 Signal alarm acts
set SM401 after ON
T0-T209 Store the Min. No. in
SD401 Min. No. at On
S2: data to judge time (1-32767) S900-S999
D: element to set signal alarm, S900-S999
Example
Function description
1. When the hold time of power flow>S2, set D; when the
hold time of power flow<S2, reset S1 and do not set D; when
the power flow is invalid, reset S1. LD M0
Address ANS T0 100 S901
Name Function
No.
When the power flow is valid, not disconnected in 10s, S901
SM400 Signal alarm is valid Set SM400 after ON,
will be set.

6.22.7 ANR: Signal alarm reset instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero, carry, borrow
IL: ANR Program steps 1
Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing

Store the Min. No. in

Operand description SD401 Min. No. at On
S900-S999
No operand
Function description Example
1. When the power flow is valid, reset the running state of
signal alarm S900-S999; if there are multiple state actions,
reset the one with the Min. No., when the power flow
becomes valid again, reset the next one with the Min. No.. LD M1
Address ANR
Name Function
No. When the power flow is valid, if there are multiple S set by
Set SM400 after ON, ANS, reset the one with the Min. No..
SM400 Signal alarm is valid
SM401 and SD401 works
Any of S900-S999 acts,
SM401 Signal alarm acts
set SM401 after ON
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 6 Application instructions 235

6.23 Other instructions

6.23.1 RND: Generate random number instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit Zero flag

IL: RND (D) Program steps 3

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
D WORD KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T Z R √

Operand description Example

D: starting element SN to store random number

Function description
1. Generate 0-32767 random number and store the value LD X0
into D; if the random number is 0, set zero flag SM180. RND D0
When M1=ON, generate the random number and store it
into D0, D0=26406.

6.23.2 DUTY: Generate timing pulse instruction

LAD: Applicable to IVC2H

Influenced flag bit

IL: DUTY (S1) (S2) (D) Program steps 7

Indexed
Operand Type Applicable elements
addressing
S1 WORD Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
S2 INT Constant KnX KnY KnM KnS KnLM KnSM D SD C T V Z R √
D BOOL SM

Operand description Example

S1: scan times of ON

S2: scan times of OFF
D: always target address of timing output When M1=ON, there will be 10 scan times for ON and 10
Function description scan times for OFF in SM430. Simultaneously, store the
1. The timing pulse output unit D scans ON S1 times and count value of scan times in SD430.
OFF S2 times; Note
2. SM unit, SM430-SM434 Act when the instruction is at rising edge, continue even if
Target address of Element for counting scan the power flow is OFF, and stop at STOP or power off.
timing output times
SM430 SD430
SM431 SD431
SM432 SD432
SM433 SD433
SM434 SD434
3. The instruction can be used 5 times while multiple DUTY
instructions cannot use the same target address of timing
output.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 236

Chapter 7 SFC tutor

This chapter introduces the basic concepts and programming methods of Sequential Function Chart (SFC). In addition, the
points to note during the programming is also introduced.

7.1 Introduction to SFC

7.1.1 What is SFC

The Sequential Function Chart, or SFC, is a programming language developed and got popular in recent years. SFC can turn a
PLC program into a structured flow chart. By using standard programming symbols and grammar compliant with IEC61131-3,
the SFC can divide a complicated operation process into sequential procedures that are linked together with conditioned
transfers, so as to realize sequence control.
The SFC edited programs are direct and sequential. Each procedure and transfer condition are relatively simple program
sections, ideal for the sequential control application. These advantages explain why it is finding wider application.

7.1.2 What is SFC of IVC series PLC

The SFC of IVC series PLC is a programming language used by INVT IVC series PLCs. Besides standard SFC functions, the
SFC of IVC series PLC can provide multiple nested LAD program blocks.
The program edited with SFC of IVC series PLC can be converted into LAD or IL program.
The SFC of IVC series PLC can also support up to 20 independent procedures. The independent procedures can run
independently, that is to say, the steps within different independent procedures are scanned and executed separately. However,
jumping among independent procedures is enabled.

7.1.3 Basic concepts of SFC

The SFC has the following two basic concepts: step and transfer. Other concepts, like jump, branch and multiple independent
procedures, all evolve from the two basic concepts.
Steps
1. Definition
A step is actually a program section, representing a work state or move in the sequence control process. Putting multiple steps
together in a organic way can form a complete SFC program.
2. Execution of steps
In a SFC program, each step is represented by a fixed S element.
A step is valid when it is being executed. For a valid step, its corresponding S element is ON, and the PLC will scan and
execute its instructions. While a step not being executed is invalid. For a invalid step, its corresponding S element is OFF, and
the PLC will not scan and execute its instructions.
Transfer
The sequence control process is actually a series of step transfers. A PLC executing a certain step will, if certain logic
conditions are met, leave the current step to enter and execute a new step. That transition is called the step transfer.
The logic condition that triggers the transfer is called the transfer condition.

7.1.4 Programming symbols and their usage

Programming symbol
The IVC series PLC SFC programming language consists of the following programming symbols:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 237

Table 7-1 Programming symbols

Symbol name Symbol Description
A initial step of SFC, numbered as Sn. The “n” must not repeat. The execution
Initial step of a SFC program must start with an initial step, whose S element range is
S0~S19

A normal step, numbered as Sn. The “n” must not repeat. The S element
Normal step
range for the normal step is S20--S991

A transfer. It can be built-in with a transfer condition (embeded LAD). You can
compile the transfer condition so that the S element connected with this
Transfer
transfer will be set when the condition is met and enter the next step. The
transfer must be used between steps.

A jump, used after the transfer. It can set the specified S element to ON when
Jump
the transfer conditions are met. It is used to cycle or jump among steps

A reset, used after the transfer. It can set the specified S element to OFF
Reset
when the transfer conditions are met. It is used to end the SFC program

Multiple independent transfer conditions, used after a step. When the transfer
condition of one branch is met, the last step will end and the next step of the
Selection branch
corresponding branch will start. After that, no other parallel branch will be
selected

A merge of selection branches. When the transfer condition of one branch is

Selection merge
met, the last step will end and the next step will start

Connected after a step, the parallel branches share the same transfer
Parallel branch conditions. When the transfer conditions are met, the parallel branches are
validated and executed at the same time

A merge of parallel branches. The next step will start only after all the parallel
Parallel merge
steps are finished and the transfer conditions are met

The LAD block presents LAD instructions for operations besides the SFC
Ladder chart block
flow, such as starting the initial step and other general operations

Usage of programming symbols

1. The initial step can be used alone. If you connect it with other symbols, you must use it at the start of you SFC program, and
use a transfer condition symbol after it.
2. However, you cannot connet the LAD step with other symbols.
3. You must connect an normal stepwith transfer condition symbols, for the ordinary steps cannot be used alone.
4. The reset and jump should both be preceded by a transfer and followed by nothing.
5. Neither the transfer nor the jump can exist alone in a program.

7.1.5 SFC program structure

The structure of a SFC program is classified into three types: simple sequential structure, selection branch structure and
parallel structure. Besides, the jump structure is also a special form of the selection branch structure.
Simple sequential structure
错误！未找到引用源。 shows a simple structured SFC program and its LAD counterpart.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 238

In a simple structured SFC program, when the step transfer conditions are met, the program will run from the current step to the
next step in a linear flow. At the last step, when the transfer conditions are met, the SFC program section will exit end or
transfer to the initial step.
1. Ladder chart block
The ladder chart block is used to start SFC program section. To be specific, to set the S element of the initial step to ON. In the
preceding figure, the program uses the power-on startup mode.
The ladder chart block can also be used as other general program sections besides the SFC program.
2. Initial step
As shown in 错误！未找到引用源。, the initial step is started by a ladder chart block. The range of S elements for initial-step is
0~19.
3. Normal step
The normal step is the main component of the program. The range of S elements for normal-step is 20~991 (for IVC2L series)
or 20~1023 (for IVC1 series).
4. Transfer or reset
The program shown in 错误！未找到引用源。 is ended with a jump, which leads the program to the initial step. This is a cyclic
program.
However, the program can also be ended with a reset, which can reset the status of the last step, end a program, and wait for
the next round of execution.
Selection branch structure
The selection branch structure is shown in the following figure, with LAD on the left and SFC on the right.

1. Selection branch
A branch step is validated when its corresponding transfer conditions are met. You must ensure that the transfer conditions of
different branches are all exclusive, so as to make sure that each time only one branch will be selected. As shown in the
preceding figure, steps S27 and S28 in row N12 of LAD program are transferred from conditions M20 and M21 respectively.
The conditions M20 and M21 must not be met at the same time in order to ensure that S27 and S28 will not be selected at the
same time.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 239

2. Selection merge
The selection merge is the structure where all selection branches merge to the same step. The transfer conditions are set
respectively. As shown in the preceding figure, the transfer condition in the branch of S27 is that time is up for T12, while that
for the branch of S28 is that time is up for T13. However, the results are the same: step S29 starts.
Parallel branch structure
The parallel branch structure is shown in the following figure, with LAD on the left and SFC on the right.

1. Parallel branch
When the transfer conditions are met for the parallel branches, all branch steps will be validated at the same time. This enables
the PLC to process multiple procedures at the same time, a quite usual sequential control process. As shown in the preceding
figure, in program row N5, the steps S30 and S31 will be validated at the same time when condition M30 is met.
2. Parallel merge
The parallel merge is the structure where all parallel branches merge to the same step by invalidating all branch steps at the
same time. As shown in the preceding figure, in program row N6, when the program is running both S30 and S31 at the same
time, if condition M31 is met, the program will start S32 and end S30&S31.
The sequential control behind the parallel merge structure is that no next step can be executed unless all the parallel steps are
finished.
Jump structure
The applications of jumps include: to omit certain steps, to recycle by returning to the initial step or a normal step, and to jump
to another independent procedure.
1. Omitting certain steps
In a procedure, when certain steps are unnecessary under certain conditions, the program can jump directly to the needed step
and omit the unnecessary steps, as shown in the following figure, with LAD on and left and SFC on the right.

In the SFC program shown in the preceding figure, S21 is used as the jump, while step S20 is omitted. The jump is actually a
selection branch.
While in the LAD counterpart, the second branch in row N0 is the jump instruction, which uses the OUT coil instead of the SET
instruction in the transfer. When step S0 is valid, and if M1 is ON, the program will jump to step S21.
2. Recycling
In a procedure, when it is necessary to recycle a part or all of the steps under certain conditions, you can use the jump function.
you can recycle a part of the steps if you jump to a previous normal step, or all the step if you jump to the initial step.
Shown in the following figure is a program that can realize the above two recycles, with LAD on the left and SFC on the right.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 240

In the SFC, when step S22 is valid, the program may jump to step S21 to recycle S21 and S22, or jump to the initial step S0 to
recycle all the steps. Which recycle will be selected is determined by a selection branch structure.
While in the LAD, the two kinds of jumps are realized in row N3, where you can see the OUT coil.
3. Jumping to another independent procedure
The SFC of IVC series PLC supports multiple independent procedures and jumping among these procedures is allowed. You
can set certain transfer conditions in an independent procedure for jumping to a random step (initial or normal) of another
independent procedure.

 Note
Jumping among multiple independent procedures complicates the program. Use it with prudence.

Shown in the following figure is a jump from one independent procedure to another, with LAD on the left and SFC on the right.

In the SFC, when the S0 in the first procedure is valid, the program can jump to step S23 in the second procedure under certain
conditions; while in the second procedure, the program can also jump to step S20 in the first procedure under certain
conditions.
As shown in the preceding figure, the jump is based on a selection branch structure. When the program jumps to another
procedure, all the steps in the original procedure will become invalid. As the example shows, if the program jumps to step S23
in the second procedure from step S20 in the first procedure, step S20 and all the other steps in the first procedure will become
invalid.

7.1.6 Execution of SFC program

The similarity between the execution of a SFC program and that of a LAD program is that they both carry out cyclic scanning
from up to down and from left to right.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 241

On the other hand, their difference lies in that in a SFC program, the steps’ validity will change according to certain conditions,
and only valid steps can be executed. While in a LAD main program, the whole program will be scanned and executed in each
scan cycle.
As shown in the following figure, the program on the right is the LAD counterpart of the SFC program on the left. When step
S20 is valid, the T2 timer will be scanned and start timing. Steps S21 and S22 will not be executed before T2 counter reaches
the preset value, and S23 will not be executed when M13 is OFF.

The S elements state will switch between ON and OFF according to the transfer conditions, thus making the program transfer
from one step to another. When a S element changes from ON to OFF, the output elements of the corresponding step will be
cleared or reset. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.

 Note
1. The SFC program of IVC series PLC usually contains LAD program blocks that are used to handle operations besides the
flow, including starting the SFC. The LAD program blocks are not controlled by the S elements and will be executed in every
scan cycle.
2. Because the state change of the S element will affect the embedded instructions of the corresponding step, and the
switch-over between two steps takes some time, it is necessary to observe certain rules during the SFC programming. For
details, see 7.4Points to note in SFC programming.

7.2 Relationship between SFC program and LAD program

A SFC program can take the form of a LAD program, which can help understand the SFC program structure.
In the LAD program, the SFC symbols are replaced with various SFC instructions, while the procedures are represented by
various structures.

7.2.1 STL instruction and step

All SFC steps are represented by S elements. In a LAD program, a step is started by a STL instruction.
Shown in the following left figure is the LAD program of a simple sequential structure, and the right figure is its corresponding
SFC program.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 242

As shown in the LAD program, the S2 step starts with a STL instruction, and the following TON instruction is the internal
instruction of S2. A step can be made up of multiple instructions. A SFC step is actually a relatively complete program section,
almost consistent with the LAD counterpart.
The difference between an initial step and a normal step is that they use different S elements.
For detailed information about the STL instruction, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。. Note that when the step
changes from ON to OFF, the destination operands of its internal instructions will be cleared. Such instructions include OUT,
TON, TOF, PWM, HCNT, PLSY, PLSR, DHSCS, SPD, DHSCI, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHST, DHSP and BOUT.

 Note
Because the PLC runs in continuous scan cycles, after a step transition, the instructions of the original step will not be affected
by the change of ON to OFF until the next scan cycle. See 7.4.1Common programming errors.

7.2.2 SFC transfter instruction

As shown in the preceding figure, the transfer symbols in the SFC program on the right are realized through the SET
instructions in the LAD program on the left.
The transfer conditions consist of the NO contacts before the SET instruction. The NO contacts are controlled by internal
instructions or through external operation.
When the power flow of the SET instruction is valid, the specified step becomes valid, and the current valid step is invalidated.
A step transfer is thus complete.

7.2.3 RET instruction and SFC program section

As shown in the preceding figure, the SFC program on the right starts with a S2 initial step symbol, and returns to S2 after two
ordinary steps. While in the LAD program, the SFC program section must end with the RET instruction.
The RET instruction can be only used in a main program.

7.2.4 SFC jump and reset instruction

As shown in the preceding figure, the jump to S2 is realized in LAD program by the N3 row, which uses an OUT instruction. The
destination operand of the OUT instruction (jump) can be in any independent procedure.
If the reset S26 is used, line N3 in the LAD program will be a RST instruction, which can reset the last step S26.

7.2.5 SFC selection branch, parallel branch and merge

See 错误！未找到引用源。 in 7.1.5SFC program structure for the LAD counterpart of SFC selection branches.
See 错误！未找到引用源。in 7.1.5SFC program structure for the LAD counterpart of SFC parallel branches.

7.3 How to program with SFC

1. Analyse the work flow and determine the program structure
The structure of a SFC program is classified into three types: simple sequential structure, selection branch structure and
parallel branch structure. Besides, the jump structure is also a special form of the selection branch structure.
To program with SFC, the first thing to do is to determine the structure of the flow. For example, a single object passing through
a sequential flow is a simple sequential structure. Multiple objects with different parameters to be processed asynchronously
needs a selection branch structure. While a cooperation of multiple independent mechanical elements may need a parallel
branch structure.

2. Determine the major procedures and transfer conditions to draw a draft flow chart
After determining the strucuture, you need to figure out the major procedures and transfer conditions. By deviding the work flow
into smaller operation stages, you can get the procedures. End each procedure with a transfer condition, and you can get the
draft of the work flow.

3. Make a SFC program according to the draft flow chart

Use the SFC programming language in AutoStation to make a SFC program out of the draft flow chart. By now you have got an
executable PLC program, but you still need to refine it.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 243

4. Make a list of input and output points, and determine the objects of each procedure and the transfer conditions
Generally, the input points are transfer conditions, while the output points are the operation objects. In addition, with the list, you
can further modify the SFC.

5. Input the steps and transfer conditions

In the SFC program you just made, right click a SFC symbol and select Embedded Ladder Chart in the shortcut menu. You
are then able to edit the step or transfer condition through the LAD programming language.

6. Add functional program sections to the program

Do remember to add program sections that provide general functions, such as start, stop and alarm functions. Such program
sections should all be put in LAD blocks.

 Note
The start and stop operations are crucial for personal and equipment safety. Considering the special features of SFC program,
make sure that all outputs that should be stopped are shut down when the PLC is stopped.

7.4 Points to note in SFC programming

The STL instruction has some special characteristics, and the PLC scans instructions cyclically by their display order. Because
of these reasons, there are some points to note during SFC programming.

7.4.1 Common programming errors

1. Reusing steps
In the same PLC program, each step corresponds to a unique S element and cannot be reused.
Note this when editing a SFC program using the LAD editor.

2. Setting branches after a transfer condition

Setting conditioned branches after a transfer condition is prohibited in SFC programming, as shown in the left figure below.
Instead, you should change it into the right figure below.

3. Connecting output coils to internal bus after a NC or NO contact instruction

Connecting output coils to the internal bus after a NO or NC contact instruction in a branch is prohibited, as shown in the left
figure below. Instead, you should change it into the right figure below.

4. Reusing the same element in neighboring steps

The PLC scans instructions by their display order. The scanning of the current step and that of the next step are closely joined
together.
Therefore, after a STL instruction is executed, although certain elements of the instruction will be reset (see 错误！未找到引用
源。错误！未找到引用源。), the reset will not be carried out until the next scan cycle. That means, at the moment of the transfer,
the elements of the last step retains their states and values until the step is scanned in the next cycle.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 244

As shown in the following figure, the two neighboring steps use the same timer: T2. When the S0-S20 transfer occurs, the T2
will retain its value and state, rendering the step S20 unable to perform as it is designed. The program will jump directly to S21
and S22. Therefore, it should be noted that, although reusing elements in a program is not prohibited, you should avoid reusing
them in neighboring steps, or accidents may occur.

5. Failing to inter-lock elements

During SFC programming, certain elements may become contradictary to each other under some special transfer conditions.
Inter-locking is then necessary.
Take the following forward&backward operation program as an example, where Y0 and Y1 are respectively forward and
backward output. X0 is forward operation, X1 is backward operation, and X2 the is stop button. Y0 and Y1 should be
inter-locked, that is to say, they should not be ON at the same time.
However, in this example, when Y0 is ON, if X1 is ON and the S33 is validated, Y1 will be also ON, within the same scan cycle
with Y0.

Therefore, you need to add an interlock to the program by adding a Y0 NC contact before the Y1 output coil, as shown in the
following figure.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 245

6. Confusing jumps with transfers

Jumps are used between different procedures or non-neighboring steps, while transfers are used between neighboring steps. It
is prohibited to change an output coil into a SET instruction where a jump should be used, or change a output coil into a SET
instruction where a transfer should be used.

7. Using parallel merge for selection branches

In a selection branch structure, only one selection is valid. However, when it is mixed with a parallel branch structure, the
selection branch structure may never end. As shown in the following figure, in the left part, when flow 1 runs to step S41, it
meets the transfer condition of a parallel merge. But the system will never run flow 2. Therefore the transfer will never occur,
making flow 1 unable to end.

Flow 1 Flow 2

Modify

The same operation

Empty step
Flow 1 cannot end due to the
parallel structure.

As shown in the right part, to correct it, you need to add a step S42 whose function is the same as S41. Then add an empty
step S43 that serves as a structural block without actual function. Design the transfer conditions for S38, S41 and S43
according to the actual situation.

7.4.2 Programming skills

1. Making use of empty steps

You may need empty steps to deal with the branches with grammatical problems. The empty steps do not provide actual
operation, but a necessary node in structure before the next transfer. See the following example.
In the left figure below, the selection merge is connected immediately with another selection branch structure. That is prohibited.
You can change it as the right figure shows: add an empty step.

Modify
Inexecutable
parallel structure Add an empty step
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 246

In the left figure below, the selection merge is connected immediately with a parallel branch structure. That is prohibited too.
You can also change it as the right figure shows: add an empty step.

Modify

Inexecutable Add an empty step

parallel structure

You can address other structures, such as parallel merge connected with parallel branches, or parallel branches connected
with selection branches, by adding an empty step.

2. Merging branches and transfer conditions

Some seemingly complicated branches are the result of bad design. You can simplify them by merging some branches.
As shown below, the designer set a selection branch first, following it by two selection branches. However, simply four selection
branches will achieve the same. The original two-level transfer conditions become one level transfer condition.

Mergeable conditions
Merge the mergeable
conditions

Modify

3. Making use of battery backup function

The S elements can be saved upon power failure by the battery. In this way, the program can resume from the step when the
power failure occurred.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 247

7.5 Examples of SFC programming

The examples in this section are just illustrations of SFC programming, with simplified operations and conditions. The
equipment configuration is conceptual and for study only. Do not apply the example programs to actual use.

7.5.1 Simple sequential structure

The following example is an object lifting and conveying machine. This machine uses cylinder lifting devices and rollers to
convey the object tray from one conveying belt to another. The following figure is a top view of the machine.
Conveying Conveying
belt belt

Tray in Baffle plate Convey complete

Height OK In lift 2

Left-side lift cylinder

Limit switch
In lift 1 Lift Rollers Lift
Right-side lift cylinder Cylinder/solenoid valve

After the machine is started, the object tray will be conveyed to the entrance of the machine at the left side and trigger the “Tray
in” limit switch. If no other tray is occupying the machine, the “Baffle plate” will lower down to let the object tray enter the
machine. When the tray is completely into the lift when it triggers the “In lift 1” limit switch, the lift will raise the tray until the
“Height OK” limit switch is triggered. The rollers will then act to convey the tray to the lift on the right side until the “In lift 2” limit
switch is triggered. The lift will then lower to put the tray to the conveying belt on the right. When the “Convey complete” limit
switch is reset, a complete lift and convey process is over and the machine is ready for the next round.
The input and output points are listed in the following table.
SN Address Monitored object SN Address Monitored object
1 X0 Tray in limit switch 8 Y0 Cylinder solenoid valve for the baffle plate
2 X1 In lift 1 limit switch 9 Y1 Cylinder solenoid valve for the left lift
3 X2 Height OK limit switch 10 Y2 Cylinder solenoid valve for the right lift
4 X3 In lift 2 limit switch 11 Y3 Roller motor contactor
5 X4 Convey complete 12 Y4 Motor contactor for the left conveying belt
6 X5 Start switch 13 Y5 Motor contactor for the right conveying belt
7 X6 Auxiliary signal of emergency switch
This is a simple sequential flow. The procedures are linear, without any selection or parallel procedures. Writing the program
with SFC would be faster and clearer than the conventional logic design method.
See the following figure for the SFC program and its LAD counterpart.
Start & stop control program section

Initial empty step

Use X0 as the transfer condition, and S20~S23 as the limit to prevent the next tray from entering before
the current operation ends
Lower the baffle plate to let the tray in lift 1. Delay: 1s

Delay (1s) time is up and start the next step

Lifting cylinders (Y1, Y2) act till Hight OK switch (X2) acts. Delay: 0.8s.

Delay (0.8s) time is up and start the next step

Start roller motor (Y3)

In lift 2 limit switch (X3) acts to enter the next step

The left & right lifts lower and the roller stops

X4 is reset to start a new round

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 248

7.5.2 Selection branch structure

The following example is a material mixing flow. Through this flow, two kinds of products, namely A and B, are produced. See
the following figure for the illustration of the manufacturing device.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 249

A minor
ingredient pipe
Deionized water B minor ingredient pipe
Major ingredient pipe
Y0 valve Y2 valve
Y1 major ingredient valve

Y5 mixing motor Y3 valve

Mixing pot

Rinsing nozzle Rinsing nozzle

Stirring paddle

Y4 evacuation valve

To start the operation, the operator should select through the touch screen the product type, A or B, for the next batch of
product. As the second step, the major ingredient wil be added until the added ingredient reaches 2000kg. As the third step,
minor ingredient, A for type A product or B for type B product, will be added until the added minor ingredient reaches 500kg. As
the forth step, the ingredients will be mixed round for 20 minutes. As the fifth step, the material will be evacuated until the left
material is less than 20kg and the delay is over. Then the machine is ready for the next round.
If the machine is brand new, or the product type produced last time is different from what is going to be produced, you need to
open the deionized water valve and evacuation valve to rinse the machine for 5 minutes before the operation.
The input and output points are listed in the following table.
SN Address Monitored object SN Address Monitored object
1 X0 Deionized water valve open 10 X11 Evacuation valve open
2 X1 Deionized water valve closed 11 X12 Evacuation valve closed
3 X2 Major ingredient valve open 12 Y0 Solenoid valve for deionized water
4 X3 Major ingredient valve closed 13 Y1 Solenoid valve for major ingredient
5 X4 Minor ingredient A valve open 14 Y2 Solenoid valve for minor ingredient A
6 X5 Minor ingredient A valve closed 15 Y3 Solenoid valve for minor ingredient B
7 X6 Minor ingredient B valve open 16 Y4 Solenoid valve for evacuation
8 X7 Minor ingredient B valve closed 17 Y5 Mixing motor contactor
9 X10 Mixing motor running
Obviously this is a selection branch structured flow. You can select only one type of product , A or B, in a round. Meanwhile, the
flow has a selection and jump structure: the rinsing procedure.
The following figures are the corresponding SFC program and its LAD counterpart.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 250

Start & stop control program section

Initial empty step

To process product different from To process the same product as

last time, enter the rinsing step the last time, enter next step

Rinsing time (5min) is up

Add major ingredient

Branch for product A Branch for product B

The mixing step

Time (20min) is up
The evacuation step

Evacuation complete
Mark the product type this time
for the next round

Enter the next round

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 251

7.5.3 Parallel branch structure

The next example is a bottle packager. The packager seals the bottles and sticks labels to them. Meanwhile, it will examine the
bottle cap and label, so that the flawed products will be eliminated in the third procedure, while the qualified products will
continue to the next work flow.
If no bottle is sent from the last work flow, the packager will not conduct any sealing or labelling. The three procedures are
carried out at the same time, and each bottle moves from one position to another each time the rotary plate rotates. See the
following figure for the illustration of the packager.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 252

Capping Labelling Eliminating

cylinder Y1 cylinder Y2 cylinder Y3

Capping cylinder Labelling cylinder Eliminating cylinder

rod BACK X10 rod BACK X11 rod BACK X12

Capping cylinder
Labelling cylinder Eliminating cylinder
rod OUT X7
rod OUT X6 rod OUT X5
Cap
Rotary plate of
packing machine

Bottle Bottle Bottle

Running direction
of rotary plate

Exit of rotary plate

ac of
e
hin
m ate
in pl
ck ry
pa ota
g

pla tion
R

Entrance of
ary rec

Rotary plate step

te

rotary plate
rot di

limit switch X0

El lind
of ing

im e
cy
nn

in r Y
at 3
Ru

in
g
Rotatary plate
Cap in position motor Y0
detection switch X2 Labelling Exit of disqualified
switc tection

cylinder Y2 products
h X3
l de

Bottle in position
Ca
Labe

p detection switch X1
pi
ng
cy
lind
er
Y1

During the operation, the rotary plate rotates one step each time, which is detected by the X0 limit switch. The rotary plate will
stay at each step long enough for all the three procedures, driven by cylinders, are finished. The cylinder rod OUT signal and
cylinder rod BACK signal are monitored respectively.
The input and output points arel isted in the following table.
SN Address Monitored object SN Address Monitored object
1 X0 Rotary plate step limit switch 8 X10 Capping cylinder rod BACK
2 X1 Bottle in position detection switch 9 X11 Labelling cylinder rod BACK
3 X2 Cap in position detection switch 10 X12 Eliminatiing cylinder rod BACK
4 X3 Label detection switch 11 Y0 Rotary plate motor
5 X5 Eliminating cylinder rod OUT 12 Y1 Capping cylinder
6 X6 Labelling cylinder rod OUT 13 Y2 Labelling cylinder
7 X7 Capping cylinder rod OUT 14 Y3 Eliminating cylinder
It is obvious that this is a parallel branch structured flow. With every step that the rotary plate makes, all the tree procedures are
carried out at the same time. Then, when the three procedures are finished, the rotary plate will rotate one step again. See the
following figure for the corresponding SFC program and its LAD counterpart.
In the program, M1~M3 are the qualification flags for the procedures of capping, labeling and eliminating respectively.
When the capping procedure runs to S22, X2 will check whether the capping is qualified or not. If yes, the corresponding
qualification flag M1 will be set. When the labelling procedure runs to S25, X3 will check whether the labelling is qualified or not.
If not, M2 will be reset. After all the procedures are complete, at step S29, the M2 state will be transferred to M3, and M1 state
will be transferred to M2.
The capping procedure will act according to X1 state. If X1 indicates no bottle is in position, the capping will not proceed. The
labelling procedure will act according to M2 state. If M2 is OFF, it indicates that the bottle in position is disqualified, and the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 253

labelling will not proceed. The eliminating procedure will act according to M3. The elimination will not be conducted when M3 is
ON, which indicates that the bottle is qualified, or the elimination will be conducted otherwise. In both cases, M3 will be reset in
S32 to prepare for the next procedure.
Start & stop control program section

Initial empty step

When a X0 rising edge is detected The labelling procedures The eliminating procedures

The capping procedures

M2 qualification M3 qualification
flag flag

Transfer conditions

Jump when Jump upon Jump upon

Capping operation qualified
no bottle is disqualified
in position product product

Labeling operation Elimination operation

Mark the qualified Mark the qualified Reset the M3

product (M1 ) product (M2 ) disqualification flag

Parallel merge
Transfer the
qualification flag
states from M1 to M2
and from M2 to M3
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 254
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 7 SFC tutor 255
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 256

Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions

This chapter presents the usage and notes about the high-speed input functions, including high-speed counter and external
pulse capture function.

8.1 High-speed counter

8.1.1 Configuration
The built-in high-speed counter for IVC series small PLCs are configured as follows:
Table 8-1 High-speed counter configuration
Max. frequency(kHz)
Input point
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 IVC1
Counter IVC2H IVC2L IVC1
L
C236 Up/down
50
C237 Up/down
C238 Up/down
Single C239 Up/down
10
phase C240 Up/down
single C241 Up/down
100
point C301 Up/down
/
input C302 Up/down
mode C242 Up/down Reset
C243 Up/down Reset
10
C244 Up/down Reset Start
C245 Up/down Reset Start
Single C246 Up Down 50
phase C247 Up Down Reset 10
up/ C303 Up Down /
100
down C248 Up Down Reset
input C249 Up Down Reset Start 10
mode C250 Up Down Reset Start
C251 Ph A Ph B 30
C304 Ph A Ph B
Double C305 Ph A Ph B /
phase C306 Ph A Ph B
50
input C252 Ph A Ph B Reset
mode C253 Ph A Ph B Reset
5
C254 Ph A Ph B Reset Start
C255 Ph A Ph B Reset Start
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
SPD instruction 100 10
point point point point point point point point
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Pulse capture function / /
point point point point point point point point
External interrupt No.
0/10 1/11 2/12 3/13 4/14 5/15 6/16 7/17 / /
(rising/falling edge)
In the modes listed in the preceding table, the high-speed counters will act according to certain input and handle high-speed
action according to interrupts. The counting practice is unrelated to the PLC scan cycle.
All the high-speed counters are of the 32-bit up/down type. According to their different up/down switchover methods, they fall
into the following four categories:
Counting method Action
Single phase single point C236~C245 and C301~C302 are down counters when SM236~SM245 and SM301~SM302 are ON, and
input up counters when SM236~SM245 and SM301~SM302 are OFF
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 257

Counting method Action

Corresponding to actions of up/down input, C246~C250 and C303 automatically count up/down,
Single phase up/down
SM246~SM250 and SM303 determine the current direction of corresponding counters, up input when SM
input
elements are OFF and down input when SM elements are ON
When SM100~SM104 are set OFF, C251~C255 C304~C306 will conduct up/down counting according to
double phase input. SM251~SM255 and SM304~SM306 determine the current direction of corresponding
counters, up input when SM elements are OFF and down input when SM elements are ON
The counting directions are shown as follows:
+1 +1 -1 -1
Double phase input
ON
A
OFF

ON
B
OFF

When SM100~SM104 are set ON, C251~C255 C304~C306 will conduct fourfold frequency up/down
counting according to double phase input. SM251~SM255 and SM304~SM306 determine the current
direction of corresponding counters, up input when SM elements are OFF and down input when SM
elements are ON
The counting directions are shown as follows:
+1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1
Double phase fourfold
frequency input ON
A
OFF

ON
B
OFF

+1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1

8.1.2 Relationship between high-speed counter and SM auxiliary relay

Special auxiliary relay for controlling counting direction Special auxiliary relay for controlling fourfold frequency
Type Counter SN Up/down control Fourfold frequency
Type Counter SN
C236 SM236 control
C237 SM237 C251 SM100
C238 SM238 C252 SM100
C239 SM239 C253 SM102
C240 SM240 Double phase C254 SM100
Single phase C241 SM241 input C255 SM102
single point input C242 SM242 C304 SM101
C243 SM243 C305 SM103
C244 SM244 C306 SM104
C245 SM245
C301 SM301
C302 SM302
Type Counter SN Up/down monitor
Special auxiliary relay for monitoring counting direction
C304 SM304
Type Counter SN Up/down monitor
C305 SM305
C246 SM246
C306 SM306
C247 SM247
Single phase C248 SM248
up/down input C249 SM249
C250 SM250
C303 SM303
C251 SM251
C252 SM252
Double phase
C253 SM253
input
C254 SM254
C255 SM255
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 258

8.1.3 Usage of high-speed counter

Usage of single phase single point input high-speed counter
The single phase single point input high-speed counter starts to count only when the pulse input changes from OFF to ON, with
the counting direction determined by its corresponding SM element.
Example:

The time sequence chart of the contacts action in the program is shown in the following figure:
X11 & X6 are ON, C244 starts to count.
X10 is ON, C244 is cleared
X12 & SM244 are OFF, C244 counts up.
X12 & SM244 are ON, C244 counts down
C244 counts 3, and C244 contact state changes
When X11 & X6 are ON, and X2 changes to ON,
C244 data and contact are cleared
X12

SM244

X2
X11

X6

X10

X0

5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
1 1
C244 0 0 0
-1
-2
-3
-4 -4
-5
C244 contact

Note:
1. Counter input point: X0.
2. High speed counters, when used in instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST,
can trigger operations free from the scan cycle.

Usage of single phase up/down input high-speed counter

The single phase up/down input high-speed counter starts to count only when the pulse input changes from OFF to ON. The
two input points determine its counting direction, which is monitored by its corresponding SM element.
Example:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 259

The time sequence chart of the contacts action in the program is shown in the following figure:
X10 is ON, C250 is cleared regardless of X11 and X7
X11 & X7: ON, C250 starts to count. X3 changes from OFF to ON
C250 counts up. SM250 is not being driven
C250 value reaches 3, C250 contact changes X11 & X7: ON. If X5 is ON, C250 is
cleared, and the contact is reset
X4 changes from OFF to ON, C250
X5 counts down. SM250 is being driven
X11

X7

X10

X3

X4

SM250

5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
C250 1 1
0 0 0
-1
-2
-3
-4 -4
-5

C250 contact

Note:
1. Counter input points: X3 & X4.
2. High speed counters, when used in instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST,
can trigger operations free from the scan cycle.

Usage of double phase input high-speed counter

The double phase input high-speed counter starts to count only when the pulse input changes from OFF to ON. The phase
difference of the two pulse inputs determines the counting direction, which is monitored by the corresponding SM element.
Example:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 260

The time sequence chart of the contacts action in the program is shown in the following figure:

X10 is ON，C254 is cleared regardless of X11 & X6

X11: ON. If X6 is ON, C254 starts to count. X0 is ON, and X1
changes from OFF to ON, X254 counts up. SM254 is not being
driven.
C254 values reaches 3, C254 contact changes X11 & X6: ON, X2 changes ON, C254
X0: ON. X1 changes from ON to OFF, is cleared, and the contact is reset
X2 C254 counts down. SM254 is being driven

X11

X6

X10

X0

X1

SM254

5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
C254 1 1
0 0 0
-1
-2
-3
-4 -4
-5
C254 contact

Note:
1. Counter input points: X0 & X1.
2. High-speed counters, when used in instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST,
can trigger operations free from the scan cycle.

Usage of double phase fourfold frequency input high-speed counter

The double phase fourfold frequency input high-speed counter starts to count only when the pulse two inputs change from OFF
to ON and ON to OFF. The phase difference of the two pulse inputs determines the counting direction, which is monitored by
the corresponding SM element.
Example:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 261

The time sequence chart of the contacts action in the program is shown in the following figure:

X10 is ON，C254 is cleared regardless of X11 & X6

X11: ON. If X6 is ON, C254 starts to count. X0 is ON, and X1
changes from OFF to ON, X254 counts up. SM254 is not being
driven.
C254 values reaches 3, C254 contact changes X11 & X6: ON, X2 changes ON, C254
X0: ON. X1 changes from ON to OFF, is cleared, and the contact is reset
X2 C254 counts down. SM254 is being driven

X11

X6

X10

X0

X1

SM254

5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
C254 1 1
0 0 0
-1
-2
-3
-4 -4
-5
C254 contact

Note:
1. Counter input points: X0 & X1.
2. High-speed counters, when used in instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST,
can trigger operations free from the scan cycle.

8.1.4 Points to note about high-speed counters in IVC2L and IVC1 series
Classification
C236, C237, C246 and C251 can be used as both hardware counters and software counters, depending on the modes in which
they are used. All the other high-speed counters are software counters.
Maximum combined frequency
1. The maximum combined frequency, or the sum of frequencies of all signals input at any time, should not exceed 80kHz on
the following two occasions:
When multiple high-speed counters (hardware counting mode) are used simultaneously.
When the high-speed counters (hardware counting mode) and the SPD instruction are used at the same time.
2. The maximum combined frequency when multiple software high-speed counters, or when high-speed counters and the SPD
instruction are used at the same time, is shown in the following table:
Conditions Maximum combined frequency
Instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSCI, DHSZ, DHSP and DHST are not
≤80kHz
used
Instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSCI, DHSP and DHST are used ≤30kHz
Instruction DHSZ is used ≤20kHz

Maximum frequency of hardware counter

Counters C236, C237, C246 and C251 are the only four potential hardware counters. Among which:
C236, C237 and C246 are single phase counters. Their maximum counting frequency is 50kHz.
C251 is a double phase counter. Its maximum counting frequency is 30kHz.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 262

Maximum frequency of software counter

The high-speed counters used in instructions DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSCI, DHSP or DHST are all in software counting mode. The
maximum input frequency for the single phase counters is 10kHz; for double phase counters: 5kHz.
When used in the DHSZ instruction, the maximum frequency for the single phase counters is 5kHz; for double phase counters:
4kHz.

8.2 External pulse capture function

The input points that provides the external pulse capture function are X0~X7. The corresponding SM elements are listed below:
Input point Corresponding SM element
X0 SM90
X1 SM91
X2 SM92
X3 SM93
X4 SM94
X5 SM95
X6 SM96
X7 SM97

 Note
1. When the output input point changes from OFF to ON, the SM element of the corresponding terminal will be set to ON.
2. SM90~SM97 will be cleared when the user program starts.
3. When using pulse capture, satisfy the maximum combined frequency of PLC series or abnormalities may occur.
4. If high-speed counters or SPD instructions are used on the same input point, the pulse capture function will become invalid
after the first scan cycle, regardless of the validity of the instructions.

8.3 Points to note about high-speed input application

X0~X7 are input signals in the functions of high-speed counters, SPD instructions, pulse capture and external interrupts.
Because different functions may use one or multiple input points, the functions cannot be used at the same time. During PLC
programming, corresponding various functions of each input point can be applied one. If X0~X7 are used repeatedly in user
program, the program cannot pass compiling.
The following table illustrates the functions of X0~X7 in high-speed counters, SPD instructions, pulse capture and external
interrupts.
Max. frequency (kHz)
Input point
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 IVC1
Counter IVC2H IVC2L IVC1
L
C236 Up/down
50
C237 Up/down
C238 Up/down
Single C239 Up/down
10
phase C240 Up/down
single C241 Up/down
100
point C301 Up/down
/
input C302 Up/down
mode C242 Up/down Reset
C243 Up/down Reset
10
C244 Up/down Reset Start
C245 Up/down Reset Start
Single C246 Up Down 50
phase C247 Up Down Reset 10
up/ C303 Up Down /
100
down C248 Up Down Reset
input C249 Up Down Reset Start 10
mode C250 Up Down Reset Start
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 8 Using high-speed input functions 263

Max. frequency (kHz)

Input point
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 IVC1
Counter IVC2H IVC2L IVC1
L
C251 Ph A Ph B 30
C304 Ph A Ph B
Double C305 Ph A Ph B /
phase C306 Ph A Ph B
50
input C252 Ph A Ph B Reset
mode C253 Ph A Ph B Reset
5
C254 Ph A Ph B Reset Start
C255 Ph A Ph B Reset Start
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
SPD instruction 100 10
point point point point point point point point
Pulse capture Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
/ /
function point point point point point point point point
External interrupt No.
0/10 1/11 2/12 3/13 4/14 5/15 6/16 7/17 / /
(rising/falling edge)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 264

Chapter 9 Using interrupts

This chapter details the mechanism, processing procedures and usage of various interrupts.

9.1 Interrupt program

When an interrupt event occurs, the normal scan cycle will be interrupted and the interrupt program will be executed, which is
called the interrupt mechanism. For the event-triggered control tasks that requires priority, you often need to use this special
mechanism.
The system provides many kinds of programmable interrupt resources. Each kind of interrupt resource can trigger a type of
interrupt events, and each type of interrupt event are independently numbered.
In order to deal with a certain interrupt event, you must compile a processing program, that is, an interrupt program, which is an
independent POU in the user program.
An event number must be designated for each interrupt program in order to link the interrupt program with the interrupt event
designated with the event SN. When responding to the interrupt request of the interrupt event, the system will call the
corresponding interrupt program based on the interrupt event number.
The following are the interrupt resources provided by IVC series small PLC:
Event Event
Interrupt event Enabling SM Interrupt event Enabling SM
No. No.
Setting: SD68
0 X0 input rising edge interrupt SM40 28 Timer interrupt 2
Enabling: SM68
1 X1 input rising edge interrupt SM41 29 Power failure interrupt SM56
Character sending interrupt of
2 X2 input rising edge interrupt SM42 30 SM48
communication port 0
Character receiving interrupt of
3 X3 input rising edge interrupt SM43 31 SM49
communication port 0
Frame sending interrupt of
4 X4 input rising edge interrupt SM44 32 SM50
communication port 0
Frame receiving interrupt of
5 X5 input rising edge interrupt SM45 33 SM51
communication port 0
Character sending interrupt of
6 X6 input rising edge interrupt SM46 34 SM52
communication port 1
Character receiving interrupt of
7 X7 input rising edge interrupt SM47 35 SM53
communication port 1
Frame sending interrupt of Frame sending interrupt of
8 SM59 36 SM54
COM2 communication port 1
Frame receiving interrupt of Frame receiving interrupt of
9 SM60 37 SM55
COM2 communication port 1
10 X0 input falling edge interrupt SM40 38 Character sending interrupt of COM2 SM57
Character receiving interrupt of
11 X1 input falling edge interrupt SM41 39 SM58
COM2
12 X2 input falling edge interrupt SM42 40 High-speed counter interrupt 6 SM65
13 X3 input falling edge interrupt SM43 41 High-speed counter interrupt 7 SM65
42 PTO (Y2) output completion interrupt SM72
14 X4 input falling edge interrupt SM44
43 PTO (Y3) output completion interrupt SM73
15 X5 input falling edge interrupt SM45 44 PTO (Y4) output completion interrupt SM74
16 X6 input falling edge interrupt SM46 45 PTO (Y5) output completion interrupt SM75
17 X7 input falling edge interrupt SM47 46 PTO (Y6) output completion interrupt SM76
PTO (Y0) output completion
18 SM63 47 PTO (Y7) output completion interrupt SM77
interrupt
PTO (Y1) output completion Interpolation completion interrupt 1
19 SM64 50 SM69
interrupt (Y0,Y2)
Interpolation completion interrupt 2
20 High-speed counter interrupt 0 SM65 51 SM78
(Y4,Y5)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 265

Event Event
Interrupt event Enabling SM Interrupt event Enabling SM
No. No.
Interpolation completion interrupt 3
21 High-speed counter interrupt 1 SM65 52 SM79
(Y6,Y7)
High-speed output passed position
22 High-speed counter interrupt 2 SM65 53 SM61
interrupt 1
High-speed output passed position
23 High-speed counter interrupt 3 SM65 54 SM62
interrupt 2
High-speed output passed position
24 High-speed counter interrupt 4 SM65 55 SM105
interrupt 3
High-speed output passed position
25 High-speed counter interrupt 5 SM65 56 SM106
interrupt 4
Setting: SD66 High-speed output passed position
26 Timer interrupt 0 57 SM107
Enabling: SM66 interrupt 5
Setting: SD67 High-speed output passed position
27 Timer interrupt 1 58 SM108
Enabling: SM67 interrupt 6

9.2 Processing interrupt event

1. When a certain interrupt event occurs, if it is enabled, its corresponding event number will be added to the interrupt request
queue, which is 8-record long and FIFO.
2. Processing of the interrupt request by system:
1) If the system detects that any request in the interrupt queue, it will stop the normal execution of user program.
2) The system will read in the request queue the head record, which is the number of the first interrupt event. The interrupt
program corresponding to the event number will be called and executed.
3) When the interrupt program is finished, the corresponding head record of the request queue will be deleted, and all the
following records will take one step foward.
4) The system will repeat these procedures until the queue is empty.
5) When the interrupt request queue is null, the system will continue to execute the interrupted main program.
3. The system can handle only one interrupt request at one time. When the system is processing an interrupt request, a new
interrupt event will be added to the interrupt request queue rather than being responded immediately. The system will process it
after all the requests ahead of it in the queue are processed.
4. When there are 8 records in the interrupt request queue, the system will automatically mask the new interrupt event so that
no new requests will be added to the queue. The mask will not be cancelled until all the requests in the queue are processed
and the interrupted main program is executed.

 Note
1. The interrupts should be brief, or abnormalities may occur, including the mask of other interrupt events (missing of interrupt
requests), system scan overtime and low execution efficiency of main program.
2. It is prohibited to call other subprograms in the interrupt program.
3. If you want to refresh I/O immediately during the interrupt, use the REF instruction. Note that the execution time of REF is
related to the number of the I/Os to be refreshed.
4. An interrupt event can generate an interrupt request only when the corresponding interrupt event is enabled (which requires
setting the corresponding SM element ON), and the global interrupt enable flag shall be on.
5. When an interrupt request with no corresponding interrupt program in the user program is generated, the request will be
responded to, but the response is empty.

9.3 Timer interrupt

Description
The timer interrupt is the interrupt event generated by the system from time to time based on the user setting.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 266

The timer interrupt program is applicable to the situation that requires timing and immediate processing by the system, such as
the timing sampling of analog signals, and timing updating analog output according to certain waveform.
You can set the intervals (unit: ms) for the timer interrupts by setting the corresponding SD elements. The system will generate
the interrupt event when the set time interval is reached (recommended minimum interval: > 4ms).
The ON/OFF status of certain SM elements can enable/disable the corresponding timer interrupts.
The system provides 3 kinds of timer interrupt resources.
Table 9-1 Timer interrupt resource list
Timer interrupt Interrupt event No. Intervals of timer interrupt (SD) Enable control (SM)
0 26 SD66 SM66
1 27 SD67 SM67
2 28 SD68 SM68

 Note
1. Setting of enable control elements cannot affect the exection of the timed interrupts in the interrupt request queue.
2. The timing for a re-enabled interrupt will start from zero.
To change the interval of the timer interrupt when the program is running, it is recommended to follow the following procedures:
disable the timer interrupt, change the interval and enable the timer interrupt.
Example
This example uses timer interrupt 0 to flip the Y0 output once a second, which makes Y0 flash.
1. Compile an interrupt program for the interrupt event.

2. Specify an interrupt event number for the interrupt program:

3. Set the interval for the timer interrupt and enable the timer interrupt in the main program.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 267

9.4 External interrupt

Description
The external interrupt is related to the actual PLC input points. It is classified into input rising edge interrupt and input falling
edge interrupt. In the user program, add the actions related to external event to the external interrupt program. The highest
response frequency of the system to the external event is 1K. The external events over 1K may be lost. The rising edge
interrupt and falling edge interrupt cannot be used on the same port simultaneously. All the external interrupts are only valid
when the global interrupt control EI and corresponding enabling SM are valid.
The detailed relationship is as follows:
Interrupt number Enabling element Interrupt number Enabling element
0 or 10 SM40 4 or 14 SM44
1 or 11 SM41 5 or 15 SM45
2 or 12 SM42 6 or 16 SM46
3 or 13 SM43 7 or 17 SM47

The external interrupts are numbered as follows:

Interrupt number Interrupt source Interrupt number Interrupt source
0 X0 input rising edge interrupt 9 Reserved
1 X1 input rising edge interrupt 10 X0 input falling edge interrupt
2 X2 input rising edge interrupt 11 X1 input falling edge interrupt
3 X3 input rising edge interrupt 12 X2 input falling edge interrupt
4 X4 input rising edge interrupt 13 X3 input falling edge interrupt
5 X5 input rising edge interrupt 14 X4 input falling edge interrupt
6 X6 input rising edge interrupt 15 X5 input falling edge interrupt
7 X7 input rising edge interrupt 16 X6 input falling edge interrupt
8 Reserved 17 X7 input falling edge interrupt
The single input pulse frequency of X0-X7 is less than 200Hz.
Example
In the example, the system upsets the output of Y0 based on the corresponding external interrupt 0 function and rising edge
input event of X0.
1. Compile the interrupt program to flip Y0 status once upon every interrupt and output immediately. To use an interrupt, you
should select its corresponding interrupt number. See the following figure for the specific operation.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 268

2. Write EI instruction in the main program, and set SM40, the interrupt enabling flag of X0 input rising edge interrupt, valid.

9.5 High-speed counter interrupt

Description
The high-speed counter interrupt must be used together with the HCNT instruction or DHSCI instruction, and generates
high-speed counter interrupt based on the value of the high-speed counter. You can compile programs related to external pulse
input in the high-speed interrupt program. The high-speed counter interrupts (20~25) are valid only when the EI instruction and
corresponding interrupt enable flag are valid.
Example
This example uses the high-speed counter function of X0 to call the interrupt program (number 20) when the external counter
C236 reaches the value specified through the DHSCI instruction.
1. Compile interrupt program, choose an interrupt number for each interrupt subprogram. See the following figure for the
specific operation.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 269

2. Write EI instruction in the main program, and set SM65, the interrupt enabling flag of high-speed counter interrupt, valid.
Drive the high-speed counter C236 and high-speed counter interrupt instruction.

9.6 PTO output completion interrupt

Description
The PTO output completion interrupt is triggered when enable flag (SM63 or SM64) is set and the high-speed pulse output at
Y0 or Y1 is finished. You can carry out the relevant processing in the interrupt subprogram. This function is applicable only to
IVC1 series PLC.
Example
This example uses the high-speed pulse output of Y0 to call the interrupt program (number 18) after Y0 high-speed pulse
output is finished.
1. Code function in interrupt program (INT_1): Compile program for the interrupt code to realize the control. Choose the
corresponding interrupt number for each interrupt. See INT_1 for the specific operation.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 270

2. Code function in main program: Enable the global interrupt of the system and the enable flag SM63 of PTO output interrupt.
Use PLS instruction.

9.7 Power failure interrupt

When the enable flag of SM56 is set and the main module has detected the power failure, the power failure interrupt will be
triggered and the user can carry out the relevant processing in the interrupt subprogram. This function is applicable only to
IVC1 series PLC.
As the power failure interrupt subprogram is executed when the system has no external power supply, the execution duration of
power failure interrupt subprogram shall not be over 5ms. Otherwise, the power failure retention component cannot be
completely saved.

9.8 Serial port interrupt

Description
Serial port interrupt: Under the free port protocol mode of serial port, the system will generate interrupt event based on the
sending or receiving events of serial port.
For each serial port, the system supports 4 interrupt resources for the user. The interrupt program of serial port is mainly used
when special processing is required for the receiving and sending of character/frame at the serial port and timely processing is
requested. It is able to respond to the processing of completing character/frame XMT/RCV without being influenced by
scanning time.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 271

Set the ON/OFF status of SM component and the serial port interrupt can be enabled or disabled. When the serial port interrupt
is disabled, the ones that have been added to the interrupt queue will continue to be executed.
Do not call the XMT instruction of serial port in the processing subprogram of character sending interrupt when the power flow
is normally on. Otherwise, it may lead to interrupt subprogram nesting which blocks the execution of user program.
Interrupt of frame receiving and sending refers to the interrupt event that is delivered after the XMT and RCV instructions of the
serial port are executed.
Serial port interrupt resource list:
Event No. Corresponding interrupt event Interrupt enabling SM
30 Character sending interrupt of communication port 0 SM48
31 Character receiving interrupt of communication port 0 SM49
32 Frame sending interrupt of communication port 0 SM50
33 Frame receiving interrupt of communication port 0 SM51
34 Character sending interrupt of communication port 1 SM52
35 Character receiving interrupt of communication port 1 SM53
36 Frame sending interrupt of communication port 1 SM54
37 Frame receiving interrupt of communication port 1 SM55
8 Character sending interrupt of communication port 2 SM59
9 Character receiving interrupt of communication port 2 SM60
38 Frame sending interrupt of communication port 2 SM57
39 Frame receiving interrupt of communication port 2 SM58
Example
In the example, with the sending interrupt function of serial port frame, the system will flip Y3 output once when a frame is sent
out and generate flashing effect based on the frequency of the character sending frame.
1. Compile interrupt program and the processing code when the serial port sending frame is completed and the interrupt is
triggered.

2. Specify interrupt event number for the interrupt program:

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 272

3. Compile the code of the sending frame interrupt of enable serial port in the main program.

For the detailed example of serial port interrupt, please refer to Chapter 10 Using communication function.

9.9 Measure short time pulse

This function is applicable only to IVC1 series PLC.
The high-speed ring counter offers the counting function of high accuracy in 0.1ms, which can match with input interrupts to
measure short time pulse width.
The relevant elements are as follows:
Name Function Attribute Range
Enabling flag of Unit: 0.1ms, 16 bits
SM16 high-speed ring Setting: High-speed ring counter starts counting R/W
counter Clearing: High-speed ring counter stops counting
0-20971 (Unit: 0.1ms, 16 bits) up counting. The high-speed ring
High-speed ring counter will count up for 0.1m clock next operation cycle after
SD16 R/W 0-20971
counter SM16 is set, and restart from zero when over 20971.
The error depends on the time for executing a single instruction.
Before using high-speed ring counter, reset SD16.
The following is an example of measuring pulse width. Connect the signals that need measurement to X0 and X1 terminals,
and set the interrupt optimal setting of X0 and X1 to the high level.
D200 specifies the measured pulse width (Unit: 0.1ms)
Main program:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 9 Using interrupts 273

X0 rising edge interrupt

X1 falling edge interrupt

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 274

Chapter 10 Using communication function

This chapter introduces the communication function of IVC series small PLC, including the communication resources and
communication protocols, and uses examples to illustrate.

10.1 Communication resource

The baud rates applicable to IVC series small PLC are listed in the following table:
Communication protocol Available baud rate
Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200
N:N communication protocol 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200
The communication protocols that IVC series small PLC supports are listed in the following table:
Main
Communication port Port type Available protocol
module
Programming port protocol, free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol
Communication port 0 RS232
(slave station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
IVC2L
RS232 or Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol (master station, slave
Communication port 1
RS485 station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Programming port protocol, free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol
Communication port 0 RS232
(slave station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
IVC1
RS232 or Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol (master station, slave
Communication port 1
RS485 station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Programming port protocol, free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol
Communication port 0 RS232
(slave station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol (master station, slave
IVC1L Communication port 1 RS485
station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol (master station, slave
Communication port 2 RS485
station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Programming port protocol, free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol
Communication port 0 RS232
(slave station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol (master station, slave
IVC2H Communication port 1 RS485
station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
Free port protocol, Modbus communication protocol (master station, slave
Communication port 2 RS485
station), N:N bus communication protocol (master station, slave station)
You can also set the mode selection switch of IVC series PLC to TM to transfer port 0 to programming port protocol.

10.2 Programming port protocol

The programming port protocol is an internal protocol dedicated to the communication between Auto Station and main module.

10.3 Free port communication protocol

10.3.1 Introduction
The free port protocol is a communication mode with user-defined data file format. It supports two data formats: ASCII&binary.
The free port protocol realizes data communication through instructions and can only be used when PLC is in RUN state.
The free port communication instructions include XMT (sending instruction) and RCV (receiving instruction).

10.3.2 Parameter setting

Select Communication Port in the System block dialogue box, and select Freeport protocol in port 0 or port 1 setting area
to enable the Freeport setting button as follows:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 275

The parameter setting of free port is as follows:

Configurable items are listed in the following table:

Item Setting Remark
115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800,
Baud rate －
2400, 1200, default: 9600
Data bit 7 or 8, default: 8 －
Parity No check, odd, even, default: no check －
Stop bit 1 or 2, default: 1 －
Allow start character
Enabled or disabled, default: disabled －
detection
Start receiving after the designated start character is
Start character
0~255 (corresponding to 00~FF) detected. Save the received characters (including the
detection
start character) to the designated BFM
Allow end character
Enabled or disabled, default: disabled －
detection
End character Stop receiving after the preset end character is
0~255 (corresponding to 00~FF)
detection received, and save the end character to the BFM
Intercharacter timeout
Enabled or disabled, default: disabled －
enabling
Stop receiving if the interval between two received
Intercharacter timeout 0~65535ms
characters is longer than the timeout setting
Interframe timeout
Enabled or disabled, default: disabled －
enabling
When the RCV power flow is valid and the
communication conditions are met, the timing will
Interframe timeout 0~65535ms start as soon as the communication serial port starts
to receive. If a frame is not received completely when
the set time is up, the reception ends
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 276

10.3.3 Free port instruction

Points to note
The free port instructions XMT and RCV can be used to send/receive data to/from the designated communication port. For the
usage of the free port instruction, refer to 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 and 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未
找到引用源。.
Note that to use free port instruction on a certain port, you need to set the free port protocol and communication parameter for
the communication port through the system block of AutoStation. In addition, you need to download the system setting to the
PLC and restart it.
Example
Example 1: Send a 5-byte data and then receive a 6-byte data through communication port 1.
The data to be sent: 01 FF 00 01 02 The data to be received: 01 FF 02 03 05 FE
Save the received data to D elements starting with D10. Each byte occupies one D element, as shown below:
01 FF 02 03 05 FE
D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

1. Change the setting of communication port in the

system block to free port communication and set
the related parameters.
2. When the power flow of SM1 is valid, save the
to-be-sent data to the communication BFM
starting with D0. Send data with XMT instruction
and reset SM122 (transmission complete flag bit)
before the sending.
3. Set SM122 after the transmission, and begin to
receive data upon the rising edge. The maximum
length for the received characters is 6.
4. Set SM123 after the data is received, and
perform the corresponding operation based on the
receiving completion information register (SD125).
5. Use X5 as the enable bit for interrupting the
sending and receiving.

Example 2: Send and receive data through communication port 1.

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 277

Different from “Example 1”, when sending the

high&low bytes of a word element, the element
must be divided into high&low byte parts.
For instance, if you want to send the content of
D2, you can store its high byte and low byte
separately in D3 and D4, and then send D3 and
D4. You can also store the data in a K4MX (such
as K4M0 of in this example) element. Take K2M0
as high byte and K2M8 as low byte.

10.4 Modbus communication protocol

10.4.1 Introduction
For the serial port communication of IVC series small PLC, Modbus communication protocol is available. Two communication
modes: ASCII and RTU (IVC1 only supports RTU mode) are supported. The PLC can be set as the master or slave station.

10.4.2 Characteristics of links

1. Physical layer: RS232, RS485
2. Link layer: asynchronous transfer mode
1) Data bit: 7 bits (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU)
2) Transfer rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
3) Check method: even check, odd check or no check
4) Stop bit: 1 or 2 stop bits
3. Networking configuration: up to 31 sets of equipment. Address range: 1~31. Broadcast is supported.

10.4.3 RTU transfer mode

1. Hexadecimal data.
2. The interval between two characters shall not be less than the time of 1.5 characters.
3. There is no frame head or tail, and the interval between two frames is at least the time of 3.5 characters.
4. Use CRC16 check.
5. The maximum length of RTU frame is 256 bytes and the frame structure is as follows:
Structure of frame Address Function code Data CRC
Number of bytes 1 1 0~252 2
6. Calculation of interval among characters:
If the communication baud rate is 19200, the interval of 1.5 characters is 1/19200×11×1.5×1000=0.86ms.
The interval of 3.5 characters is 1/19200×11×3.5×1000=2ms.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 278

10.4.4 ASCII transfer mode

1. Use ASCII data communication.
2. The frame takes “: (3A)” as the head, and CRLF (0D 0A) as the tail.
3. The allowed interval among characters is 1s.
4. Use LRC check.
5. The frame of ASCII is longer than that of RTU. It is required two character codes for transferring one byte (HEX) in ASCII
mode. The maximum length for data field (2×252) of ASCII is twice of RTU data field (252). The maximum length of ASCII
frame is 513 characters and the structure of frame is as follows:
Structure of
Head Address Function code Data LRC Tail
frame
Number of bytes 1 2 2 0~2*252 2 2

10.4.5 Available Modbus function code

Available Modbus function codes include 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 15 and 16.
Note: 04 function code is only available for version 1.23 of IVC1.

10.4.6 Addressing mode of PLC element

1. Relationship between read-write element function code and the element:
Function code Name Modicon data address Type of operational element Remark
01 Read coil 0Note1:xxxx Y, X, M, SM, S, T, C Bit read
02 Read discrete input 1Note2:xxxx X Bit read
Note3 注4
03 Read register 4 :xxxx D, SD, Z, T, C Word read
05 Write single coil 0:xxxx Y, M, SM, S, T, C Bit write
06 Write single register 4:xxxx D, SD, Z, T, C Word write
15 Write multiple coils 0:xxxx Y, M, SM, S, T, C Bit write
16 Write multiple registers 4:xxxx D, SD, Z, T, C Word write
Note:
1. 0 means “coil”.
2. 1 means “discrete input”.
3. 4 means “register”.
4. xxxx means range “1~9999”. Each type has an independent logic address range of 1 to 9999 (protocol address starts from 0).
5. 0, 1 and 4 do not have the physical meaning and are not involved in actual addressing.
6. Users shall not write X element with function codes 05 and 15; otherwise, the system will not feed back the error information if
the written operand and data are correct, but the system will not perform any operation on the write instruction.
2. Relationship between PLC Element and Modbus communication protocol address:
Protocol Available
Element Type Physical element Remark
address function code
Y0~Y377 Output status, element code: Y0
Y Bit 0000~0255 01, 05, 15
(octal code) 256 points in total toY7, Y10 toY17
Input status, it supports two kinds of
X0~X377 1200~01455 01, 05, 15
X Bit address, the element code is same as
(octal code) 256 points in total 0000~0255 02
above
M0~M2047 2000~4047
M Bit 01, 05, 15
M2048~M10240 12000-20191
SM0~SM255 4400~4655
SM Bit 01, 05, 15
SM256~SM511 30000-30255
S0~S1023 6000-7023
S Bit 01, 05, 15
S1024~S4095 31000-34071
T0~T255 8000~8255
T Bit 01, 05, 15 Status of T element
T256~T511 11000-11255
C0~C255 9200~9455
C Bit 01, 05, 15 Status of C element
C256~C306 10000-10050
D Word D0~D7999 0000~7999 03, 06, 16
SD Word SD0~SD255 8000~8255 03, 06, 16
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 279

Protocol Available
Element Type Physical element Remark
address function code
SD256~SD511 12000-12255
Z Word Z0~Z15 8500~8515 03, 06, 16
T0~T255 9000~9255
T Word 03, 06, 16 Current value of T element
T256~T511 11000-11255
C Word C0~C199 9500~9699 03, 06, 16 Current value of C element (WORD)
Double
C C200~C255 9700~9811 03, 16 Current value of C element (DWORD)
word
Double
C C256~C306 10000-10101 03, 16 Current value of C element (DWORD)
word
R Word R0~R32767 13000-45767 03, 06, 16
Note:
The protocol address is the address used on data transfer and corresponds with the logic address of Modicon data. The protocol
address starts from 0 and the logic address of Modicon data begins with 1, that is, protocol address+1=logic address of Modicon
data. For example, if M0 protocol address is 2000, and its corresponding logic address of Modicon data will be 0:2001. In practice,
the read and write of M0 is completed through the protocol address, e.g.: read M0 element frame (sent from the master station):
01 01 07 D0 00 01 FD 47
CRC check code
Number of elements to read
Starting address. The decimal value of 07D0 is 2000
Function code
Station No.

10.4.7 Modbus slave

Modbus slave responds to the master station according to the received message of local address rather than send out
message actively. The slave only supports Modbus function codes 01, 02, 03, 05, 06, 08, 15 and 16. The other codes are illegal
function codes (except broadcast frame).

10.4.8 Read/write elements

All the function codes supported by IVC2L, except 08 are used for read and write elements. In principle, in one frame, there are
2000 bits and 125 words for reading, 1968 bits and 120 words for writing at most. However, the actual protocol addresses for
elements of different types are different and discontinuous (e.g.: Y377's protocol address is 255, X0’s protocol address is 1200).
Therefore, when reading or writing an element, the element read for one time can only be the same type, and the maximum
number of the read elements depends on the elements of this type that are actually defined. For example, when reading
element Y (Y0~Y377, 256 points in total), the protocol address ranges from 0 to 255, the corresponding logic address of
Modicon data is from 1 to 256, and the maximum number of elements Y that can be read is 256.
The examples are as follows:
1. XMT from master station: 01 01 00 00 01 00 3D 9A
01- address; 01-function code; 00 00-starting address; 01 00-number of elements to read; 3D 9A-check
Response of slave station: provide correct response
2. XMT from master station: 01 01 00 00 01 01 FC 5A
The starting address for the reading of master station is 0000. 01 01 (257) elements are read, which is beyond the defined
number of elements Y.
Response of slave station: 01 81 03 00 51
The data from the slave station response is illegal, because 257>256, and 256 is the allowed maximum number of elements Y.
3. XMT from master station: 01 01 00 64 00 A0 7D AD
The starting address for the reading of master station: 00 64 (decimal 100)
Number of elements read: 00 A0 (decimal 160)
Slave station response: 01 81 02 C1 91
The slave station responds with illegal data address, because there are only 156 elements Y starting with the protocol address
100, but 160>156, 160 is illegal.
4. XMT from master station: 01 04 00 02 00 0A D1 CD
The frame of XMT function code 04 of master station
Response of slave station: 01 84 01 82 C0
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 280

The slave station responds with illegal function code. 04 is not supported by IVC2L.

 Note
1. Element X does not support write operation (that is, the write of element X is invalid). For the writable properties of elements
SM and SD, refer to Appendix 1Special auxiliary relay and Appendix 2Special data register (if the element is un-writable, the
write operation is invalid).
2. The address of the slave station is 01, the last two bytes are CRC check code and the second byte is function code.

10.4.9 Handle double word

The current count value of C element is word or double word. The value from C200 to C255 are double words, which are read
and written through the function code (03, 16) of the register. Every two registers correspond to a C double word. Only the pair
can be read and written from/into register upon reading or writing.
For example, read the RTU frame of three C double word elements from C200 to C202:
01 03 25 E4 00 06 8E F3
CRC check code
Number of elements to read: 6
Starting address 9700
Function code
Station No.

In the returned data, 9700 and 9701 are two addresses for the content of C200. 9700 is the high 16 bits and 9701 is the low 16
bits.
When reading the double word, if the starting address read is not even number, then the system will respond with error code of
illegal address; if the read number of registers is not an even number, the system will respond with error code of illegal data.
For example:
XMT from master station: 01 03 25 E5 00 04 5E F2
The starting address for the reading of master station : 4 word elements of 25 E5 (decimal 9701)
Response of slave station: 01 83 02 C0 F1
Response of slave station: illegal data address
XTM from slave station: 01 03 25 E4 00 05 CE F2
The starting address for master station read: 5 word elements of 25 E5
Response of slave station: 01 83 03 01 31
The data sent back from slave station is illegal.

10.4.10 Handle LONG INT

A LONG INT data can be saved in two D elements. For example, if a LONG INT data is saved in D3 and D4 of IVC series PLC,
the high 16 bits will be stored in D3 and the low 16 bits will be stored in D4. This is also true when the master station reads
LONG INT data through Modbus and reorganize the data into 32 bits.
The storage principle for FLOAT is the same as the storage principle for LONG INT data.

10.4.11 Diagnostic function code

Diagnostic function code is used for test the communication between the master station and slave station, or the internal error
of the slave station. The supported diagnostic subfunction codes are as follows:
Function Subfunction Function Subfunction
Name of subfunction code Name of subfunction code
code code code code
Return bus communication error
08 00 Return query data 08 12
count
08 01 Restart communication option 08 13 Return bus exceptional error count
08 04 Forced listen only mode 08 14 Return slave message count
08 10 Clear the counter 08 15 Return salve no response count
08 11 Return bus message count 08 18 Return bus character overrun count
Applicable to IVC2L/IVC2H
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 281

10.4.12 Error code

For the XMT of master station, the slave station returns data or statistic value in the data field under the normal response status.
But in the abnormal response status, the server will return error code in the data field. Refer to the following table for error
codes:
Error code Meaning of error code
0x01 Illegal function code
0x02 Illegal register address
0x03 Illegal data
In addition, if the slave station receives data under the following situations, no message will be returned:
1.Error in broadcast frame, e.g. data error, address error;
2.Characters overrun, e.g. RTU frame over 256 bytes;
3.Under RTU transfer mode, interval between two characters time out, which is the same as receiving error frame, and no
message will be returned;
4.Listen-only mode of slave station;
5.The slave station received ASCII error frame, including frame tail error, character range error.

 Note
Read station is equipped with compulsory element. What is read is the value run by the program, which may be inconsistent
with the compulsory value.

10.4.13 Modbus parameter setting

Set communication port in system block
There are two serial ports (serial port 0 and 1) on the communication port interface. Communication port 0 only supports
Modbus slave station while communication port 1 supports both master and slave stations.
Set Modbus communication parameters
There is a button of default value on Modbus operand interface. The default value is the communication setting recommended
by Modbus communication protocol. For the parameter setting items, refer to the table below.
Item Setting
Station No. 0~31
Baud rate 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200
Data bit Set to 7 or 8 bits; 7 for ASCII mode, 8 for RTU mode
Parity check bit Set to no check, odd check and even check
Stop bit Set to 1 or 2; set to 1 for odd or even check; set to 2 for no check status
It can be set to master or slave station; communication port 1 can be set to master/slave station,
Modbus master/slave
communiation port 0 can only be set to slave station
Transfer mode Select RTU mode or ASCII mode
Main mode timeout The time for waiting the slave response by master is over the set value.
Note: After the operand is set and downloaded in the system block, it will be valid only after one operation.

10.4.14 Modbus instruction

When PLC is used as Modbus master station, the Modbus data frame can be sent/received through Modbus instruction
provided by system. For the detailed use of Modbus instruction, refer to 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。.
If PLC is set to master station, there is a timeout item in main mode when setting Modbus parameter in the system block. To
ensure the correctness of the received data, the timeout period shall be longer than a scan cycle of Modbus slave station and
with reasonable margin. For example, if IVC2L is the slave station and a scan cycle of IVC2L is 300ms, the main mode timeout
of the master station shall be over 300ms. It is proper to set the timeout to 350ms.
Application program
Example 1: When IVC2L PLC is Modbus master station as well as slave station, read bit status of No.5 station. The protocol
address of slave station read by master station is the bit value ranging from 11 to 39. Assuming that the read data are as
follows, the storage location for the received data starts from D100, save the address to D100, function code to D101 and
number of registers in D102. Save the read bit value in the units beginning with D103.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 282

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27
X X X 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
D106 D105

26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
D104 D103
If the read number of the registers is not the times of 8, add 0 to the high bits. In the above example, it has added 0 to 3 high
bits (40, 41 and 42) in D106.

1. Designate 5 as the address of the slave station

to be accessed (save to D0).
2. Designate 1 as the function code (save to D1).
3. The address of the register to be read is 11
(Save to D2/D3 according to high and low bytes).
4. The number of registers to be read is 29 (Save to
D4/D5 according to high bits and low bits).
5. The received data is saved to D100.
6. If the receive is completed (set SM135 ), add 1 to
D200.
7. If the communication fails (set SM136), add 1 to
D201 and save the error code to D202.
8. SM124 is the idle flag of the communication port.

 Note
1. When logic address is used for addressing the bit element of IVC2L PLC, the logic address 1 is the protocol address 0. In the
above example, reading the value of 11~39 bits (protocol address) in the slave station, the logic address shall start from 12.
2. The failure of this communication will not affect the next communication, that is, if there are two Modbus XMT instructions in
one user program, the first communication fails and has error code, it will not influence the data sending of the second Modbus
instruction. Thus, in the example, we placed the error code of SD139 in D202, which can be observed through D202.
3. For the message sending of the slave station, if the master station is in listen-only mode, there will be no data to be returned
and the system will display error flag. Therefore, when using Modbus of IVC2L, if IVC2L is the master station, the user shall
clearly know which PLC slave station is under listen-only mode, so as to ensure that the failure of the communication is not
caused by the listen-only mode of the slave station.

Example 2: IVC2L is the Modbus master station, the slave station is also an IVC2L. Read the status of bit elements (protocol
address: 2000~2017) in No.5 station.
The read data are as follows:
The received frame starts from D100.
D100 is for saving address
D101 is for saving function code
D102 is for saving the number of registers
Units beginning with D103 are for saving the read value of bit element
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 283

1. The program has designated 5 as the address

of the slave station to be accessed (save to D0).
2. The program has designated 1 as function
code (save to D1).
3. The starting address of the register to be
read is 07D0 (hexadecimal, save to D2/D3
according to high bits and low bits).
4. The number of registers to be read is 18 (Save
to D4/D5 according to high bits and low bits).
5. The received data is saved to D100.
6. If the receive is completed (set SM135), add 1
to D200.
7. If the communication fails (set SM136), add 1
to D201 and save the error code to D202.
8. SM124 is the idle flag of the communication
port.

Example 3: IVC2L is the Modbus master station as well as the slave station. Read the status of the bit element with the protocol
address ranging from 40 to 43 of No.5 station.
The read data are as follows:
The received frame starts from D100.
D100 is for saving address
D101 is for saving function code
D102 is for saving the number of registers
Units beginning with D103 are for saving the read value of bit element
40 element 40 element 41 element 41 element 42 element 42 element 43 element 43 element
MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB
D103 D104 D105 D106 D107 D108 D109 D110

1. The program has designated 5 as the address

of the slave station to be accessed (save to D0).
2. The program has designated 3 as function
code (save to D1).
3. The starting address of the register to be read
is 40 (save to D2/D3 according to high bits and
low bits).
4. The number of registers to be read is 4 (Save
to D4/D5 according to high bits and low bits).
5. The received data is saved to D100.
6. If the receiving is completed (set SM135 ), add
1 to D200.
7. If the communication fails (set SM136), add 1
to D201 and save the error code to D202.
8. SM124 is the idle flag of the communication
port.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 284

10.5 N:N bus communication protocol

10.5.1 Introduction
N:N bus is a small PLC network developed by INVT Auto-Control Technology Co., Ltd. The physical layer of N:N bus uses
RS485, so the PLC can be directly connected through communication port 1 or connected through communication port 0 by
RS232/RS485 converter. The connected PLC of N:N bus can automatically exchange the values between D elements and M
elements , which makes the access to the other PLC elements on the network as convenient as accessing its own element. In
N:N bus, the data access between PLCs is completely equivalent (N:N communication network).
It is convenient to configure N:N bus. Most parameters of N:N bus only need to be configured on No.0 PLC. In addition, N:N
bus supports online modification of the network parameters, and is able to detect the newly added PLC automatically. If any
PLC is disconnected from the network, the other PLCs will continue to exchange the data. It is also able to monitor the
communication status of the whole network through the relevant SM element of any PLC in N:N bus.

10.5.2 N:N bus data transfer mode

N:N bus has two types of messages: token sent by the master station; broadcast of PLCs on data.
The token is sent by the master station. At first, the master station holds the token. After data broadcast, it will send the token to
each slave station in cycle and sequence. Only the slave station receiving the token can broadcast other PLCs (including
master station).
Figure 10-1~10-5 show the main process of network communication. 1＃station is the master station. It is necessary to note
that generally 0＃station is the master station by default and 1＃station is the standby master station (shift to the master station
when communication fault or power failure to the master station occurs).

Master station (1#) Master station (1#)

Token
1#data 1#data 1#data

Slave station (2#) Slave station (3#)Slave station (N#)

Slave station (2#) Slave station (3#) Slave station (N#)
RS485
RS 485

Master station broardcasts Master station sends token to 2＃slave station

Master station (1#)

Master station (1#)

2＃data

Token

Slave station (2#)

2 ＃data 2＃data
Slave station (2#) Slave station (3#) Slave station (N#)

RS 485

Slave station (3#)Slave station (N#)

RS485
Master station sends token to 3＃slave station

2＃slave station broardcasts

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 285

Master station (1#)

3＃data
Master station (1#)

Slave station (3#)

3＃data 3＃data

Slave station (2#)Slave station (3#) Slave station (N#)

Slave station (2#) Slave station (N#)
RS485
RS485

Token sending and flowing

3＃slave station broardcasts

Figure 10-6 shows the sequence in which the token flows. The bold solid lines indicate the process of sending the token and
the dotted lines indicate the sequence of holding the token and broadcasting. It is necessary to note that the token is not sent
from one slave station (2#PLC) to another slave station (3#PLC) but from the master station to 2#PLC and then the master
station to 3#PLC.

10.5.3 N:N bus network structure

N:N bus supports two kinds of network: single-layer network and multiple-layer network (as shown in the following figures):

...

RS 485

N:N bus single-layer network

...
RS 485

RS485/232 converter

(Connecting node)

...
RS 485

N:N bus multiple-layer network

In the single-layer network, each PLC only connects to N:N bus through 1 communication port. In the multiple-layer network,
the layer-to-layer PLC (intermediate node) shall be connected, and the two communication ports of PLC shall be connected to
different layers. The single-layer network can support up to 32 PLCs , while each layer of multiple-layer network can support 16
PLCs at most.

10.5.4 N:N bus refresh mode

The PLCs connected to N:N bus can automatically realize the exchange between parts of D elements and M elements in the
network. The quantity and numbering of elements D and M are fixed, and the elements are called “Elements Sharing Area”. If
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 286

PLC uses N:N bus, the value of the Elements Sharing Area will keep refreshing automatically, so as to keep the value
consistency of the Elements Sharing Area for each PLC in the network.

0＃ PLC 1＃ PLC 2＃PLC ... 7＃ PLC

0#SND area (W) 0# RCV area (R) 0# RCV area (R) 0# RCV area (R)
1#RCV area (R) 1#SND area (W) 1# RCV area (R) 1# RCV area (R)
2# RCV area (R) 2# RCV area (R) 2#SND area (W) 2# RCV area (R)
3# RCV area (R) 3# RCV area (R) 3# RCV area (R) 3# RCV area (R)
4# RCV area (R) 4# RCV area (R) 4# RCV area (R) 4# RCV area (R)
5# RCV area (R) 5# RCV area (R) 5# RCV area (R) 5# RCV area (R) Note:
6# RCV area (R) 6# RCV area (R) 6# RCV area (R) 6# RCV area (R) SND area: sending area
RCV area: receiving area
7# RCV area (R) 7# RCV area (R) 7# RCV area (R) 7# SND area (W) W: write
R: read

As shown in the above figure, each PLC with N:N bus connected has a writable sending area in the Elements Sharing Area.
N:N bus will automatically send the information (values of designated elements D and M) of the writable sending area to other
PLCs, receive the information from other PLCs and save it to the read-only sending area.
The element number in the Elements Sharing Area is fixed (64 D elements and 512 M elements can be shared) and these
elements are distributed to more than one PLC. Therefore, the less PLCs are connected to the network, the more elements can
be distributed to each PLC. The relationship is defined by N:N bus refresh mode:
Distribution of D element on N:N bus single-layer network:
Distribution of D element
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5
in sending area
D7700~D7701 #0
#0
D7702~D7703 #1
#0
D7704~D7705 #2
#1
D7706~D7707 #3
#0
D7708~D7709 #4
#2
D7710~D7711 #5
#1
D7712~D7713 #6
#3
D7714~D7715 #7
#0
D7716~D7717 #8
#4
D7718~D7719 #9
#2
D7720~D7721 #10
#5
D7722~D7723 #11
#1
D7724~D7725 #12
#6
D7726~D7727 #13
#3
D7728~D7729 #14
#7
D7730~D7731 #15
D7732~D7733 #16
#8
D7734~D7735 #17
#4
D7736~D7737 #18
#9
D7738~D7739 #19
#2
D7740~D7741 #20
#10
D7742~D7743 #21
#5
D7744~D7745 #22
#11
D7746~D7747 #23
#1
D7748~D7749 #24
#12
D7750~D7751 #25
#6
D7752~D7753 #26
#13
D7754~D7755 #27
#3
D7756~D7757 #28
#14
D7758~D7759 #29
#7
D7760~D7761 #30
#15
D7762~D7763 #31
Explanation:
1) In mode 1, the D elements distributed to the sending area by 0# station are D7700 and D7701. D7700 and D7701 can be
written by the PLC of 0# station, and directly read by other stations (1#--31#).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 287

2) In mode 2, the D elements distributed to the sending area by 0# station are D7700, D7701, D7701 and D7703. The elements
can be written by the PLC of 0# station and directly read by other stations (1#--15#).
Distribution of M element on N:N bus single-layer network:
Distribution of M element
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5
in sending area
M1400~M1415 #0
#0
M1416~M1431 #1
#0
M1432~M1447 #2
#1
M1448~M1463 #3
#0
M1464~M1479 #4
#2
M1480~M1495 #5
#1 #0
M1496~M1511 #6
#3
M1512~M1527 #7
M1528~M1543 #8
#4
M1544~M1559 #9
#2
M1560~M1575 #10
#5
M1576~M1591 #11
#1
M1592~M1607 #12
#6
M1608~M1623 #13
#3 #0
M1624~M1639 #14
#7
M1640~M1655 #15
M1656~M1671 #16
#8
M1672~M1687 #17
#4
M1688~M1703 #18
#9
M1704~M1719 #19
#2
M1720~M1735 #20
#10
M1736~M1751 #21
#5
M1752~M1767 #22
#11
M1768~M1783 #23
#1
M1784~M1799 #24
#12
M1800~M1815 #25
#6
M1816~M1831 #26
#13
M1832~M1847 #27
#3
M1848~M1863 #28
#14
M1864~M1879 #29
#7
M1880~M1895 #30
#15
M1896~M1911 #31
Explanation:
1) In mode 1, the M elements distributed to the sending area by 0# station range from M1400 to M1415. The elements can be
written by the PLC of 0# station and directly read by other stations (1#--31#).
2) In mode 2, the M elements distributed to the sending area by 0# station range from M1400 to M1431. The elements can be
written by the PLC of 0# station and directly read by other stations (1#--31#).
Distribution of D element on N:N bus multiple-layer network (layer 0):
Distribution of D element in
Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Mode 9
sending area
D7700~D7701 #0
#0
D7702~D7703 #1
#0
D7704~D7705 #2
#1
D7706~D7707 #3
#0
D7708~D7709 #4
#2
D7710~D7711 #5
#1
D7712~D7713 #6
#3
D7714~D7715 #7
D7716~D7717 #8
#4
D7718~D7719 #9
#2 #1
D7720~D7721 #10
#5
D7722~D7723 #11
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 288

Distribution of D element in
Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Mode 9
sending area
D7724~D7725 #12
#6
D7726~D7727 #13
#3
D7728~D7729 #14
#7
D7730~D7731 #15
Explanation:
In mode 6, D7700 and D7701 are distributed to the sending area by 0# station (layer 0). They can be written by the PLC of 0#
station and directly read by the other stations (1#--15#).
Distribution of D element on N:N bus multiple-layer network (layer 1):
Distribution of D element in
Mode 10 Mode 11 Mode 12 Mode 13
sending area
D7732~D7733 #0
#0
D7734~D7735 #1
#0
D7736~D7737 #2
#1
D7738~D7739 #3
#0
D7740~D7741 #4
#2
D7742~D7743 #5
#1
D7744~D7745 #6
#3
D7746~D7747 #7
D7748~D7749 #8
#4
D7750~D7751 #9
#2
D7752~D7753 #10
#5
D7754~D7755 #11
#1
D7756~D7757 #12
#6
D7758~D7759 #13
#3
D7760~D7761 #14
#7
D7762~D7763 #15
Explanation:
In mode 10, D7732 and D7733 are distributed to the sending area by 0# station (layer 0). They can be written by the PLC of 0#
station and directly read by the other stations (1#--15#).
Distribution of M element on N:N bus multiple-layer network (layer 0):
Distribution of M element in
Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Mode 9
sending area
M1400~M1415 #0
#0
M1416~M1431 #1
#0
M1432~M1447 #2
#1
M1448~M1463 #3
#0
M1464~M1479 #4
#2
M1480~M1495 #5
#1
M1496~M1511 #6
#3
M1512~M1527 #7
M1528~M1543 #8
#4
M1544~M1559 #9
#2
M1560~M1575 #10
#5
M1576~M1591 #11
#1
M1592~M1607 #12
#6
M1608~M1623 #13
#3
M1624~M1639 #14
#7
M1640~M1655 #15
Explanation:
In mode 6, the M elements distributed to the sending area by 0# station (layer 0) range from M1400 to M1415. The elements
can be written by the PLC of 0# station and directly read by other stations (1#--15#).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 289

Distribution of M element on N:N bus multiple-layer network (layer 1):

Distribution of M element in
Mode 10 Mode 11 Mode 12 Mode 13
sending area
M1656~M1671 #0
#0
M1672~M1687 #1
#0
M1688~M1703 #2
#1
M1704~M1719 #3
#0
M1720~M1735 #4
#2
M1736~M1751 #5
#1
M1752~M1767 #6
#3
M1768~M1783 #7
M1784~M1799 #8
#4
M1800~M1815 #9
#2
M1816~M1831 #10
#5
M1832~M1847 #11
#1
M1848~M1863 #12
#6
M1864~M1879 #13
#3
M1880~M1895 #14
#7
M1896~M1911 #15
Explanation:
In mode 10, the M elements distributed to the sending area by 0# station (layer 1) range from M1656 to M1671. The elements
can be written by the PLC of 0# station and directly read by other stations (1#--15#).

 Note
Once PLC is configured with N:N bus communication protocol, D7700~D7763 and M1400~M1911 will become the public
resource for data exchange on the network. Please pay attention to these elements when using them in the program.

10.5.5 Enhanced refresh mode

To support share among more elements, IVC series PLC provides mode 14~18. The modes are only applicable to the structure
of single layer and the share among more elements. M element and D element enlarge on the original basis (M1400-M1911,
D7500~D7755).
M element area (512):
Distribution of M element Mode 14 Mode 15 Mode 16 Mode 17 Mode 18
M1400-M1415 #0
#0
M1416-M1431 #1
#0
M1432-M1447 #2
#1
M1448-M1463 #3
#0
M1464-M1479 #4
#2
M1480-M1495 #5
#1
M1496-M1511 #6
#3
M1512-M1527 #7
#0
M1528-M1543 #8
#4
M1544-M1559 #9
#2
M1560-M1575 #10
#5
M1576-M1591 #11
#1
M1592-M1607 #12
#6
M1608-M1623 #13
#3
M1624-M1639 #14
#7
M1640-M1655 #15
M1656-M1671 #16
#8
M1672-M1687 #17
#4
M1688-M1703 #18
#9
M1704-M1719 #19
#2
M1720-M1735 #20 #1
#10
M1736-M1751 #21
#5
M1752-M1767 #22
#11
M1768-M1783 #23
M1784-M1799 #24 #12 #6 #3
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 290

M1800-M1815 #25
M1816-M1831 #26
#13
M1832-M1847 #27
M1848-M1863 #28
#14
M1864-M1879 #29
#7
M1880-M1895 #30
#15
M1896-M1911 #31

D element area (256):

Distribution of D element Mode 14 Mode 15 Mode 16 Mode 17 Mode 18
D7500~D7507 #0
#0
D7508~D7515 #1
#0
D7516~D7523 #2
#1
D7524~D7531 #3
#0
D7532~D7539 #4
#2
D7540~D7547 #5
#1
D7548~D7555 #6
#3
D7556~D7563 #7
#0
D7564~D7571 #8
#4
D7572~D7579 #9
#2
D7580~D7587 #10
#5
D7588~D7595 #11
#1
D7596~D7603 #12
#6
D7604~D7611 #13
#3
D7612~D7619 #14
#7
D7620~D7627 #15
D7628~D7635 #16
#8
D7636~D7643 #17
#4
D7644~D7651 #18
#9
D7652~D7659 #19
#2
D7660~D7667 #20
#10
D7668~D7675 #21
#5
D7676~D7683 #22
#11
D7684~D7691 #23
#1
D7692~D7699 #24
#12
D7700~D7707 #25
#6
D7708~D7715 #26
#13
D7716~D7723 #27
#3
D7724~D7731 #28
#14
D7732~D7739 #29
#7
D7740~D7747 #30
#15
D7748~D7755 #31

10.5.6 N:N bus parameter setting

Select Communication Port in the System block dialogue box, and select N:N bus protocol in the port 0 or port 1 setting
area to enable the N:N bus setting button as follows:
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 291

Click the N:N bus setting button to enter the N:N bus protocol setting dialogue box as shown below:

As shown in the preceding figure, the N:N bus parameters are set through the system block. The Station No. shall begin with
0#. Several PLCs cannot share the same station number. 0# station is used for starting and setting the whole network. The
setting of Max number of sites, Additional delay time, Retry times and Mode can be realized through 0# station. For the
stations with other station numbers, except that the Baud rate and Parity check shall be consistent with those of 0# station,
they only need to set their own Station No., as shown in the following figure:

The Max number of sites refers to the total number of PLCs used in the network. If 6 PLCs are used in total, the value shall be
set to 6 and the station number of the 6 PLCs ranges from 0 to 5. If you want to add another two PLCs to the network later
without any interruption of the network, you can set the Max number of sites to 8. The numbers of the newly added PLCs are
6# and 7#. When 6# and 7# are connected to the network, they will be automatically detected by N:N bus within one second
and included into the data exchange with 0#-5#.

10.6 Control strategies

10.6.1 Master station confirmation

No. 0 station is the master station by default and only the station can initialize and start the whole network. The relevant
settings of N:N, such as refresh mode, additional delay time and retry times, must be configured by No. 0 station. When the
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 10 Using communication function 292

station modifies the relevant configuration online and downloads system block, the standby master station will control the
network. After finishing system block downloading, No. 0 station will become the master station instead of the standby one.
The strategy of master station in network: The station with the minimum No. will be the master station.

10.6.2 Max. number of inspection stations

It is recommended to set the Max. number of inspection stations to the total number of PLCs in the actual network and compile
the station No. from 0 in sequence. When the Max. number of inspection stations is N, the network will only control No. 0~N-1
stations. Specially, if the Max. number of inspection stations is wrong, that is, the number is smaller than the number of PLCs in
485 network, the station No. larger than or equal to the Max. number of inspection stations cannot broadcast data but can
receive broadcast data from the station No. smaller than the Max. number of inspection stations.

10.6.3 Multiple master-slave (M:N)

N:N can be applied to network multiple master-slave structure. The meanings of master and slave: The master means the PLC
can write its own M and D elements and read M and D elements of other stations; the slave means the PLC can only read M
and D elements of other stations. In the Max. number of inspection stations (also limited by refresh mode), the PLC with smaller
station No. can be master while larger station No. can be slave. The slave stations can only read the relevant M and D
elements of master station which correspond to each master station according to refresh mode. You can refer to N:N share M
and D element list.

10.6.4 Examples of N:N

There are 5 PLCs in total, the refresh mode is 3 and station No. is 0#~4#. Store the sum of D100 of 0#PLC and D305 of 2#PLC
into D500 of 4#PLC.
0# programming: MOV D100 D7700
2# programming: MOV D305 D7716
4# programming: ADD D7700 D7716 D500
Instruction: The example is N:N single layer network of 5 PLC stations and 3 refresh mode: each station can distribute 8 D
elements and 64 M elements. The distributed D elements of 0#station are D7700~D7707, 2#station are D7716~D7723 and
4#station are D7732~D7739. Store D100 of 0#station to the network to distribute in write area D7700, D305 of 2#station to the
network to distribute in write area D7716 and the sum of D7700 and D7716 of 4#station to the local element D500.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 293

Chapter 11 Using positioning function

11.1 Positioning control system

11.1.1 Absolute position system

By detecting the current encoding position and the total number of running coils of servo motor, the absolute position system
achieves the absolute position data of servo motor on travel. According to the principle, an absolute coordinate system can be
established on mechanical travel. The following is the block diagram of the absolute position system.

PLC Servo amplifier AC power

Instruction pulse output

Servo motor control

Other I/O AC
Instruction direction output
Program
Clear pulse output
scan Origin data
Absolute position communication

Backup battery
Store absolute - + Absolute position detection
position data

Maintain Encoding data

Power supply Accumulative number of coils

Encoder Servo motor

In above figure, unlike the common incremental encoder, the current encoding position and the total number of running coils for
the absolute position system can be maintained by power supply of a backup battery. Even if the power is off, the servo drive
can power on again and achieve the current absolute position data.
After PLC powers on, by communication or other special methods, the absolute position data will be obtained to confirm travel
coordinate position. PLC can control servo drive and motor through locating instruction, realize accurate positioning on travel,
and conduct automatic increasing/decreasing and refresh on absolute position data. Therefore, a work system can be
structured on basis of the absolute position coordinate.
The following is a mechanical simple diagram of absolute position system based on IVC series PLC locating instruction.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 294

Speed
Origin return speed

Crawling speed Position

Return starting point

Backward limit point Forward limit point

Backward direction Near-point detection(front) Forward direction

Near-point signal detection device

Origin(end)
Backward limit switch Console Forward limit switch

Front End
Servo motor

Lead screw

ON ON
Near-point signal state

OFF
OFF
Console position

In the system, the servo motor drives lead screw to control the operation of console. The console’s position in travel is detected
by absolute encoder. The servo motor will decelerate to crawling speed when the near-point signal device detects the front of
console (set) to be origin return signal; PLC will stop high-speed pulse output when the near-point signal device detects the end
of console (reset) to be origin arrival signal. The forward limit switch and backward limit switch must be set. When using ZRN
instruction, without automatic near-point signal searching, you must operate at the distance farther than the near-point signal
device. By design and programming, you can adopt jogging operation and adjust the position manually.

11.1.2 Positioning control system

According to different control methods, the positioning control system can be divided into open loop control system, half close
loop control system and close loop control system.
The open loop control system does not accept feedback control and only controls output, also called no feedback control
system. The system consists of controller, stepping drive and stepping motor. The controller sends pulse instructions to the
stepping drive and thus the stepping motor drives the console to move a certain distance. The system is simple, stable and
easy to use, but it cannot detect or correct errors, has poor control accuracy and anti-interference performance, and is sensitive
to the changes of system parameters. Therefore, it is only applicable to the cases regardless of outside influence or requiring
small inertia or low accuracy.

Drive Motor

Console
Controller

Open loop control system

The close loop control system is the automatic control system made up of signal positive channel and feedback channel, also
called feedback control system. The system consists of controller, servo drive, servo motor and detector. It performs automatic
detection on the actual displacement of the console and feedbacks to the controller for close loop control. The system has high
positioning accuracy, but it is complicated, hard to debug and maintain and expensive. Therefore, it is mainly applicable to the
cases requiring high accuracy and large numerical control machine tools.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 295

Drive Motor

Detector Detector Console

Controller

Close loop control system

The working principle of half close control system is similar to the close control system. However, its detector is not installed on
the console but on the axis of the servo motor. The system is more excellent than open loop control system in accuracy, speed
and dynamic property, less complicated and expensive than close loop control system, and it is mainly applicable to the cases
requiring medium accuracy and medium or small numerical control machine tools.

Drive Motor

Detector Console
Controller

Half close loop control system

11.1.3 Positioning control procedures

Start

11.2 PLC positioning

Positioning function Refer to function introduction
confirmation 11.3 Points to note about
positioning instructions

Relevant elements Refer to 11.4 Special elements related to

confirmation positioning instructions

11.5 Examples
Refer to 11.6 PLS envelope instruction
User programming configuration
11.7 POS trace interpolation
instruction configuration

End

11.2 IVC series PLC positioning function introduction

The positioning functions IVC series PLC support includes pulse output positioning, linear and circular trace interpolation of two
axes and synchronous motion control intershafts. The functions can be used widely to control stepping and servo drives of
various brands. The absolute position data can be obtained by the way the relevant servo drive provides.
Positioning functions of IVC series PLC main module
Name IVC2H IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC1S
Control axis 6 axes/4 axes 2 axes 4 axes 2 axes 2 axes
Max. output
200kHz 100kHz 100kHz 100kHz 50kHz
frequency
Pulse output type Open collector Open collector Open collector Open collector Open collector
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 296

Name IVC2H IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC1S

Pulse+direction,
forward
Pulse output mode Pulse+direction Pulse+direction Pulse+direction Pulse+direction
rotation+reverse
rotation
Ladder ACC/DEC, Ladder
ACC/DEC processing Ladder ACC/DEC Ladder ACC/DEC Ladder ACC/DEC
triangle prevention ACC/DEC
2-axis linear
Interpolation function interpolation, circular — — — —
arc interpolation
Position
Synchronizing
synchronization, — — — —
function
electronic gear
Absolute postion Read ABS
Read ABS instruction — —
detection instruction
Positioning range -2, 147, 483, 648~+2, 147, 483, 647 (pulse)
When connecting to the servo, set the input signal of servo amplifier to negative logic mode and define the pulse output mode
as follows:
Pulse + direction Forward rotation + reverse rotation
OFF Forward OFF
Pulse
ON rotation ON

OFF Reverse OFF

Direction
ON rotation ON

Forward Reverse Forward Reverse

rotation rotation rotation rotation
Note: The high-speed IO instructions can also be pulse output, only pulse signal output control rather than direction signal
control. When using the instructions, conduct positive and accumulative processing on corresponding SD elements; when the
servo drive is running forward, set the servo direction signal to ON, whereas set the servo direction signal to OFF.
The positioning functions IVC series PLC support are shown as follows:

Positioning functions of IVC series PLC main module

Name Action Content IVC2H IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S
Act according to the set origin return
Origin return speed
speed and search DOG signal
Speed
Crawling speed
automatically. After detecting DOG
DSZR ● ●
signal (DOG sensor is ON), decelerate
to crawling speed. Stop at zero point
Zero point:ON DOG:ON Start
input and finish origin return.
Origin return speed Act according to the set origin return
Speed speed. After detecting DOG signal
ZRN Crawling speed (DOG sensor is ON), decelerate to ● ● ●
crawling speed. Stop when DOG
DOG:OFF DOG:ON Start sensor is OFF and finish origin return.
Act according to the set running speed
Running speed
DRVI and stop at the target position. The ● ● ● ●
Speed
position adopts relative coordinate.
Displacement Act according to the set running speed
DRVA and stop at the target position. The ● ● ●
Start Target position
position adopts absolute coordinate.
Running speed Act according to the set running
Speed speed. If the running speed changes,
run at new speed; if the power flow is
PLSV ● ● ●
invalid, pulse output will stop. During
Power
Speed Speed
action of ACC/DEC and speed
Start flow
change change OFF change, execute ACC/DEC.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 297

Name Action Content IVC2H IVC2L IVC1 IVC1S

Servo Read the current absolute position

ABS drive ● ● ●
data from servo drive.
Read absolute position

Running speed
Act according to the set running
Speed
speed. If the interrupt input is ON,
DVIT ●
decelerate to stop after running the set
pulses.
Interrupt input
Start Displacement
ON

Running speed
Speed When operating a certain positioning,
STOPDV if the instruction starts, decelerate to ●
stop after running the set pulses.

Start Displacement

Target position (x,y) Move to the target position in

CW clockwise circular trace at designated ●
linear speed.

Starting Target position

Center of circle
point (x,y)

Move to the target position in

CCW counterclockwise circular trace at ●
Passed
Starting position designated linear speed.
point

Target position (x,y)

Move to the target position in linear
LIN ●
trace at designated vector speed.
x
Starting point

Total amount of
movement
Amount of Amount of
movement movement
before after
synchronizing synchronizing
Amount of
movement of
secondary axis The secondary axis follows the
Total amount movement of the primary axis and
of movement keeps synchronous speed with the
MOVELINK primary axis in a designated range. ●
Amount of Support ACC/DEC control in the
Speed of movement of
secondary primary axis transient process before and after
axis
synchronizing.

Speed Synchronization
Start End
synchronized completed

Control the secondary axis to follow

the movement of the primary axis
GEARBOX ●
according to a certain electronic gear
ratio.
The locating instructions and high-speed instructions output controllable pulses according to the set high-speed ports,
regardless of user program scan cycle. For using methods of the instructions, please refer to 6.10High-speed I/O instruction. In
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 298

the program, executing different locating instructions or high-speed instructions according to different output ports can output
independent high-speed pulses.

11.3 Points to note about locating instructions

When the locating instructions or high-speed instructions are valid (including output completion), other operations on the same
port will be invalid. Only when the high-speed pulse output instructions are invalid can other instructions output correctly.
If there are multiple locating instructions or high-speed instructions at the same port, the instruction first valid will occupy the
output port and the instruction last valid will not occupy the port.
Transistor output
Use IVC series PLC with transistor output.
Requirements of locating instructions in programming
The locating instructions can be used repeatedly in programs, but it is necessary to note that:
1. Do not execute other locating instructions or high-speed pulse instructions at the same high-speed pulse output point. At any
time, only one locating instruction (high-speed pulse instruction) drives one high-speed pulse output point.
2. After the power flow of one locating instruction is OFF, it can be connected and driven again by 1 or above PLC scan cycle.
Points to apply locating instructions and high-speed instructions simultaneously
From the point of functions, the locating instructions are recommended to replace the high-speed pulse instructions (PLSY,
PLSR, PLS) and they can finish automatic updating of absolute position SD elements.
Absolute position SD elements can be used to store and update the current absolute position after executing the locating
instructions. Automatic increasing/decreasing of SD elements depends on the accumulated SD changes when outputting
pulses and the running direction when calling locating instructions. Do not write SD elements when executing the locating
instructions; otherwise, a mess of data may occur.
If the locating instructions and high-speed pulse instructions (PLSY, PLSR, PLS) need to be used at the same time, it is
necessary to program PLC to update the data in SD elements of absolute position registers correctly.
Limits to the actual output frequency of locating instructions
When executing the locating instructions, the minimum frequency of the actual output pulse is limited by:
Fmax  500
Fmin_ acc 
T
In above formula, Fmax is the Max. speed set by SD85 and SD86, T is ACC/DEC time set by SD87 (unit: ms), and Fmin_ acc is
the limit value of the Min. output frequency.
If the locating instruction sets the output frequency to F, there will be 3 situations for the actual output frequency.
 F< base frequency or F> Fmax , no actual output
 F< Fmin_ acc , the actual output is Fmin_ acc
 Fmin_ acc ≤ F ≤ Fmax , the actual output is F

11.4 Special elements related to locating instructions

11.4.1 Elements related to locating instructions of IVC2H series

Definitions and distribution of output axes of IVC2H series are shown in the following tables.
Definitions of output axes of IVC2H-1616MAT6
Output
Available mode Definition of output point Definition of output mode
axis
Pulse Y0
Pulse+direction
Direction Y1
FWD
0 Y0
Forward rotation rotation
+reverse rotation REV
Y1
rotation
1 Pulse+direction Pulse Y2
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 299

Output
Available mode Definition of output point Definition of output mode
axis
Direction Y3 Pulse+direction
FWD OFF
Y2 Pulse
Forward rotation rotation
ON
+reverse rotation REV
Y3
rotation OFF
Direction
Pulse Y4 ON
2 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y4 FWD REV
Pulse Y5 rotation rotation
3 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y5
Pulse Y6
4 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y6
Pulse Y7 Forward rotation+reverse rotation
FWD
OFF
rotation
ON
REV
OFF
5 Pulse+direction rotation
Direction Unlimited except Y7 ON
FWD REV
rotation rotation

Definitions of output axes of IVC2H-1616MAT4

Output
Available mode Definition of output point Definition of output mode
axis
Pulse Y0
Pulse+direction
Direction Y1
FWD
0 Y0
Forward rotation rotation
+reverse rotation REV
Y1
rotation
Pulse Y2
Pulse+direction
Direction Y3
Refer to table 11-3 for definitions of output modes
FWD
1 Y2
Forward rotation rotation
+reverse rotation REV
Y3
rotation
Pulse Y4
2 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y4
Pulse Y5
3 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y5

 Note
When using any output axis to connect servo, it is necessary to consider matching the output points. All output axes can adopt
“pulse+direction” mode; the output axis 0 and 1 can adopt “forward rotation+reverse rotation” mode. In the mode of
“pulse+direction”, the corresponding output points of the pulse and direction of the output axis 0 and 1 are fixed. You can
choose direction signals for the output axis 2-5, but note that the output points cannot be used in other ways at the same time.
For example, the pulse or direction signals of the output axis 2-5 and other axes cannot be defined on the same output point. In
the mode of “forward rotation+reverse rotation”, the corresponding output points of FWD rotation and REV rotation signals are
fixed. As for the output axis 0 and 1, whichever mode they are set, as long as the axis uses the locating instruction or
high-speed I/O instruction, its corresponding two output points cannot be used in other ways.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 0 (corresponding to Y0)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y0 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM80 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM82 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 300

Address Name Function R/W

Pulse output completion Enable Y0 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM63 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: CLR signal
SM280 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM281 Y element Y(N) of N in SD206 means clear signal when setting; set Y10 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: origin return
SM282 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: forward rotation limit
SM283 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: reverse rotation limit
SM284 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM285 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM286 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM288 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM280 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y10 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 0 (corresponding to Y0)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD50 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD200~SD201 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD51 SD50~SD51 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD200 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD200.
SD201 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD202 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD203 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~200000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD204 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD205 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM201 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD206 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD207 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD208 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD209 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD56 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD202~SD205 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 1 (corresponding to Y2)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y2 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM262 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 301

Address Name Function R/W

Used to monitor the state of Y2 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM272 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y2 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM72 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: CLR signal
SM320 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM321 Y element Y(N) of N in SD326 means clear signal when setting; set Y12 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: origin return
SM322 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: forward rotation limit
SM323 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: reverse rotation limit
SM324 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM325 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM326 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y2 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM328 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM320 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y12 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 1 (corresponding to Y2)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD160 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD320~SD321 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD161 SD160~SD161 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD320 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD320.
SD321 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD322 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD323 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~200000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD324 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD325 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM321 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD326 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD327 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD328 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD329 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD252 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD322~SD325 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 2 (corresponding to Y4)

Address Name Function R/W
SM264 Pulse output stop control Disable Y4 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 302

Address Name Function R/W

function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y4 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM274 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y4 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM74 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: CLR signal
SM340 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM341 Y element Y(N) of N in SD346 means clear signal when setting; set Y14 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: origin return
SM342 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: forward rotation limit
SM343 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: reverse rotation limit
SM344 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM345 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y4: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM346 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y4 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM348 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM340 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y14 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 2 (corresponding to Y4)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD164 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD340~SD341 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD165 SD164~SD165 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD340 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD340.
SD341 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD342 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD343 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~200000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD344 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD345 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM341 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD346 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD347 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD348 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD349 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD254 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD342~SD345 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 3 (corresponding to Y5)

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 303

Address Name Function R/W

Disable Y5 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM265 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y5 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM275 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y5 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM75 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: CLR signal
SM350 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM351 Y element Y(N) of N in SD356 means clear signal when setting; set Y15 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: origin return
SM352 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: forward rotation limit
SM353 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: reverse rotation limit
SM354 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM355 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y5: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM356 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y5 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM358 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM350 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y15 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 3 (corresponding to Y5)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD166 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD350~SD351 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD167 SD166~SD167 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD350 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD350.
SD351 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD352 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD353 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~100000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD354 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD355 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM351 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD356 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD357 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD358 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD359 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD255 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD352~SD355 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 304

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 4 (corresponding to Y6)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y6 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM266 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y6 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM276 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y6 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM76 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: CLR signal
SM360 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM361 Y element Y(N) of N in SD366 means clear signal when setting; set Y16 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: origin return
SM362 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: forward rotation limit
SM363 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: reverse rotation limit
SM364 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM365 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y6: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM366 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y6 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM368 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM360 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y16 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 4 (corresponding to Y6)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD168 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD360~SD361 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD169 SD168~SD169 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD360 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD360.
SD361 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD362 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD363 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~100000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD364 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD365 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM361 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD366 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD367 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD368 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD369 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD256 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD362~SD365 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 305

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 5 (corresponding to Y7)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y7 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM267 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y7 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM277 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y7 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM77 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: CLR signal
SM370 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM371 Y element Y(N) of N in SD376 means clear signal when setting; set Y17 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: origin return
SM372 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: forward rotation limit
SM373 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: reverse rotation limit
SM374 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM375 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y7: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM376 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y7 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM378 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM370 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y17 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 5 (corresponding to Y7)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD170 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD370~SD371 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD171 SD170~SD171 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD370 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD370.
SD371 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD372 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD373 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~100000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD374 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD375 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM371 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD376 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD377 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD378 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD379 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD257 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD372~SD375 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 306

11.4.2 Elements related to locating instructions of IVC2L series

Definitions and distribution of output axes of IVC2L series are shown in the following tables.
Definitions of output axes of IVC2L series
Output
Available mode Definition of output point Definition of output mode
axis

Pulse Y0 Pulse+direction
0 Pulse+direction OFF
Pulse
Direction Unlimited except Y0 ON

OFF
Pulse Y1 Direction
ON

1 Pulse+direction FWD REV

Direction Unlimited except Y1 rotation rotation

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 0 (corresponding to Y0)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y0 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM80 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM82 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y0 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM63 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: CLR signal
SM280 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM281 Y element Y(N) of N in SD206 means clear signal when setting; set Y10 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: origin return
SM282 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: forward
SM283 Forward rotation limit rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival R/W
when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: reverse
SM284 Reverse rotation limit R/W
rotation limit arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM285 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM286 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM287 processing when setting (interrupt signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive logic R/W
interrupt signal
processing when resetting (interrupt signal signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM288 R/W
drive DSZR/DVIT, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: set X(N) in SD240 to
Y0 interrupt signal
SM289 interrupt input signal when setting; set X0 to interrupt input signal according to the R/W
element valid
default value when resetting
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axes of Y0 and Y1: use SM289,
Module interrupt signal
SM260 SM299 and SD240 to set interrupt input signal when setting; disable interrupt input R/W
element valid
signal setting when resetting
Note: When SM280 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y10 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 307

Special data registers of output axis 0 (corresponding to Y0)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD50 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD200~SD201 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD51 SD50~SD51 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD200 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD200.
SD201 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD202 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD203 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~100000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD204 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD205 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD207 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD208 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD209 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
Y0 clear signal element When SM281 is set, using the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the
SD220 R/W
designation element means clear signal
Y0 interrupt signal element When SM289 is set, using the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the
SD240 R/W
designation element means interrupt signal
Note:
1. SD202~SD205 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, the base speed will assign 1/10 of the Max. speed. If
the speed of the locating instruction is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 1 (corresponding to Y1)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y1 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM81 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y1 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM83 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y1 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM64 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: CLR signal
SM290 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM291 Y element Y(N) of N in SD230 means clear signal when setting; set Y11 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: origin return
SM292 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: forward
SM293 Forward rotation limit rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival R/W
when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: reverse
SM294 Reverse rotation limit R/W
rotation limit arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM295 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM296 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM297 processing when setting (interrupt signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive logic R/W
interrupt signal
processing when resetting (interrupt signal signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y1 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM298 R/W
drive DSZR/DVIT, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 308

Address Name Function R/W

Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: set X(N) in SD240 to
Y1 interrupt signal
SM299 interrupt input signal when setting; set X1 to interrupt input signal according to the R/W
element valid
default value when resetting
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axes of Y0 and Y1: use SM289,
Module interrupt signal
SM260 SM299 and SD240 to set interrupt input signal when setting; disable interrupt input R/W
element valid
signal setting when resetting
Note: When SM290 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y11 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 1 (corresponding to Y1)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD52 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD210~SD211 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD53 SD52~SD53 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD210 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD210.
SD211 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD212 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD213 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~100000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD214 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD215 ACC/DEC time R/W
range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD217 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD218 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD219 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
Clear signal element When SM291 is set, using the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the
SD230 R/W
designation element means clear signal
Interrupt signal element When SM299 is set, using the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the
SD240 R/W
designation element means interrupt signal
Note:
1. SD212~SD215 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, the base speed will assign 1/10 of the Max. speed. If
the speed of the locating instruction is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output.

11.4.3 Elements related to locating instructions of IVC1L series

Definitions and distribution of output axes of IVC1L series are shown in the following tables.
Definitions of output axes of IVC1L
Output
Available mode Definition of output point Definition of output mode
axis

Pulse Y0 Pulse+direction
0 Pulse+direction OFF
Pulse
Direction Unlimited except Y0 ON

OFF
Pulse Y1 Direction
1 Pulse+direction ON
Direction Unlimited except Y1 FWD REV
Pulse Y2 rotation rotation
2 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y2
Pulse Y3
3 Pulse+direction
Direction Unlimited except Y3
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 309

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 0 (corresponding to Y0)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y0 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM80 Y0 pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM82 pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
pulse output completion Enable Y0 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable
SM63 R/W
interrupt enabling control pulse output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: CLR signal
SM280 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: using
Clear signal designated
SM281 corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in SD206 means clear signal when setting; R/W
element valid
set Y10 to clear signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: origin return
SM282 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is R/W
reverse rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: forward rotation
SM283 Forward rotation limit limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: reverse rotation
SM284 Reverse rotation limit R/W
limit arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM285 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y0: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM286 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM288 Locating instruction in drive R/W
DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM280 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y10 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 0 (corresponding to Y0)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD50 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD200~SD201 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD51 SD50~SD51 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD200 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD200.
SD201 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD202 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD203 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~200000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD204 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD205 ACC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
The DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD260 DEC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM201 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD206 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD207 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD208 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD209 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD56 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 310

Note:
1. SD202~SD205 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 1 (corresponding to Y1)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y1 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM81 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y1 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM83 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y1 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM64 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: CLR signal
SM290 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM291 Y element Y(N) of N in SD230 means clear signal when setting; set Y11 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: origin return
SM292 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: forward
SM293 Forward rotation limit rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival R/W
when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: reverse
SM294 Reverse rotation limit R/W
rotation limit arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM295 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM296 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM297 processing when setting (interrupt signal is ON when inputing OFF); positive logic R/W
interrupt signal
processing when resetting (interrupt signal signal is ON when inputing ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y1 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM298 R/W
drive DSZR/DVIT, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axis of Y1: set X(N) in SD240 to
Y1 interrupt signal
SM299 interrupt input signal when setting; set X1 to interrupt input signal according to the R/W
element valid
default value when resetting
Applicable to DVIT, function on the corresponding axes of Y0 and Y1: use SM289,
Module interrupt signal
SM260 SM299 and SD240 to set interrupt input signal when setting; disable interrupt input R/W
element valid
signal setting when resetting
Note: When SM290 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y11 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 1 (corresponding to Y1)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD52 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD210~SD211 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD53 SD52~SD53 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD210 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD210.
SD211 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD212 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD213 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~100000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD214 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 311

Address Name Function R/W

The ACC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD215 ACC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
The DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD261 DEC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD217 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD218 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD219 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
Clear signal element When SM291 is set, using the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the
SD230 R/W
designation element means clear signal
Interrupt signal element When SM299 is set, using the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the
SD240 R/W
designation element means interrupt signal
Note:
1. SD212~SD215 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, the base speed will assign 1/10 of the Max. speed. If
the speed of the locating instruction is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 2 (corresponding to Y2)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y2 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM262 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y2 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM272 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y2 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM72 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: CLR signal
SM320 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM321 Y element Y(N) of N in SD326 means clear signal when setting; set Y12 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: origin return
SM322 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: forward rotation limit
SM323 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: reverse rotation limit
SM324 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM325 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y2: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM326 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y2 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM328 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM320 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y12 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 2 (corresponding to Y2)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD160 Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position R/W
(MSB)
instruction is executed, calculate and update SD320~SD321 according to
Accumulated pulse total number
SD161 SD160~SD161 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading R/W
(LSB)
absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD320 Current absolute position (MSB) R/W
into SD320.
SD321 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 312

Address Name Function R/W

SD322 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD323 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~200000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD324 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD325 ACC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
The DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD262 DEC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM321 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD326 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD327 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD328 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD329 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD252 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD322~SD325 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

Control and monitor output channels of output axis 3 (corresponding to Y3)

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y3 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM263 Pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y3 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM273 Pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Pulse output completion Enable Y4 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable pulse
SM73 R/W
interrupt enabling control output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: CLR signal
SM330 Clear function valid output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: using corresponding
Clear signal designated
SM331 Y element Y(N) of N in SD346 means clear signal when setting; set Y14 to clear R/W
element valid
signal according to the default value when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: origin return
SM332 Origin return direction direction is forward rotation direction when setting; origin return direction is reverse R/W
rotation direction when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: forward rotation limit
SM333 Forward rotation limit arrival when setting; resetting means forward rotation limit non-arrival when R/W
resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: reverse rotation limit
SM334 Reverse rotation limit R/W
arrival when setting; reverse rotation limit non-arrival when resetting
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM335 processing when setting (near-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
near-point signal
logic processing when resetting (near-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Applicable to DSZR, function on the corresponding axis of Y3: negative logic
Logic reverse rotation of
SM336 processing when setting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting OFF); positive R/W
zero-point signal
logic processing when resetting (zero-point signal is ON when inputting ON)
Locating instruction in Used to monitor the state of Y3 high-speed pulse output channel when executing
SM338 R/W
drive DSZR, ON when busy, OFF when ready
Note: When SM330 is set, the corresponding default clear signal Y13 of the output axis will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return
arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If the default clear signal is used in other ways, reset valid clear signal to disable
the function.

Special data registers of output axis 3 (corresponding to Y3)

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position
SD162 R/W
(MSB) instruction is executed, calculate and update SD330~SD331 according to
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 313

Address Name Function R/W

Accumulated pulse total number SD162~SD163 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading
SD163 R/W
(LSB) absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long)
SD330 Current absolute position (MSB) into SD330. R/W
SD331 Current absolute position (LSB) R/W
SD332 Max. speed (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction, R/W
SD333 Max. speed (LSB) range: 10~200000, unit: pulse R/W
The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD334 Base speed R/W
1/10 of the Max. speed)
The ACC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD335 ACC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
The DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction, range:
SD263 DEC time R/W
50~5000, unit: ms
Clear signal element When SM331 is set, the corresponding Y element Y(N) of N in the element is
SD336 R/W
designation clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, function as the crawling speed when executing the
SD337 Crawling speed R/W
instruction
SD338 Origin return speed (MSB) Applicable to DSZR, function as the origin return speed when executing the R/W
SD339 Origin return speed (LSB) instruction R/W
SD253 Envelope output stage Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
Note:
1. SD332~SD335 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

11.4.4 Elements related to locating instructions of IVC1 series

Definitions and distribution of output axes of IVC1 series are shown in the following tables.
Definitions of output axes of IVC1
Output
Available mode Definition of output point Definition of output mode
axis

Pulse Y0 Pulse+direction
0 Pulse+direction OFF
Pulse
Direction Unlimited except Y0 ON

OFF
Pulse Y1 Direction
ON

1 Pulse+direction FWD REV

Direction Unlimited except Y1 rotation rotation

Control and monitor of output channels

Address Name Function R/W
Disable Y0 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM80 Y0 pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Disable Y1 high-speed pulse output function when setting; enable the output
SM81 Y1 pulse output stop control R/W
function when resetting
Used to monitor the state of Y0 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM82 Y0 pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Used to monitor the state of Y1 high-speed pulse output channel, ON when busy,
SM83 Y1 pulse output monitor R
OFF when ready
Y0 pulse output completion Enable Y0 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable
SM63 R/W
interrupt enabling control pulse output completion interrupt when resetting
Y1 pulse output completion Enable Y1 high-speed pulse output completion interrupt when setting; disable
SM64 R/W
interrupt enabling control pulse output completion interrupt when resetting
Applicable to ZRN, function on the corresponding axes of Y0 and Y1: CLR signal
SM85 Clear function valid R/W
output of origin return instruction is valid when setting; no CLR signal output when
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 314

Address Name Function R/W

resetting
Y0 interrupt drive pulse ON: PLSY instructions can be called in interrupt programs and subprograms, and
SM86 R/W
output valid driven continuously and repeatedly with power flow in main programs
Y1 interrupt drive pulse ON: PLSY instructions can be called in interrupt programs and subprograms, and
SM87 R/W
output valid driven continuously and repeatedly with power flow in main programs
PLSV gradual frequency
SM89 ON: frequency changes gradually R/W
conversion
Note: When SM85 is set, Y2 or Y3 will send 1 CLR pulse output at origin return arrival and the pulse width is 20ms+1 scan cycle. If
Y2 or Y3 is used in other ways, resetting SM85 will disable the function.

Special data registers of output channels

Address Name Function R/W
Accumulated pulse total number
SD50 R/W
of output axis 0 (MSB)
Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position
Accumulated pulse total number
SD51 instruction is executed, calculate and update SD80~SD81 according to R/W
of output axis 0 (LSB)
SD50~SD51 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading
Current absolute position of
SD80 absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long) R/W
output axis 0 (MSB)
into SD80.
Current absolute position of
SD81 R/W
output axis 0 (LSB)
Accumulated pulse total number
SD52 R/W
of output axis 1 (MSB)
Used to calculate and store absolute position. Each time the position
Accumulated pulse total number
SD53 instruction is executed, calculate and update SD82~SD83 according to R/W
of output axis 1 (LSB)
SD52~SD53 and direction signals. When starting the machine and reading
Current absolute position of
SD82 absolute position data from servo drive, store the acquired data (32-bit long) R/W
output axis 1 (MSB)
into SD82.
Current absolute position of
SD83 R/W
output axis 1 (LSB)
Base speed of output axes 0 The base speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction (below
SD84 R/W
and 1 1/10 of the Max. speed)
Max. speed of output axes 0
SD85 R/W
and 1 (MSB) The Max. speed when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
Max. speed of output axes 0 range: 10~100000, unit: pulse
SD86 R/W
and 1 (LSB)
ACC/DEC time of output axes 0 The ACC/DEC time when the output axis executes the locating instruction,
SD87 R/W
and 1 range: 50~5000, unit: ms
Envelope output stage of output
SD56 Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
axis 0
Envelope output stage of output
SD57 Applicable to PLS, used to detect the envelope output stage R
axis 1
Note:
1. SD84~SD87 can be changed by users according to needs. Please ensure to assign the value before driving the locating
instruction. Changing above parameters when executing the locating instruction may affect correct execution.
2. The base speed must be smaller than 1/10 of the Max. speed; otherwise, no pulse output. If the speed of the locating instruction
is lower than the base speed or higher than the Max. speed, no pulse output, either.

11.5 Examples

11.5.1 Example of pulse output program

Mechanical diagram
Refer to the schematic diagram in 6.17.3. The example is about the absolute coordinate system of single-shaft lead screw.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 315

Wiring diagram
220Vac

HC-MFS13
L N
Note9
QF KM
L1 U U
220Vac
L2 V V Servo
L3 W W motor
L11 PE E
PLC L21 PE

X0 Stop Cable to encoder Absolute

Origin return CN2
X1 encoder
X2 FWD jogging
X3 REV jogging Servo
X4 FWD position control amplifier
X5 REV position control
X6 Near-point signal
X7 System start
COM
S/S CN1B
Note10
+24V COM
COM SG

Shielded cable CN1A

Instruction pulse
Y0 PP
COM0 SG
Y1 SD
Shielded cable
COM1
Clear signal
Y2 CR
Y3 SG
SD
Instruction direction signal
Y4 NP
COM2 SG
Shielded cable SD
COM
OPC
CN1B
CN1B
X10 DO1 Note1
EMG Emergency stop button
X11 ZSP Note2
RES Reset button
X12 TLC Note3
LSP FWD limit switch
X13 ALM
LSN REV limit switch
X14 RD
SG
COM SG
Y10 SON Note4

Y11 ABSM Note5

Y12 ABSR Note6

COM3
EC10-1614BTA Note7 MR-J2S-10A Note8

Note1: When ABSM is set to ON, it is ABS bit1 data line; when ABSM is set to OFF, it is positioning complete signal.
Note2: When ABSM is set to ON, it is ABS bit2 data line; when ABSM is set to OFF, it is zero speed signal.
Note3: When ABSM is set to ON, it is transfer data ready signal; when ABSM is set to OFF, it is torque limit signal.
Note4: Servo enabling signal, set before ABS is executed.
Note5: ABS transfer mode signal.
Note6: ABS transfer request signal.
Note7: PLC main module which must adopt transistor output.
Note8: Please install according to installation instructions of servo amplifier in relevant models; the plugs of multiple ports are totally the
same in shape,, so be careful not to plug improperly.
Note9: In alarm or emergency situations, need program to control KM and disconnect the power supply.
Note10: In the example, PLC adopts sink input, short circuit +24V and S/S terminals.

Program examples
The program realizes the following functions:
1. When PLC enters the running state, read abosute position data of servo drive via ABS instruction or communication mode
(servo drive is required to power on before or at the same time PLC runs).
2. Enter the running state, set SM85 and clear output function. Each time origin returns, Y2 will output clear pulse.
3. Operate the JOG+ button for jogging in forward direction.
4. Operate the JOG- button for jogging in reverse direction.
5. When the console locates farther than the front of near-point signal, operate the origin return button for origin return action in
backward direction.
6. Press the stop button when the console is running and the console will stop running.
7. Operate the forward position control and reverse position control buttons for console positioning.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 316
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 317
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 318

Configuration of PLS envelope instruction

PLS envelope instruction is generated by PTO instruction wizard. In Auto Station, select Tool->Instruction Wizard…, to carry
out the relevant configuration of PLS instruction, as shown below, select PTO.

Click Next to enter the interface of high-speed pulse output point, Max. and Min. frequency of high-speed pulse output, and
ACC/DEC time, as shown below:

The accelerated speed for all stages of envelope in acceleration/deceleration is definite. For example, if the setting goes as
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 319

above figure, thus the ACC time required by the motor accelerating from 20000Hz to 50000Hz is:
1000×(50000-20000)÷(100000-5000)=316(ms)=0.316(s)
During ACC time, the total output pulse number can be achieved by trapezoid area calculation formula:
(20000+50000)×0.316÷2=11060(total pulse number)
Therefore, if the ACC/DEC time or pulse number is required, please make relevant calcultation and then set the Max. speed,
Min. speed and ACC/DEC time.
Click Next in above figure and then enter Motion Contour Definition in below figure. Input the target speed and move
distance of the first step and click Add Step. Input the target speed and move distance of the second step and click Add Step,
and so on. Finally, click Finish.

The above configuration will be stored in D elements. You can choose which D elements are used to store the settings.

Set up two subprograms for envelope output wizard, one is parameter setting subprogram and the other is PLS execution
subprogram, as shown below. When programming the main program, ensure to call the PLS execution subprogram after
properly calling and executing the parameter setting subprogram (relevant D elements will be assigned).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 320

So far, all configuration is completed, as shown below, click Finish to end PTO configuration.

11.5.2 Example of trace interpolation program

Mechanical diagram

Backward direction

Console
Servo X axis origin
motor

Backward X axis Forward

direction Origin direction

Y axis origin

Y axis
Forward direction
Servo
motor
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 321

Wiring diagram

Instruction pulse
+24V Y0 PP EMG Emergency stop
button
RES
Instruction direction signal Servo
COM Y1 NP LSP FWD limit switch
drive
LSN REV limit switch
COM
S/S SG SG
0
X axis
EC20H-1616BTA4

X axis near-point signal

X0 Y axis
Y axis near-point signal Instruction pulse
X1 Y2 PP EMG
X axis origin return
X2 RES Reset button
Y axis origin return Instruction direction signal Servo
X3 Y3 NP LSP FWD limit switch
drive
Stop X4 LSN REV limit switch
COM
Start X5 SG SG
1

Program examples
The program realizes the following functions:
1. Operate the origin return button, the console will perform origin automatic search and stop running when reaching the origin.
2. Enter the running state, operate the start button and run continuously in the trace shown in the diagram.
3. Press the stop button when the console is running and the console will stop running.

-200 B
A

H -100 C

X
-100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

100

G 200 D

300
F E

Y
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 322
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 323
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 324
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Chapter 11 Using positioning function 325
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 326

Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay

All the special auxiliary relays are initialized when the PLC changes from STOP to RUN. Those that have been set in system
setting will be set to the preset value after that initialization.

 Note
The reserved SD and SM elements are not listed in the table. The reserved SM elements are by default read only (R).

1. PLC work state flag

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Monitoring run
SM0 This bit is high in the RUN state, and zero in the STOP state R √ √ √ √
bit
Initial run pulse This bit is set high when PLC changes from STOP to RUN, and set low after a
SM1 R √ √ √ √
bit scan cycle
SM2 Power on flag bit This bit is set high after system power-on, and set low after a scan cycle R √ √ √ √
This bit is set when system error occurs after power-on or after PLC changes
SM3 System error R √ √ √ √
from STOP to RUN, or reset if no system error occurs
Battery voltage This bit is set when the battery voltage is too low, or reset if the battery voltage
SM4 R √ √ √
low is detected higher than 2.4V
This bit is set when PLC detects AC power off (detecting time 40ms). If the
AC power failure
SM5 power is on after the delay of power off detecting time (set in SD05), the bit will R √ √ √ √
detection bit
be reset
This bit is set when PLC detects the 24Vdc power failure (detecting time
24Vdc power
SM6 50ms). If within the following 50ms the power is detected to be back, this bit R √ √ √ √
failure
will be reset
If this bit is set as 1, the battery backup data lost error and the forced-table lost
No battery work
SM7 error (code: 44) will not be reported upon system battery failure (configurable R √ √ √
mode
only through system block)
Constant scan Set this bit, and the scan time will be constant (configurable only through
SM8 R √ √ √ √
mode system block)
Input point Set this bit, and the PLC can change from STOP to RUN when the designated
SM9 R √ √ √ √
startup mode X input point is ON (configurable only through system block)

2. Clock running bit

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Crystal oscillation (period: 10ms). Reverse every half period. The first half
SM10 10ms clock R √ √ √ √
period is 0 when the user program starts
Crystal oscillation (period: 100ms). Reverse every half period. The first half
SM11 100ms clock R √ √ √ √
period is 0 when the user program starts
Crystal oscillation (period: 1s). Reverse every half period. The first half period
SM12 1s clock R √ √ √ √
is 0 when the user program starts
Crystal oscillation (period: 1min). Reverse every half period. The first half
SM13 1min clock R √ √ √ √
period is 0 when the user program starts
Crystal oscillation (period: 1 hour). Reverse every half period. The first half
SM14 1hour clock R √ √ √ √
period is 0 when the user program starts
Scan cycle This bit reverses once every scan cycle (The first period is 0 when the user
SM15 R √ √ √ √
oscillation bit program starts)
High-speed ring Unit: 0.1ms, 16 bits
SM16 counter enabling Set: high-speed ring counter starts counting R/W √ √
flag Reset: high-speed ring counter stops counting
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 327

3. User program execution error

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
This bit is set upon instruction execution error. Ths corresponding error
Instruction execution
SM20 type code is written into SD20. This bit is cleared after the execution R √ √ √ √
error
succeeds
Instruction register
This bit is set upon instruction execution error. The corresponding error
SM21 number subscript R √ √ √ √
type code is written into SD20
overflow
This bit is set upon instruction execution error. The corresponding error
Instruction parameter
SM22 type code is written into SD20. This bit is cleared after the execution R √ √ √ √
illegal
succeeds
Instruction execution
SM30 This bit is connected at the end of MODRW instruction execution R √ √
end flag

4. Interrupt control
Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM40 X0 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM41 X1 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM42 X2 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM43 X3 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM44 X4 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM45 X5 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM46 X6 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM47 X7 input rising/falling edge interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM48 COM 0 character transmission interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM49 COM 0 character reception interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM50 COM 0 frame transmission interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM51 COM 0 frame reception interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM52 COM 1 character transmission interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM53 COM 1 character reception interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM54 COM 1 frame transmission interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM55 COM 1 frame reception interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM56 Power failure interrupt Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM57 COM 2 character transmission interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √
SM58 COM 2 character reception interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √
SM59 COM 2 frame transmission interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √
SM60 COM 2 frame reception interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √
Positioning instruction passed position interrupt 1
SM61 Enable when set as 1 R/W √
enabling flag bit
Positioning instruction passed position interrupt 2
SM62 Enable when set as 1 R/W √
enabling flag bit
SM63 High-speed output 0 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM64 High-speed output 1 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √
SM65 High-speed counter interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM66 Timed interrupt 0 enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM67 Timed interrupt 1 enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM68 Timed interrupt 2 enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √ √ √
SM69 Interpolation complete interrupt 1 enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM72 High-speed output 2 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √ √
SM73 High-speed output 3 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM74 High-speed output 4 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM75 High-speed output 5 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM76 High-speed output 6 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM77 High-speed output 7 complete interrupt enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM78 Interpolation complete interrupt 2 enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM79 Interpolation complete interrupt 3 enabling flag bit Enable when set as 1 R/W √
SM105 Positioning instruction passed position interrupt 3 Enable when set as 1 R/W √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 328

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
enabling flag bit
Positioning instruction passed position interrupt 4
SM106 Enable when set as 1 R/W √
enabling flag bit
Positioning instruction passed position interrupt 5
SM107 Enable when set as 1 R/W √
enabling flag bit
Positioning instruction passed position interrupt 6
SM108 Enable when set as 1 R/W √
enabling flag bit

5. External instruction
Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
1-16 characters when set as 1, 8 characters
SM70 Print mode selection R/W √ √
when set as 0
SM71 Print in progress In printing when set as 1 R √ √

6. High-speed pulse output control

Addr. Name Function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM80 Y0 high-speed pulse output control Y0 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W √ √ √ √
SM81 Y1 high-speed pulse output control Y1 high-speed pulse output stop instruction R/W √ √ √
Y0 high-speed pulse output mointor (ON: busy. OFF:
SM82 Y0 high-speed pulse output monitor R √ √ √ √
ready)
Y1 high-speed pulse output mointor (ON: busy. OFF:
SM83 Y1 high-speed pulse output monitor R √ √ √ √
ready)
SM84 PWM time base unit ON: microsecond. OFF: millisecond R/W √ √
SM85 Reset function valid Output of CLR signal for ZRN instruction enabled R/W √
ON: PLSY instructions can be called in interrupt
SM86 Y0 interrupt drive pulse output valid programs and subprograms, and driven continuously R/W √ √ √
and repeatedly with power flow in main programs
ON: PLSY instructions can be called in interrupt
SM87 Y1 interrupt drive pulse output valid programs and subprograms, and driven continuously R/W √ √ √
and repeatedly with power flow in main programs
SM88 Envelope loop execution ON: envelope loop execution R/W √
SM89 PLSV gradual frequency conversion ON: frequency changes gradually R/W √ √ √
ON: PLSY instructions can be called in interrupt
SM382 Y2 interrupt drive pulse output valid programs and subprograms, and driven continuously R/W √
and repeatedly with power flow in main programs
ON: PLSY instructions can be called in interrupt
SM383 Y3 interrupt drive pulse output valid programs and subprograms, and driven continuously R/W √
and repeatedly with power flow in main programs

7. Pulse capture monitoring bit

Addr. Name Function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM90 Input X0 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X0 R/W √ √ √
SM91 Input X1 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X1 R/W √ √ √
SM92 Input X2 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X2 R/W √ √ √
SM93 Input X3 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X3 R/W √ √ √
SM94 Input X4 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X4 R/W √ √ √
SM95 Input X5 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X5 R/W √ √ √
SM96 Input X6 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X6 R/W √ √ √
SM97 Input X7 pulse capture monitoring bit Capture rising edge pulse at input X7 R/W √ √ √
Note:
1. All the elements in this table are cleared when the PLC changes from STOP to RUN. The pulse capture will fail when the HCNT or SPD
instruction is being executed at the same input point. For details, see 错误！未找到引用源。错误！未找到引用源。 and 错误！未找到引用源。
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 329

错误！未找到引用源。.
2. For hardware counters, the total pulse frequency input through X0~X7 (using pulse capture, SPD instruction or HCNT instructions, but not
high-speed compare instructions) is ≤80k. For software counters, that frequency (using instructions DHSCS, DHSCI, DHSZ, DHSP or DHST for
driven high-speed counters) is ≤30k.

8. Fourfold frequency
Addr. Name function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
AB ph of X0 and X1 input
SM100 Clear when STOP－>RUN R/W √ √ √ √
once/fourfold switching
AB ph of X2 and X3 input
SM101 R/W √
once/fourfold switching
AB ph of X3 and X4 input
SM102 R/W √ √ √ √
once/fourfold switching
AB ph of X4 and X5 input
SM103 R/W √
once/fourfold switching
AB ph of X6 and X7 input
SM104 R/W √
once/fourfold switching

9. Free port (port 0)

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
This bit is set when XMT instruction is used, and is cleared
Port 0
after the transmission is over. You can manually clear this
SM110 transmission R/W √ √ √ √
bit to halt the current transmission at Port 0. The
enabling flag bit
transmission can resume when power flow is on again
This bit is set when RCV instruction is used, and is cleared
Port 0 reception after the transmission is over. You can manually clear this
SM111 R/W √ √ √ √
enabling flag bit bit to halt the current transmission at Port 0. The
transmission can resume when power flow is on again
Port 0
SM112 transmission This bit is set after the transmission is over R/W √ √ √ √
complete flag bit
Port 0 reception
SM113 This bit is set after the reception is over R/W √ √ √ √
complete flag bit
SM114 Port 0 idle flag bit This bit is set when the port is idle R √ √ √ √

 Note
SM112~SM114 are the flags for the reception, complete and idle states in all communication protocols that are supported by
PORT 0. For example, the PORT 0 of IVC1 PLC supports N:N bus, Modbus and Freeport. No matter which protocol is used,
the functions of SM112~SM114 remain the same.

10. Free port (port 1)

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
This bit is set when XMT instruction is used, and is cleared
Port 1 transmission after the transmission is over. You can manually clear this
SM120 R/W √ √ √ √
enabling flag bit bit to halt the current transmission at Port 1. The
transmission can resume when power flow is on again
This bit is set when RCV instruction is used, and is cleared
Port 1 reception after the transmission is over. You can manually clear this
SM121 R/W √ √ √ √
enabling flag bit bit to halt the current transmission at Port 1. The
transmission can resume when power flow is on again
Port 1 transmission
SM122 This bit is set after the transmission is over R/W √ √ √ √
complete flag bit
SM123 Port 1 reception This bit is set after the reception is over R/W √ √ √ √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 330

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
complete flag bit
SM124 Port 1 idle flag bit This bit is set when the port is idle R √ √ √ √

 Note
SM122~SM124 are the flags for the reception, complete and idle states in all communication protocols that are supported by
Port 1 . For example, the Port 1 of IVC1 PLC supports N:N bus, Modbus and Freeport. No matter which protocol is used, the
functions of SM122~SM124 remain the same.

11. Extension free port (port 2)

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L
This bit is set when XMT instruction is used, and is cleared
Port 2 transmission after the transmission is over. You can manually clear this
SM130 R/W √ √ √
enabling flag bit bit to halt the current transmission at Port 2. The
transmission can resume when power flow is on again
This bit is set when RCV instruction is used, and is cleared
Port 2 reception enabling after the transmission is over. You can manually clear this
SM131 R/W √ √ √
flag bit bit to halt the current transmission at Port 2. The
transmission can resume when power flow is on again
Port 2 transmission
SM132 This bit is set after the transmission is over R/W √ √ √
complete flag bit
Port 2 reception complete
SM133 This bit is set after the reception is over R/W √ √ √
flag bit
SM134 Port 2 idle flag bit This bit is set when the port is idle R √ √ √

Note
SM132~SM134 are the flags for the reception, complete and idle states in all communication protocols that are supported by
Port 2 . For example, the Port 2 of IVC1 PLC supports N:N bus, Modbus and Freeport. No matter which protocol is used, the
functions of SM132~SM134 remain the same.

12. Modbus communication

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
Port 1 Modbus
SM135 This bit is set after the communication is over R/W √ √ √ √
communication complete
Port 1 Modbus
SM136 This bit is set upon communication error R/W √ √ √ √
communication error
Port 2 Modbus
SM137 This bit is set after the communication is over R/W √ √ √
communication complete
Port 2 Modbus
SM138 This bit is set upon communication error R/W √ √ √
communication error

13. N:N bus communication

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM140 Station 0 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM141 Station 1 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM142 Station 2 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM143 Station 3 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM144 Station 4 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM145 Station 5 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM146 Station 6 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM147 Station 7 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM148 Station 8 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 331

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM149 Station 9 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM150 Station 10 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM151 Station 11 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM152 Station 12 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM153 Station 13 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM154 Station 14 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM155 Station 15 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM156 Station 16 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM157 Station 17 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM158 Station 18 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM159 Station 19 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM160 Station 20 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM161 Station 21 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM162 Station 22 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM163 Station 23 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM164 Station 24 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM165 Station 25 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM166 Station 26 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM167 Station 27 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM168 Station 28 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM169 Station 29 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM170 Station 30 communication error flag R √ √ √ √
SM171 Station 31 communication error flag R √ √ √ √

14. Enabling flag of integrated analog channel

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Enabling flag of AD Sampling at AD channel 1 is enabled when this bit is
SM172 R/W √ √
channel 1 set to 1
Enabling flag of AD Sampling at AD channel 2 is enabled when this bit is
SM173 R/W √ √
channel 2 set to 1
Voltage/current
SM174 enabling flag of AD 1 for current input and 0 for voltage input R/W √ √
channel 1
Voltage/current
SM175 enabling flag of AD 1 for current input and 0 for voltage input R/W √ √
channel 2
Enabling flag of AD Sampling at AD channel 3 is enabled when this bit is set
SM176 R/W √ √
channel 3 to 1
Voltage/current
SM177 enabling flag of AD 1 for current input and 0 for voltage input R/W √ √
channel 3
Enabling flag of AD Sampling at AD channel 4 is enabled when this bit is set
SM34 R/W √ √
channel 4 to 1
Voltage/current
SM35 enabling flag of AD 1 for current input and 0 for voltage input R/W √ √
channel 4
Enabling flag of AD Sampling at AD channel 5 is enabled when this bit is set
SM36 R/W √ √
channel 5 to 1
Voltage/current
SM37 enabling flag of AD 1 for current input and 0 for voltage input R/W √ √
channel 5
Enabling flag of AD Sampling at AD channel 6 is enabled when this bit is set
SM38 R/W √ √
channel 6 to 1
Voltage/current
SM39 enabling flag of AD 1 for current input and 0 for voltage input R/W √ √
channel 6
SM178 Enabling flag of DA Output at DA channel 0 is enabled when this bit is set to R/W √ √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 332

channel 0 1

15. Operation flag bit

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
This bit is set when the related calculation result is zero.
SM180 Zero flag bit R/W √ √ √ √
You can clear or set this bit manually
This bit is set when the result of the related calculation
SM181 Carry/overflow flag bit R/W √ √ √ √
is a carry. You can clear or set this bit manually
This bit is set when the result of the related calculation
SM182 Borrow flag bit R/W √ √ √ √
is a borrow. You can clear or set this bit manually
SM185 Table comparison flag This bit is set when the whole table is completed R/W √ √ √ √
Data block This bit is set when the data block comparison result is
SM188 R/W √
comparison set 1

16. ASCII code conversion instruction flag

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
0: the most and least significant bytes of every word are stored
ASC instruction
with one ASCII code
SM186 storing mode R/W √ √ √ √
1: the least significant byte of every word is stored with one
flag
ASCII code
Instruction
SM187 execution Set ON after MTR initial circulation R
completion

17. System bus error flag

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
1. Clear when power on correct addressing
Main module
2. Clear when no STOP→RUN error
SM190 bus error flag R √ √ √ √
3. Clear when downloading new programs
bit
4. The bit causes stop of the system
1. This bit is set and the system raises an alarm when a general
General
module bus operation error occurs
SM191 module bus R √ √ √ √
2. This bit is reset automatically when the system error is
error flag bit
removed
1. This bit is set and the system raises an alarm when a special
Special
module bus operation error occurs
SM192 module bus R √ √ √ √
2. This bit is reset automatically when the system error is
error flag bit
removed

18. Real-time clock error flag

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
This bit is set upon real-time clock error
R/W of real-time clock
SM193 This bit is automatically cleared if system R √ √ √ √
error
fault is removed

19. Memory card existing flag

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
Memory card is This bit is set as 1 when memory card
SM197 R √ √
connected or not connected and reset when no memory card
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 333

20. Counting direction of bi-directional counters

Addr. Counter addr. Function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM200 C200 R/W √ √ √ √
SM201 C201 R/W √ √ √ √
SM202 C202 R/W √ √ √ √
SM203 C203 R/W √ √ √ √
SM204 C204 R/W √ √ √ √
SM205 C205 R/W √ √ √ √
SM206 C206 R/W √ √ √ √
SM207 C207 R/W √ √ √ √
SM208 C208 R/W √ √ √ √
SM209 C209 R/W √ √ √ √
SM210 C210 R/W √ √ √ √
SM211 C211 R/W √ √ √ √
SM212 C212 R/W √ √ √ √
SM213 C213 R/W √ √ √ √
SM214 C214 R/W √ √ √ √
SM215 C215 R/W √ √ √ √
SM216 C216 When SM2 _ _ is of high level, the R/W √ √ √ √
corresponding C2_ _ becomes down
SM217 C217 R/W √ √ √ √
counter
SM218 C218 R/W √ √ √ √
When SM2 _ _ is of low level, the
SM219 C219 R/W √ √ √ √
corresponding C2_ _ becomes up counter
SM220 C220 R/W √ √ √ √
SM221 C221 R/W √ √ √ √
SM222 C222 R/W √ √ √ √
SM223 C223 R/W √ √ √ √
SM224 C224 R/W √ √ √ √
SM225 C225 R/W √ √ √ √
SM226 C226 R/W √ √ √ √
SM227 C227 R/W √ √ √ √
SM228 C228 R/W √ √ √ √
SM229 C229 R/W √ √ √ √
SM230 C230 R/W √ √ √ √
SM231 C231 R/W √ √ √ √
SM232 C232 R/W √ √ √ √
SM233 C233 R/W √ √ √ √
SM234 C234 R/W √ √ √ √
SM235 C235 R/W √ √ √ √

21. Counting direction and monitoring of high-speed counter

Type Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM236 C236 R/W √ √ √ √
SM237 C237 R/W √ √ √ √
SM238 C238 R/W √ √ √ √
Single
SM239 C239 R/W √ √ √ √
phase
SM240 C240 The high&low level of SM2 _ _ corresponds R/W √ √ √ √
single
SM241 C241 to the counting down&up of the counter R/W √ √ √ √
point
SM301 C301 respectively R/W √
counting
SM302 C302 R/W √
input
SM242 C242 R/W √ √ √ √
SM243 C243 R/W √ √ √ √
SM244 C244 R/W √ √ √ √
Single SM245 C245 When the single phase bi-directional R/W √ √ √ √
phase bi- SM246 C246 counter and 2-phase counter C2 _ _ is in R/W √ √ √ √
directiona SM247 C247 the down counting mode, the corresponding R/W √ √ √ √
l counting SM303 C303 SM2 _ _ becomes high level; when in up R/W √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 334

Type Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
input SM248 C248 counting mode, the corresponding SM2 _ _ R/W √ √ √ √
SM249 C249 becomes low level R/W √ √ √ √
SM250 C250 R/W √ √ √ √
SM251 C251 R/W √ √ √ √
SM304 C304 R/W √
AB phase SM305 C305 R/W √
counting SM306 C306 R/W √
input SM252 C252 R/W √ √ √ √
SM253 C253 R/W √ √ √ √
SM254 C254 R/W √ √ √ √
SM255 C255 R/W √ √ √ √

22. Enhanced positioning

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Y0 and Y1 are applicable to DVIT. When the function is
Interrupt input function unused, Y0 will correspond to X0 interrupt and Y1 to
SM260 R/W √ √
designation valid X1 interrupt. When this bit is set, each 4bit of SD240
will correspond to input of each output (Y)
Y002 pulse output
SM262 After this bit is set, Y002 pulse will be disabled R/W √ √
stop instruction
Y003 pulse output
SM262 After this bit is set, Y003 pulse will be disabled R/W √
stop instruction
Y004 pulse output
SM264 After this bit is set, Y004 pulse will be disabled R/W √
stop instruction
Y005 pulse output
SM265 After this bit is set, Y005 pulse will be disabled R/W √
stop instruction
Y006 pulse output
SM266 After this bit is set, Y006 pulse will be disabled R/W √
stop instruction
Y007 pulse output
SM267 After this bit is set, Y007 pulse will be disabled R/W √
stop instruction
Y002 pulse output
SM272 Setting at Y002 pulse output R √ √
monitor (busy/ready)
Y003 pulse output
SM272 Setting at Y003 pulse output R √
monitor (busy/ready)
Y004 pulse output
SM274 Setting at Y004 pulse output R √
monitor (busy/ready)
Y005 pulse output
SM275 Setting at Y005 pulse output R √
monitor (busy/ready)
Y006 pulse output
SM276 Setting at Y006 pulse output R √
monitor (busy/ready)
Y007 pulse output
SM277 Setting at Y007 pulse output R √
monitor (busy/ready)
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, CLR signal output function
SM280 Clear function valid valid (Y0) when positioning instruction origin return R/W √ √ √
(ZRN)
Clear signal Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230
SM281 designated element is clear signal; Y10 is clear signal of Y0 when no R/W √ √ √
valid designation
SM282 Origin return direction Y0 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √ √
SM283 Forward rotation limit Y0 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √ √
SM284 Reverse rotation limit Y0 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √ √
Logic reverse rotation
SM285 Y0 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √ √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM286 Y0 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √ √
of zero-point signal
Logic reverse rotation Y0 is applicable to DVIT, not applicable to user
SM287 R/W √ √ √
of interrupt signal interrupt input instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 335

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Positioning instruction
SM288 Y0 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √ √
in drive
User interrupt input
SM289 Y0 is applicable to DVIT R/W √ √
instruction
Applicable to DSZR/ZRN, CLR signal output function
SM290 Clear function valid valid (Y1) when positioning instruction origin return R/W √ √
(ZRN)
Clear signal Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230
SM291 designated element is clear signal; Y11 is clear signal of Y1 when no R/W √ √
valid designation
SM292 Origin return direction Y1 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √
SM293 Forward rotation limit Y1 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √
SM294 Reverse rotation limit Y1 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √
Logic reverse rotation
SM295 Y1 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM296 Y1 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √
of zero-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM297 Y1 is applicable to DVIT R/W √ √
of interrupt signal
Positioning instruction
SM298 Y1 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √
in drive
User interrupt input
SM299 Y1 is applicable to DVIT R/W √
instruction
SM320 Clear function valid Y2 is applicable to DSZR/ZRN R/W √ √
Clear signal Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230
SM321 designated element is clear signal; Y2 is Y12 when no designation (IVC2L R/W √ √
valid is Y3)
SM322 Origin return direction Y2 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √
SM323 Forward rotation limit Y2 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √
SM324 Reverse rotation limit Y2 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √
Logic reverse rotation
SM325 Y2 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM326 Y2 is applicable to DSZR R/W √ √
of zero-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM327 Y2 is applicable to DVIT R/W √
of interrupt signal
Positioning instruction
SM328 Y2 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √ √
in drive
User interrupt input √
SM329 Y2 is applicable to DVIT R/W
instruction
SM330 Clear function valid Y3 is applicable to DSZR/ZRN R/W √
Clear signal Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230 √
SM331 designated element is clear signal; Y2 is Y12 when no designation (IVC2L R/W
valid is Y3)
SM332 Origin return direction Y3 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
SM333 Forward rotation limit Y3 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
SM334 Reverse rotation limit Y3 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
Logic reverse rotation √
SM335 Y3 is applicable to DSZR R/W
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation √
SM336 Y3 is applicable to DSZR R/W
of zero-point signal
Logic reverse rotation √
SM337 Y3 is applicable to DVIT R/W
of interrupt signal
Positioning instruction
SM338 Y3 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W
in drive
User interrupt input √
SM339 Y3 is applicable to DVIT R/W
instruction
Clear signal Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230
SM341 R/W √
designated element is clear signal; Y4 is Y14 when no designation
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 336

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
valid
SM342 Origin return direction Y4 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
SM343 Forward rotation limit Y4 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
SM344 Reverse rotation limit Y4 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
Logic reverse rotation
SM345 Y4 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM346 Y4 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of zero-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM347 Y4 is applicable to DVIT R/W √
of interrupt signal
Positioning instruction
SM348 Y4 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
in drive
SM350 Clear function valid Y5 is applicable to DSZR/ZRN R/W √
Clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD is
SM351 designated element R/W √
clear signal; Y5 is Y15 when no designation
valid
SM352 Origin return direction Y5 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
SM353 Forward rotation limit Y5 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
SM354 Reverse rotation limit Y5 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
Logic reverse rotation
SM355 Y5 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM356 Y5 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of zero-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM357 Y5 is applicable to DVIT R/W
of interrupt signal
Positioning instruction
SM358 Y5 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
in drive
SM360 Clear function valid Y6 is applicable to DSZR/ZRN R/W √
Clear signal
Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230
SM361 designated element R/W √
is clear signal; Y6 is Y16 when no designation
valid
SM362 Origin return direction Y6 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
SM363 Forward rotation limit Y6 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
SM364 Reverse rotation limit Y6 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
Logic reverse rotation
SM365 Y6 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM366 Y6 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of zero-point signal
SM370 Clear function valid Y7 is applicable to DSZR/ZRN R/W √
Clear signal Applicable to DSZR, the corresponding Y(N) in SD230
SM371 designated element is clear signal; Y7 is Y17 when no designation (IVC2L R/W √
valid is Y3)
SM372 Origin return direction Y7 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
SM373 Forward rotation limit Y7 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
SM374 Reverse rotation limit Y7 is applicable to DSZR/DVIT R/W √
Logic reverse rotation
SM375 Y7 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of near-point signal
Logic reverse rotation
SM376 Y7 is applicable to DSZR R/W √
of zero-point signal

23. Signal alarm

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM400 Signal alarm valid Set SM400 after ON, SM401 and SD401 works R/W √
SM401 Signal alarm action Any of S900-S999 acts, set SM401 to ON R/W √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 1 Special auxiliary relay 337

24. Time output instruction

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
SM430 Timer clock output 1 For DUTY instruction R/W √
SM431 Timer clock output 1 For DUTY instruction R/W √
SM432 Timer clock output 1 For DUTY instruction R/W √
SM433 Timer clock output 1 For DUTY instruction R/W √
SM434 Timer clock output 1 For DUTY instruction R/W √

25. CANopen instruction

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
CANopen instruction
SM440 √
finish
CANopen instruction
SM441 √
error
CANopen instruction
SM442 √
is being executed
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 338

Appendix 2 Special data register

 Note
1. All special data registers except SD50~SD55 will be initialized when the PLC changes from STOP to RUN.
2. The reserved SD and SM elements are not listed in the table. The reserved SD elements are by default read only.

1. PLC work state data

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
11 means IVC1, 20 means IVC2L
110 means IVC1A, 112 means IVC1L
SD00 PLC type R √ √ √
111 means EVC-UPRG
28 means IVC2H
SD01 Version For example, 100 means V1.00 R √ √ √ √
For example, 8 means an 8k step
SD02 Capacity of user program R √ √ √ √
program
SD03 System error code Store the code of occured system error R √ √ √ √
SD04 Battery voltage Unit: 0.1V, for example 36 means 3.6V R √ √ √
Configurable only through system
Setting of AC power block. Any setting smaller than 10ms
SD05 R √ √ √ 10~100ms
failure detection delay or bigger than 100ms will be regarded
as 10ms or 100ms respectively
Number of extension I/O
SD07 R √ √ √ √
module
Number of special
SD08 R √ √ √ √
module
Setting the input points for operation control. Decimal (X0 is
SD09 displayed as 0; X10, 8. Maximum:15). Configurable through system R √ √ √ √ 0-15
block
Number of main module High byte: input
SD10 R √ √ √ √
I/O points Low byte: output
Number of extension High byte: input
SD11 R √ √ √ √
module I/O points Low byte: output
Number of main module High byte: input
SD12 R √ √ √
analog I/O points Low byte: output
0-20971 (Unit: 0.1ms, 16 bits) up ring
SD16 High-speed ring counter R/W √ 0-32767
counter

2. Operation error code FIFO area

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD20 Reserved operation error code 0 In the order of arrival, the R √ √ √ √
SD21 Reserved operation error code 1 latest five operation error R √ √ √ √
SD22 Reserved operation error code 2 codes are reserved. SD20 R √ √ √ √
SD23 Reserved operation error code 3 always stores the latest error R √ √ √ √
SD24 Reserved operation error code 4 codes R √ √ √ √

3. FROM/TO error
Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1L IVC1 IVC2H Range
Special modules’ numbering is wrong (starting with 0) when
SD25 R √ √ √ √ Initial value: 255
using FROM/TO instruction
The I/O chips’ numbering is wrong (starting with 0) when
SD26 R √ √ √ √ Initial value: 255
refreshing I/O
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 339

4. Scan time
Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
Current scan
SD30 Current scan time (unit: ms) R √ √ √ √
value
SD31 Min. scan time Min. scan time (uint: ms) R √ √ √ √
SD32 Max. scan time Max. scan time (unit: ms) R √ √ √ √
Default: 0ms. Unit: 1ms. When the constant scan
time is longer than the user monitoring overtime
setting, user program overtime alarm will be
raised. When a scan cycle of user program is
Constant scan longer than the constant scan time, the cycle
SD33 R √ √ √ √ 0~1000ms
time constant scan mode is invalid automatically and
no alarm will be raised.
SD33 is regarded as 1000ms when it is set
bigger than 1000ms (configurable only through
the system block)
Default: 100ms. Unit: 1ms. Any setting smaller
User program than 100 or bigger than 1000 will be regarded as 100~1000
SD34 R √ √ √ √
overtime 100 or 1000 respectively. Configurable only ms
through system block

 Note
1. The error tolerance of SD30, SD31 and SD32 is 1ms.
2. It is recommended to set the user program overtime (SD34) at least 5ms bigger than the constant scan time (SD33).
Otherwise, due to the influence of system operation and user program, the system is apt to report user program overtime error.

5. Input filtering constant setting

Addr. Name Action and function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
0,2,4,8,1 0,2,4,8,16
SD35 Input filtering constant Configurable only through system block R 0-60ms 6,32,64 0-60ms ,32,64
ms ms
0,2,4,8,1 0,2,4,8,16
SD36 Input filtering constant Configurable only through system block R 6,32,64 ,32,64
ms ms

Note
1. IVC2L has only one group of filtering SD35, available input X0~X17.
2. IVC1 and IVC1S have two groups of filtering: SD35, available input X0~X3; SD36, available input X4~X7. Range: 0, 2, 4, 8,
16, 32, 64ms.
3. IVC1 and IVC1S have two groups of filtering: SD35, available input X0~X3; SD36, available input X4~X7. Range: 0~64ms.

6. High-speed pulse output monitoring

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD50 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √ √ √ √
SD51 PLSY accumulated output Y0 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √ √ √ √
SD52 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √ √ √
SD53 PLSY accumulated output Y1 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √ √ √
SD54 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √ √
SD55 PLSY accumulated output Y1, Y0 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √ √
SD56 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y0 R √ √ √
SD57 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y1 R √ √
SD160 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √ √
SD161 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y2 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √ √
SD162 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 340

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range

SD163 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y3 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √
SD164 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √
SD165 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y4 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √
SD166 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √
SD167 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y5 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √
SD168 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (MSB) R/W √
SD169 PLSR/PLSY accumulated output Y6 total pulse number (LSB) R/W √
SD252 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y2 R √ √
SD253 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y3 R √
SD254 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y4 R √
SD255 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y5 R √
SD256 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y6 R √
SD257 Current section of the PLS instruction that outputs Y7 R √

7. Timed interrupt cycle

Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
The interrupt will not occur when the
SD66 Cycle of timed interrupt 0 R/W √ √ √ √ 1~32767ms
value is not within 1~32767
The interrupt will not occur when the
SD67 Cycle of timed interrupt 1 R/W √ √ √ √ 1~32767ms
value is not within 1~32767
The interrupt will not occur when the
SD68 Cycle of timed interrupt 2 R/W √ √ √ √ 1~32767ms
value is not within 1~32767
Note:
An error of ±1ms may occur when the system processes a user timed interrupt. To ensure the normal operation of the interrupt,
it is recommended to set the cycle of timed interrupts to be bigger or equal to 5ms.

8. Positioning instruction
Addr. Name Initial value Function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
The current
value of Y0
output
SD80 R/W √
positioning
instruction
As the current values of Y000 output
(MSB)
0 positioning instruction for data
The current
register
value of Y0
output
SD81 R/W √
positioning
instruction
(LSB)
The current
value of Y1
output
SD82 R/W √
positioning
instruction
As the current values of Y001 output
(MSB)
0 positioning instruction for data
The current
register
value of Y1
output
SD83 R/W √
positioning
instruction
(LSB)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 341

Addr. Name Initial value Function R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L
Base speed of
Base speed when executing
executing
instructions ZRN, PLSV, DRVI and
SD84 instructions 5000 R/W √
DRVA (below 1/10 of the Max.
ZRN, DRVI and
speed)
DRVA
Max. speed of
executing
SD85 instructions R/W √
ZRN, DRVI and
Max. speed when executing
DRVA (MSB)
100000 instructions ZRN, PLSV, DRVI and
Max. speed of
DRVA (10-100000)
executing
SD86 instructions R/W √
ZRN, DRVI and
DRVA (LSB)
ACC/DEC time ACC/DEC time when raising from
of executing the base speed (SD84) to the Max.
SD87 instructions 1000 speed (SD85, SD86) at executing R/W √
ZRN, DRVI and instructions ZRN, DRVI and DRV
DRVA (50ms-5000ms)
Interrupt input
SD240 0 Interrupt input designation R/W √ √
designation

9. Real-time clock
Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD100 Year For real-time clock R √ √ √ √ 2000~2099
SD101 Month For real-time clock R √ √ √ √ 1~12 months
SD102 Day For real-time clock R √ √ √ √ 1~31 days
SD103 Hour For real-time clock R √ √ √ √ 0~23 hours
SD104 Minute For real-time clock R √ √ √ √ 0~59 minutes
SD105 Second For real-time clock R √ √ √ √ 0~59 seconds
0 (Sunday)~6
SD106 Week For real-time clock R √ √ √ √
(Saturday)
Note: You can set these elements only with the TWR instruction or through the upper computer.

10. Reception control and state of free port (Port 0)

Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
b2, b1, b0
000=38,400
001=19,200
010=9,600
SD110.0~SD110.2 port
011=4,800 √ √ √ √
baud rate
100=2,400
101=1,200
110=57,600
Free
111=115,200
port0
0=1 stop bit
SD110 mode SD110.3 stop bit R
1=2 stop bits
state
0=even parity
word SD110.4 parity check
1=odd parity
SD110.5 parity check 0=no check
enabling 1=check
Data bit of every character
SD110.6 character data bit 0=8 bits
1=7 bits
SD110.7 free port receiving 1=start character specified
start character start mode 0=start character
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 342

Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
unspecified
SD110.8 free port receiving 1=end character specified
end character mode 0=end character unspecified
SD110.9 free port word 1: word overtime enabled
overtime enabling 0: word overtime disabled
SD110.10 free port frame 1=frame overtime enabled
overtime enabling 0=frame overtime disabled
SD110.11 Reserved
0: word element valid at low
SD110.12 high/low byte byte
valid 1: word element valid at
high/ low byte
SD110.13~SD110.15 Reserved
SD111 Start character R/W √ √ √ √
SD112 End character R/W √ √ √ √
Default: 0ms (word overtime
SD113 Word overtime setting R/W √ √ √ √ 1~32767ms
omitted)
Default: 0ms (frame
SD114 Frame overtime setting R/W √ √ √ √ 1~32767ms
overtime omitted)
Bit 0: set when receiving
ends
Bit 1: set when specified end
character is received
Bit 2: set when Max.
character number is
received
SD115 Receiving completion message code R √ √ √ √
Bit 3: set upon word
overtime
Bit 4: set upon frame
overtime
Bit 5: set upon parity check
error
Bits 6~15: reserved
SD116 Current received characters R √ √ √ √
Total number of current received
SD117 R √ √ √ √
characters
SD118 Current sent characters R √ √ √

11. Reception control and state of free port (Port 1)

Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
b2, b1, b0
000=38,400
Free
001=19,200
port1
010=9,600
mod SD120.0~SD120.2
SD120 011=4,800 R/W √ √ √ √
e port baud rate
100=2,400
state
101=1,200
word
110=57,600
111=115,200
0=1 stop bit
SD120.3 stop bit
1=2 stop bits
0=even parity
SD120.4 parity check
1=odd parity
SD120.5 parity check 0=disabled
enabling 1=enabled
Data bit of every character
SD120.6 character
0=8 bits
data bit
1=7 bits
SD120.7 free port 1: start character specified
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 343

Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
receiving start 0: start character unspecified
character mode
SD120.8 free port
1: end character specified
receiving end
0: end character unspecified
character mode
SD120.9 free port
1: word overtime enabled
word overtime
0: word overtime disabled
enabling
SD120.10 free port
1: frame overtime enabled
frame overtime
0: frame overtime disabled
enabling
SD120.11 Reserved
0: word element valid at low
SD120.12 high/low byte
byte valid 1: word element valid at high/
low byte
SD120.13~SD120.15 Reserved
SD121 Start character R/W √ √ √ √
SD122 End character R/W √ √ √ √
Default: 0ms (word overtime
SD123 Word overtime setting R/W √ √ √ √ 0~32767ms
omitted)
Default: 0ms (frame overtime
SD124 Frame overtime setting R/W √ √ √ √ 0~32767ms
omitted)
Bit 0: set when receiving
ends
Bit 1: set when specified end
character is received
Bit 2: set when Max.
Receiving completion character number is received
SD125 R √ √ √ √
message code Bit 3: set upon word overtime
Bit 4: set upon frame
overtime
Bit 5: set upon parity check
error
Bits 6~15: reserved
SD126 Current received characters R √ √ √ √
Total number of current
SD127 R √ √ √ √
received characters
SD128 Current sent characters R √ √ √ √

12. Modbus/N:N bus setting

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
MOD (1~32) ,
SD130 Local station No. (Port 0) R/W √ √ √ √
EMR (0~31)
Max. timeout time of Port 0 (post-sending
SD131 R/W √ √ √
and pre-receiving) / N:N bus extra delay
SD132 Port 0 retry times R/W √ √ √ √
SD133 N:N bus network update mode (Port 0) R/W √ √ √ √ 1~13
Error code of Modbus master
SD134 R
Code(COM0)
MOD (1~32),
SD135 Local station No. (Port 1 ) R/W √ √ √ √
EMR (0~31)
Max. timeout time of Port 1 (post-sending √
SD136 R/W √ √ √
and pre-receiving) /N:N bus extra delay
SD137 Port 1 retry times R/W √ √ √ √ 0~100
SD138 N:N bus network update mode (Port 1 ) R/W √ √ √ √ 1~13
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 344

13. Reception control and state of extension free port (Port 2)

Addr. Name Register content R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
b2, b1, b0
000=38,400
001=19,200
010=9,600
SD140.0~SD140.2
011=4,800
port baud rate
100=2,400
101=1,200
110=57,600
111=115,200
0=1 stop bit
SD140.3 stop bit
1=2 stop bits
0=even parity
SD140.4 parity check
1=odd parity
Free
SD140.5 parity check 0=disabled
port1
enabling 1=enabled
SD140 mode R/W √ √
Data bit of every character
state SD140.6 character
0=8 bits
word data bit
1=7 bits
SD140.7 free port
1: start character specified
receiving start
0: start character unspecified
character mode
SD140.8 free port
1: end character specified
receiving end
0: end character unspecified
character mode
SD140.9 free port
1: word overtime enabled
word overtime
0: word overtime disabled
enabling
SD140.10 free port
1: frame overtime enabled
frame overtime
0: frame overtime disabled
enabling
SD140.11 Reserved
0: word element valid at low
SD140.12 high/low byte
SD140 R/W √ √
byte valid 1: word element valid at high/
low byte
SD140.13~SD140.15 Reserved
SD141 Start character R/W √ √
SD142 End character R/W √ √
Default: 0ms (word overtime
SD143 Word overtime setting R/W √ √ 0~32767ms
omitted)
Default: 0ms (frame overtime
SD144 Frame overtime setting R/W √ √ 0~32767ms
omitted)
Bit 0: set when receiving
ends
Bit 1: set when specified end
character is received
Bit 2: set when Max.
Receiving completion character number is received
SD145 R √ √
message code Bit 3: set upon word overtime
Bit 4: set upon frame
overtime
Bit 5: set upon parity check
error
Bits 6~15: reserved
SD146 Current received characters R √ √
Total number of current
SD147 R √ √
received characters
SD148 Current sent characters R √ √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 345

14. Modbus setting (Port 2)

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD150 Local station No. (Port 2) R/W √ √ MOD (1~32)
Max. timeout time of Port 2 (post-sending
SD151 R/W √ √
and pre-receiving)
SD152 Port 2 retry times R/W √ √ 0~100
SD153 N:N bus COM2 update mode R √ √ 1~18 (default 3)
SD154 N:N bus COM0 polling cycle R √ √
SD155 N:N bus COM1 polling mode R √ √
SD156 N:N bus COM2 polling cycle R √ √
SD159 Error code of Modbus master (Port 2 ) R √ √

15. Setting and reading of integrated analog signal channel

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD172 Average sample value of A/D CH1 R √ √ -10000~+10000
SD173 Sampling times of A/D CH1 R/W √ √ 1~1000
SD174 Average sample value of A/D CH2 R √ √ -10000~+10000
SD175 Sampling times of A/D CH2 R/W √ √ 1~1000
SD176 Average sample value of A/D CH3 R √ √ -10000~+10000
SD177 Sampling times of A/D CH3 R/W √ √ 1~1000
SD185 Average sample value of A/D CH4 R √ √ -10000~+10000
SD186 Sampling times of A/D CH4 R/W √ √ 1~1000
SD187 Average sample value of A/D CH5 R √ √ -10000~+10000
SD188 Sampling times of A/D CH5 R/W √ √ 1~1000
SD189 Average sample value of A/D CH6 R √ √ -10000~+10000
SD190 Sampling times of A/D CH6 R/W √ √ 1~1000
SD178 Output value of D/A CH1 R/W √ √ -10000~+10000
Note: The default value of SD173, SD175, SD177, SD186, SD188 and SD190 is 8.

16. Usage of DHSP and DHST instructions

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD180 MSB of DHSP table comparison output data R/W √ √ √
SD181 LSB of DHSP table comparison output data R/W √ √ √
SD182 MSB of DHST or DHSP table comparison data R/W √ √ √ √
SD183 LSB of DHST or DHSP table comparison data R/W √ √ √ √
SD184 Record No. of the table being executed R/W √ √ √ √

17. Error flag

Addr. Name R/W IVC2L IVC1 IVC2H IVC1L Range
SD191 No. of the module where bus error occured R √ √ √ √
No. of the special module where bus error
SD192 R √ √ √ √
occured
SD193 MODBUS detailed error (COM0) R √ √ √ √

SD194 MODBUS detailed error (COM1) R √ √ √

SD195 MODBUS detailed error (COM2) R √

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 346

18. Enhanced positioning instruction

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L
SD200 Current data register of Y000 output locating
0 R/W √ √ √
SD201 instruction

SD202 Max. speed when Y0 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √ √ √
SD203 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y0 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD204 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √ √ √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base
speed (SD204) rising to the Max. speed
SD205 1000 R/W √ √ √
(SD202, SD203) when Y0 executes ZRN,
DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD206 Y0 clear signal element designation R/W √ √ √
SD207 Y0 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √ √ √
SD208
Y0 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √ √ √
SD209
SD220 Y0 clear signal element designation √
DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for the Max. speed
reducing to the base speed when Y0 executes
SD260 1000 R/W √
ZRN, DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT
instructions

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD210 Current data register of Y001 output locating
0 R/W √ √
SD211 instruction

SD212 Max. speed when Y1 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √ √
SD213 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y1 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD214 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √ √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base
speed (SD204) rising to the Max. speed
SD215 1000 R/W √ √
(SD202, SD203) when Y1 executes ZRN,
DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD216 Y1 clear signal element designation R/W √ √
SD217 Y1 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √ √
SD218
Y1 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √ √
SD219
SD230 Y1 clear signal element designation 0 √
DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for the Max. speed
reducing to the base speed when Y1 executes
SD261 1000 R/W √
ZRN, DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT
instructions

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD320 Current data register of Y002 output locating
0 R/W √ √
SD321 instruction

SD322 Max. speed when Y2 executes ZRN, PLSV, 100000 R/W √ √

Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 347

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions

SD323
(10~100000)
Base speed when Y2 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD324 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √ √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base
speed (SD204) rising to the Max. speed
SD325 1000 R/W √ √
(SD202, SD203) when Y2 executes ZRN,
DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD326 Y2 clear signal element designation R/W √ √
SD327 Y2 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √ √
SD328
Y2 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √ √
SD329
DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for the Max. speed
reducing to the base speed when Y2 executes
SD262 1000 R/W √
ZRN, DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT
instructions

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD330 Current data register of Y003 output locating
0 R/W √
SD331 instruction

SD332 Max. speed when Y3 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √
SD333 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y3 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD334 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base
speed (SD204) rising to the Max. speed
SD335 1000 R/W √
(SD202, SD203) when Y3 executes ZRN,
DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD336 Y3 clear signal element designation R/W √
SD337 Y3 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √
SD338
Y3 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √
SD339
DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for the Max. speed
reducing to the base speed when Y3 executes
SD263 1000 R/W √
ZRN, DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT
instructions

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD340 Current data register of Y004 output locating
0 R/W √
SD341 instruction

SD342 Max. speed when Y4 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √
SD343 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y4 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD344 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base
speed (SD204) rising to the Max. speed
SD345 1000 R/W √
(SD202, SD203) when Y4 executes ZRN,
DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD346 Y4 clear signal element designation R/W √
SD347 Y4 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 348

SD348
Y4 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √
SD349

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD350 Current data register of Y005 output locating
0 R/W √
SD351 instruction

SD352 Max. speed when Y5 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √
SD353 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y5 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD354 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base
speed (SD204) rising to the Max. speed
SD355 1000 R/W √
(SD202, SD203) when Y5 executes ZRN,
DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD356 Y5 clear signal element designation R/W √
SD357 Y5 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √
SD358
Y5 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √
SD359

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD360 Current data register of Y006 output locating
0 R/W √
SD361 instruction

SD362 Max. speed when Y6 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √
SD363 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y6 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD364 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base speed
(SD204) rising to the Max. speed (SD202,
SD365 1000 R/W √
SD203) when Y6 executes ZRN, DRVI, DRVA,
DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD366 Y6 clear signal element designation R/W √
SD367 Y6 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √
SD368
Y6 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √
SD369

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L

SD370 Current data register of Y007 output locating
0 R/W √
SD371 instruction

SD372 Max. speed when Y7 executes ZRN, PLSV,

DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 100000 R/W √
SD373 (10~100000)
Base speed when Y7 executes ZRN, PLSV,
SD374 DRVI, DRVA, DSZR and DVIT instructions 5000 R/W √
(below 1/10 of Max. speed)
ACC/DEC time (50ms~5000ms) for base speed
(SD204) rising to the Max. speed (SD202,
SD375 1000 R/W √
SD203) when Y7 executes ZRN, DRVI, DRVA,
DSZR and DVIT instructions
SD376 Y7 clear signal element designation R/W √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 2 Special data register 349

SD377 Y7 crawling speed, applicable to DSZR 1000 R/W √

SD378
Y7 origin return speed, applicable to DSZR 50000 R/W √
SD379

19. Signal alarm instruction

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L
SD401 Store the Min. No. in S900-S999 0 R/W √

20. Timing output instruction

Addr. Name Initial value R/W IVC1 IVC2L IVC2H IVC1L
SD430 Scan times of timing clock output 1 R/W √
SD431 Scan times of timing clock output 2 R/W √
SD432 Scan times of timing clock output 3 R/W √
SD433 Scan times of timing clock output 4 √
SD434 Scan times of timing clock output 5 √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 3 Reserved elements 350

Appendix 3 Reserved elements

Description IVC1/IVC2L IVC1S

Buffer area for transmission of inverter instructions D7940 D7969 D3940 D3969
Buffer area for reception of inverter instructions D7970 D7999 － －
N:N bus network shared area D7700 D7763 － －
N:N enhanced mode (mode14-18) network shared area D7500 D7755 － －
N:N network shared area M1400 M1911 － －
EROMWR instruction operation area D6000 D6999 － －
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 4 Modbus communication error code 351

Appendix 4 Modbus communication error code

Error codes Description

0x01 Illegal function code
0x02 Illegal register address
0x03 Data number error
0x10 Communication overtime (longer than the preset maximum communication time)
0x11 Data frame reception error
0x12 Parameter error (mode or master/slave parameter setting error)
0x13 Error occurs because the local station number coincides with the station number set by the instruction
0x14 Element address overflow (the data received or sent is too much for the storing area)
0x15 Instruction execution failure
The received slave address does not match with the requested slave address, the specific error code element stores the
0x16
received slave address
The received function code does not match with the requested function code, the specific error code element stores the
0x17
received function code
Information frame error: only refer to the starting element address does not match, the specific error code element stores
0x18
the received starting element address
The received data length does not conform to the protocol or the number of elements exceeds the maximum limit of the
0x19
specified function code
0x20 CRC/LRC check error
0x21 Reserved
0x22 Starting element address setting error for instruction parameter
0x23 Unavailable function code or illegal function code set by instruction parameter
0x24 Number of elements setting error for instruction parameter
0x25 Reserved
0x26 Parameter unchangeable during operation (only applicable to EV3000)
0x27 Parameters under password protection
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 5 Inverter instruction error code 352

Appendix 5 Inverter instruction error code

Error code Description

0x1 Illegal function code
0x2 Illegal register address
0x3 Data error (data outside the range)
0x4 Slave operation failure (including the error due to invalid data, although the data is in the range)
0x5 Valid instruction. Processing. Mainly used to save data to EEPROM
0x6 Slave busy. Please try again later. Mainly used to save data to EEPROM
0x18 Information fram error, including information length error and parity check error
0x20 Parameter unchangeable
0x21 Parameter unchangeable during operation (only applicable to EV3100)
0x22 Parameters under password protection
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 6 System error code 353

Appendix 6 System error code

Error code Description Error type Description IVC1 IVC2L

0 No error √ √
1~9 Reserved √ √
System hardware error
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
10 SRAM error System error To remove this fault, power off the PLC and √
check the hardware
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
11 FLASH error System error To remove this fault, power off the PLC and √
check the hardware
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
12 Communication port error System error To remove this fault, power off the PLC and √
check the hardware
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
13 Real-time clock error System error To remove this fault, power off the PLC and √
check the hardware
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
14 I2C error System error To remove this fault, power off the PLC and √
check the hardware
External setting error (20~23)
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
20 Serious local I/O error System error To remove this fault, power off the PLC and √
check the hardware
ERR indicator blinks. This alarm is cleared
21 Serious extension I/O error System error √
automatically upon the removal of the fault
ERR indicator blinks. This alarm is cleared
22 Serious special module error System error √
automatically upon the removal of the fault
Update error of real-time clock
ERR indicator blinks. This alarm is cleared
23 (incorrect time is read during system System error √
automatically upon the removal of the fault
update)
ERR indicator blinks. This alarm is cleared
24 EEPROM write/read operation error System error √
automatically upon the removal of the fault
ERR indicator blinks. This alarm is cleared
25 Local analog signal error System error √
automatically upon the removal of the fault
System special module configuration ERR indicator blinks. This alarm is cleared
26 System error √
error automatically upon the removal of the fault
Storage error (40~45)
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
40 User program file error System error To remove this fault, download new program or √ √
format the disk
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
41 System configuration file error System error To remove this fault, download new system √ √
configuration files or format the disk
User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on.
42 Data block file error System error To remove this fault, download new data block √ √
file or format the disk
User program keeps running ERR indicator
43 Battery backup data lost System error blinks. To remove this fault, clear the register, or √ √
format the disk, or reset
User program keeps running. ERR indicator
44 Forced-table lost System error blinks. To remove this fault, clear the register, or √ √
force, or format the disk, or reset
User program keeps running ERR indicator is off.
45 User information file error System error To remove this fault, download new program and √ √
data block files, or format the disk
46~59 Reserved
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 6 System error code 354

Error code Description Error type Description IVC1 IVC2L

Instruction execution error (60~75)
60 User program compilation error Execution error User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on. √ √
61 User program operation overtime error Execution error User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on. √ √
Illegal user program instruction execution
62 Execution error User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on. √ √
error
63 Illegal element type of instruciton operand Execution error User program stops, and ERR indicator turns on. √ √
64 Illegal instruction operand value Execution error √ √
65 Outside instruction element range Execution error √ √
User program keeps running, ERR indicator
66 Subprogram stack overflow Execution error √ √
keeps off. The corresponding error code will be
67 User interrupt request queue overflow Execution error √ √
prompted in SD20
68 Illegal label jump or subprogram call Execution error √ √
69 Divided by 0 error Execution error √ √
When stack size, or stack elements are smaller
70 Definition error of stack operand Execution error than zero, or stack element number exceeds the √ √
limit of stack size
71 Reserved √ √
Undefined user subprogram or interrupt
72 Execution error √ √
subprogram
73 Special module address invalid Execution error √
74 Special module access error Execution error √
75 I/O error when using REF instruction Execution error √ √
Cannot set real time clock time using
76 Execution error √ √
TWR
Parameter 3 of PLSR instruction
77 Execution error √ √
inappropriate under constant scan
BFM unit of accessed special module
78 Execution error √
exceeds range
79 ABS data read timeout Execution error √
80 ABS data read and check error Execution error √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 355

Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series)

1. Modbus communication protocol overview

IVC series small PLC has two communication ports: Port 0 (also the programming port), which supports Modbus slave station,
and Port 1 , which supports Modbus master station and slave station (configurable through ConstrolStar). Their features
include:
1. Using RS485 or RS232 port, with RS232 3-line system as the physical interface.
2. Supportive of RTU mode and ASCII mode, but not of the change of the ASCII ending character.
3. Being the Modbus slave station, the addresses range from 1 to 31.
4. Supportive of broadcast mode. The broadcast is effective for write and sub-function codes of diagnosis.
5. Suppoting baud rates including 38,400 bps, 19,200 bps, 9,600 bps, 4,800 bps, 2,400 bps and 1,200 bps. (Default: 19200, 8
bits, 1 stop bit, even check)
6.Supportive of data field 2×252 bytes (ASII mode) or 252 bytes (RTU mode).

2. Supported Modbus function code and element addressing

The slave station supports function codes 01, 02, 03, 05, 06, 08, 15, 16 (decimal).
Pay attention to the following points during the reading:
Relationship between read-write element function code and the element
Function code Name of function code Modicon data address Type of operational element Remark
01 read coil status 0Note 1:xxxx Y, X, M, SM, S, T, C Bit read
02 read discrete input status 1Note 2:xxxx X Bit read
03 read register status 4Note 3:xxxxNote 4 D, SD, Z, T, C Word read
05 write single coil status 0:xxxx Y, M, SM, S, T, C Bit write
06 write single register status 4:xxxx D, SD, Z, T, C Word write
15 write multiple coils status 0:xxxx Y, M, SM, S, T, C Bit write
16 write multiple registers status 4:xxxx D, SD, Z, T, C Word write
Note:
1. 0 means “coil”.
2. 1 means “discrete input”.
3. 4 means “register”.
4. xxxx means range “1~9999”. Each type has an independent logic address range of 1 to 9999 (protocol address starts from 0).
5. 0, 1 and 4 do not have the physical meaning and are not involved in actual addressing.
6. Users shall not write X element with function codes 05 and 15; otherwise, the system will not feed back the error information if the written
operand and data are correct, but the system will not perform any operation on the write instruction.

Relationship between PLC element and Modbus communication protocol address

Protocol Supported function
Element Type Physical element Notes
address code
Y0 to Y377 output status, element code:
Y bit 0000~0255 01, 05, 15
(octal code) 256 points in total Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17
input status, it supports two
X0 to X377 1200~01455 01, 05, 15
X bit kinds of address, the element
(octal code) 256 points in total 0000~0255 02
code is same as above
M bit M0 to M1999 2000~3999 01, 05, 15
SM bit SM0 to SM255 4400~4655 01, 05, 15
S bit S0~S991 6000~6991 01, 05, 15
T bit T0~T255 8000~8255 01, 05, 15 status of T element
C bit C0~C255 9200~9455 01, 05, 15 status of C element
D word D0~D7999 0000~7999 03, 06, 16
SD word SD0~SD255 8000~8255 03, 06, 16
Z word Z0~Z15 8500~8515 03, 06, 16
T word T0~T255 9000~9255 03, 06, 16 current value of T element
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 356

Protocol Supported function

Element Type Physical element Notes
address code
current value of C element
C word C0~C199 9500~9699 03, 06, 16
(WORD)
current value of C element
C double word C200~C255 9700~9811 03, 16
(WORD)
current value of C element
C double word C256~C306 10000-10101 03, 16
(WORD)
R word R0~R32767 13000-45767 03, 06, 16
Note:
The protocol address is the address used on data transfer and corresponds with the logic address of Modicon data. The protocol address
starts from 0 and the logic address of Modicon data begins with 1, that is, protocol address+1=logic address of Modicon data. For example, if
M0 protocol address is 2000, and its corresponding logic address of Modicon data will be 0:2001. In practice, the read and write of M0 is
completed through the protocol address, for example: read M0 element frame (sent from the master):

01 01 07 D0 00 01 FD 47
CRC check code
Number of elements to read
Starting address. The decimal value of 07D0 is 2000
Function code
Station No.

Abnormal response description:

Abnormal code Definition
0x01 Illegal function code
0x02 Illegal register address
0x03 Illegal data

Notes:
1. Elements X and Y use octal system. There are 256 points in total from X0 to X377, 256 points from Y0 to Y377, with the
combinations of Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17 and Y20~Y27. etc.
2. Two addressing methods are available for element X. One is the protocol address of 1200-1455 with corresponding function
codes of 01, 05 and 15; the other is the protocol address of 0-255 with function code 02.
3. Processing of double-word element: C element is a counter. It has status and current value. C200~C255 are 32-bit elements,
but each C element in the range will get two protocol addresses during the protocol address compiling. For example: The
protocol address of C200 is 9700~9701. When reading the elements though Modbus, both the starting protocol address and
the number of the read elements shall be even number.
4. For most SM, SD elements, the real value cannot be written through Modbus, but PLC salve station will still return “OK“ to
indicate the completion of write operation, which is allowable.
5. In addition, the Modbus communication protocol of IVC2L supports the read and write of double word element, LONG INT
variable and floating point number. In the PLC of IVC2L, 32-bit data are stored with high bits at high address. For example, a
32-bit data is stored in two D elements (D3 and D4), with 16 high bits in D3 and 16 low bits in D4, as shown in the following
figure: (Refer to the description for the specific example)
High
D3
High Low 16-bit
16-bit 16-bit Low
D4
16-bit
32-bit data

3. Modbus function code description

3.1 Read coil status (0x01)

Up to 256 bit-element can be read in IVC series PLC.
1. Request frame
Starting address Number of elements Check code
Address Function code (01H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 357

2. Response frame
If the read address is not the times of 8, the remaining bits will be filled with 0 (starting with the high bits).

Function code Number of bytes read Read data Read data Check code
Address ......
(01H) (n) No.1 No.n (CRC or LRC

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

3.2 Read discrete input status (0x02)

In the PLC of GCM series, it specially refers to X element. The function code only supports the read function of X element with
the maximum read number of 256.
1. Request frame
Starting address Number of elements Check code
Address Function code (02H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
If the read address is not the times of 8, the remaining bits will be filled with 0 (starting with the high bits).

Function code Number of bytes read Read data Read data Check code
Address ...
(02H) (n) No.1 No.n (CRC or LRC

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

3.3 Read holding registers (0x03)

It refers to reading the value of data (word) register at the slave station, with the maximum number of registers of 125 read each
time. It does not support broadcast.
1. Request frame
Starting address Number of elements Check code
Address Function Code (03H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame

Read data No.1 Read data No.n Check code

Address Function code (03H) Number of bytes read (n) ...
(CRC or LRC)
H L H L

3.4 Force (write) single coil (0x05)

Force (Write) single coil writes bit element value to the slave station and supports broadcast, i.e. writing the same element to all
slave stations. It supports 1 bit element at most.
1. Request frame
Starting address Written element value Check code
Address Function code (05H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)

Note: The written value of the element is 0xFF00 (ON, 1) or 0x0000 (OFF, 0).
2. Response frame
Response frame is the repeat of request frame.
Starting address Written element value Check code
Address Function code (05H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 358

3.5 Preset (write) single register (0x06)

Preset (Write) single register writes word element value to the slave station and supports broadcast, i.e. writing the same
element to all slave stations. It supports 1 bit element at most.
1. Request frame
Starting address Written element value Check code
Address Function code (06H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Response frame is the repeat of request frame.
Starting address Written element value Check code
Address Function code (06H)
H L H L (CRC or LRC)

3.6 Return diagnostic check (0x08)

Diagnostic register and communication error information can be obtained through returning diagnostic check.
Diagnostic code Description
0x00 Return Request frame
0x01 Restart Comm Option
0x04 Listen Only Mode of Slave Station
0x0a Clear Ctrs and Diagnostic Reg
0x0b Return Bus Message Count
0x0c Return Bus CRC Error Count
0x0d Return Bus Exception Error Cnt
0x0e Return Slave Message Count
0x0f Return Slave No Response Cnt
0x12 Return Bus Char. Overrun Cnt
The frame description of sub-function code is as follows.
Return request frame (0x00):
1. Request frame
Function word Any character Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x00H) H L (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Return request frame intact.
Function word Any character Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x00H) H L (CRC or LRC)

Restart communication option (0x01):

After receiving the frame, PLC will exit from Listen Only mode (Broadcast frame is supported).
1. Request frame
The normal Data field is 0x00 00 or 0xff 00.
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
0x00H 0x01H H L (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
0x00H 0x01H H L (CRC or LRC)

Listen only mode of slave station (0x04):

Slave station enters Listen Only mode. None of the instructions will be executed or responded. The slave station can only
recognize the restart communication option instruction and enters the online mode after receiving the instruction (Broadcast
frame is supported).
1. Request frame
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 359

Function word Data field Check code

Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x04H) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
No return
Clear counter and diagnostic register (0x0A):
Clear all counters (Broadcast frame is supported).
1. Request frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0AH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function Function word Data field Check code
Address
code (0x08H) (0x00H) (0x0AH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

Return bus message count (0x0B):

Record the total number of the messages to all master stations from the slave stations since the last starting, clearing and
power-on of counter, which excludes the message of CRC error.
1. Request frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0BH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0BH) H L (CRC or LRC)

CRC error count (0x0C):

Record the number of CRC errors received by slave station since the last starting, clearing and power-on of counter.
1. Request frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0CH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0CH) H L (CRC or LRC)

Return slave exception error count (0x0D):

Record the number of the exception error that detected by slave station since the last starting, clearing and power-on of counter,
which includes the error detected in the broadcast message.
1. Request frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0DH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0DH) H L (CRC or LRC)

Return slave message count (0x0E)

Record the number of the addressing messages received by the slave station since the last starting, clearing and power-on of
counter.
1. Request frame
Address Function code (0x08H) Function word Data field Check code
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 360

(0x00H) (0x0EH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0EH) H L (CRC or LRC)

Return slave no response count (0x0F)

Record the number of messages that have not returned to the slave station since the last starting, clearing and power-on of
counter.
1. Request frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0FH) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function word Data field Check code
Address Function code (0x08H)
(0x00H) (0x0FH) H L (CRC or LRC)

Return bus character overrun count (0x12)

Record the number of the messages that cannot be addressed due to the character overrun since the last starting, clearing and
power-on of counter.
1. Request frame
Function Function word Data field Check code
Address
code (0x08H) (0x00H) (0x12H) 0x00H 0x00H (CRC or LRC)

2. Response frame
Function Function word Data field Check code
Address
code (0x08H) (0x00H) (0x12H) H L (CRC or LRC)

3.7 Force (write) multiple coils (0x0F)

At most 1968 bit elements (0x07b0) can be written and the number is changeable according to the defined range.
1. Request frame
Starting Number of
Function Number Written Written
address elements Check code
Address code of bytes(n) element ... element
(CRC or LRC)
(0FH) H L H L value No.1 value No.N

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

2. Response frame
Function Starting address Number of elements Check code
Address
code (0FH) H L H L (CRC or LRC)

3.8 Preset (write) multiple registers (0x10 Hex)

At most 120 registers (0x78) can be written
1. Request frame
Written Written
Function Starting Number of Number of Check code
element element
Address code address elements bytes ... (CRC or LRC)
value No.1 value No.N
(0x10H) (n)
H L H L H L H L

2. Response frame
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 361

Starting
Number of elements Check code
Address Function code (0x10H) address
(CRC or LRC)
H L H L

3.9 Faulty response frame (0x80+function code)

Response Frame:
Check code
Address Function code Error code (see above)
(CRC or LRC)

Function code refers to the function code of the captured request frame + 0x80

3.10 Points to note

1. Refer to the address classification of elements, the elements read each time shall be of the same type. For example,
elements X and Y cannot be read in one frame.
2. The address and data range of the element shall be within the range specified by the protocol. For example:
For Y element, the protocol address range is 0000~0255 (Y0-Y377):
5.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1 If the read starting address is 1 and 256 elements are read, address error will be returned (error code 02),
because there are only 255 Y elements that start with 1.
5.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.2 If the read starting address is 0 and 257 elements are read, data error will be returned (error code 03),
because the actual defined number of Y elements is only 256.
5.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.3 If the read starting address is 0 and 256 elements are read, the status of 256 elements will be returned.
In other words, the read number of the elements must be within the actually defined range. It is true for read/write of bit/word
elements.

4. Example of Modbus communication control

Rather than transmitting any message actively, the Modbus slave station only decides whether to respond to the message from
the master station based on the specific situation after receiving the message for the local station. The slave station only
supports Modbus function codes 01, 02, 03, 05, 06, 08, 15 and 16. The rest will be responded with illegal function code (except
broadcast frame).
Read and write of element:
Except function code 08, the other supported function codes can read and write element. In principle, one frame can read up to
2000 bit elements 125 word elements, and write 1968 bit elements and 120 word elements at most. However, the real protocol
addresses are separate and discontinuous for different elements, therefore, when reading or writing an element, the elements
read at one time can only be the same type and the maximum number of the read or written elements is related to the actually
defined number of the elements. For example, when reading Y element (Y0-Y377), the protocol address ranges from 0 to 255,
the logic address of the corresponding Modicon data is 1-256 and the maximum number of elements can be read is 256. See
the following examples:
Note: The address of the slave station is 01, the last two bytes are CRC check code and the second byte is function code.
1. XMT from master station: 01 01 00 00 01 00 3D 9A
01 address; 01 function code; 00 00 starting address; 01 00 number of read elements; 3D 9A check
Slave station response: return correct response
2. XMT from master station: 01 01 00 00 01 01 FC 5A
The master station reads 01 01 elements (257), which is over the defined range of Y elements.
Slave station response: 01 81 03 00 51
The response of the slave station is illegal data, because 257>256, 256 is the allowed maximum number of Y elements.
3. XMT from master station: 01 01 00 64 00 A0 7D AD
00 64(decimal 100) is the starting address for master station to read, 00 A0 (decimal 160) is the number of the elements.
Slave station response: 01 81 02 C1 91
The response of the slave station is illegal address, because there are only 156 Y elements which are defined to start from 100
and 160 Y elements have exceeded the number.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 362

4. XMT from master station: 01 01 01 2C 00 0A 7C 38

The master station reads 10 bit elements of 01 2C (decimal 300).
Slave station response: 01 81 02 C1 91
The response of the slave station is illegal address, because protocol address 300 has no definition of bit element.
5. XMT from master station: 01 04 00 02 00 0A D1 CD
The mater station sends the frame of function code 04.
Slave station response: 01 84 01 82 C0
The response of the slave station is illegal function code.
6. XMT from master station: 01 02 00 00 00 0A F8 0D
Master station reads input element (X element), 10 (X0-X9) from the starting address 00 00.
Slave station response: 01 02 02 00 00 B9 B8
The slave station responds with correct information, which has 02 bytes, and the content is 00 00.
7. XMT from master station: 01 01 04 B0 00 0A BC DA
Master station reads 10 bit elements(X0-X9) starting with 04 B0 (decimal 1200).
Slave station response: 01 01 02 00 00 B9 FC
The slave station responds with 02 bytes, and the content is 00 00.

 Note
1. The slave station address is 01, the last two bytes are CRC check codes and the second byte is function code.
2. X element does not support write.

Processing of double-word elements

1. The current value of C element is word element or double word element. The values from C200 to C255 are double word
elements, which are read and written through the function codes (03, 16) of read/write register. The address of every two
registers corresponds to one C double word element, and the registers can only be read or written in pair. For example, read
the RTU fame of three C double word elements (C200-C202):

01 03 25 E4 00 06 8E F3
CRC check code
Number of elements to read: 6
Starting address: 9700
Function code
Station No.

In the returned data, 9700 and 9701 are the two addresses representing the content of C200. 9700 is the high 16 bits and 9701
is the low 16 bits.
2. When reading the double word element, if the starting address for the reading is not an even number, the error code of
illegal address will be returned. For example:
XMT from master station: 01 03 25 E5 00 04 5E F2
The starting address for the reading sent by the master is 25 E5 (four word elements, decimal 9701).
Slave station response: 01 83 02 C0 F1
Slave station response: illegal data address
3. If the number of the read elements is not an even number, the error code of illegal data will be returned. For example:
XMT from master station: 01 03 25 E4 00 05 CE F2
25 E4: The starting address for master station reading, 5 word elements
Slave response: 01 83 03 01 31
Slave station returns illegal data.
Processing of LONG INT data:
Based on the storage method of PLC in GCM, one LONG INT data can be saved in two D elements. For example: Store one
LONG INT data in D3 and D4, D3 is used for storing high 16 bits, D4 is used for storing low 16 bits in INVT PLC. If master
station reads LONG INT data through Modbus, the 32-bit data shall be regrouped based on the LONG INT storage principle of
INVT PLC after reading the data.
Storage principle of FLOAT is the same as the storage principle of LONG INT.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 7 Modbus communication protocol (IVC1, IVC2L series) 363

5. Description of broadcast
The slave station supports broadcast but not all the function codes. The slave station supports function codes 01, 02, 03, 05, 06,
08, 15 and 16 (decimal). Wherein, 01, 02 and 03 can read element but do not support broadcast, no response will be gotten
after sending out the broadcast; 05, 06, 15 and 16 can write element and support broadcast, no response will be gotten after
sending out the broadcast, but slave station will process the received data; 08 is the diagnostic function code, it does not
support the broadcast except its sub-function codes 0x01, 0x04 and 0x0A (Hexadecimal).
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 8 ASCII code table 364

Appendix 8 ASCII code table

High 3-bit
ASCII HEX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SPACE 0 @ P 、 p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
Low 4-bit
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L l I
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 365

Appendix 9 Instruction index

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Zero, carry,
ABS Read current value instruction 8 √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
ACOS Floating point number ACOS instruction 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
ADD Add integer instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
ANB Power flow block and instruction 1 √ √ √ √
AND NO contact power-flow and 1 √ √ √ √
AND< Compare integer AND< instruction 5 √ √ √ √
AND<= Compare integer AND<= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
AND<> Compare integer AND<> instruction 5 √ √ √ √
AND= Compare integer AND= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
AND> Compare integer AND> instruction 5 √ √ √ √
AND>= Compare integer AND>= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Compare double integer AND<
ANDD< 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer AND<=
ANDD<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer AND<>
ANDD<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer AND=
ANDD= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer AND>
ANDD> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer AND>=
ANDD>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
A Compare floating point number AND<
ANDR< 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number AND<=
ANDR<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number AND<>
ANDR<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number AND=
ANDR= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number AND>
ANDR> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number AND>=
ANDR>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
ANI NC contact power-flow and 1 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
ANR Signal alarm reset instruction 1 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
ANS Signal alarm set instruction 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
ASC ASCII code conversion instruction 19 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
ASIN Floating point number ASIN instruction 7 √
borrow
ASCII code-hexadecimal number Zero, carry,
ATI 7 √ √ √ √
conversion instruction borrow
Floating point number ATAN instruction Zero, carry,
ATAN 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry, √
ALT Alternate output instruction 11 √ √
borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 366

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Zero, carry, √
ABSD Absolute drum control instruction 9 √
borrow
BAND Word bit contact AND instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BANI Word bit contact ANI instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
BCD Word to 16-bit BCD instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
BIN 16-bit BCD to word instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
BITS Counting ON bit in word instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
BKADD Add batch data operation 9 √
borrow
BKCMP=,>,<,
B Compare batch data 9 √
<>,<=,>=
Zero, carry,
BKSUB Subtract batch data operation 9 √
borrow
BLD Word bit contact LD instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BLDI Word bit contact LDI instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BMOV Move data block transmission instruction 7 √ √ √ √
BON Judging ON bit in word instruction 7 √
BOR Word bit contact OR instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BORI Word bit contact ORI instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BOUT Word bit coil output instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BRST Word bit coil reset instruction 5 √ √ √ √
BSET Word bit coil set instruction 5 √ √ √ √
B
Zero, carry,
BTOW Data combination instruction for byte unit 7 √
borrow
Depend on
CALL Calling a subprogram the √ √ √ √
program
CCITT CCITT check instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Counterclockwise circular trace Zero, carry,
CCW 12 √
interpolation borrow
CFEND Conditional end from user main program 1 √ √ √ √
Conditional return from user interrupt
CIRET 1 √ √ √ √
subprogram
CJ Conditional jump 3 √ √ √ √
C
Zero, carry,
COS Floating point number COS instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
CRC16 CRC16 check instruction 7 √ √ √ √
CSRET Conditional return from user subprogram 1 √ √ √ √
16-bit counter loop cycle counting
CTR 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
CTU 16-bit counter counting up instruction 5 √ √ √ √
CMP Compare and set integer instruction 7 √* √
Zero, carry, √
CW Clockwise circular trace interpolation 12
borrow
Zero, carry,
DADD Add double integer instruction 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DBAND Dead band control 9 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DBCD Double word to 32-bit BCD instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
D
DBIN 32-bit BCD to double word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Counting ON bit in double word
DBITS 6 √ √ √ √
instruction
DCMP< Compare date< instruction 7 √ √ √
DCMP<= Compare date<= instruction 7 √ √ √
DCMP<> Compare date<> instruction 7 √ √ √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 367

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
DCMP= Compare date= instruction 7 √ √ √
DCMP> Compare date> instruction 7 √ √ √
DCMP>= Compare date>= instruction 7 √ √ √
DCNT 32-bit counting instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
DDEC Decrement double integer instruction 4 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DDIV Divide double integer instruction 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DEC Decrement integer instruction 3 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DEG Floating point number rad->angle 7 √
borrow
DECO Decode instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Double integer to floating point number Zero, carry,
DFLT 7 √ √ √
instruction borrow
DFMOV Fill data block double word instruction 9 √ √ √ √
Read double word from special module
DFROM 10 √ √
buffer register instruction
32-bit Gray code to double word Zero, carry,
DGBIN 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Double word to 32-bit Gray code Zero, carry,
DGRY 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
High-speed counting interrupt trigger
DHSCI 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting compare reset
DHSCR 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting compare set
DHSCS 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting table compare
DHSP 10 √ √ √ √
pulse output instruction
High-speed output absolute position
DHSPI 10 √
compare interrupt trigger instruction
High-speed counting table compare
DHST 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting zone compare
DHSZ 13 √ √ √ √
instruction
DI Disable interrupt instruction 1 √ √ √ √
Increment double integer instruction Zero, carry,
DINC 4 √ √ √ √
borrow
Floating point number to double integer Zero, carry,
DINT 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Zero, carry,
DIS 4bit separation instruction for 16bit data 7 √
borrow
DIV Divide integer instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Move double word data transmission
DMOV 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Zero, carry,
DMUL Multiply double integer instruction 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DNEG Negative double integer instruction 7 √ √ √ √
D borrow
DRCL 32-bit carry circular shift left instruction 9 Carry √ √ √ √
DRCR 32-bit carry circular shift right instruction 9 Carry √ √ √ √
DROL 32-bit circular shift left instruction 9 Carry √ √ √ √
DROR 32-bit circular shift right instruction 9 Carry √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
DRVA Absolute position control instruction 11 √* √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DRVI Relative position control instruction 11 √* √ √ √
borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 368

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
DSHL 32-bit shift left instruction 9 √ √ √ √
DSHR 32-bit shift right instruction 9 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
DSQT Square root double integer instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DSUB Subtract double integer instruction 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DSUM Sum double integer instruction 9 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DTI Double integer to integer instruction 6 √ √ √ √
borrow
Write double word to special module
DTO 10 √ √
buffer register instruction
DUTY Generate timing pulse instruction 7 √
Zero, carry,
DVABS Double integer absolute value instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
DWAND AND double word instruction 10 √ √ √ √
DWINV NOT double word instruction 10 √ √ √ √
DWOR OR double word instruction 10 √ √ √ √
DWXOR Exclusive-OR double word instruction 10 √ √ √ √
DXCH Exchange double word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Double word absolute drum control Zero, carry, √
DABSD 11 √
instruction borrow
Regress to origin with DOG search Zero, carry, √
DSZR 9 √ √
instruction borrow
Zero, carry, √
DVIT Interrupt locating 11 √ √
borrow
ED Power flow falling edge detection 1 √ √ √ √
EI Enable interrupt instruction 1 √ √ √ √
ENCO Encode instruction 5 √ √ √ √
EROMWR EEPROM write instruction 7 √ √ √
EU Power flow rising edge detection 2 √ √ √ √
Inverter jogging forward rotation
IVDFWD 6 √* √ √ √
instruction
Inverter jogging reverse rotation
IVDREV 6 √* √ √ √
instruction
IVFRQ Inverter set frequency instruction 8 √* √ √ √
E
IVFWD Inverter forward rotation instruction 6 √* √ √
Inverter read single register value
IVRD 10 √* √ √ √
instruction
IVRDST Inverter read status instruction 10 √* √ √ √
IVREV Inverter reverse rotation instruction 6 √* √ √ √
IVSTOP Inverter stop instruction 8 √* √ √ √
Inverter write single register value
IVWRT 10 √* √ √ √
instruction
Zero, carry,
EXP Floating point number EXP instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
FIFO First-in-first-out instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Integer to floating point number Zero, carry,
FLT 6 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
F FMOV Fill data block instruction 7 √ √ √ √
FOR Cycle instruction 3 √ √ √ √
Read word from special module buffer
FROM 9 √ √
register instruction
Zero, carry,
GBIN 16-bit Gray code to word instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
G
Zero, carry,
GRY Word to 16-bit Gray code instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 369

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
HACKLE Hackle wave signal output instruction 12 √ √ √ √
HCNT High-speed counter drive instruction 7 √ √ √ √
H HOUR Timing list instruction 8 √ √ √ √
Time (hour, minute and second) to
HTOS 5 √
second instruction
Zero, carry,
INC Increment integer instruction 3 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
INITR Initialize extension register 5 √
borrow
Floating point number to integer Zero, carry,
INT 6 √ √ √ √
I instruction borrow
INV Power flow block inverse 1 √ √ √ √
Hexadecimal number-ASCII code Zero, carry,
ITA 7 √ √ √ √
conversion instruction borrow
Zero, carry,
ITD Integer to double integer instruction 6 √ √ √ √
borrow
LBL Jump label definition 3 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
LCNV Engineering conversion instruction 9 √ √
borrow
LD NO contact power-flow loading 1 √ √ √ √
LD< Compare integer LD< instruction 5 √ √ √ √
LD<= Compare integer LD<= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
LD<> Compare integer LD<> instruction 5 √ √ √ √
LD= Compare integer LD= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
LD> Compare integer LD= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
LD>= Compare integer LD>= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
LDD< Compare double integer LD< instruction 7 √ √ √ √
LDD<= Compare double integer LD<= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
LDD<> Compare double integer LD<> instruction 7 √ √ √ √
LDD= Compare double integer LD= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
LDD> Compare double integer LD> instruction 7 √ √ √ √
LDD>= Compare double integer LD>= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
LDI NC contact power-flow loading 1 √ √ √ √
Compare floating point number LD<
LDR< 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number LD<=
LDR<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
L
Compare floating point number LD<>
LDR<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number LD=
LDR= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number LD>
LDR> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number LD>=
LDR>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
LIFO Last-in-first-out instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
LIMIT Upper/lower limit control 9 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
LIN Linear trace interpolation 12 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
LN Floating point number LN instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
LOADR Read extension file register 5 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
LOG Floating point number LOG instruction 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
LOGR Log in extension register 11 √
borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 370

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
LRC LRC check instruction 7 √ √ √ √
MC Main control 3 √ √ √ √
MCR Main control remove 1 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
MEAN Mean instruction 7 √
borrow
Modbus Master station communication instruction 8 √ √ √ √
MOV Move word data transmission instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
M MOVLINK Synchronous control instruction 17 √
borrow
MPP Output power-flow stack pop off 1 √ √ √ √
MPS Output power-flow input stack 1 √ √ √ √
MRD Read output power-flow stack top value 1 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
MUL Multiply integer instruction 8 √ √ √ √
borrow
MODRW MODBUS read/write instruction 14 √* √ √ √
Zero, carry,
NEG Negative integer instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
N
NEXT Return from cycle 1 √ √ √ √
NOP No operation 1 √ √ √ √
OR NO contact power-flow or 1 √ √ √ √
OR< Compare integer OR< instruction 5 √ √ √ √
OR<= Compare integer OR<= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
OR<> Compare integer OR<> instruction 5 √ √ √ √
OR= Compare integer OR= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
OR> Compare integer OR> instruction 5 √ √ √ √
OR>= Compare integer OR>= instruction 5 √ √ √ √
ORB Power flow or instruction 1 √ √ √ √
ORD< Compare double integer OR< instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Compare double integer OR<=
ORD<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer OR<>
ORD<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
ORD= Compare double integer OR= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
ORD> Compare double integer OR> instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Compare double integer OR>=
O ORD>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
ORI NC contact power-flow or 1 √ √ √ √
Compare floating point number OR<
ORR< 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number OR<=
ORR<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number OR<>
ORR<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number OR=
ORR= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number OR>
ORR> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare floating point number OR>=
ORR>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
OUT Coil output instruction 1 √ √ √ √
OUT Sxx SFC state jump 3 √ √ √ √
PID PID instruction 9 √ √ √ √
PLS Pulse output instruction of envelope 7 √ √ √ √
Count pulse with ACC/DEC output
PLSR 10 √ √ √ √
P instruction
Zero, carry,
PLSV Variable speed pulse output instruction 8 √ √ √ √
borrow
PLSY High-speed pulse output instruction 9 √ √ √ √
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 371

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Floating point number exponentiation Zero, carry,
POWER 10 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
PUSH Push instruction 7 √ √ √ √
PWM Pulse output instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Count pulse with base frequency and Zero, carry, √
PLSB 12 √
ACC/DEC output instruction borrow
Zero, carry, √
RAD Floating point number angle->rad 7
borrow
Zero, carry,
RADD Add floating point number instruction 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
RAMP Ramp wave signal output instruction 12 √ √ √ √
RCL 16-bit carry circular shift left instruction 7 Carry √ √ √ √
RCR 16-bit carry circular shift right instruction 7 Carry √ √ √ √
RCV Free port receiving instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
RDIV Divide floating point number instruction 10 √ √ √
borrow
REF Instant refresh I/O instruction 5 √ √ √ √
REFF Set input filtering constant instruction 3 √ √ √ √
RET SFC program end 1 √ √ √ √
R Floating point engineering conversion Zero, carry,
RLCNV 12 √ √
instruction borrow
Move floating point number data
RMOV 7 √ √ √ √
transmission
Zero, carry,
RMUL Multiply floating point number instruction 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
RND Generate random number instruction 3 Zero √
Negative floating point number Zero, carry,
RNEG 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
ROL 16-bit circular shift left instruction 7 Carry √ √ √ √
ROR 16-bit circular shift right instruction 7 Carry √ √ √ √
Square root floating point number Zero, carry,
RSQT 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
RST Coil reset instruction 1 √ √ √ √
RST Sxx SFC state reset 3 √ √ √ √
Substract floating point number Zero, carry,
RSUB 10 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Zero, carry,
RSUM Sum floating point number instruction 9 √ √ √ √
R borrow
Floating point number absolute value Zero, carry,
RVABS 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Compare and set floating point number √
RCMP 9 √*
instruction
Zero, carry, √
SAVER Write extension file register 7
borrow
Zero, carry, √
SCL Locate coordinate 7
borrow
Zero, carry,
SEG Word to 7-segment code instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
SER Search data 9 √
borrow
S
SET Coil set instruction 1 √ √ √ √
SET Sxx SFC state transfer 3 √ √ √ √
SFTL Shift left byte instruction 9 √ √ √ √
SFTR Shift right byte instruction 9 √ √ √ √
SHL 16-bit shift left instruction 7 √ √ √ √
SHR 16-bit shift right instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
SIN Floating point number SIN instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 372

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
SPD Pulse detection instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
SQT Square root integer instructions 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
STL SFC state load instruction 3 √ √ √ √
Second to time (hour, minute and
STOH 5 √
second) instruction
STOP User program stop 1 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
STRADD Add string 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRINSTR Search string 9 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRLEFT Read string from the left 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRLEN Detect string length 5 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRMIDR Read any strings 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRMIDW Replace any strings 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRMOV Move string 5 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRRIGHT Read string from the right 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
SUB Subtract integer instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
SUM Sum integer instruction 8 √ √ √ √
borrow
SWAP Swap bytes 3 √ √ √ √
TADD Add clock instruction 7 Zero, carry √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
TAN Floating point number TAN instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
TCMP< Compare time< instruction 7 √ √ √ √
TCMP<= Compare time<= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
TCMP<> Compare time<> instruction 7 √ √ √ √
TCMP= Compare time= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
TCMP> Compare time> instruction 7 √ √ √ √
TCMP>= Compare time>= instruction 7 √ √ √ √
TKY EEPROM write instruction 7 √
T
TMON Monostable timing instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Write word to special module buffer
TO 9 √ √
register instruction
TOF Off-delay timing instruction 5 √ √ √ √
TON On-delay timing instruction 5 √ √ √ √
TONR On-delay remember timing instruction 5 √ √ √ √
TRD Read real-time clock instruction 3 √ √ √ √
TRIANGLE Triangle wave signal output instruction 12 √ √ √ √
TSUB Subtract clock instruction 7 Zero, borrow √ √ √ √
TWR Write real-time clock instruction 3 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
U UNI 4bit combination instruction for 16bit data 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
VABS Integer absolute value instruction 5 √ √ √ √
borrow
V
Read analog potentiometer value
VRRD 5 √ √
instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 9 Instruction index 373

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
WAND AND word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
WDT User program watchdog reset 1 √ √ √ √
WINV NOT word instruction 5 √ √ √ √
WOR OR word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
WSFL Shift left word instruction 9 √ √ √ √
W borrow
Zero, carry,
WSFR Shift right word instruction 9 √ √ √ √
borrow
Zero, carry,
WTOB Data separation instruction for byte unit 7 √
borrow
WXOR Exclusive-OR word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
XCH Exchange word 5 √ √ √ √
X
XMT Free port sending instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Zero, carry,
ZONE Zone control 9 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
Z ZRN Regress to origin instruction 11 √ √ √
borrow
ZRST Batch bit reset instruction 5 √ √ √ √
ZSET Set batch bit instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Note: * only applies to IVC2L.
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 374

Appendix 10 Classified instruction index

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
NO contact power-flow
LD 1 √ √ √ √
loading
NC contact power-flow
LDI 1 √ √ √ √
loading
NO contact power-flow
AND 1 √ √ √ √
and
NC contact power-flow
ANI 1 √ √ √ √
and
NO contact power-flow
OR 1 √ √ √ √
or
NC contact power-flow
ORI 1 √ √ √ √
or
OUT Coil output instruction 1 √ √ √ √
SET Coil set instruction 1 √ √ √ √
RST Coil reset instruction 1 √ √ √ √
Power flow block and
ANB 1 √ √ √ √
instruction
Power flow or
ORB 1 √ √ √ √
instruction
Power flow block
INV 1 √ √ √ √
inverse
NOP No operation 1 √ √ √ √
Output power-flow input
MPS 1 √ √ √ √
stack
Basic
Read output power-flow
instruction MRD 1 √ √ √ √
stack top value
Output power-flow stack
MPP 1 √ √ √ √
pop off
MC Main control 3 √ √ √ √
MCR Main control remove 1 √ √ √ √
Power flow rising edge
EU 2 √ √ √ √
detection
Power flow falling edge
ED 2 √ √ √ √
detection
On-delay timing
TON 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Off-delay timing
TOF 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Monostable timing
TMON 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
On-delay remember
TONR 5 √ √ √ √
timing instruction
16-bit counter counting
CTU 5 √ √ √ √
up instruction
16-bit counter loop
CTR cycle counting 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
32-bit counting
DCNT 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
LBL Jump label definition 3 √ √ √ √
Program
CJ Conditional jump 3 √ √ √ √
control
Depend on
instruction CALL Calling a subprogram √ √ √ √
the program
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 375

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Conditional return from
CSRET 1 √ √ √ √
user subprogram
Conditional end from
CFEND 1 √ √ √ √
user main program
Conditional return from
CIRET user interrupt 1 √ √ √ √
subprogram
FOR Cycle instruction 3 √ √ √ √
NEXT Return from cycle 1 √ √ √ √
User program watchdog
WDT 1 √ √ √ √
reset
STOP User program stop 1 √ √ √ √
Enable interrupt
EI 1 √ √ √ √
instruction
Disable interrupt
DI 1 √ √ √ √
instruction
SFC state load
STL 3 √ √ √ √
instruction
SFC SET Sxx SFC state transfer 3 √ √ √ √
instruction OUT Sxx SFC state jump 3 √ √ √ √
RST Sxx SFC state reset 3 √ √ √ √
RET SFC program end 1 √ √ √ √
Move word data
MOV 5 √ √ √ √
transmission instruction
Move double word data
DMOV 7 √ √ √ √
transmission instruction
Data
Move floating point
transmission
RMOV number data 7 √ √ √
instruction
transmission
Move data block
BMOV 7 √ √ √ √
transmission instruction
SWAP Swap bytes 3 √ √ √ √
XCH Exchange word 5 √ √ √ √
Exchange double word
DXCH 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Fill data block
FMOV 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Fill data block double
DFMOV 9 √ √ √ √
word instruction
Data flow Shift right word Zero, carry,
WSFR 9 √ √ √ √
instruction instruction borrow
Shift left word Zero, carry,
WSFL 9 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
PUSH Push instruction 7 √ √ √ √
First-in-first-out
FIFO 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Last-in-first-out
LIFO 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Zero, carry,
ADD Add integer instruction 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
Add double integer Zero, carry,
DADD 10 √ √ √ √
Integer/ instruction borrow
double integer Subtract integer Zero, carry,
SUB 7 √ √ √ √
math instruction borrow
instruction Subtract double integer Zero, carry,
DSUB 10 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Increment integer Zero, carry,
INC 3 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 376

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Increment double Zero, carry,
DINC 4 √ √ √ √
integer instruction borrow
Decrement integer Zero, carry,
DEC 3 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Decrement double Zero, carry,
DDEC 4 √ √ √ √
integer instruction borrow
Multiply integer Zero, carry,
MUL 8 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Multiply double integer Zero, carry,
DMUL 10 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Divide integer
DIV 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Divide double integer Zero, carry,
DDIV 10 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Integer absolute value Zero, carry,
VABS 5 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Double integer absolute Zero, carry,
DVABS 7 √ √ √ √
value instruction borrow
Negative integer Zero, carry,
NEG 5 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Negative double integer Zero, carry,
DNEG 7 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Square root integer Zero, carry,
SQT 5 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Square root double Zero, carry,
DSQT 7 √ √ √ √
integer instruction borrow
Zero, carry,
SUM Sum integer instruction 8 √ √ √ √
borrow
Sum double integer Zero, carry,
DSUM 9 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Add floating point Zero, carry,
RADD 10 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Substract floating point Zero, carry,
RSUB 10 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Multiply floating point Zero, carry,
RMUL 10 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Divide floating point Zero, carry,
RDIV 10 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Floating point number
Zero, carry,
RVABS absolute value 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
instruction
Negative floating point Zero, carry,
RNEG 7 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Floating point
Square root floating Zero, carry,
number math RSQT 7 √ √ √ √
point number instruction borrow
instruction
Floating point number Zero, carry,
SIN 7 √ √ √ √
SIN instruction borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
COS 7 √ √ √ √
COS instruction borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
TAN 7 √ √ √ √
TAN instruction borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
LN 7 √ √ √ √
LN instruction borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
EXP 7 √ √ √ √
EXP instruction borrow
Floating point number
Zero, carry,
POWER exponentiation 10 √ √ √ √
borrow
instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 377

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Sum floating point Zero, carry,
RSUM 9 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
ASIN 7 √
ASIN instruction borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
ACOS 7 √
ACOS instruction borrow
Floating point
Floating point number Zero, carry,
math ATAN 7 √
ATAN instruction borrow
instruction
Floating point number Zero, carry,
RAD 7 √
angle->rad borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
DEG 7 √
rad->angle borrow
Floating point number Zero, carry,
LOG 7 √
LOG instruction borrow
WAND AND word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
AND double word
DWAND 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
WOR OR word instruction 7 √ √ √ √
OR double word
Word/ DWOR 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
double word
Exclusive-OR word
logic WXOR 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
instruction
Exclusive-OR double
DWXOR 10 √ √ √ √
word instruction
WINV NOT word instruction 5 √ √ √ √
NOT double word
DWINV 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
16-bit circular shift right
ROR 7 Carry √ √ √ √
instruction
32-bit circular shift right
DROR 9 Carry √ √ √ √
instruction
16-bit circular shift left
ROL 7 Carry √ √ √ √
instruction
32-bit circular shift left
DROL 9 Carry √ √ √ √
instruction
16-bit carry circular shift
RCR 7 Carry √ √ √ √
right instruction
32-bit carry circular shift
DRCR 9 Carry √ √ √ √
right instruction
Shift/ 16-bit carry circular shift
RCL 7 Carry √ √ √ √
rotate left instruction
instruction 32-bit carry circular shift
DRCL 9 Carry √ √ √ √
left instruction
16-bit shift right
SHR 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
32-bit shift right
DSHR 9 √ √ √ √
instruction
16-bit shift left
SHL 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
32-bit shift left
DSHL 9 √ √ √ √
instruction
SFTL Shift left byte instruction 9 √ √ √ √
Shift right byte
SFTR 9 √ √ √ √
instruction
DECO Decode instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Enhanced bit
ENCO Encode instruction 5 √ √ √ √
logic
Counting ON bit in word
instruction BITS 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 378

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Counting ON bit in
DBITS 6 √ √ √ √
double word instruction
Batch bit reset
ZRST 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
ZSET Set batch bit instruction 5 √ √ √ √
Judging ON bit in word
BON 7 √
instruction
High-speed counter
HCNT 7 √ √ √ √
drive instruction
High-speed counting
DHSCS 10 √ √ √ √
compare set instruction
High-speed counting
DHSCR compare reset 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting
DHSCI interrupt trigger 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting
DHSZ zone compare 13 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed counting
DHST table compare 10 √ √ √ √
High- instruction
speed I/O High-speed counting
instruction DHSP table compare pulse 10 √ √ √ √
output instruction
Pulse detection
SPD 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
High-speed pulse
PLSY 9 √ √ √ √
output instruction
Count pulse with
PLSR ACC/DEC output 10 √ √ √ √
instruction
Count pulse with base
frequency and Zero, carry,
PLSB 12 √ √
ACC/DEC output borrow
instruction
PWM Pulse output instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Pulse output instruction
PLS 7 √ √ √ √
of envelope
PID PID instruction 9 √ √ √ √
Ramp wave signal
RAMP 12 √ √ √ √
output instruction
Triangle wave signal
TRIANGLE 12 √ √ √ √
output instruction
Control Hackle wave signal
HACKLE 12 √ √ √ √
calculation output instruction
instruction Absolute drum control Zero, carry,
ABSD 9 √ √
instruction borrow
Double word absolute Zero, carry,
DABSD 11 √ √
drum control instruction borrow
Alternate output Zero, carry,
ALT 3 √ √ √
instruction borrow
Read word from special
FROM module buffer register 9 √ √
External
instruction
equipment
Read double word from
instruction
DFROM special module buffer 10 √ √
register instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 379

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Write word to special
TO module buffer register 9 √ √
instruction
Write double word to
DTO special module buffer 10 √ √
register instruction
Read analog
VRRD potentiometer value 5 √ √
instruction
Set input filtering
REFF 3 √ √ √ √
constant instruction
Instant refresh I/O
REF 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
EEPROM write
EROMWR 7 √ √ √
instruction
PR Print instruction 5 √* √
Numeric key input
TKY 7 √
instruction
Read current value Zero, carry,
ABS 8 √ √ √
instruction borrow
Regress to origin Zero, carry,
ZRN 11 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Variable speed pulse Zero, carry,
PLSV 8 √ √ √ √
output instruction borrow
Relative position control Zero, carry,
DRVI 11 √* √ √ √
instruction borrow
Absolute position Zero, carry,
DRVA 11 √* √ √ √
control instruction borrow
Regress to origin with Zero, carry,
Locating DSZR 9 √ √ √
DOG search instruction borrow
instruction
Zero, carry,
DVIT Interrupt locating 11 √ √ √
borrow
Linear trace Zero, carry,
LIN 12 √
interpolation borrow
Clockwise circular trace Zero, carry,
CW 12 √
interpolation borrow
Counterclockwise
Zero, carry,
CCW circular trace 12 √
borrow
interpolation
Synchronous control Zero, carry,
MOVLINK 17 √
instruction borrow
Read real-time clock
TRD 3 √ √ √ √
instruction
Write real-time clock
TWR 3 √ √ √ √
instruction
TADD Add clock instruction 7 Zero, carry √ √ √ √
Subtract clock
Real-time TSUB 7 Zero, borrow √ √ √ √
instruction
clock
HOUR Timing list instruction 8 √ √ √ √
instruction
Time (hour, minute and
HTOS second) to second 5 √
instruction
Second to time (hour,
STOH minute and second) 5 √
instruction
Compare integer LD=
Compare LD= 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
contact
Compare double integer
instruction LDD= 7 √ √ √ √
LD= instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 380

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Compare floating point
LDR= 7 √ √ √ √
number LD= instruction
Compare integer LD>
LD> 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
LDD> 7 √ √ √ √
LD> instruction
Compare floating point
LDR> 7 √ √ √ √
number LD> instruction
Compare integer LD>=
LD>= 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
LDD>= 7 √ √ √ √
LD>= instruction
Compare integer LD<
LD< 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
LDD< 7 √ √ √ √
LD< instruction
Compare floating point
LDR< 7 √ √ √ √
number LD< instruction
Compare integer LD<=
LD<= 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
LDD<= 7 √ √ √ √
LD<= instruction
Compare floating point
LDR<= number LD<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer LD<>
LD<> 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
LDD<> 7 √ √ √ √
LD<> instruction
Compare floating point
LDR<> number LD<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer AND=
AND= 5 √ √ √ √
Compare instruction
contact Compare double integer
ANDD= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction AND= instruction
Compare floating point
ANDR= number AND= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer AND>
AND> 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ANDD> 7 √ √ √ √
AND> instruction
Compare floating point
ANDR> number AND> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer
AND>= 5 √ √ √ √
AND>= instruction
Compare double integer
ANDD>= 7 √ √ √ √
AND>= instruction
Compare floating point
ANDR>= number AND>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer AND<
AND< 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ANDD< 7 √ √ √ √
AND< instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 381

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Compare floating point
ANDR< number AND< 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer
AND<= 5 √ √ √ √
AND<= instruction
Compare double integer
ANDD<= 7 √ √ √ √
AND<= instruction
Compare floating point
ANDR<= number AND<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer
AND<> 5 √ √ √ √
AND<> instruction
Compare double integer
ANDD<> 7 √ √ √ √
AND<> instruction
Compare floating point
ANDR<> number AND<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer OR=
OR= 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ORD= 7 √ √ √ √
OR= instruction
Compare floating point
ORR= 7 √ √ √ √
number OR= instruction
Compare integer OR>
OR> 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ORD> 7 √ √ √ √
OR> instruction
Compare floating point
ORR> 7 √ √ √ √
number OR> instruction
Compare integer OR>=
OR>= 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ORD>= 7 √ √ √ √
OR>= instruction
Compare
Compare floating point
contact
ORR>= number OR>= 7 √ √ √
instruction
instruction
Compare integer OR<
OR< 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ORD< 7 √ √ √ √
OR< instruction
Compare floating point
ORR< 7 √ √ √ √
number OR< instruction
Compare integer OR<=
OR<= 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ORD<= 7 √ √ √ √
OR<= instruction
Compare floating point
ORR<= number OR<= 7 √ √ √
instruction
Compare integer OR<>
OR<> 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare double integer
ORD<> 7 √ √ √ √
OR<> instruction
Compare floating point
ORR<> number OR<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare and set
CMP 7 √* √
integer instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 382

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Compare and set
LCMP double integer 9 √* √
instruction
Compare and set
RCMP floating point number 9 √* √
instruction
Integer to double integer Zero, carry,
ITD 6 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Double integer to Zero, carry,
DTI 6 √ √ √ √
integer instruction borrow
Integer to floating point Zero, carry,
FLT 6 √ √ √ √
number instruction borrow
Double integer to
Zero, carry,
DFLT floating point number 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
instruction
Floating point number to Zero, carry,
INT 6 √ √ √ √
integer instruction borrow
Floating point number to
Zero, carry,
DINT double integer 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
instruction
Word to 16-bit BCD Zero, carry,
BCD 5 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Double word to 32-bit Zero, carry,
DBCD 7 √ √ √ √
BCD instruction borrow
16-bit BCD to word Zero, carry,
BIN 5 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
32-bit BCD to double Zero, carry,
DBIN 7 √ √ √ √
word instruction borrow
Data converting Word to 16-bit Gray Zero, carry,
GRY 5 √ √ √ √
instruction code instruction borrow
Double word to 32-bit Zero, carry,
DGRY 7 √ √ √ √
Gray code instruction borrow
16-bit Gray code to Zero, carry,
GBIN 5 √ √ √ √
word instruction borrow
32-bit Gray code to Zero, carry,
DGBIN 7 √ √ √ √
double word instruction borrow
Word to 7-segment Zero, carry,
SEG 5 √ √ √ √
code instruction borrow
ASCII code conversion Zero, carry,
ASC 19 √ √ √ √
instruction borrow
Hexadecimal
Zero, carry,
ITA number-ASCII code 7 √ √ √ √
borrow
conversion instruction
ASCII
code-hexadecimal Zero, carry,
ATI 7 √ √ √ √
number conversion borrow
instruction
Engineering conversion Zero, carry,
LCNV 9 √ √
instruction borrow
Floating point
Zero, carry,
RLCNV engineering conversion 12 √ √
borrow
instruction
Word contact Word bit contact LD
BLD 5 √ √ √ √
instruction instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 383

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Word bit contact LDI
BLDI 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit contact AND
BAND 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit contact ANI
BANI 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit contact OR
BOR 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit contact ORI
BORI 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit coil set
BSET 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit coil reset
BRST 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Word bit coil output
BOUT 5 √ √ √ √
instruction
Master station
Modbus communication 8 √ √ √ √
instruction
Free port sending
XMT 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Free port receiving
RCV 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Inverter forward rotation
IVFWD 6 √* √ √ √
instruction
Inverter reverse rotation
IVREV 6 √* √ √ √
instruction
Inverter jogging forward
IVDFWD 6 √* √ √ √
rotation instruction
Communicatio Inverter jogging reverse
IVDREV 6 √* √ √ √
n instruction rotation instruction
IVSTOP Inverter stop instruction 8 √* √ √ √
Inverter set frequency
IVFRQ 8 √* √ √ √
instruction
Inverter write single
IVWRT register value 10 √* √ √ √
instruction
Inverter read status
IVRDST 10 √* √ √ √
instruction
Inverter read single
IVRD register value 10 √* √ √ √
instruction
MODBUS read/write
MODRW 14 √* √ √ √
instruction
CCITT CCITT check instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Data check CRC16 check
CRC16 7 √ √ √ √
instruction instruction
LRC LRC check instruction 7 √ √ √ √
Compare date=
DCMP= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare date>
DCMP> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare date Compare date<
DCMP< 7 √ √ √ √
instruction instruction
Compare date>=
DCMP>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare date<=
DCMP<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 384

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Compare date<>
DCMP<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare time=
TCMP= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare time>
TCMP> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare time<
TCMP< 7 √ √ √ √
Compare time instruction
instruction Compare time>=
TCMP>= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare time<=
TCMP<= 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Compare time<>
TCMP<> 7 √ √ √ √
instruction
Zero, carry,
MEAN Mean instruction 7 √
borrow
Data separation Zero, carry,
WTOB 7 √
instruction for byte unit borrow
Data combination Zero, carry,
BTOW 7 √
instruction for byte unit borrow
Data
4bit combination Zero, carry,
processing UNI 7 √
instruction for 16bit data borrow
instruction
4bit separation Zero, carry,
DIS 7 √
instruction for 16bit data borrow
Signal alarm set Zero, carry,
ANS 7 √
instruction borrow
Signal alarm reset Zero, carry,
ANR 1 √
instruction borrow
Zero, carry,
BKADD Add batch data operation 9 √
borrow
Data block
Subtract batch data Zero, carry,
processing BKSUB 9 √
operation borrow
instruction
BKCMP=,>,<, Zero, carry,
Compare batch data 9 √
<>,<=,>= borrow
Zero, carry,
LIMIT Upper/lower limit control 9 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
DBAND Dead band control 9 √
borrow
Data table
Zero, carry,
processing ZONE Zone control 9 √
borrow
instruction
Zero, carry,
SCL Locate coordinate 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
SER Search data 9 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRADD Add string 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRLEN Detect string length 5 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRRIGHT Read string from the right 7 √
borrow
String
Zero, carry,
processing STRLEFT Read string from the left 7 √
borrow
instruction
Zero, carry,
STRMIDR Read any strings 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRMIDW Replace any strings 7 √
borrow
Zero, carry,
STRINSTR Search string 9 √
borrow
Programming manual of IVC series small PLC Appendix 10 Classified instruction index 385

Program
Instruction Instruction function Influenced flag bit IVC2L IVC1 IVC1L IVC2H
steps
Zero, carry,
STRMOV Move string 5 √
borrow
Read extension file Zero, carry,
LOADR 5 √
register borrow
Write extension file Zero, carry,
SAVER 7 √
register borrow
Extension file
Initialize extension Zero, carry,
register INITR 5 √
register borrow
instruction
Log in extension Zero, carry,
LOGR 11 √
register borrow
Initialize extension file Zero, carry,
INITER 5 √
register borrow
Generate random
RND 3 Zero √
number instruction
Others
Generate timing pulse
DUTY 7 √
instruction
Note: * only applies to IVC2L.